CLASSICS AND REVISITS IN SCIENTIFIC MEDICINE CRS[MED.] APRIL 2014VOL 1(1)

Profile of Specialty Focused Journal Supplements

 

Classics and Revisits in Scientific Cardiology.CRS[Card.] 

 

A focused review of the Cardiac Anatomy

Angina Pectoris and Acute Chest pain of Cardiac origin

Classics and Revisits in Scientific Dermatology CRS [Derm.]  A directed anatomical study for the dermatological structures

Classics and Revisits in Scientific Endocrinology CRS [End.]  

 

Classics and Revisits in Scientific Gastroenterology.CRS [Gast.Ent.]

 

 

 

 

 

 

A precise Anatomical Data for the Gastrointestinal System

 

 

 

Profile of Specialty Focused Journal Supplements

Classics and Revisits in Scientific HaematologyCRS [Haem.]  

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Characteristic Fanconi Anaemias in Childhood.

 

Classics and Revisits in Scientific Hepatology.CSR [Hep.]  

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

A precise Anatomical Data for

the Hepatobiliary System

Classics and Revisits in Scientific History of Medicine.CRS [His.Med.]

Classics and Revisits in Scientific Infectious Diseases.CRS [Inf.Dis.] 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

                                                                                                         

Classics and Revisits in Scientific Medicine CRS [Med.]

April 2014Vol 1(1) 

                                                                                                                                   

 

Profile of Specialty Focused Journal Supplements

 

 

Classics and Revisits in Scientific NeonatologyCRS [Neon.]Classics and Revisits in Scientific NephrologyCRS [Neph.]
Classics and Revisits in Scientific NeurologyCRS[Neur.]Classics and Revisits in Scientific Oncology CRS[Onc]

 

Classics and Revisits in Scientific Medicine CRS [Med.] April 2014Vol 1(1) 

 

Profile of Specialty Focused Journal Supplements 

 

 

Classics and Revisits in Scientific Preventive MedicineCRS[Prev.]Classics and Revisits in Scientific Pulmonology CRS [Pulm.]
Classics and Revisits in Scientific Psychiatry CRS[Psych.]Classics and Revisits in Scientific Radiology CRS[Rad.]

Classics and Revisits in Scientific RheumatologyCRS [Rheum.]  

Osteogenesis Imperfecta fragilis with blue sclerotics in childhood

Classics and Revisits in Interdisciplinary Medical Themes.CRS [Int.Disc.Med.Them.] 

Proteus syndrome

Cervical haemangiomas with  intracerebral extensions

 

 

 

 

 

 

Contents

 Background and purpose of Journal and Supplements        2 .
 List of Specialty Focused Journal Supplements Profiles     3.                    Journal and Supplements Editorial policy                                      4

 

Specialty Focused Journal Supplements Profiles.                                                  7

 

 

Classics and Revisits in Scientific Cardiology Supplement (1)                              14

Angina pectoris and Acute Chest Pain of Cardiac Origin.           

 

Classics and Revisits in Scientific Rheumatology Supplement (1)                        22

Osteogenesis Imperfecta Fragilis with Blue Sclerotics

in Childhood

 

Classics and Revisits in Scientific Interdisciplinary Medical Themes.                 

Proteus Syndrome in Childhood                                                    29

Cervical Haemangiomas with Intracerebral extensions.                47

 

Classics and Revisits in Scientific Haematology.                                                    49

Fanconi Anaemias in Childhood.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

April 2014   1(1)                     Classics and Revisits in Scientific Medicine.

                                                                                                                  

Back ground

Classics and Revisits in Scientific Medicine CRS [Med.] is new.

CRS [Med] is a balanced portal of continuing medical education information ,

Purpose

The intent is that CRSM [Med] could provide a fairly well effective reciprocal communicative pathway for continuing medical education development.

The text delivers the details of good basic and clinical medical practice clearly and concisely .It is a unique contribution to medical specialty practice development nationally, regionally and globally, in the context of ongoing health trends.Although the current directions in health care developments were highlighted, an unpretentious emphasis to quite often unavailable advanced technological innovations and models were reasonably. weighted.

Focus and Theme

Throughout the series efforts were made to balance the emphasis on the scientific fundamentals and the basic principles of management and prevention with research directions and recent advances in investigations and interventions.

In order to make it more reader friendly and handy, efforts were made to minimize the volume while at the same time not compromising the contents.

On this basis, suggestions were made that it should be a regular and frequent topical medical periodical in scientific basic and clinical medicine.

It is hoped that these compendia will be found most rewarding by medical practitioners, health professionals undergoing their undergraduate and postgraduate medical trainings and other health conscious professionals and individuals.

This is a legendary textbook of scientific medicine in a journal format.

Issues and Future Trends

In this edition of the CRS [Med], a preamble of the format   of the publications is suggested.

However, it would be worthwhile to hasten to say that it is likely that there may be considerable alterations in these serial publications with regards to their academics structure, print layout, constituent parts, focus and certainly contents and periodicity.Therefore suggestions and opinions on contents inclusions and modifications are welcome.

In principle, publications would normally follow positive peer and editorial reviews, revisions and decisions.

Specialty Focused Journal Supplements

For clarity sake, the other associated serial medical scientific publications and channels of classics and revisits in scientific medicine, which will normally be published periodically as attached, merged or adhoc as isolated supplements to the parent journal CRS [Med] are alphabetically itemized according to the relevant medical specialties focus as follows:

 

 

                                                                                                                                               

April 2014 Vol 1(1)              Classics and Revisits in Scientific Medicine            

April 2014   1(1)                     Classics and Revisits in Scientific Medicine.

Specialty focusedSupplements to JournalNumberSpecialty focusedSupplements to Journals Fulland abridged TitleAnticipated IssuesPer year/PublicationCycle Specialty focusedJournalSupplementClassification
01Classics and Revisits in Scientific Cardiology-                 CRS [Card.] 12MonthlyAcademic, clinical.professional&Scholarly
02Classics and Revisits in Scientific Dermatology.            CRS [Derm.].12MonthlyAcademic, clinical.professional&Scholarly
03Classics and Revisits in Scientific Endocrinology.          CRS [End.].12MonthlyAcademic, clinical.professional&Scholarly
04Classics and Revisits in Scientific Hepatology    .            CRS [Hep.]12MonthlyAcademic,clinical,professional&Scholarly
05Classics and Revisits in Scientific History of Medicine.   CRS [His.Med.]12MonthlyAcademic, Informative.professional&Scholarly
06Classics and Revisits in Scientific Infectious Diseases.  CRS[Inf.Dis.]12MonthlyAcademic, clinical.professional&Scholarly
07Classics and Revisits in Scientific Interdisciplinary Medical Themes.CRS [Int.Disc.Med.Them.]12MonthlyAcademic, Clinical, Informative.professional&Scholarly
08Classics and Revisits in Scientific Neonatology.                          CRS [Neon.]12MonthlyAcademic, clinical.professional&Scholarly
09Classics and Revisits in Scientific Nephrology.                            CRS [Neph.]12MonthlyAcademic, clinical.professional&Scholarly
10Classics and Revisits in Scientific Neurology.                  CRS [Neur.]12MonthlyAcademic, clinical.professional&Scholarly
11Classics and Revisits in Scientific Oncology.                    CRS [Onc.]12MonthlyAcademic, clinical.professional&Scholarly
12Classics and Revisits in Scientific Preventive Medicine. CRS [Prev.Med,]12MonthlyAcademic, clinical, Informativeprofessional&Scholarly
13Classics and Revisits in Scientific Pulmonology.             CRS [Pul.]12MonthlyAcademic, clinical.professional&Scholarly
14Classics and Revisits in Scientific Psychiatry.                  CRS [Psy.]12MonthlyAcademic, clinical.professional&Scholarly
15Classics and Revisits in Scientific Radiology.                   CRS [Rad.]12MonthlyAcademic, clinical.professional&Scholarly
16Classics and Revisits in Scientific Rheumatology.          CRS[Rhem]12MonthlyAcademic, clinical,professional&Scholarly
17Grey Medical Literature.Ad-hocAcademic&Scholarly
18News Letters,Brochures&BulletinsAd-hocProfessional
19Medical Health UpdatesAd-hoc.Clinical &Professional
20Other Miscellenous PublicationsAd-hocClinical&Professional

         

Classics and Revisits in Scientific Medicine.  April 2014   1(1)  

Editorial Policy

We are pleased to consider papers in the following categories.

Original Articles from primary and secondary research:

The original articles could normally be up to 3000 words.

The documentations of the original papers should follow the traditional IMRAD pattern introduction, methods/ patients, results.discussion.conclusion, acknowledgements and references

The contents are expected to be precise, factual and as concise as possible.

Illustrative colour, black and white photographs and line drawings could be used if they could make the contents more lucid.

The abstract or the summary section should be structured and limited to 250 words or less.

Review Articles:

Review articles would generally be less than 3000 words.

It should be well researched and referenced.

Short Reports and Brief Communications:

Short reports and brief communications may contain up to 1000 words.

No summary or abstracts are required, but authors could decide to include them.

The contents should be logically ordered, but division into sections is optional and up to ten references may be used.

This may be suitable for the presentation of descriptive studies, some personal experience/observation and some field studies.

Case Reports and Case Series

This is the format most suitable for the presentation of individual case reports of particular interest or an illustrative series of cases.

Correspondence to the Editor

This could be on any topic related to the subject areas of the journal, which could be new topics or based on articles which have appeared in the series.

Current Topical Issues, opinions, view points, annotations and perspectives

This part of the series will provide a forum for expert opinion on topical issues in the area relevant to the series.

Appropriate submissions may include proposals for action such as:

[I]-Sound clinical judgment and good practice.

[II]-Appraisal or critiques of ongoing practice or principles.

[III-Responses to published statements.

The length of submissions in this section should normally be less than 1000 words. The presentations are expected to be precise, succinct and factual.

Usually about 20 references or less will suffice.

Occasional papers

Manuscripts of reasonable academic or clinical relevance belonging to this category could be published in the journal or in its supplements.

                                                                                                                                               

 

April 2014   1(1)                     Classics and Revisits in Scientific Medicine.

                                                                                                                                               

Research Letters:

This is a good medium for communicating research findings, which are too brief for short reports or brief communications.

Supplements:

Supplements to the series by Consulting Guest Editors on emerging topical issues will be published with a specialty based focus, periodically and on ad-hoc basis.

Normally these specialty focused supplements will be published as attachments, merged or isolated and detached supplements to the parent journal CRS [Med]

Technical Notes, Methods and Devises:

Papers describing procedures, techniques or equipment adapted by authors to their own conditions of work are welcome.

Medical Highlights and Forum Digest:

Summaries or Abstracts of ongoing and emerging topical medical issues will be published in the relevant sections of the journal or its specialty supplements.

Normally, these abstracts and summaries will be limited to 350 words or less and are best presented unstructured.

Editorials:

Normally, each series will be accompanied by an editorial perspective which as much as possible will aim to illuminate on the most significant contributions in the series.

Periodically, and on ad hoc basis editorials by consulting academic clinical guest editors will also be included, in the journal series or its supplement.

Book updates, Book Reviews and the Academic Clinicians Book shelf:

The series will consider book reviews, book updates relevant to the specialty series. A book shelf highlighting other updated books relevant to the specialty could be mentioned or displayed.

Report of the Highlights of Meetings and Conference Proceedings:

Proceedings of meetings and conferences relevant to the theme of the series could be published along the main journal series or as a supplement.

The specialty relevant highlights of appropriate medical scientific meetings will be published in the journal series or as supplements.

Academic Clinicians Web-Blog watch and alert:

Clinicians and medical scientists could be made aware of interesting Web sites and web-blogs in their relevant specialties.

Expert Opinions and View Points:

This involves a best evidence based expert advise and answer on a difficult or ambiguous academic or clinical encounter in any area relevant to the scope of the series. Normally the question or the scenario would be presented in a contextual format.with no more than 250 words.

The interventional answer or the solution to the difficulty will then be printed along with the question in the journal or a supplement following consultations with academic clinical experts in the topic and specialty.

                                                                                                                                               

 

                                                                                                                                               

April 2014   1(1)                     Classics and Revisits in Scientific Medicine.

                                                                                                                                                 

 

Ongoing and forthcoming medical conferences, courses and pathways to medical career opportunities and progressions.

The series will from time to time and on adhoc basis publish a list of accreditated medical conferences, courses and achievable pathways to medical career progressions and opportunities.

Health News

The series will from time to time publish a balanced scientific perspective of the medical health literature on emerging clinical issue of public health importance.

Profile of Medical Journals and other related Publications

Editors of Medical Journals or other relevant scientific medical publications could

proffer copies of their publications to the Classics and Revisits in Scientific Medicines.

A compilation of these publications would then be sent to our consulting guest editors, referees and reviewers for short listing, vetting and selection.The publications will then be showcased in the upcoming issues of CRS [Med] or its supplements.

Clinical debates and Round Table discussions.

Logical and constructive debates and discussions on emerging topical health issues, on clinical issues which could influence practice positively will be published in the journal or its supplements periodically or on adhoc basis.

Text Presentation Format:

Text should be double spaced and all pages should be numbered.

The first page should include the title and the full names of authors with their academic and professional qualifications and/or job title and institutional affiliations at the time of writing, postal and E-mail addresses, telephone and   fax numbers or other relevant contact co-ordinates for correspondence.

Tables, figures and text boxes should appear on separate pages at the end of the document and be appropriately labeled.

Text Boxes

Text boxes should be used for tangential information, such as contact details or background information of organizations relevant to the article, lists of very short case studies or descriptions of related research/projects and details of elements of a study or project, such as a survey, which for reasons of clarity are best removed from the main body of the text.

References and Acknowledgements:

References and acknowledgements should each start on a new page.

References should be outlined using the Vancouver referencing style, as originally published by the International of Medical Journal Editors (ICMJE)

References should be listed numerically in the order in which they appear in the text. The numbers of the references in the text could be in superscript.

A corresponding numerical list of the references is supplied at the end of the text after conclusive remarks.

                                                                                                                  

April 2014   1(1)                                 Classics and Revisits in Scientific Medicine.          

References should be adequate, but redundant references should be avoided.

The full list of references should include the names and initials of the authors up to six authors could be listed then followed by et al for the outstanding authors, title of the paper, journal title, year of publication, volume number, first and last page numbers.

References to books should give the book title, place of publication, publisher and year, those of multiple authorship should also include

chapter title, first and last page numbers and the names and initials of the editors.

Papers accepted but not yet published should be included in the references followed by (in press)

Those in preparation (and any submitted for publication), personal communications and unpublished observations should be referred to as such in the body of the text.

Consent:

[I]-Original sentences and paraphrases replicated and quoted from other authors should be cited in a standard manner and be referenced appropriately.

[II]-The consent of patients and approval of the protocol by an ethical

committee or relevant authority on ethical matters should be confirmed for human investigations.

[III]-Any potentially defamatory statement or those construed to be defamatory must be eschewed.

[IV]-Any tables or illustrations previously published should be accompanied by the written consent of the copyright holder to republication, an acknowledgement included in the caption and the full reference should be included in the list.

Patient confidentiality:

Where a patient might be identified through an illustration or from the text, it is essential that written permission is obtained from the patient and forwarded with the manuscript.

 

Proofs and off prints

Proofs are sent to authors designated to receive them and corrections should be made within specified guidelines.

Covering Letter:

A covering letter signed by all of the authors must be submitted with the articles, and original or secondary research papers.

E-mail submissions should be sent to the Classics and Revisits in Scientific Medicine editorial section with record of all approved authors e-mail accounts.

The letter must contain the following information:

[I]-Why the submission is appropriate for publication in Classics and Revisits in Scientific Medicine or its specialty focused supplements and what it adds to the existing body of medical scientific knowledge.

[II]-The manuscript category that the paper is for.

 

                                                                                                                   

April 2014   1(1)                     Classics and Revisits in Scientific Medicine.                        

 [III]-Confirmation that the paper meets the requirements for the category as laid out in this document, stating word count and confirming that references were formatted in the Vancouver style as detailed below.

[IV]-Confirmation that the paper has not been published elsewhere.

[V]-Declaration of competing interests or the absence of competing interests and the disclosure of all sources of funding.

[VI]-Original research must declare ethical approval from an appropriate body and consent from participants.

[VII]-Name the corresponding author and provide full contact details.

[VIII]-Authors should also include written consents from those individuals being acknowledged in their paper.

Key Words

Authors are advised to include about five main key words before their introduction, this will facilitate the indexing of the article.

Language Support

Ideally, authors are advised to seek the assistance of a native English linguist for a linguistic editorial revision, however if this is unachievable, the Editors will provide the necessary linguistic support.

Copyright.

Before publication, authors would be asked to transfer the copyright of their contribution to the publishers of the Journal or its relevant supplement.

Check Lists for Authors:

Please ensure inclusion of the following before the manuscript submission:

.Manuscript in Microsoft word.

.Manuscript corresponding authors name, qualifications, degrees and/or job title

contact co-ordinates outlining their institutional affiliations, postal address,e-mail and telephone/ fax numbers.

.Submission covering letter.

Consent forms where applicable.

Papers may be submitted in one of the following ways: :

.Two copies of the manuscripts typed and double spaced.

.On a disk accompanied by one printed copy.

.Via E-mail to:

Dr.Emmanuel.G.U. Onyekwelu

Honorary Academic Clinical Editor

Classics and Revisits in Scientific Medicine.

P.O.BOX 2696

Serrekunda Post Office

The Gambia.

West Africa.

Tel: +220/9908295/2207357804.

E-mail:euonyekwelu@hotmail.com

Website: cottageclinicdoctors.wordpress.com

                                                                                                                  

  April 2014  Vol 1(1)        Classics and Revisits in Scientific Medicine                                                                                                                              

Journal and Supplements Subscriptions and off prints enquiries.

Subscription enquires and Editorial communications about prints and off prints of the Journal or its supplements should be addressed to the above address.

The concessional subscription rate for this issue is the equivalent of Ten Euros.

                                                                                                                                    CRS [Med]Classics and Revisits in Scientific Medicine.

 

 

 

This novel  edition of CRS[Med]  is a  composite compilation of continual medical educational resource consisting of  a profile of four supplements to the journal with a medical specialty focus with a considerable weighting given to their editorial aspects and themes:Classics and Revisits in Scientific Cardiology.CRS[Card]Classics and Revisits in Scientific Rheumatology .CRS [Rhem.]Classics and Revisits in Scientific Interdisciplinary Medical Themes.CRS[Int.Disc.Med.Them]

Classics and Revisits in Scientific Haematology.CRS[Haem,]

 

The Classics and Revisits in Scientific Cardiology.CRS[Card] journal supplement Presents a Guest Editorial Perspective on Angina pectoris and Acute chest pain of Cardiac origin by the CRSM Academic Clinical Consulting Guest Editors.

 

Classics and Revisits in Scientific Rheumatology .CRS [Rhem.] Classics and Revisits in Scientific Rheumatology .CRS [Rhem.]With a paediatric slant dilates on the peculiarities of Osteogenesis Imperfecta fragilis with blue sclerotics in childhood  as a Guest  Editorial review article by the CRSM Academic Clinical Consulting Guest Editors.a paediatric slant dilates on the peculiarities of  Osteogenesis Imperfecta  in  negroid Africans  as an Editorial short communication.

 

Classics and Revisits in Scientific Interdisciplinary Medical Themes.CRS [Int.Disc.Med.Them] with a paediatric slant.This supplement includes a guest editorial review article on Proteus syndrome in childhood and cervical haemangiomas in children with an intracerebral extension as editorial review articles by the CRSM Academic Clinical Consulting Guest  Editors.
In this Classics and Revisits in Scientific Haematology.CRS [Haem] supplement with a paediatric slant characteristic Fanconis anaemia in childhood was discussed as an Editorial review article by the CRSM Academic clinical consulting Guest Editors.
 
Specialty Focused Journal Supplements Profile April 2014Supplements to Classics and Revisits in Scientific Medicine.Volume No. 1 Issue No.1

 

 

Classics and Revisits in Scientific CardiologyCRS [Car]

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Angina Pectoris

and Acute Chest

pain of Cardiac origin

 

 

Classics and Revisits in Scientific Haematology

CRS[Haem]

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Fanconi-anaemias

 

Classics and Revisits in ScientificRheumatologyCRS[Rheum] 

Osteogenesis Imperfecta

 

 

Classics and Revisits in ScientificInterdisciplinary Medical ThemesCRS [Int.Disc.Med.Them.]

 

 

Cervical haemangiomas with intracranial extensions

and complications

 

Proteus Syndrome

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

                                                                                                                  

 

Contents:

 

.         Acute Chest pain of cardiac origin and Angina Pectoris.

.         Osteogenesis Imperfecta fragilis with blue sclerotics in childhood.

.         Proteus syndrome in childhood.

.         Cervicalhaemangiomas with intracerebral extensions in childhood

.         Characteristic Fanconi anaemias in childhood.

 

April 2014 Supplement 1          Classic and Revisits in Scientific Cardiology.                                                                                                                      

 

Angina Pectoris and Acute Chest pain of cardiac origin

                                                                                                                   

Guest Editors: CRS [Med] Consulting Academic clinical Experts.

Definition:

Angina pectoris is an acute chest pain of cardiac origin due to a poor reception of oxygen supply by the heart muscles:

Aetio-Patho-physiology:

Angina pectoris usually ensues when the oxygen demands and requirements of the heart exceeds the capacity of the coronary arteries to supply an adequate amount of blood to the heart for the coronary cardiac perfusion.

In typical exertional angina pectoris, ischaemia results when myocardial oxygen demand is increased but supply is relatively compromised because of occlusion   of more than fifty percent of the coronary arteries either directly through the obstruction by the eccentrically located arteriosclerotic plaque or following dynamic coronary artery vasoconstriction of the subjacent areteriosclerotically uninvolved vessel muscle wall.In the setting of atherosclerotic blood vessel pathology.

Usual Causes:

Artheriosclerosis, Coronary Artery Spasms, Anaemia and Erythrocytopaenia:

Coronary-Cardiac perfusion could be compromised or made ischaemic by a diminution in the caliber of the coronary arteries, erythrocytopaenia or anaemia.

The diminution in the caliber of the coronary arteries may be arteriosclerosis related or sympathetic dysautonomic resulting in coronary artery spasms.

The usual causes of erythrocytopaenia or anemia were reviewed elsewhere.

In intense anaemia or erythrocytopaenia, angina pectoris is likely because the number of red blood cells [which contains haemoglobin –the oxygen carrying molecule in the red blood cells or the amount of haemoglobin in themselves is below the normal range for the age and gender of the case leading to a diminution in the oxygen supply to the heart muscles and acute cardiac pain-angina. Other pathologies which cause an increase in the work of the heart and thus an augmentation of the oxygen requirements of the heart include:

Hypertension:

Intense to profound high blood pressure causes coronary artery vascular flow resistance following fibromuscular hyperplasia of the coronary artery wall and coronary artery fibromuscular spasms from reflex sympathetic dysautonomia.

Valvular Heart Disease:

Cardiac valvular stenosis or narrowing and valvular regurgitations or incompetencies especially of the aortic valves given its close anatomical relationship to the coronary arteries associated with rheumatic valvular heart disease or of other aetiological factors will lead to a net ineffective or insufficient aortic outflow and consequently coronary artery perfusion difficulties.

                                                                                                                  

 

April 2014 Supplement 1         Classic and Revisits in Scientific Cardiology    

Angina Pectoris and Acute chest pain of cardiac origin.

Cardiomyopathies:

Idiopathic heart muscles pathologies especially the hypertrophic obstructive cardiomyopathic forms leads to a thickening of the cardiac muscles -increasing the surface areas to be perfused, in addition to causing a compressive effect on the coronary arteries and a relative myocardial perfusion insufficiencies.

Arrythmogenic Right Ventricular Dysplasia or Type Four Cardiomyopathy could also cause arrhythmia related angina pectoris.

Hypercoagulable states: 

The angina pectoris associated with hypercougulable states are usually a consequence of compromised ischaemic oxygenation of the heart muscles secondary to poor myocardial perfusion following sludging of poor blood flow due to its hyperviscocity.

Cardiac Dysarythmias:

Atrial and ventricular fibrillations are usually associated with angina pectoris because of the associated poor ventricular filling and hence cardiac output.

 

Aetiopathogenic Classification Scheme for Angina Pectoris:

 

Effort Angina Pectoris:

This is a chest pain or discomfort that typically occurs with activity or stress.

This pattern of angina is usually transient, but appears to be induced repeatedly by these activities or stress profile in a predictable and regular manner.

Postural Angina Pectoris

This is the form of angina that occurs on sudden recumbency due to the redistribution of the body fluid with an increase in left ventricular end diastolic pressure initiated increase in the cardiac work load and subsequent myocardial ischaemia.

Cardiac Syndrome X:

This form of angina pectoris usually affects middle aged menopausal women following hysterectomy and it is usually associated with ST segment depression on exercise thread mill test, but angiographically normal coronary arteries.

The prognosis for progression to coronary artery disease is the same as those for the normal population.

The cause of this pattern of angina is thought to be due to narrowing of the smaller coronary arteries or arterioles due to neurotransmitter or myocytes related chemical imbalance causing ventricular dysfunction or other forms of coronary arteriolar dysfunctions.

Hypersomniac Angina Pectoris:

This is angina related to sleep, especially the rapid eye movements [REM] sleep, it is probable that this form of angina is related to the relative hypoxia in this stage of sleep or the obstructive sleep apnea syndrome or associated nightmares.

 

                                                                                                                  

 

April 2014     Supplement 1 Classics and Revisits in Scientific Cardiology      

Variant or Prinzmetal Angina Pectoris:

This is an effortless Angina Pectoris and refers to episodic unpredictable angina which occurs during rest rather than during activities and it is usually accompanied by specific electrocardiographic changes such as transient ST segment elevation during the anginal attacks.

This form of angina is thought to be consequential to spasms of the large coronary arteries on the surface of the heart with or without atherosclerotic lesions.

Unstable Angina Pectoris:

This form of angina pectoris is metarmorphic.

It refers to angina pectoris with variable symptomatologies,given the constant symptomatology patterns of angina in any one individual, any augmentative change in its symptomatologies such as its severity, attack frequencies, uninduced events or whilst in the restive state should be taken seriously, and investigated, because the risk of a heart attack is usually considerable, because this may indicate a sudden narrowing due to a new cloth formation or rupture of an atheroma.

This form of Angina Pectoris is considered a form of Acute Coronary Syndrome.

Symptomatologies:

More often than not anginal pains are usually felt as a pressure or an ache beneath the breastbone-sternum.

This is usually interpreted as a chest discomfort or heaviness rather than pain.

The affected individual has an exertional chest discomfort assuaged by rest.

This discomfort may also occur in either shoulder or down either sides of the arm, the back, the throat, jaw or the teeth or as a burning sensation especially in the middle aged female.Anginal pains are usually transient, worse following cigarette smoking, emotional, exercise, exposures to cold or physical exertions especially after meals, walking in cold windy environment, sleep or nightmares

Patterns of anginal pains may be predictable or unpredictable.

Diagnosis:

Accurate historical details of the nature of the pain following the Ryles ten point algorithm questionnaire  with its associated symptomatologies is very crucial for the exact diagnosis of angina pectoris. A physical examination in between events although mandatory may not be all that very useful. If an opportunistic examination is achievable during an event, a mild tachycardia, hypertension or dysarrthymia or specific or non specific ECG changes may be observable.

Coronary reserve is mostly compromised most in the subendocardium, ischaemia occurs initially in that region. If an ECG is undertaken during an episode of an anginal pain, ST segment depression suggestive of a subendocardial ischaemia will be observable.

 

 

 

                                                                                                                   

April 2014 Supplement 1          Classic and Revisits in Scientific Cardiology

                                                                                                                  

Angina Pectoris and Acute Chest Pain of Cardiac Origin.

 

Adverse prognostic features in Angina pectoris

The prognosis for angina pectoris is usually affected adversely by advancing age, extensive coronary artery disease, diabetes mellitus, hypertension, previous heart attacks, tobacco smoking, hypercholesterolaemia, events with excruciating chest pains, ventricular pump failures, the extent and severity of the coronary artery occlusions, abnormal ECG results, the prognosis for people with stable angina and efficient ventricular pump function, the prognosis is reasonably good.

Although the mortality rate for people with isolated angina pectoris is about 1.5%, it is considerably higher for those with the risk factors outlined above.

A good historical description of the symptoms may be enough to achieve the diagnosis of angina pectoris in most instances of the classically typically presenting cases.

Electrocardiogram

Electrocardiogram (ECG) will show ST segment changes as outlined above.

Interval ECGs are not usually very satisfactory, most useful information are usually achieved with the baseline and pharmacological exercise stress testing ECGs using a vasodilator.

Continuous ECG monitoring with a Holter monitor may detect abnormalities indicating symptomatic or silent ischaemia or prinzmetal angina which typically occurs at rest.

Exercise Stress Test.

An exercise stress test incites myocardial ischaemia, in patients with coronary artery diseases and offers some useful prognostic information to the clinician.

The patient who manifests ischaemia either clinically or electrocardiographically following the first few minutes of exercise is likely to have myocardial insufficiency related to coronary artery dysfunction or disturbances of its structural integrity.

An exercise stress test should be undertaken to define objectively the degree of exertion required to induce myocardial ischaemia due to coronary artery related haemodynamic disturbances. Patients with a positive exercise stress testing should be presumed to have a relatively considerable morbidity and should be referred for further angiographically gated imaging procedures.

Echocardiography.

In this procedure, ultrasonic waves could produce images of the heart called echocardiograms thereby outlining the size of the heart, the movement of the heart muscles, blood flow through the   heart valves and the valvular functions during rest or related to exercise ischaemic conditions, Left ventricular functions is usually compromised by ischaemia

 

 

                                                                                                                   

April 2014 Supplement 1        Classics and Revisits in Scientific Cardiology.

                                                                                                                  

 

Angina Pectoris and Acute Chest Pain of Cardiac Origin.

 

Coronary Angiography:

For this investigation to be achieved, x-rays of the coronary arteries are taken after a radiopaque dye is injected.

Coronary angiography is probably the most accurate procedure for diagnosing coronary artery disease.

It is usually indicated when the diagnosis of angina pectoris or coronary artery disease is uncertain.

Coronary angiography is commonly used to help evaluate whether Coronary by-pass Graft or percutaneous coronary intervention is appropriate.

It could also be employed in the diagnosis of a spontaneous or drug induced coronary artery spasm.

Multimodal Computer Assisted Tomographic Scans.

Electron beam computer assisted tomographic scans could detect the amount of calcium deposits in the coronary arteries.

The amount of calcium present could be computed as the calcium score is roughly proportional to the likelihood of the person having an angina or a heart attack. The limitation of this procedure is that occasionally, calcium deposits may be present in people whose coronary arteries are not terribly compromised so the scores derived may not very much predict the need for a percutaneous coronary intervention or coronary artery bypass grafting.

Given the significant radiation exposure with this procedure, EBCT will not usually be applied universally, but would be restricted to those cases with a relatively significant high risk of death or acute coronary syndrome especially those with risk factors such as metabolic syndromes, diabetes mellitus, hypertension, hypercholesterolaemia, hyperuraceamia, abnormal, unclear or ambiguous test results.

Multidetector series Computer Assisted Tomographic scan

This is a new technique that employs a high velocity CT scanner comprising of multiple small detectors that could accurately identify coronary artery narrowing.

 

 

                                                                                                                   

 

April 2014 Supplement 1  Classics and Revisits in Scientific Cardiology.

 

                                                                                                                                               

 

Angina Pectoris and Acute Chest Pain of Cardiac Origin

                                                                                                                   

 

However the amount of radiation exposure is considerable.

It could also be used to ascertain the patency of a stent or a bypass graft, or to ascertain if atheromas have undergone dystrophic calcifications.

In addition it is very useful for displaying the cardiac and the coronary venous anatomy.

This procedure is absolutely contraindicated in pregnancy, or in patients who are unable to hold their breath for at least a quarter of a second or tachycardiac or cannot tolerate bradycardia or the drugs used to induce bradycardia.

If the test must necessarily be employed in patients with tachycardia, they may need to be allowed a cardio-selective beta blocker to regulate the heart rate below 70 beats per minute.

The technique is noninvasive and highly accurate in excluding coronary artery narrowing as a source of a person’s symptoms especially in those instances where the exercise stress test was unachievable or its results inconclusive.

Cardiac Magnetic Resonance Imaging

In cases of coronary artery disease, MRI could be employed to evaluate the narrowing of the coronary arteries, measure the blood flow in the coronary arteries and test how well the heart is being supplied with oxygen.

It could also be used to assess the abnormalities of the heart wall motion during exercise stress test which may signify a poor blood supply to that area.

MRI may also be used as a test of viability to assess whether areas of the heart muscles damaged following an acute coronary syndrome could recover.

It could be used to evaluate the heart and the large blood vessels arising from the heart such as the aorta and the pulmonary arteries.MRI is radiation free.

Management:

Treatment of angina pectoris depends partly on the stability and severity of the symptoms of the angina.

Management of Angina pectoris implies attempts to slow or reverse the progression of coronary artery disease by the rapid treatment and modifications of risk factors, such as hypertension, high cholesterol levels, cessation of cigarette smoking, obesity, recommendation of a low varied polyunsaturated fatty diet, which is low in highly refined sugar carbohydrates and exercise.

The patient will need to comprehend the pathological process to drive the motivation to modify coronary artery disease risk factors and to be able to know

where and when to seek medical assistance during aggravation of symptomatologies.

In stable angina with symptomatologies of mild to moderate severity, modifications of the above risk factors with occasional drug use may suffice.

If this approach is not enough to ameliorate the symptomatologies of angina considerably, a procedure to restore the myocardial perfusion by improving the coronary blood flow through a revascularization procedure should be recommended. When symptomatologies worsen rapidly, immediate hospitalization is usually required and the case should be evaluated for a acute coronary syndrome.

 

                                                                                                                   

April 2014 Supplement 1        Classics and Revisits in Scientific Cardiology.  

 

Angina pectoris and Acute chest pain of cardiac origin.

Pharmacotherapy:

Pharmacotherapy of stable angina pectoris is aimed to ameliorate myocardial perfusion and decrease the work load on the heart.

The pharmacotherapy of angina pectoris revolves around six groups of drugs.

A-The organic nitrates

B-The beta-blockers

C-The calcium channel blockers

D-The angiotensin-converting enzyme inhibitors.

E- The antiplatelet drugs.

F-Non-opoid and opoid analgesics.

The Beta Blockers

These groups of drugs antagonize the effects of the catecholamine hormones epinephrine and norepinephrine on the heart and other organs.

These hormones have chronotropic (increases the heart rate) and inotropic effects (increases the strength of the heart contractions, and causes the arterioles to constrict (there by causing the blood vessels to constrict)

The resting and the activity related augmentation of the heart rates and blood pressures are usually ameliorated by these groups of drugs, thereby the myocardial oxygen demand is reduced. This group of drugs reduces the risk of heart attacks and sudden deaths.The long term outcome for people with coronary artery disease is therefore improved.

[2]-Organic Nitrates

[A]-Short Acting Organic Nitrates

Nitroglycerin is a very short acting organic nitrate drug that dilates the blood vessels.Following the administration of this drug .the anginal events are usually ameliorated in about two to four minutes. It is usually quite handy and could be taken shortly in anticipation of an anginal event, however the effects of nitroglycerin usually lasts about 30 minutes. The dose could be administered sublingually (i.e. as a tablet placed under the tongue) or bucally (as a tablet placed next to the gum) or intranasally (as a spray inhaled through the nostrils)

[B]-Long Acting Organic Nitrates

Isorsorbide dinitrate is an example of a long acting organic nitrate

This drug could be taken as tablets orally about one to four times daily.

It could also be administered as nitrate skin patches and paste allowing cutaneous absorption over several hours.

However if they are taken regularly they may loose their ability to provide relief.

Usually a period of nocturnal drug holiday is usually appropriate for its long term anginal relieving effect to be maintained. The use of their effect is mainly aimed towards the relieve of anginal symptomatologies rather than prophylaxis against acute coronary syndromes or sudden deaths.

                                                                                                                   

 

April 2014 Supplement 1       Classics and Revisits in Scientific Cardiology.

                                                                                                                  

 

Angina Pectoris and Acute Chest pain of Cardiac origin.

 

[3]-Calcium Channel blockers

This group of drugs prevents the blood vessels from narrowing (constricting) and could attenuate coronary artery spasm and as a group have a hypotensive effect.

Calcium channel blockers are equally effective in Prinzemetal angina pectoris.

Verapamil and daltiezem has negative chronotropic and antiarrythmic effects.

This group of drugs on the average is used as third line drugs, if the above two groups of drugs are inadequate for symptomatic relief or are contraindicated.

[4]-Angiotensin Converting Enzymes Inhibitors

ACE inhibitors such as ramipril were often given to angina pectoris cases with the aim of attenuating the risk factors of acute coronary syndromes and sudden deaths rather than symptomatic relief of angina pectoris.

[5]-Antiplatelet Agents

Aspirin, disopyradimole, ticlopidine, and clopidegrel have antiplatelet effects and influence the function of platelets, so that they do not   clump together and stick to the blood vessels walls.

Platelets which circulate in the blood, promote clot formation (thrombosis) when a blood vessel is injured.

If platelets collect on atheromas in an artery’s walls, the resulting clot could narrow or block the artery and result in an acute coronary syndrome.

Aspirin modifies the platelet function by reducing the tendency for its aggregation and thrombus formation thereby ameliorating the vascular occlusion associated with artheromatous thrombus formation.

Antiplatelet drugs are usually given to individuals with angina pectoris, unless there is a good reason not to, such as in individuals with bleeding diathesis or haematological dyscrasias of unclear significance or consequence.

The traditional teaching is for individuals with coronary artery syndrome to take cardio-aspirin 75mg daily in addition to clopidogrel daily to reduce the risk of an acute coronary syndrome. Another beneficial antiplatelet drug Ticlopidine, although with more frequent side effects could be employed in individuals who are allergic or intolerant to aspirin-clopidogrel combination.

[6]-Non-Opoid and Opoid Analgesics

Analgesia of varying strengths will invariably be a component of the anti-anginal pectorisarmamentarium.

Paracetamol, Aspirin, other non-steroidal anti-inflammatory agents and codeine or morphine could be employed in combination on individual cases as bridge therapy until appropriate beta blocker or calcium channel blocker is defined.

 

                                                                                                                   

 

 

April 2014 Supplement 1 Classic and Revisits in Scientific Cardiology.

                                                                                                                   

 

Angina Pectoris and Acute Chest pain of cardiac origin

In summary the objectives of the pharmacotherapy of angina pectoris is aimed at the reduction of myocardial oxygen demand during exercise or stress by the use of organic nitrates, beta blockers or calcium channel blockers

Promotion of maximal dilatation of the coronary arteries by the use of nitrates, calcium channel blockers.

Revascularization Procedures:

Percutaneous Coronary Intervention (PCI) angioplasty and Coronary Artery By Pass Grafting [CABG]

These procedures are the two main revascularization procedures employed in the management of angina pectoris where pharmacotherapy was unsuccessful.

However, it is worthwhile to note that these procedures are invasive anatomical techniques which aim to alleviate the immediate pathology, but they are not usually effective for the cessation of the progression of the underlying disease without influencing the risk factors favourably.

[A]-PCI is non-invasive and hence it is often preferred to CABG in a selected group of patients. It is particularly indicated in cases in one or two coronary artery vessel disease, especially when the blocked coronary vascular segments are not lengthy or extensive. However, increasing experience and more sophisticated techniques is allowing this procedure to be used confidently and more frequently.

[B]-CABG, is particularly beneficial to individuals with severe angina and coronary artery disease which were not amenable to relevant pharmacotherapy, good cardiac reserve and a normally functioning heart, no previous acute coronary syndromes, no chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, thrombophilias, carcinomatosis or other conditions that could preclude surgery or make it hazardous About nine of ten of such people will have a rapid and absolute relief of symptoms after surgery.

CABG could improve symptoms, exercise tolerance, and could decrease the number and dose of drugs needed

An electively planned CABG has an infinitesimal mortality at about less than 1 in 100 and a risk of asymptomatic or symptomatic intraoperative acute coronary event of about less than one in twenty.

 

 

 

 

Guest Editors: CRS [Med] Consulting Academic clinical Editorial Experts.

 

                                                                                                                   

 

 

 

                                                                                                                   

April 2014 Supplement 1  Classics and Revisits in Scientific Rheumatology.                                                                                                                                                 

Osteogenesis Inperfecta fragilis with blue sclerotics in childhood.

 

Guest Editors: CRS [Med] Consulting Academic clinical Editorial Experts.

 

An unusual preponderance of observational reports on children with phenotypic features consistent with Osteogenesis Imperfecta fragilis presenting covertly with a history of multiple long bone fractures and /or easy bruisability of the skin espoused an expert guest editorial consultations and review article on this theme.

Introduction/Historical Perspective

Osteogenesis Imperfecta or Vroliks syndrome is a heterogeneous group of inherited conditions arising from a variety of biochemical and morphological collagen defects.Willam Vrolik professor of  Anatomy ,Pathological Anatomy and zoology at the Athenaeum Illustre(University of Amsterdam) discussed in his handbook of Pathological Anatomy(1842-1844) and Tabulae and Illustradam embryogenesis hominis et mamalium,naturalem tam abnorman (1844-49) a new born infant with numerous fractures and hydrocephalus.The Tabulae, had both Latin and Dutch texts, in the Latin text ,Vrolik used , the term Osteogenesis Imperefecta (in Dutch, gebrekkige beenwording) Vrolik also mentioned that the infant lived for three days and that both parents were suffering from Lues Universalis at the time of the baby’s birth .

On re-examination of the Index case.

The whole skeleton of the baby appeared poorly mineralized.

The family had large skulls, exhibited a broad and high forehead, large fontanels, frontal and temporal bossing, shallow orbits, and a protruding occiput.

At autopsy, the calvaria of the baby consisted of many wormian bones.

The tubular bones, although of normal length and only slightly curved, were very thin as were the ribs. All the skeletal structures showed one or more fractures and many fractures showed callus formation. Following further investigations on this topic, this case was retrospectively diagnosed as a case of Osteogenesis Imperfecta type II..

Willan Vrolik was one of the first scientists to realize that many skeletal dysplasias were not the result of a post natally acquired disease such as rickets or osteomalacia as many of his contemporaries believed. He thought that it might be due to insufficient intrinsic generative energy. He substantiated this by stating that in his study specimen a primary impairment of ossification is present and not a secondary degeneration.

The Index Case Description.

The descriptions given by Willem Vroliks in some of the specimens ,generated the term Osteogenesis Imperfecta and the eponym Vroliks syndrome for this genetic disorder characterized by increased fragility.[1]Fractures are frequent and its onset depends on the type of Osteogenesis Imperfecta.[2]Osteogenesis Imperfecta is a heritable disease that may result in bone fragility, increased joint laxity, decreased muscle tone, thinning of the skin, a bluish appearance of the sclera, scoliosis, deafness, dentigenosis imperfecta and other multiple abnormalities.

                                                                                                                  

 

April   2014 Supplement 1                Classics and Revisits in Scientific Rheumatology  

 

Osteogenesis Imperfecta Type 1

Osteogenesis Imperfecta type 1 is a disorder characterized by frequent bone fractures and deformities associated with fracture malunion and poor healing, blue sclera, normal or near normal stature and autosomal dominant inheritance pattern.

The incidence is thought to be one in about twenty thousand live births.

Males and females are affected equally Osteopaenia is associated with an increased rate of long bone fractures upon ambulation.

For some reasons not well understood, fracture frequency decreased dramatically at puberty and during young adult life but increases once again in late middle age.

Most observed patients presented with clinically overt symptomatologies prepubertally.

Progressive hearing loss, often beginning in the second and third decade, is a feature of this disease in about half the families.The proportion of Osteogenesis Imperfecta Type 1 patients with significant hearing loss rises steadily into middle age ,despite the general decline in fracture frequency .Conductive or mixed conductive and sensorineural hearing loss are more common in dominant pattern oseogenesis imperfecta than sensorineural hearing loss alone. Dentigenosis Imperfecta is observed in some subset of the patient population.

Mortality Figures.

Mortality could be significant even in hospitalized patients at about three percent..

Mortality figures are 3.7 times more in the negroid race.

OI related demises are more likely in women. Admissions at younger age connote more severe disease.

 

 

Children at a younger age are more severely affected and more difficult to manage.

They tend to fair better when referred to a dedicated paediatric unit [3]

A classification scheme and the inheritance pattern for OI

Inheritance pattern depends on the type. The classification of OI has been debatable.

The detailed aspects of its nomenclature have been reviewed.

Anecdotally there are four types of Osteogenesis Imperfecta, although with recent advances in molecular biological techniques, other sub-types have been deciphered with considerable over-lap between the subtypes. The mode of inheritance is autosomal dominant for Type1and VI and recessive for Type II and III. It has been reported in one of two twins. [4]Osteogenesis Imperfecta is a defect of Type 1 collagen which is present in many tissues including blood vessels.

The differentiation of child abuse and Osteogenesis Imperfecta is critical, because of medical and legal implications for the latter. [5, 6, 7]

Considerations for the Inheritance pattern in OI

The mode of inheritance of OI is variable and the clinical manifestations are heterogeneous. In addition to its bone involvement, osteogenesis imperfecta, may involve tendons, ligaments, skin scleras, dentin, fascia and blood vessels.

 

                                                                                                                   

 

April 2014 Supplement 1 Classics and Revisits in Scientific Rheumatology

                                                                                                                   

A modified classification scheme for OI

The most commonly used classification schemes are those developed by Sillence and Colleagues. [8]Type 1 Osteogenesis Imperfecta, which was previously called Osteogenesis Imperfecta tarda, is the most common form and is a relatively mild to moderately severe disorder , inherited as an autosomal dominant trait with varying penetrance and expressivity.

It is associated with blue scleras and hearing loss in about fifty percent of the cases [9]

Type 2 Osteogenesis Imperfecta is lethal in the perinatal period and was previously known as Osteogenesis Imperfecta congenita, it is the most severe form and it is inherited as an autosomal recessive trait.

Types 3 and 4 Osteogenesis Imperfecta have clinical manifestations of intermediate severity between that of types 1 and 2 and are often associated with bone deformities and varying degrees of short stature and hearing loss.

Hearing loss commonly occurs in patients with Type 3 OI, it also occurs in some patients with Type 4 Osteogenesis Imperfecta. [8, 9]Loss of hearing is one of the least constant major features of Osteogenesis Imperfecta, with occurrence that varies between  twenty six and  sixty percent[10]The association of Osteogenesis Imperfecta, hearing loss and blue sclera’s is often referred to as de Van der Hoene Kleyn syndrome, which was originally well described in 1918 by two authors. [11]This syndrome usually occurs in the late second and early third decades of life, younger patients have a mixed or sensorineural hearing impairment.[12]

Histopathological Features and Molecular genetic pathological aspects of OI.

Findings at histopathologic examination of specimens extracted from patients with Osteogenesis Imperfecta provide some clues and values to the Type of hearing Impairment that could be expected in these patients.Osteogenesis Imperfecta.

OI is one of the inherited connective tissue disorders that result in brittle bones.

The molecular defects reside in various mutations that lead to defective or decreased Type 1 collagen synthesis [9,13, 14]In greater than ninety percent  of cases , Osteogenesis Imperfecta results from mutations in one of two genes,COL1A1 gene on chromosome 17 and COL1A2 gene on chromosome 7 which encodes the chains of Type I collagen.[15,16]

Clinico-pathological correlations.

Findings at the histopathological examination of specimens from patients with Osteogenesis Imperfecta provide clues to the types of hearing impairments that could be expected in these patients.Temporal bone specimens extracted from patients with osteogenesis Imperfecta congenita(Type II) demonstrated markedly delayed and deficient ossification in the three layers of the otic capsule.[17]Conductive hearing loss is expected in these patients and is mainly due to fractures that commonly involve the crus of the stapes or the handle of the malleus.These fractures lead to discontinuity of the ossicular chain or to fixation by ankylosis of the head of the malleus to the medial attic wall, Therefore the hearing loss in Osteogenesis Imperfecta could be of a conductive type and may not always be progressive[18] Adult onset hearing loss with Osteogenesis Imperfecta therefore could be of a conductive type and is not always progressive.

 

April 2014 Supplement 1 Classics and Revisits in Scientific Rheumatology.

                                                                                                                   

Reports of Osteogenesis Imperfecta tarda (Type 1) are somewhat scanty since the availability of specimens depends on surgical procedures or autopsies.

The whole question on the f temporal bones morphologies related to deafness in OI was answered elsewhere. [19, 20, 21, 22]

Radiological Features of OI

Conventional radiographs of the tibia and fibular in IO could demonstrate multiple healed or healing fractures of the tibia , as well as  non-united fracture deformities of the tibia or the fibular shaft .The bones are usually gracile and osteoporotic in appearance, which are  some characteristics radiological features  of osteogenesis imperfecta.

Further discussions on the collagenous defects in OI

The evaluation of children with multiple unexplained fractures is a clinically and radiological challenging one, because of issues concerning non-accidental injuries.

An inconsistent, non-correlating historical, clinical and radiological profile and cessation of further events will point more to a non-accidental injury as the cause of the pathological fracture. Abnormalities in collagen in other tissues other than the bones will account for clinical findings in addition to fractures, such as dentinogenesis imperfecta (fragile discoloured teeth), blue or grey colour of the sclera, increased joints laxities and a tendency to bruising(thought to be due to defective collagen of small blood vessels)

The distinctive features of OI

Reports on most of the observed cases, suggest that they probably belong to the Type I Osteogenesis Imperfecta or Type III.OI subsets.

The exact classification scheme could be accomplished, clarified and distinguished with exact certainty at molecular biological studies to determine if the collagen structure is qualitatively normal, but quantitatively reduced (Type I) or defective in (TypeIII) where it is abnormal. On epidemiological basis however, Type 1 OI would likely to be the diagnosis in the most of the observed reports because it is the most common and complicating fractures may not necessarily be present at birth.

Fracture patterns in OI

All types of fractures could be seen in osteogenesis imperfecta such as transverse, oblique and spiral fractures. Greenstick fractures and torus also occur commonly in children with mild to moderately severe defects..

Localizations to the lower limbs are particularly more common in osteogenesis imperfecta in comparison to normal children. Fractures in osteogenesis imperfecta could be metaphyseal.[23, 24] Rib fractures are also relatively common.

Of all these fracture patterns, metaphyseal fractures are those with the most implication for a multidisciplinary intervention, because of its strong connotations for

non-accidental injuries. [25]

The associated osteopathies in OI with their diagnostic significance.

Given that the primary defect in Osteogenesis Imperfecta is principally with the collagen.

The anecdotal evidence that osteopaenia, osteoporosis and diminished bone density are features in Osteogenesis Imperfecta could be unfounded. This is buttressed by the fact that precise densitometry and native densitometry in unfractured bones in Osteogenesis Imperfecta is generally within the normal reference range.[26]

                                                                                                                   

April 2014 Supplement Classics and Revisits in Scientific Rheumatology                      

Osteopaenia and other abnormalities occasionally inferred, were usually multiple previous fractures and prolonged immobilization related. This diagnostic enigma is worsened by the fact that the assessment of bone density from X–ray radiological features is unduly unreliable [27] and as such it is usually not very useful overall in achieving the diagnosis of osteogenesis imperfecta especially in older children.

The diagnostic accuracy, reontenographic-densitometric correlations and precision is more distinct in infants and children with temporary brittle bone disease [28, 29] where they could assist to distinguish these conditions from Osteogenesis Imperfecta.

However lack of a standard reference range has compromised the applicability of densitometry with robust precision.

Wormian bones in OI

Other features that could espouse the diagnosis of Osteogenesis Imperfecta includes the presence of Wormian bones which are additional small bones within the sutures of the skull as was originally described in 1643 by Olaus Worm, a Danish anatomist.

In osteogenesis Imperfecta the number of Wormian bones are usually excessive and their distribution is in a crazy-paving pattern rather than a linear profile.

They are particularly most pronounced in the majority of cases with Type III Osteogenesis Imperfecta.

However Wormian bones could also be seen in excess in the milder types I, IV and other pathological states. The x-ray radiological techniques for the demonstration of Wormian bones and its implication for the diagnosis of Osteogenesis Imperfecta and other simulating conditions is an interesting topic.[30]The lateral and especially the Townes views are the most informative views in the assessment and demonstration of wormian bones and are particularly recommended as most appropriate for the exact assessment of Wormian bones ,especially in children with fractures, where the exclusion of a non-accidental injury will be expedient. The absence of Wormian bones will not be adequate to achieve an exclusion of Osteogenesis Imperfecta, especially in early infancy when it is notoriously absent as was confirmed by interval projections latter on.

Wormian bones are not notable features in temporary brittle bone disease.

Isolated periosteal reaction as a phenomenon is not all that a common feature of classical Osteogenesis Imperfecta except in relationship to fractures.

Occasionally, symmetrical metaphyseal sclerosis could follow fractures in Osteogenesis Imperfecta.

Other collagenous defects in OI with haemodynamic and functional consequence.

Being a collagen based defect, other features such as excessive joint laxity and cerebral aneurysms[31] and cardiovascular abnormalities especially pulmonary and aortic dilatation and  regurgitation, mitral valve prolapse and subtle microscopic changes in the pulmonary artery and aorta could be associated features .These associations might not necessarily be present at birth, but usually they appear with the passage of time and plays a dominant role in the natural history of the disease process, especially with regards to deleterious consequences such as aortic dissections.[32, 33, 34] OI could be associated with bleeding diathesis which could be spontaneous or follow mild trauma. [35]OI could be associated with spondylolisthesis caused by extreme pedicle elongation.

 

                                                                                                                   

April 2014 Supplement 1               Classics and Revisits in Scientific Rheumatology 

 

The clinico-radiological distinction between OI and non-accidental injuries.

The Type 1 collagen is thought to make an important contribution to the structure and function of long bones.[36]From a Biomechanics perspective, bone is considered to be a non homogenous composite structure consisting at the very least of mineral and organic phases. In test of whole bone properties e.g. four point bending, the sum of the various phases of a composite structure usually contributes to the mechanical properties measured in other mechanical tests, one phase may predominate over the other.

Increased number of fractures with few or no bruises will point more to classical Osteogenesis Imperfecta rather than a non-accidental injury as the aetiological factor in cases of fractures, where as in non-accidental injury, bruising is much more common than fractures.[37, 38]

Although imaging is relevant to the diagnosis of Classical Osteogenesis Imperfecta it cannot be considered in isolation from the clinical findings, the historical events, the family history, the social assessment and the laboratory features.

Plausible pharmacological and physical therapeutic Interventions for OI                     

The beneficial therapeutic aspects of Osteogenesis imperfecta were contentiously discussed in the medical literature .Although no pharmacotherapeutic intervention has revolutionized the medical management of OI as such,however,the evidence for the beneficial effect of  several pharmacotherapeutic interventions appears to be most convincing for the biophosphonates ,especially ,palmidronate or alendronate.

Also other reports have suggested the beneficial effect of the growth hormone in some selected group of children with OI, especially in aiding the affected children to attain an aesthetically acceptable linear growths, in other wise a subset that would have been disfiguringly stunted if the natural history of the pathology is uninterrupted with these pharmacological interventions.Orthopaedic and physical therapy in addition to modifications of functional, social professional and occupational ergonomics using assistive devices are other plausible interventional strategies.

Conclusion and Importance:

This editorial review article buttresses the need for clinicians to apply an in-depth evaluation, and scrutiny during patient’s encounter, to be able to decipher clinically covert pathological conditions and circumstances. Normally these evaluations would be most rewarding if a holistic multidisciplinary approach is introduced.

Guest Editors: CRS [Med] Consulting Academic Clinical Editorial Experts.

References:

[1.] Baijet B Aspects of the history of Osteogenesis Imperfecta (Vroliks Syndrome) An Anat 2002, 184(1).1-7.

[2.] Darmanis S, Bircher) Fractures of the acetabulum in Osteogenesis Imperfecta (Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery May 1.2006

[3.] Vitality,MG,Matsumoto ,Hiroko MA,Kessler ,Weinstein M,Hoffmann ,William BA,Roye,David P.Osteogenesis Imperfecta.Determining the demographics and the predictors of death from an inpatient population .Journal of Paediatrics orthopaedics.March 2007,27(2).228-232.

                                                                                                                   

 

 April2014 Supplement 1      Classics and Revisits in Scientific Rheumatology

[4.] O.Seriki.Osteogenesis Imperfecta in one of twins.Acta Paediatrica 21Jan, 59(3).340-342. and as a familial aggregation (Braga S, Passage E.Congenital Osteogenesis Imperfecta in three sibs (Human genetics) 1Oct1981, 58(4).441-443.

[5.] Klieman PK.Differentiation of Child abuse and Osteogenesis Imperfecta has medical and legal implications AJR (American Journal of Radiology May1990, 154. (1047-1048.

[6.] Bishop .N, Sprigg A, Dalton A, Unexplained fractures in infancy. Looking for fragile bones.Arch.Dis, Child, March 1, 2007, 92(3).251-256.

[7.] Cabral.W.A, Milgrom S, Leticha AD, Moriarty E, Marini JC.Biochemical screening of Type 1 collagen in Osteogenesis Imperfecta.detection of glycine substitutions in the amino end of the alpha chains requires supplementation by molecular analysis J.Med.Genet.August 1, 2006, 43.685-690.

[8.] Sillence D.O, Seen A, Danks DM, 1979, Genetic heterogeneity in Osteogenesis Imperfecta.J Med Genetm16.101-116.

[9.] Ablin DS, 1998, Osteogenesis Imperfecta, a review Can Assoc Radiol J.49.110-123.

[10.] Nager GT 1988, Osteogenesis Imperfecta of the temporal bone and its relationship to Otosclerosis.Ann Otol Rhinol Laryngol.97.585-593.

[11.] Van der Hoene J de Kleyn A.1918.Blaue Skleren, Knochen bruchigkeit Und Schwerhohrigkeit. Arch Ophthalmol 95.81-93. (German).

[12]Reidner ED, Levin LS, Holliday MJ.1980, Hearing patterns in dominant Osteogenesis Imperfecta.Arch Otolarngol.106.737-740

[13.] Byers PH, Steiner RD, 1992, Osteogenesis Imperfecta .Annu Rev Med 1992, 43.269-282

[14.]Kuivaniem H,Tromp G,Prockop DJ 1997,Mutations in fibrillar collagens(Type I,II,II and XI) ,fibril associated collagen Type IX and network forming collagen Type X cause a spectrum of diseases  of the bone, cartilage ,and blood vessels. Hum Mutat 9.300-315

[15.] Byers PH, Steiner RD 1992MOsteogenesis Imperfecta Annu.Rev.Med.43.269-282

[16.]Skyes B,Ogilvie D,Wordsworth P,et al 1990,Consistent linkage of dominantly inherited Osteogenesis Imperfecta to the Type I collagen Loci.COL 1A1 and COL1A2,Am J Hum Genet 1990,46.293-307.

[17.] Berger G, Hawke M, Johnson A, Proops D.Histopathology of the temporal bone in Osteogenesis Imperfecta Congenita. a report of 5 cases. Laryngoscope 1985, 95.193-199)

[18.] Zajtchuk JT, Lindsay JR.Osteogenesis Imperfecta Congenita and tarda. A temporal bone report .Ann Otol.1975, 84.350-358

[19.] Sando I, Myers D, Havada T, Hinojosa R, Myers E Osteogenesis Imperfecta tarda and Otosclerosis, a temporal bone histopathology report. Ann otol 1981, 90.199-203

[20]Marion MS, Hinojosa R. Osteogenesis Imperfecta Am J Otolaryngol 1993, 14.137-138.

[21.]Tabor EK ,Curtin HD,Hirsh BE, May M .Osteogenesis imperfecta tarda.appearance of the temporal bones at Computed Tomography .Radiology 1990,175.1810183

[22.]Mafee MF,Valvasson GE,Ditch RL,et al .Use of the CT scan in  the  evaluation of Cochlear Otosclerosis.Radiology 1985,156.703-708

[23.] Hoddsmorth CE, Endahl GL, Soifer N, et al   Comparative biochemical study of Otosclerosis and Osteogenesis Imperfecta .Arch oto-laryngol 1973, 98.336-339

 

                                                                                                         

April 2014     Supplement 1              Classics and Revisits in Scientific Rheumatology 

 

[24.] Dent JA, Paterson CR.Fractures in early childhood.Osteogenesis imperfecta or child abuse? J Paediatr Orthop 1991; 11:184-186.

[25.] Ablin DS, Greenspan A, Reinhart M, Grix A, Differentiation of child abuse from Osteogenesis Imperfecta.Am J Roentgenol 1990.154:1035-1046

[26.] Paterson CR, Mole PA.Bone density in Osteogenesis Imperfecta may well be normal Postgrad Med J 1994:70:104-107.

[27.] Williamson MR, Boyd CM, Williamson SL Osteoporosis: Diagnosis by Plain chest film versus dual photon absorptiometry.Skeletal Radiol 1999; 19:27-30.

[28.] Miller ME. Temporary brittle bone disease: a true entity? Semin Perinatal 1992; 23:174-182.

[29.] Koo WWK.Sherman R, Succop P et al.Fractures and rickets in very low birth weight infants: Conservative management and outcome.J Paediatr Orthop 1989; 9:326-330.

[30.]Cremin B, Goodman H, Spranger J, Brighton P, Wormian bones in Osteogenesis Imperfecta and other disorders. Skeletal Radiol 1982; 8:35-38

[31.]Hawlik DM ,Nashesky MB,Ruptured cerebral artery aneurysm and Bacterial meningitis in a man with Osteogenesis Imperfecta.American Journal of Forensic Medicine and Pathology June 2006,27(2).117-120

[32.]Modestino G,Criscitiello M ,James A ,et al Cardiovascular abnormalities in Osteogenesis Imperfecta .Circulation 1965,31.255.

[33.]Wong R.S Follis.F, M Shively.B.K, Wernly .J.A.Osteogenesis Imperfecta and Cardiovascular diseases Ann.Thorac.Surg.November 1.1995, 60(5).1395-1397.

[34.] Moore.J.B, E.G.Wook and Kinkead.L.R.Ulnar artery aneurysm in Osteogenesis Imperfecta.J.Hand Surg Eur vol, February 1983.Original series, volume 15(1).91-95.

[35.]Ganesh.A, Jenny.C,Geyer.J.Shouldice M,Leven A, Retinal haemorrhages in type 1 ostegenesis imperfecta after minor trauma.Opthalmology.Volume 111,Issue 7.Pages 1428-1431.

[36.] Martin, R.B, Burr .D.B. (1989) The structure, function and adaptation of compact bone (Raven, New York), pp.57-84.

[37] McMahon P,Grossman W,Gaffney M.Stanitski C.Soft tissue injury as an indication of child abuse.J Bone Joint Surg 1995;77A:1179-1183.

[38.]Paterson CR, Monk EA.Long term follow up of children thought to have temporary brittle bone disease.Osteoporos Int 2000;11(Suppl 4):S47-S48

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

                                                                                                                  

April 2014 Supplement 1      Classics and Revisits in Scientific Interdisciplinary Medical Themes CRS [Int.Disc.Med.Them.]

                                                                                                                   

Proteus syndrome in childhood with a selective literature review.

 

Guest Editors: CRS [Med] Consulting Academic Clinical Editorial Experts.

 

The need for an Editorial review article on Proteus syndrome PS.

An editorial review article following academic clinical experts consultations on PS is undertaken on the basis of concerns evoked following observations on few compatible   cases encountered over a considerable time. Given the progressive compressive, the vascular and malignant neoplastic implications of PS,a high index of suspicion should be expedient for an early and timely exclusion or  diagnosis for PS,especially those cases presently covertly, or with minimal phenotypic expressivities or attenuations.

Case Definition

Proteus syndrome (PS) is a rare sporadically occurring hamartomatous disorder

associated with mosaic multifocal irregular asymmetric overgrowth of multiple body

tissues and cell lineages. The aetiology of Proteus syndrome is still idiopathic.

However, the predominant hypothesis is that PS is caused by a postzygotic mosaic

alteration in a gene that is lethal in its nonmosaic state.

Most malformations in Proteus syndrome have a predominantly ectodermal or

mesodermal origin.

Characteristic multifocal, multicentric, metachronous or synchronous overgrowths

(partial or regional gigantism, or hemi hypertrophy) in Proteus syndrome could involve

any body structure, especially the skin, bone, connective tissues, and fat.

Globally, published or unpublished reports of PS , are still very few.

A cluster of phenotypic features evoking the possibility of PS ..

On  closer scrutiny,observations and follow ups, a couple of  children presented with some of  the spectral phenotypic dysmorphological features of PS such as  lower limb hemi-hypertrophies,  cerebriform cutaneous hyperplastic unilateral sole overgrowths, widespread hyperpigmented capillary haemangiomatosis on the  limbs and extremities,  saccrococcygeal, gluteal, perineal protuberant lipomatous masses,congenital  absence of the gluteal cleft and  progressive abdominal tumefactions.

Establishing PS as the most plausible diagnosis.

Following the observations of these features consistent with the recognized clinical diagnostic criteria for Proteus syndrome, the possibility of  .this diagnosis was evoked and suggested, on follow ups ,with  progressive enlargement of these structures the  probability of Proteus syndrome was considered and discussed.

Rare embryonic neoplasms in PS

Following focused radiological imaging procedures the diagnosis of Proteus syndrome complicated by nephroblastoma, multifocal neuroblastomas and embryonic tumours was  established in these cases.Although a range of malignancies have been previously reported in PS, embryomas were relatively uncommon especially Wilms tumour and Nephroblastom as they were demonstrated in the editorial observations

 

                                                                                                                  

April 2014     Supplement 1 Classics and Revisits in Scientific Interdisciplinary           Medical Themes.                                                                                          

The diagnostic and therapeutic difficulties in PS                                          

The diagnosis and management of Proteus syndrome is challenging, enigmatic and

difficult and were controversially discussed in the  medical literature.

Proteus syndrome could be associated with synchronous, metachronous,

multicentric, multifocal, phenotypic expressivities and intrabdominal embryomas

Literature search to aid  the diagnosis. PS.

In establishing this diagnosis,the extant,and current medical literature were briefly reviewed to examine the rarity and strengths of these associated structural features in achieving the diagnosis of this syndrome against its other differentials. Other methodological issues concerning its epidemiology, presentations, diagnosis and management were also proffered and discussed.

Case definition.

Proteus syndrome (PS) is an extremely rare disorder of patchy or mosaic postnatal

growth dysregulation, primarily involving overgrowth. The disorder is thought to be

related to a somatic genetic alteration ,but its exact etiology is still largely unknown.

Proteus syndrome was named after the Greek god Proteus who could change his shape at will.This rare disorder is characterized by multiple lesions of the mesodermal tissues, fat cells,lymphatic and blood vessels (lipolymphohaemangiomas), overgrowth of one side of the body(hemihypertrophy), an abnormally large head (macrocephaly), partial gigantism of the feet, darkened spots or moles (nevi on the skin).

Historical Perspective and Nomenclature of interest.

Studies on Proteus syndrome commenced in earnest in 1978, when Bennett proposed a putative experimental model for the mode of inheritance in PS and other related syndromes associated by a dominantly determined genomically patterned inheritance with mosaicism sustaining the survival of a naturally lethal gene.[1]

Although some evidence of this syndrome was originally published in the medical

literature as early as in 1907 or before, the more modern medical description of the

disease was attributed to Cohen and Hayden, who identified the syndrome in 1979.[2]

To stress the polymorphic nature of the clinical manifestations of this new

syndrome, in 1983,Wiedermann coined the term Proteus syndrome after the Greek mythological god Proteus (meaning polymorphous), the Old man of the Sea who could change his shape at will to avoid capture. [3]

The Elephant Man had PS on retrospective analysis.

Anecdotally, Joseph Merrick, the Elephant Man described by Sir Fredrick Treves in 1884

celebrated by stage plays and movies with the same name, was initially thought to have

suffered from elephantiasis and latter on a diagnosis of neurofibromatosis was suggested

, but now believed retrospectively to have had a Proteus syndrome after a study of the preserved castings of his soles revealed a cerebriform cutaneous hyperplasia, a characteristic finding in Proteus syndrome. [4][5]It was in 1996 that the answer to what affected Merrick was determined with exact certainty . A radiologist, Amita Sharma, of the National Institutes of Health (U.S.A), examined very meticulously the x-rays and CT scans of Merrick’s skeleton preserved at the Royal London Hospital after his death.

 

                                                                                                                   

April 2014      Supplement 1 Classics and Revisits in Scientific Interdisciplinary           Medical Themes                                                                                                                  

Dr.Sharma in 1979. determined that Merrick had Proteus syndrome, an extremely rare disorder, she asserts that Merrick’s appearance, and especially his skeleton, portrays all the identified stigmata of the defect in their extreme.

Folk-lores on the Elephant man

Historical legends had it that the head of the elephant man was so large that his hat measured about three feet in diameter.

Undoubtedly, Joseph Carey Merrick the elephant man (1862-1890) wanted to be like other people. He often wished he could lie down and sleep, but because of the size and weight of his head he had to sleep sitting up. One morning in 1890 he was found lying down in bed on his back, dead. The weight of his head had compressed his airway, and he suffocated. He was aged 28 years old at the time of his death.

Retrospectively, in 1983, Weidemann suggested that the patient reported by Graetz in

1928 could have had Proteus syndrome. [6]and that another case reported by Temtamy and Rogers in 1976 had features consistent with PS [7]

An earnest Search for the phenotypic features compatible with PS

The same year, Weidemann et al described a new syndrome in four unrelated boys with a

constellation of clinical features of partial gigantism of the hands and or the feet, nevi,

hemihypertrophy, subcutaneous tumors, macrocephaly or other skull anomalies, possibly

accelerated growth and visceral affectations which were in keeping with Proteus syndrome. [3]Additional advancements in the comprehension of the

pathomorphology in Proteus syndrome led to relevant updates in 1984.[8]

That same year, Wiedemann and Burgio studied the extent and the nature of the dermal

changes in Proteus syndrome and asserts that they were papillomatous epidermal nevi piquantly aligned along the lines of Baloshka.[9]

Time lines of the Investigations on PS

Several Investigations were undertaken on PS from 1984 to 1990

Further investigations into the pathogenesis and phenotypic expressivity in

Proteus syndrome was undertaken by Lezama and Buyse et al still in 1984[10]

In the same year, Gorlin described another case with features consistent with Proteus

syndrome. [11]

Lipomatosis as an association of PS was highlighted In 1985

Mucke et al et al highlighted the dynamism of the clinical features of the Proteus syndrome by illuminating on the natural history of lipomatosis in I985 [12]The same year, further reports on the multi-focality of Proteus syndrome were made by Costa et al.Two cases were reported, with both having abdomino-pelvic lipomatosis.This was noted in one of the cases aged seven who retrospectively had a conjuctival dermoid at the age of thirty six months.Laparatomy at the age of seventy two months for an acute abdominal pain revealed a right iliac fossa lipomatosis and a twisted necrotic mesenteric fat as the implicated aetiopathogenic factor for the pain.Some morphological similarities of PS to the Bannayan-Zonana syndrome and linear sebaceous nevus syndromes were demonstrated. [13]With further case enrollments into these series in the same year by Costa et al, they asserted the paternal age independence of these cases in a study of  ten cases, with a mean paternal age of 30(range 23 to 40) which were not unusually extreme.

                                                                                                                   

April 2014 Supplement 1 Classics and Revisits in Interdisciplinay, Medical Themes.                                                                                                                                                   

 

The alignment of dermopathy of  PS along the lines of Baloscka was noted in 1986

Happle pointed out that the lesions follow the dermal lesions along the lines

Baloschka.Happle had proposed that the likely putative aetiopathogenic pathway in PS is

an autosomal dominantly determined genomically transmitted lethal gene persisting by

mosaicism akin to hypothetically proven aetiopathogenic mechanisms propagating the

MCCune-Albright syndrome and probably the Schimmelpenning-Feuerstein-Mims

syndrome [14,15]

Association of PS with adherent lipomatosis and haemangiomas reiterated in 1987

Clark et al reported eleven cases of PS syndrome all with the remarkable

association of lipomatosis. [16] The same year in 1987, a case series was reported in Southern Africa by Viljoen et al [17], in the same year they mentioned that the surgical removal of lymphatic, fatty or hemangiomatous elements could be difficult ,usually resulting in unsightly scars and keloids,at about  the same period a further case of a child aged fifty four  months who was severely affected by Proteus syndrome was reported by Malamitsi-Puchner et al. [18] Between 1987 and 1988, further works were undertaken retrospectively by Cohen with regards to the Elephant man. [4, 19, 20]

Further aspects of the dermopathies of PS were highlighted in 1988,

Viljoen et al described the skin manifestations of the Proteus syndrome in all of their six patients, with marked hypertrophy of the skin of the soles, being a consistent and universal feature of this syndrome that the authors inferred that it was almost pathognomonic for the syndrome. In three cases, additional features such as large epidermal nevi and linear macular lesions with areas of depigmentations were also demonstrated.

On light microscopy, the affected skins from the soles were noted to have an elongation

of the cytoplasm of the basal cells.

Bannayan-Zonana syndromes suggested as a possible differentials of PS

The differential diagnosis of the Proteus and Bannayan-Zonana syndromes were discussed by Bailer et al in 1988In their examination of the relevant literature they noted a history of consanguinity in 5.56% of their cases with compatible Proteus syndrome.

The overlap within syndromes that include hamartoma as eloquent features intimates that

these syndromes may be aetio-pathologically related, probably with regards to

perturbations in the secretion of a hypothetical humoural growth factor or an irregular tissue or receptor responsiveness to this growth factor.[21]

Malignant transformation of PS lesions exemplified by progressions to testicular malignancy.

Samlaska et al. in 1989 reported an archetypical case and reviewed thirty four others reported sporadically. [22], Malamitsi-Puchner et al in 1990 gave an account of the

follow up of the cases that they studied and reported earlier in 1987.

A striking tissue overgrowth occurred after surgical interventions in this child who latter

developed testicular malignancy. [23]Still in 1990, Beluffi et al reported a case of Proteus syndrome with pelvic lipomatosis and illustrated the use of a computer assisted tomographic scan for demonstrating pelvic lipomatosis.

                                                                                                                   

April 2014 Supplement 1 Classics and Revisits in Scientific InterdisciplinaryThemes The musculoskeletal associations of PS highlighted.

Further investigations in 1990 by Hotamisligil and Ertogan described the case in

a nine month old girl who in addition to other features, had soft tissue masses in the

paravertebral and gluteal areas with aggressive involvement of the spinal canal and a

hyperpigmented epidermal nevus with hyperkeratosis on one side of his body.

He had a bipedal and unilateral left palmar and dorsal macrodactyly with syndactyly of

the third and fourth left digits. In this instance, nephrogenic diabetes insipidus was

described in Proteus syndrome for the first time.[24 ]

Familial transmission of PS demonstrated.

Although traditionally considered a sporadic congenital disorder, some anecdotal reports

have proposed the possibility of a familial transmission in Proteus syndrome.

Goodship, et al in 1991 presented a possible case of father to son transmission of Proteus

syndrome. The son had a cranial hemihypertrophy, a lymphangioma, a lipomata, and

epidermal nevi, where as the father had a large lymphangioma resected from the right

side of his face as a child, given this association, the possibility that his father was a mosaic was proposed. [25]

The possibility of  PS presenting with minimal phenotypic expressivity or attenuation highlighted.

Kruger et al in 1993, observed mild Proteus syndrome in a boy whose mother had very

attenuated manifestations of PS. She had facial asymmetry with hypertrophy of her right lower cheek and impaired facial expression in that region. He was not cognitively impaired, but he a had minimally expressed left unilateral superior labial hypertrophy and cheek, causing a perilesionally lateralized impaired focal facial expressivity, hypertrophy of the left arm, partial gigantism of the left middle finger, and a large subcutaneous swelling in the upper left abdomen thought clinically and sonographically to be a lipomata.Both this mother and her son had distinctive superiorly localized venous markings. [26]

The probability of spinal cord compression from related structural defects suggested in PS.

Also Skovby et al in 1993 reported two illustrative cases of the two plausible

pathways by which spinal cord compromise may develop in Proteus syndrome:

In the first instance, spinal stenosis resulted from an anomalous vertebral architectonics

such as angular kyphoscoliosis.In the second case, cord compression resulted from tumoural infiltration most likely froma paraspinal, intrathoracic angiolipomata.[27]

Somatic Mosaism and further associated organic structural defects in PS  remarked.

Two unusual cases of PS were further reported by Cohen which supported the concept of

somatic mosiacism.In one case, a huge connective tissue nevus covered the anterior

thoraco-abdominal walls, in addition to multifocal calvaria hyperostoses.

In the other subject, linear verrucous epidermal nevi, epibulbar dermoids, and

hyperostoses were demonstrated. However no appendageal, digital or superficial plantar

enlargements were demonstrated in these instances.In the same year further review of selective aspects of Proteus syndrome, including uncommon neoplasms, pulmonary and renal abnormalities, brain malformations,and patterns of abnormal growth in the craniofacial skeleton were undertaken by Cohen.

                                                                                                                   

April 2014 Supplement 1Classics and Revisits in Scientific Interdisciplinary Medical Themes,                                                                                                         

At this point, the presence of external auditory meatal hyperostosis was taken as a very specific feature of Proteus syndrome. [28]

The multifocality of PS lesions demonstrated.

Smeets et al in 1994 reported another patient with a cranio-facial manifestation of

Proteus syndrome. In this case, multi-focal calvarial, facial bony, external auditory

meatal and mandibular hyperostoses were the principal regional features demonstrated.

Also a scleral tumor was demonstrated in this patient. These observations were interpreted as lending a further support to the hypothetical concept of somatic mosaicism. [29]

Further aspects of malignant transformations in PS were reiterated.further

Gordon et al in 1995, observed two patients with Proteus syndrome who progressed to

malignant transformations. One case had a probable mesothelioma, in addition to features

suggestive of thyroid papillary carcinoma, which was not ruled out with

exact certainty pre-mortem, this case latter died at the age of five whilst asleep, at

autopsy, a papillary neoplasm, most likely of mesothelial origin, involving the inferior

surface of the diaphragmatic musculature and infiltrating into the omentum, the pelvic

area, the scrotum and some of the mesenteric lymph nodes were demonstrated.

The other case had bilateral ovarian serous cystadenomas with nuclear atypia identified at six years three months of age, warranting.a right ovarian oophorectomy, invasion of the right fallopian tube was also noted. During this period a catalogue of uncommon neoplasms in Proteus syndrome was compiled and proffered. [30]

 

Multiple organomegalies and Visceromegalies as an association of PS.

Lacombe and Battin, in 1996 described two unrelated children diagnosed at birth with

isolated macrodactyly .At follow ups they were noted to have developed hemihypertrophy. Three dorsally located angiomas were seen in one of these cases,

a female child, when she was aged four years. The clinical features encountered in both cases were consistent with the specific diagnostic criteria for Proteus syndrome. [31]

Ceelen et al in 1997described a man with Proteus syndrome who sustained an enlarged

splenic rupture while horse riding. [32]

Splenomegaly as a common feature of PS

Biesecker et al in 1998 described their experience with eighteen cases with a

presumptive diagnosis of Proteus syndrome.Splenic hyperplasia was noted to be a recognized feature of PS. The spleen was enlarged in two of the eighteen cases, and another case with asymptomatic splenomegaly and thymic hyperplasia was known to them earlier on. However, they annotated that it was likely that hemi-hyperplasia commonly over simulates Proteus syndrome [33]

In the same year Biesecker et al described a distinctive subset characterized by static or

mildly progressive hemi-hyperplasia and multiple lipomata.

 

 

 

 

                                                                                                                  

April 2014 Supplement 1 Classics and Revisits in Scientific Interdisciplinary Medical Themes.

                                                                                                                  

A review of the diagnostic criteria for PS

The recommendations for the diagnostic criteria, differential diagnosis, and

guidelines for evaluation of patients with Proteus syndromes which were developed at a

workshop held at the National Institutes of Health in 1998 were reviewed by

Biesecker et al.The general criteria suggested as mandatory for the diagnosis of PS were mosaic distribution of lesions, a progressive course, and a sporadic occurrence.

Pathognomonic Features for the diagnosis of PS suggested.

Specific clinical manifestations also were suggested as necessary to meet the diagnostic

Criteria for PS. Connective tissue nevi, which were common manifestations in Proteus

syndrome, were considered almost pathognomonic for the syndrome, although they were

not always present in all cases, where the diagnosis of  PS was made.

Other combinations of manifestations (e.g., epidermal nevus, disproportionate overgrowth, specific tumours were suggested to meet the diagnostic criteria. [34]

Describing other mutational variants of PS

Happle in 1999 suggested the designation elattoproteus syndrome for a disorder that he considered to be an inverse form of Proteus syndrome.

He described a seven year old boy with partial lipohypoplasia and patchy dermal hypoplasia involving large body surface areas. These areas of attenuated growth were similar to those described in many cases of Proteus syndrome. Paradoxically; however, he had a minimally expressed inordinate overgrowth defects.Happle proposed to explain this unusual phenotype by suggesting that there may be various allelic mutations in the putative gene locus responsible for Proteus syndrome, which gives rise to overgrowth of somatic tissues.

Pleioproteus and Ellattoproteus as mutational variants extremes of PS.

Such mutations could be called Pleioproteus alleles, a term derived from the Greek word pleion meaning plus. Conversely, the same gene locus may harbor alleles responsible for deficient growth of somatic tissues. Mutations in these points were referred to as Ellattoproteus alleles after the Greek word elatton, meaning minus.

Patients affected with Proteus syndrome may show classic overgrowth or a composite picture with Pleioproteus and Elattoproteus lesions or even an isolated putative previously uncharacterized elattoproteus phenotype [35]

Ophthalmopathy of PS highlighted.

De Becker in 2000 described the ocular manifestations in a case of Proteus

syndrome and reviewed the ocular features demonstrated in published cases. [36]

Also the same year ,Hodge et al described a ten year old boy with Proteus syndrome

who presented with an effusive pericardial disease, a panhypogammaglobinaemia, with a specific deficiency in IgG and IgA subsets accompanied by low levels of specific antibodies to pneumococcal and hemophilus type B polysaccarides, and global lymphopenia.Given that no other cause was found for this immune deficiency in this case of PS, the authors suggested that it may represent a previously unrecognized feature of Proteus syndrome. [37]

 

                                                                                                                   

April 2014 Supplement 1  Classics and Revisits in Scientific Interdisciplinary               Medical Themes                                                                                                                  

Cognitive impairments associated with neuronal migration disorders and ophthalmopathies demonstrated in PS

Further work on PS was undertaken by Gilbert-Barnes et al, in 2000, who reported an exceptional patient with Proteus syndrome in whom manifestations included multifocal meningiomas, polymicrogyria, and periventricular heterotopias, with both eyes having epibulbar cystic lesions. The retina showed diffuse disorganization with nodular gliosis, retinal pigmentary abnormalities, chronic papilledema, and optic atrophy. Other abnormalities noted included progressive cranial, mandibular, maxillary, and auditory canal hyperostosis, epidermal nevi, and mental sub-normality. His limbs, hands and feet were noted to be proportionate and otherwise normal. [38]

Deleterious Pulmonary embolism observed in PS

The same year, Slavotinek et al reported three patients with Proteus syndrome who died suddenly from pulmonary embolism related to different clinical circumstances.

The first patient, who was diagnosed with Proteus syndrome at the age of twelve years, had varicose veins, portal vein thrombosis, right iliac fossa vein occlusion and recurrent pulmonary embolism. At the age of twenty five years old he died from pulmonary embolism. The second patient was a nine year old male who collapsed and died at home. Autopsy asserted the cause of death to be pulmonary embolus associated with deep vein thrombosis. The third patient was a seventeen year-old female undergoing inpatient treatment for sinusitis when she suddenly died. Autopsy showed a large pulmonary embolus with no identified deep vein thrombosis.

The need for relevant historical enquiry for PS and evaluation for thrombogenicity to direct anti-thrombogenic prophylactic measures in PS reiterated.

Given the fatality related to these complications, Slavotinek et al promptly suggested that patients undergoing surgical procedures should be evaluated for coagulopathic potential to determine whether antithrombotic prophylaxis will be appropriate for them [39]Cohen in 2001 reviewed at least seventeen reported cases of premature deaths in Proteus syndrome and suggested that patients with this disorder and/or their families should make their health care providers aware of the risk of deep venous thrombosis and pulmonary embolism. [40 ]

Biesecker in the same year reported Proteus syndrome in a five year old case and made a selective literature review.[41 ]

Controversies on the role of PET Gene mutations in PS. 

Further work on the molecular genetic aspect of PS was undertaken by Barker et

al in 2001, however they did not identify mutations in the PTEN gene in eight unrelated patients with classic Proteus syndrome, hence suggesting that the mutation exclusion hypothesis may not be unfounded.[42]

 

 

 

 

 

 

                                                                                                                                               

April 2014 Supplement 1 Classics and Revisits in Scientific Interdisciplinary                Medical    Themes                                                                                                               

Obstipation demonstrated in PS, a consequence of infiltrative colonic lipomata.

Mackay et al in 2002 reported a twelve year old boy with Proteus syndrome who had presented with gross abdominal distension and severe intractable obstipation.

At an Axial T1- weighted MRI, a diffuse hyperintense tissue, signal typical of fat surrounding and separating bowel loops, with a lesional aspect extending posteriorly on the left into the paraspinal musculature, displacing the psoas muscle anteriorly was

demonstrated. At laparatomy a huge infiltrating lipomatous mass was identified encasing the left colon, including the rectum. [43]

Induced abortion with Misoprostol by a mother related to birth of a baby with PS

Mohameddbhai et al. also in 2002 reported the case of a newborn male Proteus

syndrome case whose mother had ingested misoprostol, an orally active prostaglandins,

at six weeks of gestation in an attempt to abort that conception. [44 ]

Further definitions of diagnostic criteria for PS

Turner et al in 2004 reviewed two hundred and five reported cases of Proteus syndrome.

Interestingly, of all these lot, only ninety seven were thought to have strictly met the diagnostic criteria of PS, eighty cases clearly did not meet the criteria; and although twenty eight cases had features suggestive of Proteus syndrome, there were insufficient clinical data to substantiate this diagnosis.

Follow up adverse events on putative PS cases using a stringent criterion.

On follow up, the reported cases that met the strict criteria for Proteus syndrome had a higher incidence of premature deaths and other complications (Scoliosis, megaspondyly, central nervous system abnormalities, tumors, otolaryngologic complications, pulmonary cystic malformations, dental and ophthalmic complications) compared to those in the non-Proteus group. Cases that met the criteria were more often males, which had implications regarding the hypothesis for the etiology and pathophysiology of Proteus syndrome.Cerebriform connective tissue nevi (skin lesions characterized by deep grooves and gyrations as seen on the surface of the brain, which are striking features when seen on the hands and feet) were considered characteristic.

Specific later onset tumours in PS

Specific tumors occurring before the second decade include ovarian cystadenomas

and parotid monomorphic adenomas. Lung cysts were also added as a criterion.[45]

The Controversies surrounding PTEN in PS clarified.

Thiffault et al in 2004 reiterated that the most plausible suggestion for the genetic

basis of Proteus syndrome is the Happle somatic mosaic hypothesis, although no somatic

mutations in candidate genes had been reported, because germ line mutations in the

PTEN gene had been identified in patients diagnosed with Proteus syndrome.

In the same year, Thiffault et al screened affected and unaffected tissue from six patients

with Proteus syndrome by direct sequencing of genomic DNA for germ line or somatic

mutations in the PTEN or GPC3genes. No intraexonic mutations were identified,

indicating that neither PTEN nor GPC3 was likely to have a major role in the etiology of

Proteus syndrome in this series of cases. [46 ]

 

 

                                                                                                                                               

April 2014 Classics and Revisits in Scientific Interdisplinary Medical Themes                                                                                                                                                 

Post zygotic mutations associated Mosaicism suggested as a causality factor in PS

Brockmann et al in 2008 reported a pair of monozygotic nine year old male twins

discordant for Proteus syndrome. The affected boy showed progressive postnatal

overgrowth of his right lower limb and foot with asymmetric progressive overgrowth of

single toes. There was a small cerebriform connective tissue nevus on his right fourth toe.

The phenotype was mild but still fulfilled the diagnostic criteria for Proteus syndrome.

The findings supported the hypothesis that this condition is caused by a post zygotic

mutation event resulting in mosaicism. [47]

Further discussions on establishing the diagnosis of PS:

Although the exact aetiology of Proteus syndrome is still idiopathic; however the

predominant hypothesis is that Proteus syndrome is a consequence of a post zygotic

mosaic alteration in a gene that is lethal in its non mosaic form, however, Proteus like syndromes were associated with PTEN mutations.

Somatic mutations and defective production or regulation of tissue growth factors or receptors as a causality factor in PS

The concept of a somatic mutation that affects the production or regulation of tissue

growth factors or their receptors could explain the sporadic occurrence, the random

distribution of overgrowth, and the wide range of findings within the phenotype.

Many features of Proteus syndrome overlap with other overgrowth syndromes.

A Proteus like syndrome was previously reported in association with a germ line and

tissue-specific somatic mutations in the PTEN [48, 49, 50] These PTENS genes are usually mutated in Cowden syndrome and in Bannayan-Riley-Ruvalcaba syndrome (BRRS)

Confounding diagnostic difficulties with PS due to other overlapping syndromes.

Some of the phenotypic features of this syndrome overlap with those of the other

overgrowth syndromes such as the Klippel-Trenaunay-Weber syndrome, the

Ollier disease and the Maffucci syndrome occasionally posing some diagnostic

challenges. [51]Although chromosomal alterations have not been demonstrated with routine cytogenetic studies as such in Proteus syndrome, however the karyotype in two patients with Proteus syndrome showed structural abnormalities of chromosome 16 and chromosome 1 in a mosaic distribution, further supporting the hypothesis of somatic mutation. This concept of a somatic mutation that involves tissue growth factors or their receptors could explain several aspects of Proteus syndrome, such as the mosaic distribution of lesions, its sporadic occurrence, the unaffected offspring from the affected individuals, and the existence of discordant twins. Despite the evidence implicating a somatic mutation, no causal gene mutations were known for Proteus syndrome.

However, ongoing advances in the comprehension of the  aetiologic-phenotypic

correlations in the context of supposedly genetic defects appear to make the future more

certain. [52]

Striking a balance in the diagnostic criteria for PS.

The most appropriate criteria for the exact diagnosis of Proteus syndrome with much certainty were controversially discussed. Although under diagnosis could be more common, most stringent diagnostic criteria is commonly advocated over simplistic

overlapping generic ones to facilitate appropriate research investigations and utmost

clinical care.The strengths of most stringent criteria are that they define an entity with an

apposite level of congruity in clinical features and outcome which could lead to an

enhanced comprehension of the inherent putative pathogenic mechanisms in these cases [41,33,34 ]

Plausible diagnostic, prophylactic and therapeutic interventions for PS

The aggressive and disproportionate overgrowth in PS is progressive involving mostly the musculo-skeletal systems and these orthopaedic complications could be difficult and challenging to manage. An optimal intervention will imply an adequate knowledge of a spectrum of manifestations and complications of the disorder and a multidisciplinary approach involving the geneticist, surgeons and other specialists.

The diagnosis of Proteus syndrome could be achieved without routine cytogenetic

studies, which have demonstrated inconsistent chromosomal aberrations.

The determination of the molecular aetiology of this syndrome will be difficult, given its

extreme rarity, the abbreviated life span in affected subjects, and its sporadic occurrence,

making the conventional approach of traditional cloning less useful.

Novel molecular genetic approach for the diagnosis of PS.

The aetiology of this disorder could however be studied using various comparative molecular biological techniques such as c DNA arrays, genomic arrays, subtractive techniques, testing of candidate genes and other appropriate techniques.

In addition to testing for dysregulations of growth hormones and binding proteins in vivo.

A novel systematic  diagnostic classification scheme for PS

An updated revised criteria was adopted for PS in 2014 [45], differing from that undertaken in 1999. [33] and other more generic less stringent ones which allowed the diagnosis of PS to be made in patients presenting ordinarily with hemi-hyperplasia. [34,53, 54].Its diagnosis requires the presence of all general criteria and various specific criteria, including the presence of  the category A criterion or two category B criteria or three category C criteria. The affected subjects should have the following general criteria, mosaic distribution of the lesions, progressive course, and a sporadic occurrence.

The specific PS diagnostic criteria are as follows:

[I] +Category A-Cerebriform connective-tissue nevus.

[II] +Category B-Epidermal nevus; asymmetric, disproportionate overgrowth (limbs,

skull, external auditory meatus, vertebrae, and/or viscera); and specific tumours that

occur most commonly in the second decade (i.e., ovarian cystadenoma, parotid

Monomorphic adenoma)

[III]+Category C-Dysregulated adipose tissue (lipomas, regional lipohypoplasia)

, vascular malformations (capillary, venous, and/or lymphatic), lung cysts, and facial

phenotype..

The argument for a high index of suspicion for the diagnosis of PS

The variably mild form of this syndrome with a less eloquent phenotypic expressivity could be missed initially or entirely until catastrophic complication of DVT or PE renders it suspicious and the diagnosis now made in retrospect. Neuroimaging with Skull X-ray, CT or MRI will be most informative for those with significant facial dysmorphism, mental subnormality or epileptogenesis.Compressive neuropathies could follow tumourigenesis or bony exostosis.

 

                                                                                                                                               

  April 2014 Supplement 1Classics and Revisits in Scientific Interdisciplinary Medical Themes                                                                                                         

PS is a progressive and dynamic overgrowth condition.

Occasionally, the mild or moderate effects of Proteus syndrome, such as bening tumours, are present at birth. As the child grows and develops, the tissue overgrowth progresses and changes. This progression is often irregular, it is characterized by periods of major overgrowths and other periods of absent overgrowth.The effects therefore change over the course of a time.

PS is associated with ambulatory difficulties and compressive neuropathies.

However, most changes occur before adolescence, since tissue over-growths tend to plateau at that time.Patients with Proteus syndrome have difficulty ambulating because of toe macrodactyly, scoliosis, and joint instability, with frequent dislocations, expansive subcutaneous tumours and compressive neuropathies due to intraneural hamartomas.

Some patients may have persistent atelectasis, pneumonia, or symptoms of pulmonary

Strict diagnostic criteria, guidelines and algorithms has been proposed and accepted. Those features which are considered to have diagnostic values are considered because of the tremendous variability in the manifestations of Proteus syndrome.

These features could be classified as cutaneous or noncutaneous.

Cutaneous manifestations

Almost always, all patients with Proteus syndrome have at least one type of cutaneous

lesion, of which several different types have been reported. These skin lesions could

generally be classified into two groups, those that are congenital or neonatal in onset and are stable in the first group and those that are post neonatal and progressive in the second

group. In some patients, the presenting symptom may be one or more of the many types

of heterogeneous skin lesions that characterize Proteus syndrome.

These include cerebriform connective –tissue nevi, epidermal nevi, vascular hamartomas, lipomatas and hyperpigmented or hypopigmented areas. Epidermal nevi and vascular malformations are considered group one lesions, while lipomatas and cerebriform connective tissue nevi generally occur latter and are considered group two lesions.

Group 1 cutaneous lesions are characterized as follows:

Epidermal nevi are a common finding in patients with Proteus syndrome.

These manifest at birth as tan-to-brown, flat topped, hyperkeratotic or verrucous papules,

which run in a linear or whorled pattern along the lines of Blaschko.

Epidermal nevi are found asymmetrically, scattered around the body.

Histologic features are acantholysis and hyperkeratosis in a clinical lesion consistent with an epidermal nevus.

Congenital Vascular malformations are other common cutaneous features in PS.

These anomalies can be of venous, capillary, or lymphatic origin and include nevus

flammeus, angiokeratomas, cavernous hemangiomas, superficial and deep lymphangiomas, and varicosity of the superficial veins. [55, 56]

These lesions are developmental abnormalities and they grow proportionately through a

patient’s lifetime without regression .In an occasional patient these vascular malformations have been noted to expand beyond proportionate growth.

Prominence of veins may be enhanced in areas of regional lipodystrophy.

                                                                                                                                               

April 2014 Supplement 1 Classics and Revisits in Scientific Interdisciplinary Medical Themes.

                                                                                                                                               

Group Two cutaneous lesions are characterized by the presence of cerebriform nevi

Cerebriform connective-tissue nevus is one of the most common and characteristic

features of Proteus syndrome, although its presence is not required for diagnosis and its

presence alone is not pathognomonic for Proteus syndrome, although its presence is not

required for diagnosis and its presence alone is not pathognomonic for Proteus syndrome.

An occasional patient developed an isolated plantar cerebriform collegenoma who lacked the general diagnostic criteria for Proteus syndrome. These nevi have a relatively delayed onset, making the diagnosis of PS difficult in neonates and infants.

Cerebriform nevi occur as well-demarcated, skin coloured plaques with a cerebriform or

rugated appearance. Most often they occur in the cutaneous and subcutaneous tissues on

the palms or soles but have also been noted on the forearm, on the trunk, and inferior to the ala nasi.Lesions on the sole typically cause the most morbidity because they cause ambulation difficulties, are usually prone to ulceration and infection, and are malodorous.Histopathologically, the lesions consist of an irregular whorly non-lipomatous proliferation of highly collagenised cellular fibrous tissue.

Lipolymphohaemangiomas are characteristic features in PS

In PS adipose tissue abnormalities are common, resulting in lipomatas and areas of lipohypoplasia.Lipomatas occur as hamartomatous masses consisting of subcutaneous

tissue or a variable combination of adipose, lymphatic, and hemangiomatous components

(eg, lipolymphohaemagiomas) and are the second most frequent type of skin findings that

characterize Proteus syndrome. The soft subcutaneous tumours can affect any area of the

body but are most common on the head, abdomen, groin, or legs. They appear as soft,

skin coloured nodules or tumours.Patchy areas of lipohypoplasia or dermal hypoplasia

are also observed in some patients.Lipohypoplasia occurs as regions of skin with minimal

fat, while dermal hypoplasia appears depressed, red plaques in areas with prominent

Other non-lipomatous growths in PS

Cutaneous manifestations also include striking overgrowth anomalies, including

asymmetric hypertrophy of the face, part or all of one or both limbs (particularly

digits), the trunk, or any combination of these; often, hemihypertrophy of one side of the

body results. These abnormalities could also be the first to attract the parent’s attention

and cause considerable anxiety.Cafe au lait spots and areas of hypopigmentation or

hyperpigmentation with a linear or whorled arrangement are also hallmark skin findings

in persons with Proteus syndrome.Hypertrichosis and nail abnormalities are also seen.

Non-cutaneous manifestations in Proteus syndrome:

The most characteristic non-cutaneous findings in patients with Proteus syndrome involve skeletal overgrowth and include corporal hemihypertrophy, partial gigantism of the hands and or the feet, and skeletal anomalies such as long-bone overgrowth and scoliosis. Overgrowths of the hands, feet, or both were universal in one series of twenty four patients with Proteus syndrome. Arm or leg over growth is nearly always   a constant feature of PS.

 

                                                                                                                                               

April 2014   Supplement 1 Classics and Revisits in Scientific Interdisplinary                 Medical Themes,                                                                                                                 

 

Cranio-facial abnormalities

These are fairly common and progressive and include cranial hemihyperplasia, hyperostosis of the skull or external auditory canal, craniosynostosis,

and unilateral condylar hyperplasia. Hyperostosis and unilateral condylar hyperplasia

were common, while cranial hemihyperplasia and craniosynostosis were rare.

A facial phenotype with dolichocephaly, long face, down-slanting palpebral fissures,

ptosis, low nasal bridge, wide or anteverted nares, and open mouth at rest has been

associated with mental retardation and seizures.

The other commonly associated neoplasms in Proteus syndrome 

Specific tumours have been noted to occur with an increased frequency in patients with Proteus syndrome. In addition to being found subcutaneously lipomata could also infiltrate muscles and internal organs, including the heart, pancreas, spinal cord, and the pharynx. Other tumours noted to occur in several patients include ovarian cystadenomas, testicular tumours, and parotid adenomas. Other benign neoplasms, such as bronchial hamartomas and multiple meningiomas have been reported. Cystic lung disease is found in approximately 1:10 of patients with Proteus syndrome and could lead to a significant morbidity, with rapid progression, fatality could result. Renal cysts in PS have been previously described. Visceral overgrowth was reported previously, especially involving the spleen or the thymus. Internal vascular malformations of the gastrointestinal tracts, spleen, kidneys, and the testicles have been reported previously.Other occasional reports of intravesicular venous lesions associated with life threatening haematuria was previously proffered.

Other ophthalmopathies in PS

Many ocular manifestations   were previously reported in patients with Proteus syndrome. The most commonly recorded of these ocular involvements included strabismus, nystagmus, and epibulbar tumours.Other ocular involvements include an over representation of a high degree of myopia, retinal pigmentary abnormalities, retinal detachment, cataracts, posterior segment hamartomas, retinal colobomas, heterochromia irides, and glaucoma.

Associated myopathies, cardiopathies and Immuno-deficiency  states in PS

Other additional features in PS include asymmetric myopathies, congenital cardiac defects, malocclusions, hypodontias, and hypoplastic enamels. A congenital immunodeficiency of some sort was previously reported in a case of Proteus syndrome.

HHML is a differential of PS with much clinical consequence.

A very important differential diagnosis to be considered in these is hemihyperplasia

and multiple lipomatosis syndrome (HHML), because of the higher association with

nephroblastoma (Wilms tumours and possibly hepatoblastomas) in HHML.

The diagnosis of HHML with certainty will have implications for apposite screening of these patients for malignancies using standard screening protocols. [57]

 

 

 

                                                                                                                                               

  April 2014 Supplement 1 Classics and Revisits in Scientific Interdisciplinary              Medical Themes.                                                                                                                 

Early prophylactic surgical management are more appropriate interventions.in PS

The management of PS has been an inescapable but crucial medical dilemma,

especially with regards to the prolonged multiple staged orthopaedic interventions.

The rapidly progressive overgrowths are quite cosmetically disfiguring, unsightly and

probably mechanically and  functionally incapacitating, seldomly or occasionally causing

compressive aerodynamically significant airway defects or neuropathies and rarely

malignant transformations. Despite several previous descriptions of early, intermediate or

delayed modified surgical interventions for these defects, overall short, medium or long

terms outcomes for these defects appear to be discouraging and unrewarding.

However, the evidence for a primordial intervention before the onset of catastrophic or

debilitating complications appears more convincing and satisfactory.

Interventions for PE in PS

The other factors of interest in the management of PS  are the continual concerns with

deep vein thrombosis related thrombo-embolic phenomenology especially with regards to

its frequent occurrence peri or post operatively. The importance, strengths and the morbidity and mortality implications of these associations raised and buttressed the

argument for routine pre or perioperative anticoagulant prophylaxis and monitoring

of PS cases. However, this practice is more or less anecdotal and could occasionally be a

complex decision in the context of a sequence with a supposedly universal vascular

anomalies, real risk of bleeding especially in the association of Marriet Kaselbach

syndrome which is a potential complication of platelet consumption by the meshwork of

the vascular malformations.

Screening for Neoplastic conditions as plausible prophylactic strategy for PS

The other area worthy of adequate attention and consideration in the overall management of PS patients which were contentiously reviewed and addressed in the literature are those dealing with the most safe, cost effective and clinically useful way of detecting the tumourous events in PS early enough for appropriate interventions and outcomes to be most therauptically and prognostically rewarding. However, this decision is compounded by the fact that the list of plausible neoplasms which could complicate a case of PS are quite diverse and there appears to be no robust figures to suggest that earlier detection of these tumours or interventions by any means is actually rewarding.As such the time for active surveillance of these tumours should be weighed in favour of clinically and symptomatically suspected cases as against a routine procedure.

Genetic Counseling

Also issues concerning the genetic counseling of PS patients seem anecdotally based on

the mutational, nonmosaic lethality principle which  infers a low recurrence risk  for PS.

Finally, the physician investigators concerns of the most appropriate way of PS gene

mapping, identification and elaboration appears to be future challenges given its sporadic

Conclusions:

For a long time in the medical literature, issues concerning the exact diagnostic criteria of

PS in suspected cases have been topics of much debate, were controversially discussed,

inconclusive and not uniformly accepted. Although recently, these criteria were consensusly fairly well elaborated on, with some convincing recommendations derived. However, it is likely that these criteria will need to be modified from time to time as it has always been, to circumvent underdiagnosis or over diagnosis, the extensiveness and expressivity of the increasing number of overlapping syndromes make these diagnostic challenges likely, especially with further work in these areas or longer term follow up of putative PS probands and their families.

Relevance and Importance.

These editorial review discusses an unusual hitherto   previously unaddressed co-existence and associations of   embroyomas in PS.The diversity in its phenotypic expressivities and the variabilities in the chronology and temporality of their manifestations were reiterated.The rarity and strengths of its associated features as against its differentials especially hemihyperplasia and multiple lipomatosis syndrome (HHML) which is associated with  embryomas were examined.[58] The other available literature on the other putative tentatively peculiar overlapping syndromes could be reviewed  as a topic for debate in the near future.

Guest Editors: CRS [Med] Consulting Academic Clinical Editorial Experts.

 

References:

[1]-Bennett, D.: Rescue of a lethal T/t locus genotype by chimaerism with normal embryos. Nature 272:539 only, 1978.

[2]-Cohen Jr MM, Hayden PW: A newly recognized hamartomatous syndrome. Birth Defects Orig Artic Ser 1979; 15:291-296.

[3]-Widermann HR,Burgio GR,Aldenhoff P,Kunze J,Kaufmann HJ,Scirg E:The proteus syndrome. Partial gigantism of the hands and or feet, nevi, hemihypertrophy, subcutaneous tumours, macrocephaly or other skull anomalies and possible accelerated growth and visceral affectations.Eur J Pediatr 1983; 140:5-12.

[4]-Cohen Jr MM.The elephant man did not have neurofibromatosis.Proc Greenwood Genet Center 1987; 6:187-192.

[5]-Treves F: A case of congenital deformity.Proc Pathol Soc London 1885; 36:494-498

[6]-Graetz, I.Ueber einen Fall von sogenannter

totaler halbseitiger Korperhypertrophie.Z.Kinderheilk.45:381-403, 1928

[7]-Temtamy, S.A.; Rogers,J.G.: Macrodactyly, hemihypertrophy, and connective tissue nevi: report of a new syndrome and review of the literature.J.Pediat.89:924-927,1976.

[8]-Burgio, G.R.; Further and new details on the Proteus syndrome.Europ.J.Pediat.143:71-73, 1984.

[9]-Wiedemann HR, Burgio GR: Encephalocraniocutaneous lipomatosis and Proteus syndrome .Am J Med Genet 1986; 25:403-404.

[10]-Lezama, D.B.; Buyse, M.L.: The Proteus syndrome: the emergence of an entity.J.Clin.Dysmorph.2:10-13, 1984.

[11]-Gorlin, R.J ;Proteus syndrome J.Clin.Dysmorph.2:8-9, 1984.

[12]-Mucke, J.; Willegerodt, H.; Kunzel, R.; Brock, D.: Variability in the Proteus syndrome: report of an affected child with progressive lipomatosis.Europ.J.Pediatr.143:320-323, 1985.

[13]-Costa, T.; Fitch, N.; Azouz, E.M.: Proteus syndrome: report of two cases with pelvic lipomatosis.Pediatrics 76:984-989, 1985.

[14]-Happle R: Cutaneous manifestations of lethal genes. Hum Genet 1986; 72:280.

April 2014 Supplement 1Classics and Revisits in Scientific Interdisciplinary Themes                                                                                                                                                  

[15]-Happle R: Lethal genes surviving by mosaicism: a possible explanation for sporadic birth defects involving the skin.J Am Acad Dermatol 1987; 16:899-906.

[16]-Clark, R.D.;Donnai, D.; Rogers, J.; Cooper, J.; Baraitser M.: Proteus syndrome: an expanded phenotype.Am.J.Med.Genet.27:99-117,1987.

[17]-Viljoen, D.L.; Nelson, M.M.; de Jong, G.; Beighton, P.: Proteus syndrome in Southern Africa; natural history and clinical manifestations in six individuals.Am.J.Med.Genet.Genet.27:87-97,1987.

[18]-Malamitsi-Puchner, A.; Kitsiou, S.; Bartsocas, C.S.: Severe Proteus syndrome in an18-month-old boy.Am.J.Med.Genet.27:119-125,1987.

[19]-Cohen, M.M.Jr.: Understanding Proteus syndrome, unmasking the Elephant Man, and stemming elephant fever. Neurofibromatosis 1:260-280, 1988.

[20]-Cohen, M.M., Jr: Further diagnostic thoughts about the Elephant Man.Am.J.Genet.29:777-782, 1988:

(21]- Bailer, M.G.; Reidy,M.J; Wilson, W.G.Proteus syndrome versus Bannayan-Zonana syndrome: a problem in differential diagnosis .Europ.J.Pediat.148:122-125, 1988.

[22]-Samlaska,C.P.;Levin,S.W.;James,W.D.;Benson,P.M.;Walker,J.C.;Perlik,P.C.:

Proteus syndrome .Arch.Derm.125:1109-1114,1989.

[23]-Malamitsi-Puchner,A,;Dimitriadis,D.;Bartsocas,C.;Wiedemann,H.-R.:Proteus syndrome: course of a severe case.Am.J.Genet.35:283-285,1990.

[24]-Hotamisligil, G.S.; G.S.; Ertogan, F.: The Proteus syndrome: association with nephrogenic diabetes insipidus.Clin.Genet.38:139-144, 1990.

[25]-Goodship,J.;Redfearn,A.;Milligan,D.;Gardner-Medwin,D.;Burn,J.:Transmission of Proteus syndrome from father to son?Med.Genet.28:781-785.

(26)-Kruger, G.; Pelz, L.; Weidemann, H.-R.: Transmission of Proteus syndrome from mother to son? (Letter) Am.J.Med.Genet.45:117-118,1993.

[27]-Skovby,F.; Graham,J.M.; Sonne-Holm,S.; Cohen,M.M.,Jr.:

Compromise of the spinal canal in Proteus syndrome.Am.J.Med.Genet.47:656-659.

[28]-Cohen, M.M., Jr.: Proteus syndrome: clinical evidence for somatic mosaicism and selective review.Am.J.Med.Genet.47:645-652,1993.

[29]-Smeets, E.; Fryns, J.-P.; Cohen, M.M., Jr.Regional Proteus syndrome and somatic mosaicism Am.J.Med.Genet.51:29-31.

[30]-Gordon,P.L.;Wilroy,R.S.;Lasater,O.E.;Cohen,M.M.,Jr.:Neoplasms in Proteus syndrome.Am.J.Med.Genet.57:74-78,1995.

[31]-Lacombe,D,; Battin,J.: Isolated macrodactyly and Proteus syndrome. (Letter)Clin.Dysmorph.5:255-257.

(32]-Ceelen, W.; de Waele, J.; Kummen, M.; de Hemptinne, B: Non-operative management of a splenic laceration in a patient with Proteus syndrome.J.Accid.Emerg.Med.14:111-113,1997

[33]-Biesecker,L.G.;Happle,R.;Mulliken,J.B.;Weksberg,R.;Graham,J.M.,Jr.;Viljoen,D.L.;

Cohen, M.M., Jr.: Proteus syndrome: diagnostic criteria, differential diagnosis, and patient evaluation.Am.J.Med.Genet.84:389-395.

[34]-Biesecker, L.G.; Peters, K.F.;Darling, T.N.; Choyke, P.; Hill,S.; Schimke,N.;

 

                                                                                                                                               

April 2014 Supplement 1 Classics and Revisits in Scientific Interdisciplinary                Medical Themes.                                                                                                                 

Cunningham,M,;Meltzer,P.;Cohen,M.M.,Jr.:Clinical differentiation between Proteus syndrome and hemihyperplasia:description of a distinct form of hemihyperplasia.Am.J.Med.Genet.79:311-318,1998.

[35]-Happle,R.: Elattoproteus syndrome: delineation of an inverse form of Proteus syndrome.Am.J.Med.Genet.84:25-28,1999.

[36]-De Becker,I.;Gajda,D.J.; Gilbert-Barness,E.;Cohen,M.M.,Jr.:Ocular manifestations in Proteus syndrome.Am.J.Med.Genet.92:350-352, 2000

[37]-Hodge,D,;Misbah,S.A.;Mueller,R.F.;Glass,E.J.;Chetcuti,P.A.J.:Proteus syndrome and immunodeficiency .Arch.Dis.Child.82:234-235,2000.

[38]-Gilbert-Barness, E.; Cohen, M.M.,Jr.;Optiz, J.M.: Multiple meningiomas, craniofacial hyperostosis and retinal abnormalities in Proteus syndrome.Am.J.Med.Genet.93:234-240.

[39]-Slavotinek, A.M.; Vacha, S.J.; Peters,K.F.; Biesecker,L.G.: Sudden death caused by pulmonary thromboembolism in Proteus syndrome.Clin.Genet.58:386-389,2000)

[40]-Cohen.M; Causes of premature death in Proteus syndrome (Editorial) Am.J.Med.Genet.101:1-3, 2001.

[41]-Biesecker,L.G.: The multifaceted challenges of Proteus syndrome.JAMA 285:2240-2243,2001.

[42]-Barker,K.;Martinez,A.;Wang,R.;Bevan,S.;Murday,V.;Shipley,J.;Houlston,R.

;Harper, J.: PTEN mutations are uncommon in Proteus syndrome.J.Med.Genet.38:480-481,2001.

[43]-Mackay, G.; Spitz, L.; McHugh,K.: Lipomatosis of the colon complicating Proteus syndrome.Arch.Dis.Child.86:265 only,2002.

[44]-Mohamedbhai,A.G.;Miyan,A.M.H.;Lacombe,D.:Neonatal Proteus syndrome?(Letter)Am.J.Med.Genet.112:228-230,2002.

[45]-Turner JT, Cohen Jr MM, Biesecker LG: Reassessment of the Proteus syndrome literature: application of diagnostic criteria to published cases. Am J Med Genet 2004; 130A:111-122.

[46]-Thiffault, I.; Schwartz, C.E.;Der Kaloustian, V.;Foulkes,W.D.: Mutation analysis of the tumor suppressor PTEN and the glypican 3 (GPC3) genes in patients diagnosed with Proteus syndrome.Am.J.Med.Genet.130A:123-127, 2004.

[47]-Brockmann, L.G.; Happle,R.;Oeffner,F;,Konig,A.: Monozygotic twins discordant for Proteus syndrome.Am.J.Med.Genet.146A:2122-2125,2008.

[48]-Smith,J.M;Kirk,E.P.E;Theodospoulos,G;Marshall,G.;Walker,J;Rogers,M;Field,M;

Brereton,J.J; Marsh, D.J.Germline mutation of the tumour suppressor PTEN in Proteus syndrome. (Letter)J.Med.Genet.39:937-940,2002.

[49]-Zhou,X;Hampel H;Thiele,H;Gorlin,R.J;Hennekam,R.C;Parisi,M;Winter R.M;Eng,C.:Association of germline mutation in the PTEN tumour suppressor gene and Proteus and Proteus-like syndromes. Lancet 358:210-211, 2001

[50]-Zhou, X.-P.;Marsh,D.J.;Hampel,H.;Mulliken,J.B,;Gimm,O.;Eng,C,:Germline and germline mosaic PTEN mutations associated with a Proteus-like syndrome of hemihypertrophy,lower limb asymmetry,arteriovenous malformations and lipomatosis.Hum.Molec.Gent.9:765-768,2000

                                                                                                                                               

[51]-Cohen JrMM, Neri G, Weksberg R: Klippel-Treaunay syndrome, Parkes Weber Syndrome, and Sturge-Weber syndrome: Overgrowth syndromes. New York: Oxford University Press, 2002, pp111-124.

[52]-Robin NH, Biesecker LG: Considerations for a multiaxis nomenclature system for medical genetics. Genet Med 2001; 3:290-293.

[53]-Darmstadt GL, Lane AT: Proteus syndrome.Pediatr Dermatol 1994; 11:222-226

[54]-Hotamisligil GS: Proteus syndrome and hamartoses with overgrowth.

Dysmorphol Clin Genet 1990; 4:87-107.

[55]- Tweed JV, Turner JT, Biesecker LG, Darling TN: Cutaneous manifestations of Proteus syndrome: correlations with general clinical severity. Arch Dermatol 2004; 140:947-954

[56]-Nguyen D,Turner JT,Olsen C,Biesecker LG,Darling TN:Evolution of skin lesions in Proteus syndrome.J. Am. Acad. Dermatol. 2005; 52:834-838.

[57]-De Baun MR, Brown M, Kessler L: Screening for Wilms tumor in children with high-risk congenital syndromes: considerations for an intervention trial. Med Pediatr Oncol 1996; 27:415-421.

 

 

 

 

 

April    2014 Supplement 1  Classics and Revisits in Scientific Interdisciplinary            Medical Themes.                                                                                                                 

 

Cervical haemangiomas with intracerebral extensions in childhood.      

                       

Guest Editors: CRS [Med] Consulting Academic Clinical Editorial Experts.

 

Background and Purpose

The need for a multidisciplinary intervention in most cases in clinical medicine is further reiterated by another editorial annotation and perspective from the CRSM consulting guest editorial experts by cases of exophytic cervical haemangiomas with intracerebral extensions observed in some young children,

Editorial Annotation and perspective.

In this correspondence, unusual presentations of congenital Cervical Haemangioma with intracerebral corticomedullary extension, with acute respiratory distress, hypochromia and thrombocytopaenia in children is discussed. In such instances, early and timely interventions will have positive implications for guarding against occult Marriet-Kaselbach syndrome, high output cardio-respiratory decompensation, neurologically significant and multiple vital organic compressive-obstructive effects. In these circumstances, application of intralesional corticosteroids appears to have arrested the progressive course of these lesions, until interval extramural instrumentations were achievable.

Introduction

The descriptive epidemiology of Haemangiomas intimates that they are relatively common childhood tumours occurring in 1:10 to 1:20 infant’s .Female gender and extreme prematurity appears to be significant features of its epidemiologic associatiions.They are usually localized to the cutaneous or subcutaneous tissues. Although almost universally congenital, they are rarely fully developed at the time of birth. About 2 in 3 cases of haemangiomas are localized to the head and neck region. Most haemangiomas are present or appear during the neonatal period as soft rapidly growing solitary unifocal lesions or occasionally multifocal lesions.

Complications of Haemangiomas.

In haemangiomas rapid growth over six to nine months may occur to produce severe cosmetic disability, orificial obstructions, threatened viability of vital structures such as the eyes and multiple ulcerations. In less than 1: 10 cases, rapidly growing hemangiomas of the head and neck region could produce catastrophic complications, with aero-digestive tract obstructions especially following a sudden increase in size related to haemorrhages, causing visual, auditory, deglutinatory and vocal difficulties. Also the tumefactions could   get secondarily infected through the ulceration of the overlying skins .If an arteriovenous malformative communications of a considerable capacity   with a haemodynamic significance or consequence develops an intractable high output congestive cardiac failure could follow.

April 2014 Supplement 1 Classics and Revisits in Scientific Interdisciplinary                Medical Themes.                                                                                          

Other deleterious consequences of Haemangiomas.

There are other several complications of great concern such as the Kasabach-Merrit syndrome. In this complication, an inordinate bleeding diathesis and purpura may result from platelet consumption, DIC, microangiopathic haemolytic anaemia.

Previously, internal organs have been reported to be occasionally involved, in

haemangiomas, however, intracerebral involvement in haemangiomas are rather an

unusual and rare phenomenon.

Thrombocytopenia, thrombocytosis, respiratory distress and occult bleeding diathesis from coagulapathy and thrombocytopaenia and severe recurrent iron deficiency   anaemia appears to be real major concerns with significant lesions.

Associated naevus may initially be considered to be inconsequential but could occasionally pose cosmetic and aesthetic difficulties with the passage of time.

The natural history of haemangiomas and its simulating lymphogiomas

The natural history of haemangiomas peculiarly involves an initial proliferative growth

phase that lasts about half to one year and an involutional phase which is associated with

a slow regression of the haemagiomas, with about one half of the lesions resolving by sixty months and about 9/10th resolving by the age of ten years. A very important differential to consider in this case is a lymphangiomatous lymphatic malformations which could be unifocal or multifocal and commonly occurs in the facio-cervical region, axilla or thoracic, they are similar to haemangiomas in that they appear in infancy and childhood usually before thirty six months. However, they differ from them by the lack of spontaneous involution. They are equally obstructive and haemmorragic tendencies.

These lesions are quite extensive and diffuse making a stage evaluation for the exact

determination of the extent of the lesion and appropriate stage dissections imperative for

an utmost outcome.

 

Management

Intralesional steroids appeared to have arrested the progression of these lesions in some instances.In occasional circumstances however, management could be expectant, given that spontaneous resolutions has been known to occur. By the age of ten years 9 out of 10 cases would have resolved completely.

Systemic steroid applications would have been indicated otherwise if there were concerns with ocular integrity or ongoing concerns with airway obstructions, difficulties with feeding or defecation or in the Kasabach-Merrit syndrome

Although some recalcitrant cases may not be very steroid or radio therapeutically responsive. Administration of interferons appears to be very useful in catastrophic situations. Also Laser coagulations or sclerotherapy could be useful in haemangiomas but not usually in Lymphangiomas..Other agents like OTK 145 have been employed in selected cases with significant beneficial effects. In Kasabach-Merritt syndrome, treatment is supportive, platelets, cryoprecipitate and fresh frozen plasma, heparin and antifibrinolytic agents such as aminocaproic acid and traxenamic acid may be used.

In other instances, life threatening compressive effects such as severe respiratory distress or rising intracranial pressure with cardiopulmonary instability and intrabdominal hypertensive events has made urgent extramural instrumentations imperative.

 

Guest Editors: CRS [Med] Consulting Academic Clinical Editorial Experts.

                                                                                                                  

 

April 2014 Supplement 1 Classics and Revisits in Scientific Haematology.

                                                                                                                  

Fanconi anaemias in Childhood.

 

Guest Editors: CRS [Med] Consulting Academic Clinical Editorial Experts.

 

Background and Context:

 

Fanconi Anaemia-FA is a severe debilitating disease associated with a compromised life expectancy. Specific review on FA is crucial. This expert guest editorial review article by the CRSM academic clinical consulting editors is based on observational reports on a spectrum of compatible childhood symptomatic characteristic Fanconi akylating aplastic anaemias.

In the various subsets, overall aggregate annotations suggest that growth failures were universal, whereas dysmorphologies such as microcephaly, polydactyly, hypopigmented dermatoses were common associations.Rhizomelic short limbed dwarfism, hypodontias and caput quadratum were occasionally encounted defects. Bleeding diathesis, febrile neutropaenias, and pallor were predominantly featured phenomena.

Another notable feature of interest is that in individual cases, recurrent symptomatologies were invariable and somewhat predictable.

Multiple blood transfusions, antimicrobials, steroids. , testosterone, acyclovir and fluconazole were the most commonly applied interventions which lead to a partial remission in some cases.. Doubtful malignant transformations and acute catstrophic bone marrow failures were mutually exclusive events. Unprecedented demise was a notable phenomenon. Occasionally, recovery from FA could be spontaneous.

Case Definitions..

Fanconi aplastic anaemia is an inherited autosomal recessively transmitted, genomically determined instability syndrome, associated with multiple developmental structural and functional abnormalities, progressive bone marrow failure, leading to pancytopaenia and the requirement for haematopoietic bone marrow stem cell transplantation or increased morbidity or mortality as a result of defective haemopoesis and malignant predisposition to earlier onset acute myeloid leukaemias and latter onset solid stromal tumours. [1, 2]In Fanconi anaemia, cellular chromosomal instability, breakage and hypersensitivity to bifunctional DNA cross-linking agents especially mitomycin C is usually demonstrated, which usually forms one of the basis for its diagnostic criteria. [3]

Complementation somatic-cell hybridization genomic analysis in FA

For a long time, the relationship between congenital malformations, bone marrow

failures, cancers, chromosomal breakages and their derived complementation groups in

                                                                                                                                               

 

April   2014 Supplement 1                Classics and Revisits in Scientific Haematology   

Fanconi anaemia syndromes were poorly understood. [4 ]

The principal pathophysiology in Fanconi anaemias, the most common of the familial congenital constitutional aplastic anaemias have been fairly well elucidated through major advances in complementation somatic-cell hybridization genomic analysis of FA cell lines which demonstrated and provided evidence for  alphabetically designated complementation groups (FA-A, FA- B, FA-C, FA-D1, FA-D2, FA-E, FA-F, FA-G, FA-I, FA-J, FA-L) with implications for abnormal haemopoiesis and apoptosis in their mutant states especially for the FA-C [2] in addition to linkage to a specific pathognomonically genomic disease entity.

The distribution of the complementation subgroup subtypes.

The distribution of the complementation subgroup subtypes of FA is geographically distinct, in some regions the FA-A was the most frequently represented at 59%, where as in the other, FA-C was the predominantly featured subtype at 67%.

This distributional in homogeneity could have implications for mutation-screening

strategies in continental FA patients. [5]

The extensive genetic heterogeneity in FA and its influence on linkage analysis.

The implications of this extensive genetic heterogeneity for classical linkage analysis were further discussed in previous investigations. [6, 7, 8] however, a good part of its pathophysiology remains elusive.

Although it is a genetically inherited form of bone marrow failure syndrome, its presentation may not necessarily be congenital [9, 10], until the abnormal immune

responses implicated in its pathogenesis is triggered by genomic instability or by

environmental exposures to chemicals, drugs or viral infections or perhaps by

endogenously generated altered bone marrow cells, which then heralds its more florid

The molecular and geographic epidemiology of FA.

The pathobiology, molecular and geographical epidemiology with the relevant therapeutic options in Fanconi aplastic anaemia syndromes have been previously investigated, described, replicated and revisited in several  settings [11,12,13,14] Previous occasional case studies and series suggested hospital and community based high incidence rates, however overall the disease prevalence was relatively low, such that longitudinal single city epidemiological studies were not logistically feasible, however more recent investigations achieved higher sample sizes but most of those were in adults.[15]Overall, FA is a relatively uncommon disease with an estimated prevalence of 1 to 5 per million and an approximated carrier frequency of 1 in 200 to 1 in 300 in most population studies [16] Although its diagnosis is probably underestimated, because its haematological features may be moderately expressed or they could present latter.

The influence of the Founder effect on the incidence of FA

Of growing interest in the elucidation of the drive behind the unusual preponderance of FA in some ethnic groups compared to others is the concept of founder effect associated with genetic and reproductive isolation. This phenomenon implies an increased risk of inheriting rare genetic disorders such as FA following the development of a high frequency of a mutant allele introduced into communities which are genetically and reproductively isolated and therefore consanguineously and endogamously married .

The carrier frequency in this subset was estimated to be 1 in 90 to 1 in 92[17,18]

Other previously described epitomes of the phenomenon of founder effect were demonstrated for a subset , where the carrier frequency was estimated to be about 1 in 77 [19,20]

Further recent investigations demonstrated the inordinately clustered overrepresentation

of the incidence of FA in the subjects of particular ancestry from heterogeneously

distinct descent, abode and ethnicity. However, the figures from those of  subsets

with homogenous ancestries mostly of the complementation group A subset were

astonishingly extreme, probably the most globally at 1 in 64 to 1 in 70[21, 22]

Haplotype linkage disequilibrium as a causality factor in  FA.

Other prominent clusters were demonstrated elsewhere, where the populace in

genetic isolation revealed clinical characteristics of the patients showing both intra-and

interfamilial heterogeneity suggestive of haplotype linkage disequilibrium for markers

flanking the FAA gene. This hypothesis may have implications for positional

cloning of this gene through haplotype disequilibrium mapping. [23]

 

The case for further investigations in FA

In most circumstances however, accurate estimates of childhood characteristic

Aplastic anaemia (Fanconi subset) Fanconi anaemia, its clinical profile, peculiarities, heterogeneity, complexities and the intricacies in its diagnosis and the feasible therapeutic options have not been previously analyzed, revisited or completely understood.

Reliable inference or reference review on Characteristic Fanconi akylating aplastic anaemia syndromes are crucial for interventional planning, hypothesis generation, research directions and focused  hospital or population based interventions.

It could also offer some contribution to a better definition of its natural history. Furthermore, this annotation offers the opportunity to highlight and briefly discuss some of   the commonly associated structural and functional anomalies in FA as was previously proposed [24] , given the relevance of a more lucid definition of these commonly associated anomalies in expediently advancing a rational prognostic scoring index which predicts the likelihood of progression to catastrophic bone marrow failures or malignant transformations as was determined previously[2,25,26] This  editorial review article is a step to  describe and characterize some of these aspects.

Case definitions, Observations and follow up of compatible FA cases.

On observation and follow ups, suspected cases with the diagnosis of compatible Characteristic Fanconi akylating aplastic anaemia syndromes would have achieved the clinical, radiological and pathological inclusion criteria of FA for descriptors, clinical features, predominant symptomatologies, laboratory features as was previously described by Camitta: [27]

With severe disease defined as the presence of two of three blood component counts

criteria of an absolute leukocyte count of<0.5×10 (9), platelet count of <20×10 (9) and a

reticulocyte count of < 1%.Extreme neutropenia (<0.2×10 9/L) defined very severe

aplastic anaemia, the other cases could be  described as moderately severe aplastic

anaemia.The bone marrow biopsy had to be compatible with the diagnosis of aplastic

anaemia.Cases had to be analyzed for demographics, historical and medical information, especially with relevance to clinical features, recent and previous drug use and related infective episodes.

Clinico-Epidemiological diagnosis in FA

Further basic epidemiologic features of Fanconi aplastic anaemia bone marrow failure syndromes could be achieved by characterizing  cases in terms of demographic variables, age, sex, medical history, clinically significant manifestation, proof of diagnosis, and prognostic criteria. Associated dysmorphologies were evaluated, studied, validated, analyzed and reported in a standardized manner using standard normograms from the dysmorphology databases.

Clinical features and associations of FA

Overall, presentations in FA were associated with the male factor, consanguinity, latter presentation,non-familial incidence,infective episodes, unusual cranio-facial features or inconsistent physical characteristics Bleeding diathesis especially with epistaxis was a common but less florid mode of presentation, where as massive haemoptysis.frank pulmonary haemorrhages and haematemesis,where less frequent, but clinically more alarming and deleterious.Lost cases were mostly related to massive haemorrhages or overwhelming infective events related to febrile neutropaenias.

Outcome of observed FA cases..

The presence of at least one associated anomalous dysmorphological defect is quite usual.Rhizomelic short limbed dwarfisms with delicate statute, microcephaly

pre-axial and post axial polydactyl, caput quadratum, absent radii,

hypodontias and abnormal gingival morphology were the most predominant  dysmorphological phenomena. Abnormal pigmentation of the hair, the skin and the mucous membranes especially the lips were the most common intergumentary defect noted.

 

 

April 2014      Supplement 1          Classics and Revisits in Scientific Haematology                                                                                                                        

The diagnostic and the therapeutic aspects of  FA.

For the suspicion of Characteristic Fanconi anaemia to be evoked, the blood film and bone marrow morphologies has to be compatible with that of bone marrow failure syndromes.

Undertaking radiological evaluations would be expedient to exclude respiratory tract infections or complicated organizing pneumonias or features suggestive of pulmonary infarctions or haemorrhage, it may equally exclude or suggest erythrophagocytic lympho-histiocytosis-X rather than FA as the plausible diagnosis to be pursued.

X-ray radiological surveys could be worthwhile from the context of suggesting  absent radii. Or other more covert musculoskeletal defects.

Transthoracic and abdominal ultrasonic echographies or tomograms could be useful to exclude the possibility of other linked congenital visceral abnormalities.

Routine cultures and biochemical studies would have positive prophylactic, therapeutic and prognostic implications for those with persistent febrile episodes despite applications of broad spectrum and specific antimicrobial. Most patients would be hospitalized at a point, and most of the hospitalizations will be associated with whole blood transfusions, and most cases could be managed conservatively at the first instance.

The historical perspective of FA.

Fanconi aplastic anaemia syndrome, a form of Constitutional aplastic anaemia was

earlier described by Erlich towards the end of the 19th century. [28]

Constitutional aplastic anaemia could be associated with congenital dysmorphology

(Fanconi subset) or it may not be associated with it. In 1919 Smith reported aplastic

anaemia in a six year old boy associated with marked nuchal, genital, umbilical and areolar skin pigmentation. [29] Most cases of constitutional aplastic anaemias were usually autosomal-recessively transmitted, although an occasional case report suggested the possibility of an autosomal familial dominant inheritance pattern [30]

Fanconi in 1927 described three brothers aged five, six and seven with hyperchromic

anaemia, leucopaenia, thrombocytopaenia, haemmorragic diathesis, microcephaly, testicular hypoplasia, convergent strabismus, exaggerated deep tendon reflexes and generalized brown, melanin like pigmentation of the skin but not of the buccal mucosa. [31]

The Haemopoetic stem cell line defect in FA and its therapeutic implications.

Fanconi anaemia bone marrow syndromes usually arise as a result of damage to precursor cells so that they cannot supply an adequate quantity of haemopoetic cells .This damage could also be at the bone marrow stromal level (i.e.the  bone marrow microenvironment) which is now regarded to be equally important in the pathogenesis of aplastic anaemia.The spectrum of clinical and laboratory features are implicit on the stage of the haemopoiesis where the maturational sequence was disrupted. Earlier damage will result in uniform pancytopaenia, whereas latter disruptions after haemopoetic progenitor cells differentiation will result in predominantly red blood cell aplasia, agranulocytosis or thrombocytopenia. These differential interruptions may have implications for variabilties in its symptomatologies, which if predictably consistent could be exploited for a

more focused and targeted blood component and adjunctive supportive therapeutic interventions with overall positive outcome, toxicity and costs implications.

April 2014 Supplement 1                  Classics and Revisits in Scientific Haematology                                                                                                                       

Irradiation and toxicity induced perturbations implicated as causality factors in FA

The association of the onset of the symptomatology of Fanconi aplastic anaemia with several putative inciting agents such as viral infections, drugs, toxic agents, irradiation,

autoimmune diseases and idiopathic- cryptogenic factors, intimated the probability of

several mechanisms for the non-specific triggers and amplifications of the disease

processes. [32] The effect of irradiation on the cells of characteristic Fanconi akylating aplastic anaemias were controversially discussed, although the results suggested that

there were no increases in radio-sensitivity to all cell types from characteristic Fanconis

akylating aplastic anaemia patients, however an apparent increase in chromosomal

radiosensitivity may be seen in the lymphocytes from an occasional case. [33]

Defects of  Haemopoetic stem cell line and immonopathology suggested as FA causality factors.

Previous investigations proposed several hypotheses for the pathophysiology of Fanconi aplastic anaemias, which were derived from the results obtained after several systematic laboratory investigations. These results suggested the convincing evidence of the efficacies of several therapeutic options which linked it to some plausible aetiological mechanisms. The successful use of bone marrow transplantation to cure Fanconi aplastic anaemia implicated a stem cell deficiency, where as the significant response to immunomodulant therapies pointed more to an immune mechanism of haematopoietic

Clonality inconsistencies suggested as a possible causality factor for

FA and other associated diseases haematological dyscrasias.

The relationship of the Fanconi aplastic anaemia syndrome to other haematological dyscrasias associated with clonality has been suggested, such haemato-pathologies include large granular lymphocytosis, and single haematopoietic lineage deficiency states such as agranulocytosis, pure red cell aplasia and amegakaryocytic thrombocytopenia. [34] Other closely related entities to FA are Dyskeratosis congenita and other forms of Idiopathic cryptogenic unclassifiable forms of  constitutional aplastic anaemias, like FA they are associated with a high incidence of haemopoetic clonal disorders, single-or multiple lineage cytopaenias, severe aplastic anaemia, myelodysplasia, and malignant transformation, identification of these associated mutant genes in such pathologies will have implications for elucidating the exact pathophysiology involved, and proffer relevance for deducing apposite novel therapeutic options. [35, 36, 37]

Chromosomal breakage points on peripheral lymphocytes may suggest the diagnosis of FA.

The diagnosis of Fanconi aplastic anaemias could be inferred from chromosomal breaks observed in peripheral blood lymphocytes or dermal fibroblasts exposed to mitomycin in the appropriate clinical and haemato-pathological setting.Fanconi anaemia cells will normally show excessive chromosomal breaks. [38, 39] In this way some young adults have been diagnosed to have Fanconi anaemia.

Myodysplastic syndromes and paroxysmal nocturnal haemoglobinuria as FA differentials

Some less common congenital marrow failures syndromes, without specific markers,

could be more difficult to exclude.Myelodysplastic syndromes could be ruled out by

appropriate marrow haemato-pathologic and cytogenetic analysis.The distinction

between Fanconi anaemia, Myelodysplasia and other forms of bone marrow aplastic

anaemia is critical, because therapeutic options differ. [40, 41] Also, there are considerable overlaps between the pathogenesis, laboratory features and therapeutic options for the syndromes of paroxysmal nocturnal haemoglobinuria and Fanconi aplastic anaemia because many patients with FA bone marrow failure syndromes

have an increased population of abnormal cells [42]

Although FA is congenitally acquired, its onset is delayed till early childhood.

Interestingly, the onset of the aplastic anaemia is usually between the ages of four and seven years in boys and six and ten years in girls, however it may occur at an earlier age.

Results proffered by one investigation noted a male preponderance and a younger age at onset [43]

April 2014 Supplement 1 Classics and Revisits in Scientific Haematology                                                                                                                                          

The cryptic onset of the clinical features of FA in some instances and its diagnostic implications.

The onset of FA could be cryptic with pallor, skin bruises and petechiae.Easy fatigability

and anorexia then follows, with progression of the disease, bleeding could occur from

almost any site and a sore throat with ulceration of the mucosa due to leucopenia ensues.

Physical examination is more informative for the associated defects, the usual

pallor and occasionally for the related cutaneous bleeding diathesis. Also FA could

present in a more occult way as bone marrow hypoplasia or aplasia following further bone marrow studies of an incidentally or co-incidentally discovered abnormal blood film

morphology. Multiple sites aspirates and a trephine will be relevant for making a more

substantive diagnosis in indeterminate cases.

The therapeutic aspects of FA.

Whole blood, blood component therapy with platelets and chemoprophylaxis will be

required until there is a compatible bone marrow donor.Allogeneic bone marrow stem

cell transplant in children is a very rewarding intervention. However, this may not always

be achievable in all cases due to lack of a suitable donor. In such cases

immunomodulation and antithymocyte globulin therapy could be considered in the interim. [44]However, there are real concerns of longer term complications of hypocellular myelodysplasia compounding its diagnosis and transformation to acute leukaemias in longer term survivors even after bone marrow transplantation. [45]

The variations in the clinical course of Fanconi anaemia and the response to

immunosuppressive treatment could be explained by variations in the balance between

its primary defect and the secondary immune responsiveness, the co-involvement of other

accessory cells in the primary disease, the relative time course of the two components and

the efficiency of the repair mechanisms. [32]

 

    April 2014 Supplement 1  Classics and Revisits in Scientific Haematology                                                                                                                                                              

 

A rational and conservative approach to circumvent some complexities associated with some optimal interventions for FA

The inherent complexities of these interventions for FA imply that they will not always be rapidly achievable, in most instances or circumstances.

However, since previous investigations intimated that symptomatologies appear when the stem cell and progenitor cell populations are less than one percent, given the inherent high marrow reserve potential for haemopoiesis.There fore, this positive feature of an immense marrow reserve capacity for haemopoiesis could be exploited in more selective , specific and focused  haematopoietic cell line conservative supportive interventions with colony stimulating factors and/or defined blood component therapies, which offers initial interim tentative options for well selected cases in restricted circumstances, while arrangements for an appropriate compatible umbilical or bone marrow stem cell donor are being made, however given its negative cost and systemic toxicity implications a more rational, directed, focused and informed use of these options will be imperative for an utmost outcome. [46]

Predictive scoring systems to determine progression to catastrophic bone marrow failures or malignant transformations in FA

Previous investigations intimated that haematological indexes after interventions predict

prognosis [47].This may have implications for major decisions concerning bone marrow

stem cell transplantations. [48]A scoring system proposed previously, to predict the

likelihood of the onset of an early catastrophic bone marrow failure or progression to latter acute myelogenous leukaemias and stromal solid organ tumours which are it’s commonly associated mutually exclusive or rivalry phenomena, speculates that abnormal or absent radii and a five-item congenital abnormality score were hypothetically significant predictor of early symptomatic catastrophic bone marrow failures, [25] where as those with latter onset less overt bone marrow failures syndromes are likely to survive longer enough to progress to malignancies such as acute leukaemias mainly, acute myelegenous leukaemias in about nine  of every ten cases,anaemic myelodysplastic syndromes in one of every other fifteen cases, solid tumours in one of every twenty cases which were mainly gastrointestinal and gynaecological stromal tumours and hepatic tumours both hepatocellular carcinomas or hepatic adenomas in one of every thirty three cases, although the age at onset of the malignancies were considerably much lower compared to the general population ..In a quarter of these cases the malignant features preceded the diagnosis of Fanconi aplastic anaemia syndrome. [26]

 

 

 

 

Epidemiologic figures for the haematological and oncological complications of FA.

                                                                                                                  

 

On the basis of these predictors, a previous series demonstrated the cumulative incidence of bone marrow failures by the age of ten years to be quite heterogeneous from one of every eight cases to about four of every five cases, according to associated risk scores, whereas the ratio of the statistically significant, observed versus expected malignancies were demonstrated for all cancers, all solid tumors and acute myelogenous leukemia’s. Other significantly relevant observed versus expected ratio elevations were noted in oesophageal, vulval, head and neck, mammary gland and cerebral neoplastic conditions respectively. [2]However, the competing events of a possible occasionally synchronous or usually metachronous acute myelogenous or invasive stromal solid tumours could be completely overwhelmed by overtly acute symptomatic catastrophic bone marrow failures syndromes, which indeed validated the diagnosis of Fanconi anaemias in most instances

The five- point congenital dysmorphology score for predicting catastrophic BMF in FA.

The five-item congenital abnormality score with microcephaly, absent or abnormal radii,

polydactyly, abnormal pigmentary skin defects and growth failures predictive of

catastrophic bone marrow failures has been determined to be fairly well reproducible by several investigations compared to that suggested for malignant transformations.

This is unlike the result reported by one investigation, where there were progressions to acute myelomonocytic leukemias [43] where as Leukaemias contributed immensely to the mortalitities in one study [14], malignant transformations to a miscellaneous subset of

stromal solid tumours was the implicated culprit in another investigation [2]

Blood Transfusions as an inescapable intervention in FA and its major concerns

Blood transfusions are almost always a necessary adjunct to the therapy of bone marrow failures, and its indication in Fanconi aplastic anaemias syndromes is a spectra as indicated by the reports from several series, however the major concern with multiple blood transfusions are the hazards related to iron overload and transfusion related infectious phenomena. The other major concern of multiple pretransplant platelets transfusions is, its negative impact on reducing the chances of allogeneic umbilical cord and bone marrow stem cells transplants from an HLA genotypically identical sibling, which is the mainstay of a substantive definitive intervention for the Fanconis anaemias related pancytopaenias and the most predictive prophylactic option for new onset leukaemic evolution.[49]

Immuno-modulation as a therapeutic option in FA

In such instances or circumstances where multiple blood transfusions are contraindicated, non-beneficial or hazardous immunomodulators and antithymocyte globulin could be an interim therapeutic option. [44]However, there are still further concerns of longer term complications of hypocellular myelodysplasia compounding this diagnosis, transformation to acute leukaemias in longer term survivors especially following bone marrow transplantation. [45]

Other pragmatic diagnostic options for FA when chromosomal studies are unachievable or inconclusive.

In FA most cases will show a predominance of either a severe to profound defect in granulopoiesis or thrombopoeisis with an erythropoetic insufficiency of moderately severe to very severe degree being fairly constant among these subsets.

Although traditionally, a significant contribution to the diagnosis of Fanconis anaemias have been the description of consistent chromosomal abnormalities in a high proportion of cases,however,chromosomal studies assist in achieving the diagnosis of Characteristic Fanconi akylating aplastic anaemia syndromes   with some restricted degree of certainty, given the commonly encountered inconsistencies appearing in a high proportion of FA cases.

The exploitation of the associated dysmorphologies in FA for achieving a therapeutically useful diagnosis in restricted, equivocal or ambiguous diagnostic circumstances.

However, review of extant and modern literature intimates that the diagnosis of Fanconi anaemia was occasionally achieved on the basis of compatible clinical and

haemato-pathological features in addition to its associated congenital malformations. Commonly associated congenital abnormalities noted in characteristic Fanconi akylating aplastic anaemias include a variety of skeletal abnormalities (especially involving the thumb), absent or abnormal radii, short stature, abnormal skin pigmentation, microcephaly, triangular shaped face, micrognathia, adrenal abnormalities.

The inconsistencies of chromosomal studies lends an argument for other supporting diagnostic armamentarium for FA

In some cases of Fanconi characteristic akylating aplastic anaemias, associated with bone

marrow syndromes, the chromosomal analyses will not demonstrate a high number of

chromosomal breaks, chromatid exchanges and endoreduplications, but could be

essentially normal and stable with unperturbed structural integrity which would not fit in

entirely with the diagnosis of Fanconi anaemia as was proposed by Swift and Hirschhorn [50] and Bloom et al [51],where as in other cases these chromosomal inconsistencies could be demonstrated without any obvious associated skeletal or organic dysmorphologies or malformations, in a few cases, eloquent associated malformations were the principally overwhelming features noted.

Exceptionally, the presentations of FA were typical and the diagnoses were  made on the basis of consistent clinical, haemato-pathological, radiological and typically associated anomalies and by excluding its differentials.

Revisiting the dysmorphological associations of FA to butress its diagnostic use for FA

A recap of the classically associated dysmorphological features and

anomalies in this syndrome will be expedient to demonstrate the validity of  the diagnosis

of compatible symptomatic characteristic Fanconi akylating aplastic anaemias in  those

instances when the possibility of this diagnosis was evoked .

In most reported series abnormal pigmentary lesions were the most consistent

abnormality occurring more regularly in certain areas such as the axillae, groins,

umbilicus, areola and nuchal areas, although any part of the body could be affected.

The pigmentation may appear before or after the haematological abnormalities have manifested. An early detection of these pigmentary skin defects could offer timely suggestive clues for the diagnosis of FA with positive implications on generic and specific interventions with overall good outcome;however its presence is not invariable in all FA cases. [52] .

 

 

Other relevant associated dysmorphologies in FA.

The other commonly associated skeletal anomalies observed in FA involved  the thumbs, such as hypoplasia of the phalanges, complete absence of one or both thumbs, supernumerary thumbs, atrophy of the thenar eminence, immobility of one or both joints of the thumb, a double distal phalanx and thumbs attached to the hand only by soft tissues. Other skeletal abnormalities reported occurs frequently enough to be considered an associated feature of the syndrome, viz.complete absence of one or both radii.

The other incidental or co incidental skeletal abnormalities which were previously described skeletal inconsistencies include a saddle nose deformity, spinal alterations, metaphyseal striation syndromes .The incidence of abnormalities of the renal tract in Fanconis anaemia is over 1 in 4 .The most common anomalies are structural renal defects such as absence of one kidney, horseshoe kidneys, ectopy, hydronephrosis, and impaired excretion by one or both kidneys. Cardiovascular anomalies occur but are not nearly as common as renal anomalies. They include Patent ductus areteriosus, and marked arteroma at an early age. Other associations include abnormal ears and hearing difficulties.

 April 2014 Supplement 1       Classics and Revisits in Scientific Haematology.                                                                                                                                                             

 

On the average, overall intelligence is usually adequate to make a realistic educational and career development planning achievable. Many other miscellaneous anomalies have been described, the most common being hypogonadism,[43]Failure to thrive and growth retardation are universal findings in children with Fanconi aplastic anaemia syndromes. The Short statures in these patients are usually proportionate. micropthalmia, microstomia, strabismus and hypereflexia were not noted in this series. Other previous occasional case reports have proposed other very uncommonly encountered developmental anomalous associations.

The sporadic occurrence of VACTERRL syndrome in FA subsets.

Although most VACTERRL associations occur sporadically, the associated anomalies in VACTERRL syndrome and FA are so overlapping especially in the presence of a radial ray defect that, a systematic cytogenetic diagnostic tests of FA should be pursued in all cases of VACTERRL, because in patients with such malformations an early diagnosis of Fanconi anaemia could offer positive implications for genetic counseling and specific interventions. [53] In the absence of these associated dysmorphologies, it would be difficult to propose the diagnosis of Fanconi anaemias in most instances.

Idiopathic cryptogenic aplastic anaemia as a differentials of FA

A diagnosis of Idiopathic Cryptogenic aplastic anaemia could however be suggested, in that case, chromosomal studies with Mitomycin as suggested previously would be relevant to suggest these diagnoses with some degree of certainty. [54] and exclude or include the idiopathic cryptogenic groups.

Plausible therapeutic interventions for FA

In most cases of FA, although an adverse implication of the three haemopoetic cell lines is universal, however in any one instance and case, the extent and severity of this implication for each haemopoetic cell line is relatively quite variable.

These differential haemopoetic cell lineage affectations will have positive cost and toxicity implications for a defined colony stimulating factor or blood component therapy application, which could be selective, focused and directed to the most adversely affected haemopoetic cell line with more frequent and consequential symptomatologies.

 

Generally, children with Fanconi anaemia could be managed on out patient basis,

however, inpatient care could be warranted occasionally for the management of

complications of bone marrow failures such as bleeding diathesis or severe infections.

Whole blood or blood component therapies and transfusions were occasionally achieved

on outpatient basis. Focused evaluations of blood counts and film morphologies are recommended at three-monthly intervals or more often as needed or more frequently if warranted as an out patient procedure.Haemopoetic stem cell transplant is currently an inpatient procedure.

Traditional and recent evidence proposed a combination of androgens and corticosteroids as an initial feasible and achievable treatment options in all forms of Characteristic Fanconi akylating aplastic anaemia syndromes. [9]

The occasional shortcomings of the therapeutic interventions for FA

The shortcomings of frequent relapses in a quarter to half instances and steroid related side effects are known major concerns, hence this treatment modality though sustainable could not meet the criteria for a specific, satisfactory or definitive therapeutic option.

Occasionally, results from some investigations were not very positive, the response rate was thought to be generally unsatisfactory due to several contributory factors leading to higher mortality figures and inexorable progression to exigent bone marrow transplantation, which remains an important option for patients with Fanconi Aplastic anaemia syndromes.[14]

The promising outcome of other therapeutic interventions in FA

However a previous investigation demonstrated a sustainable beneficial effect of androgens in constitutional aplastic anaemia as a group. [55]

In childhood Characteristic Fanconi akylating aplastic bone marrow failure syndromes, immunomodulation with anti-thymocyte globulin and cyclosporine could be considered as an interim interventional option, until bone marrow stem cell transplantation from a human leucocyte antigen compatible sibling, which is the main stay of management in all severe cases could be achieved .A longer term more certain amelioration of symptomatologies with improved quality of life was described for this intervention by several authors [27]

Therapeutic concerns with Immunomodulation.

Favourable prognostic indicators for immunomodulation therapy in FA are a younger age and a short interval from diagnosis. However, the shortcomings of immunomodulation therapy with an enhanced risk of developing clonal bone marrow diseases such as leukemia or myelodysplasia continue to be major concerns. In the presence of an empty marrow, pancytopaenia and transfusion dependence, the severity of the disease is based on polymorphnuclear counts. However with the use of ATG/cyclosporine this may no longer be the case. Determination of intracellular interferon gamma in blood samples of FA cases may correlate with responsiveness to immunomodulation therapy and may suggest those patients who are likely to relapse.[56] Also, the quantitative compromise in the white blood cell counts is commonly associated with important qualitative consequences as depicted by the shorter telomere diameter of the polymorphnuclear cells in this pathology further predisposing them to multipathogenic invasive infections

.[57] and posing further diagnostic, prognostic and therapeutic difficulties.

 

Malignant transformations related to prolonged immuno-modulations.

Reasonably lengthy investigations recorded a death rate of about sixty eight percent, with eight percent of the deaths attributed to acute leukaemic events.

However, the mean age at the death of patients, the time from presentation to death,

and the duration of the studies  were   about ten  years, two and half years and eleven  years respectively as proffered by one investigation in a group of  FA children living between the tropics on cancer and capricorn [14]In most series, the presence of more than one cell line symptomatology was associated with an increased morbidity and mortality.

The relative mortality impact of the features and complications of FA.

Bleeding diathesis and overwhelming septicaemias could be associated with mortality more than erythrocytopaenias.Aleukaemic prodromes of childhood acute lymphoblastic leukaemias should be searched for in all suspected cases. The positive outcome implication of searching for this association was reiterated by previous investigations. [58]

Surveillance programme is a cost effective and crucial interventional approach for FA.

One of the major concerns in the follow up of children with FA is the early detection of

malignancies through structured surveillance programmes, because children with

autosomally dominant Fanconi anaemias have one of the highest predictable risks for

developing catastrophic bone marrow failure syndromes with subsequent transformation

to acute myelogenous leukaemia. [59]

Relative and absolute indications for hospitalizations in FA

In FA, hospitalizations will be imperative for the treatment of malignant transformations

In aplastic anaemia, with pharmacotherapeutic interventions, the application of blood products adjuncts, and bone marrow stem cells transplantations, the putative life expectancy could be prolonged beyond the projected median of  thirty year or its environ..

The prophylactic interventional approach in the management of FA.

The earlier gloomy prognosis in Fanconi anaemia has been remarkably improved by cancer screening and preventive strategies, aimed to identify early malignancies and apply appropriate oncological therapeutic interventions, which supposedly will reduce the cancer related mortality events. Although major interventions are usually required in the definitive management of FA, however, basic health seeking habits such as, eschewing behaviours and activities with much risk of injuries and bleeding, as well as maintenance of optimal hygienic standards to reduce chances of acquiring infective events, reiterating the need to adhere to relevant pharmacotherapies, transfusions, and other interventions, aimed at cancer screening such as bone marrow, oropharangeal, and

gynaecological examinations and preventions, in addition to keeping away from smoking or excessive alcohol ingestion have been inferred to be rewarding.

Screening for FA in children with malignant conditions with no known risk factors.

Also children and adolescents who present with tumours that

are characteristic of Fanconi aplastic anaemia syndrome but who are not having the usual

risk factors associated with those tumours need to be screened for Fanconi aplastic

anaemias, such tumours include acute myeloid laeukaemias, tumours,of the brain oropharynx, esophagus, vulva, brain, skin (non-melanomatous, cervix, breast, kidney, lung, liver (adenomas and hepatomas), lymph nodes (lymphoma),stomach, colon, osteogenic sarcomas, retinoblastomas, Wilms tumours and myelodysplastic

syndromes related malignancies.

                                                                                                                  

Genetic Counseling

Nuclear and extended familial genetic counseling aimed at providing apposite genetic counseling to parents, caregivers, and other carriers or potential carriers with regard to the risk of recurrence and discussion of phenotypic variability within a family will be feasible deterrent options. In families, in which a mutation has been identified in a proband or through carrier screening, invitro fertilization and preimplantation genetic diagnosis could be proffered and management options suggested to the parents for an informed decision. A founder effect or an unduly high carrier frequency will also merit similar interventions.In families with affected probands, cord blood may be saved for future use as a source of  hematopoietic stem cells at the birth of a sibling. Assisted conception and preimplantation genetic diagnosis could be used to identify a fetus that is a human leukocyte adhesion (HLA) compatible sibling, who does not have Fanconi anaemia.

The descriptive epidemiology of malignancies in FA subsets.

The incidences of acute myeloid leukaemias and certain solid tumours are

greatly increased in homozygotes FA syndromes. [60]

The issues concerning the associations and predispositions to malignancies in children

who are heterozygous asymptomatic carriers of FA mutations and were inferred to be at

an increased risk of developing Acute Myeloid Leukaemia from environmenental

carcinogens were contentiously discussed, and malignant transformations were raised as possibilities in these subsets by previous investigations

The initial study on this debate by Swift et al analysed one hundred and two deaths in the relatives of eight FA families and found a higher rate of leukaemia, gastric, colorectal and tongue cancers [61] but this was not confirmed by latter investigations by the same authors when the study sample was expanded to include twenty five families no overall or specific excess of malignancies could be demonstrated, in these subsets, indeed there were fewer leukaemic events than expected [62]

A separate study of one hundred and twenty five relatives in nine FA families also failed to show any statistically significant or superior difference between these subsets. [63]

FANCC mutations carriage in FA and FA complementation group C as a risk factor for breast cancer.

Where as molecular genetic studies investigating cancer risk in heterozygotes have been mostly inconclusive. [64], A recent molecular genetic study investigating cancer risk in nine hundred and ninety four relatives of FA probands did suggest an increased risk of breast cancer in FANCC mutation carriers. [65]

However, other previous investigations suggested a significantly increased frequency of FA complementation group C sequence variants in children with Acute Myeloid Leukaemia compared to controls which lends plausible support to the hypothesis that speculates on the association that small variations in the FAC protein might be sufficient to render haemopietic stem cells more sensitive to certain environmental DNA cross-linking agents, leading to an increased risk of Acute Myeloid Leukaemia. [66 ]

This hypothesis of increased susceptibility of the heterozygotes family members of FA cases to malignancies could be further partly explained by putative inherent grading of pre-existing immune defects demonstrated in parental heterozygotes and their FA proband off springs. [67]

The positive therapeutic and the toxicity implications of achieving the diagnosis  .of FA with a reasonable degree of certainty.

Issues pertaining to the aetiopathogenesis, specific interventions and

overall management of Fanconi aplastic anaemia have been extensively reviewed,

understanding these new concepts will be invaluable in formulating future management

strategies and research directions. Failure to diagnose Fanconi aplastic anaemia syndrome

may lead to delays in treatment. Making a diagnosis of Fanconi anaemia with certainty

against its other differentials will have positive implications for an appropriate use of

immunosuppressive therapy in such instances, and positive pharmaco-vigilance and anti-toxicological implications for the avoidance of the inappropriate use of intensive chemotherapeutic or

                                                                                                                  

 April 2014 Supplement 1 Classics and Revisits in Scientific Haematology                                                                                                                                                                    

radiotherapeutic interventions in leukaemias or solid stromal tumours, or unduly enthusiastic marrow cytoablative therapy or other very toxic types of preparations for bone marrow stem cells transplantations.

A high index of suspicion is needed for early detection of FA cases with minimal symptomatologies and/or phenotypic expressivities.

More benign forms of Fanconi anaemias with less phenotypic expressivities may be missed in sibs of probands, so suspected or implicated cases should be evaluated for possibly associated birth defects or haematological inconsistencies suggestive of occult Fanconi aplastic anaemias and considered for a definitive evaluation. The diagnosis of Fanconi aplastic anaemias syndromes in relatives of probands will have further implications for excluding those cases as potential donors, which will contribute positively for a more successful and sustainable transplantation programmes to be achieved.

The health economics aspect of interventions for FA.

The outlook of children with FA could be considerably improved by the availability of these novel interventional options, given the concerns with costs and toxicities a more focused and directed committed colony line stimulating factor use and/or blood component therapies could be more appropriate treatment options with overall positive costs and toxicities implications.

The benefits of earlier interventions for FA.

The benefits of earlier detection of Fanconi anaemia at its presymptomatic stage in affected children using these dysmorphologies as a clue and predilection to FA will be worth exploring, since this will offer an opportunity for earlier prophylactic interventions and time for the search for a compatible bone marrow stem cell donors and appropriate pre-transplantations evaluations and arrangements.

Early detection of FA could also assist research directions, by proffering the opportunity for a more primordial comprehension of its pathogenesis and natural history.

Fanconi aplastic anaemia of childhood is a grave disease, its incidence

varies considerably globally. Fanconi anaemia syndromes meet the criteria of a

voluntary, confidential and consented screening program, because it poses a significant

burden to the population, a reliable means for its diagnosis exists, the test is cost

effective, and there are options of interventions that could alter its clinical

course and outcome considerably.

FA is a significant cause of mortality and morbidity globally.

Overall, bone marrow failures are a significant cause of

morbidity and mortality globally. The case fatality of a severe disease is considerable.

However, in ideal circumstances, earlier detection, timely presentations and appropriate

interventions with regards to allogeneic haemopoetic  stem cell transplantation or multimodal immunomodulation has dramatically improved the  prognosis and  outcomes over the last three decades, with four fifths of the cases having a longer term complete or partial remission with either or both therapeutic options. However in some instances,

given the limited number of investigations in these aspects, and paucity of comparable

clinical and investigative scenes, many aspects of its pathological impact remains elusive or obscure..

The challenges with FA and   the need for a systematic approach to a complex issue.

The partial response to androgens and steroids, the high mortality events, and early mean age at demise will suggest that timely bone marrow transplantations in these children would be beneficial and worthwhile. Continued concerns about the grave consequences of these rapidly fatal progressive pathologies could raise and support an argument for screening children with these structural and functional inconsistencies and their relatives in a non invasive way for incidental or coincidental bizarre haematological features including bone marrow hypoplasia, and occult malignancies.

A structured hospital and population based screening as a plausible interventional strategy for FA

A structured hospital and population based screening especially in children with familial history of congenital defects, those with bone marrow failures, with emphasis focused on trends of incidence, morbidity, mortality and survival.

Also an evaluation of the economics and cost benefit ratios of the various options of interventions will be rewarding.

The Need for further reappraisals and literature review. 

Selected relevant extant and current global and regional literatures could be reviewed to examine the progress in the interventions for FA and to evaluate the diagnostic rarity and strength of the association between FA and these morphological or functional defects.

Other plausible therapeutic and deterrent options in addition to other methodologic issues could be discussed further in the near future.

 

Guest Editors: CRS [Med] Consulting Academic Clinical Editorial Experts.

 

 

April 2014 Supplement 1                Classics and revisits in Scientific Haematology

                                                                                                                   

 

 

References:

[1]- Sieff CA, Nisbet Brown E, Nathan DG.Congenital bone marrow failure syndromes.Br J Haematol.2000; 111:30- 42.

[2]-Philip S.Rosenberg I,Blanche P.Alter,Wolfram Ebell.Cancer risks in Fanconi anaemia from the German Fanconi Anaemia Registry.Haematologica,2008; Vol 93,Issue 4,511-517.

[3]-Callen E,Ramirez MJ,Creus A,et al.Relationship between chromosome fragility ,aneuploidy and severity of the haematological disease in Fanconi anaemia.Mutat Res.2002;504:75-83.

[4]-Liu JM, Buchwald M, Walsh CE, et al.Fanconi anaemia and novel strategies for therapy. Blood 1994; 84:3995-4007)

[5]-Joenje H.Fanconi anaemia complementation groups in Germany and The Netherlands. Human Genetics.1996; 97(3):280-282.

[6]-Jan C Pronk, Rachel A Gibson, Anna Savoia, Mario Wijker, Neil V Morgan, Salvatore Malchinda, Deborah Ford et al. Localization of the Fanconi anaemia complementation group A gene to chromosome 16q24.3.Nature Genetics 1995; 11:338-340.

[7]- Meetal AR, de Winter JP, Medhurst AL, et al.A novel ubiquitin ligase is deficient in Fanconi anaemia.Nat Genet.2003; 35:165-170.

[8]-Levitus M, Rooimans AA, Steltenpool J, et al.Heterogeneity in Fanconi anemia: evidence for 2 new genetic subtypes. Blood 2004; 103:2498-2503.

[9]-Alter BP, Young NS.The bone marrow failure syndromes. In: Nathan DG, Orkin SH, editors. Nathan and Oskis Haematology of infancy and childhood.5th ed.Saunders: Philadelphia; 1998.p.237-5.

[10]-Alan D, D Andrea, Ford R.The constitutional aplastic anemia. In: Berhrman RM, Jenson HB, editors. Nelson Textbook of Paediatrics.17th ed.Saunders: Philadelphia; 2004.p.1642-4.

[11]-Hannah Tamary, Raanan Bar-Yam, Michel Zemach, Orly Dgany, Lea Shalmon, Isaac Yaniv.The molecular biology of Fanconi anaemia.Isr Med Assoc J.2002 Oct;4(10):819-23.

[12]-Magdalena N,Pilonetto ,MA,Bitencourt,N F,Pereira ,RC,Ribeiro,Jeng M,Pasquini R. Frequency of Fanconi anemia in Brazil and efficacy of screening for the FANCA 3788-3790 del mutation.Braz J Med Biol Res.2005 May;38(5):669-73.

[13]-Gupta V, Tripathi S, Singh TB, V Tilak, Bhatia BD.A study of bone marrow failure syndrome in children. Indian J Med Sci 2008; 62:13-8.

[14]-Macdougall,LG,Greeff MC,Rosendorff J,Berstein R. Fanconi anemia in black African children. Am J Med Genet.1990 Aug; 36(4):408-13.

[15]-Savino M, Lanzano L, Strippoli P et al Mutations of the Fanconi anemia group A gene (FAA) in Italian patients. Am J Hum Genet.1997; 61:1246.

[16]-Joenje H, Patel KJ.The emerging genetic and molecular basis of Fanconi

anaemia.Nat Rev Genel.2001; 446-457).

 

April 2014 Supplement 1                Classics and revisits in Scientific Haematology

                                                                                                         

[17]-Verlander, PC, Kaporis, A, Liu Q et al.Carrier frequency of the IVS4+4àt mutation of the Fanconi anemia gene FAC in the Ashkenazi Jewish population. Blood 1995; 86:4034.

[18]-Leah Peleg,Rachel Pesso,Boleslaw Goldman,Keren Dotan,Merav Omer,Eitan Friedman, Michel Berkenstadt.Bloom syndrome and Fanconis anaemia:rate and ethnic origin mutation carriers in Isreal.Isr Med Assoc J.2002 feb;4(2):95-7.

[19]-Tipping AJ,Pearson T,Morgan NV,et al.Molecular and genealogical evidence for a founder effect in Fanconi anemia families of the Afrikaner population of South Africa.Proc Natl Acad Sci USA.2001;98:5734-5739]

[20]-Rosendorff J,Berstein R,Macdougall L,Jenkins T,Optiz JM,Reynolds JF.Fanconi anaemia:Another disease of unusually high prevalence in the Afrikaans population of South Africa. American Journal of Medical Genetics Volume 27 Issue 4, Pages 793-797)

[21]-Callen E, Casado JA, Tischkowitz MD, et al.A common founder mutation in FANCA underlies the world’s highest prevalence of Fanconi anaemia in Gypsy families from Spain. Blood .Mar 1 2005; 105(5):1946-9)

[22]-Ramal LM,de Pablo R,Guadix MJ,et al.HLA class II allele distribution in the Gypsy community of Andalusia, southern Spain. Tissue Antigens.2001; 57: 138-143.)

[23]-Savoia A, Zatterale A, Del Principe D, Joenje H Fanconi anaemia in Italy: high prevalence of complementation group A in two geographic clusters. Hum Genet.1996; 97:599-603)

[24]-Glanz A, Fraser FC.The Spectrum of anomalies in Fanconi anaemia.J Med Genet.1982 Dec; 19(6):412-416.)

[25]-Philip S Rosenberg, Yi Huang, Blanche P Alter.Individualised risks of first adverse

events in patients with Fanconi anemia.Blood.2004 Jul 15; 104(2):350-5)

[26]-Blanche P Alter. Cancer in Fanconi anaemia, 1927-2001.Cancer.2003 Jan 15; 97(2):425-40.)

[27]-Camitta BM,Thomas ED,Nathan DG,Santos G,Gordon Smith EC,Gale RP,et al.Severe aplastic anaemia:a prospective study of the effect of early marrow transplantation on acute mortality. Blood 1976; 48:63-9)

[28]-Ehrlich P.Uber einem Fall von Aname mit Bemerkungen uber regenerative Veranderungen des Knochenmarks Charite Annalen 1888, 13:300 -9)

[29]-Smith, L Amer.J.Dis .Child.1919; 17:174.)

[30]-Gonzales CH, Durkin-Stamm MV, Geimer NF, et al.The W.T.syndrome-a new autosomal dominant pleiotropic trait of radial/ulnar hypoplasia with high risk of bone marrow failure and or leukaemia.In: Bergsma D, Lowry RB, eds.New syndromes. Part B of Annual Review of Birth Defects.Vol XIII, No 3B.New York: Liss, 1976:31-8)

[31]-Fanconi .GJB.Kinderheilk.1972; 117:257.

[32] -Nissen-Durey C.The Pathophysiology of aplastic anaemia.Baillieres Clin Haematol 1989; 2:37-49.

[33]-Duckworth-Ryesiecki .G, Taylor.A.M.R.Effects of Ionizing Radiation on Cells from Fanconis Anaemia Patients. Cancer Research .1985.Jan 1; 45:416-420.

[34]-Griffiths AD. Constitutional aplastic anaemia: a family with a new X linked variety of amegakaryocytic thrombocytopaenia.Journal of Medical Genetics 1983; 20:361-364.

[35]-Dokal I. Severe aplastic anemia including Fanconis anemia and dyskeratosis congenita. Curr Opin Hematol 1996; 3:453-60.

                                                                                                                  

April 2014 Supplement 1                Classics and revisits in Scientific Haematology

                                                                                                                   

[36]-Teo JT, Klaassen R, Fernandez CV, Yanofsky R,Wu J,Silva M,Lipton JH,Brossard J et al.Clinical and genetic analysis of unclassifiable inherited bone marrow failure syndromes.Pediatrics.2008 Jul;122(1):e139-48.

[37]-Alter B.P, Giri, N Savage S.A, Rosenberg P.S.Cancer in dyskeratosis congenita.Blood.2009; June 25,113(26):6549-6557.

38- Ohga S,Ohara A,Hibi S et al,Treatment responses of childhood aplastic anaemia chromosomal aberrations at diagnosis British Journal of Haematology 2002,vol.118.

[39]-Pinto.F.O,Leblanc.D,Chamousset.G,Le Roux.B,Brethon.B,Cassinat .J,Larghero J.P,de Villarty D,Stoppa-Lyonnet A,et al.Diagnosis of Fanconi anaemia in patients with bone marrow failure.Haematologica,April 1,2009;94(4):487-495.

[40]-Barret J ,Saunthararajah Y,Molldrem J.Myelodysplastic syndrome and aplastic anaemia ,distinct entities of diseases linked by a common pathophysiology ?Semin Hematol.2000;37:15 -29.

[41]-Joenje H,Artwert F,Kwee ML,Madan K,Hoehn H.Confounding factors in the

diagnosis of Fanconi anaemia.Am J Med Genet.1998 Oct 12; 79(5):403-5.

[42]-Dunn DE, Tanawattanacharoen P, Boccuni P, Nagakura S, Green SW, Kirby MR, et al.Paroxysmal nocturnal haemoglobinuria cells in patient’s bone marrow failure syndromes. Ann Intern Med.1999; 131:401- 8.

[43]-Gozdasoglu S, Cadvar AO, Arcasov A, Babacan E, Sanal O.Fanconis aplastic anaemia, analysis of 18 cases.Acta Haematol.1980; 64(3):131-5.

[44]-Storb R,Etzioni R,Anasetti C,Appelbaum FR,Buckner CD,Bersinger W,et al.Cyclophosphamide combined with antithymocyte globulin in preparation for allogeneic marrow transplants in patients with aplastic anaemia.Blood.1994;84:941- 9.

[45]-Deeg HJ, Leisenrig W, Storb R, Nims J, Flowers ME, Witherspoon RP, et al. Long term outcome after marrow transplantation for severe aplastic anaemia .Blood .1998; 91:3637- 45.

[46]-March JC, Socie G , Schrewenmeier H, Tichelli A, Gluckman E, Ljungman P et al Haemopoetic growth factors in aplastic anemia .a cautionary note. European Bone Marrow Transplant Working Party for Severe Aplastic Anaemia Lancet.1994; 334:172- 3.

[47]-Rosenfeld SJ,Nunez O,Follman D,Young NS.Long term outcome in severe aplastic anaemia is predicted by blood counts after treatment with intensive immunosuppressive therapy.Gruppo Italiano Trapianto di Midollo Osseo(GITMO)Br J Haematol,1999;107:330- 4.

[48]-Sleijfer D.Th, Mulder N.H, Nieweg H.O.The value of prognostic indices in aplastic anaemia. Annals of Haematology 1989; 42:2, 69 -78.

[49]-Gluckman E, Auerbach AD, Horowitz MM, et al.Bone marrow transplantation for Fanconi anaemia.Blood 1995; 86:2856-2862.

[50]-Swift, M.R.and Hirschorn, K. (1966):Ann.Intern.Med. 65.496.

[51]-Bloom, G.E., Warner, S., Gerald, P.S and Diamond.L.K. (1966 )New Engl.J.Med.274; 8.

 

                                                                                                                   

 

April 2014 Supplement 1                Classics and revisits in Scientific Haematology

                                                                                                                   

[52]-Giampietro PF, Adler-Brecher B, Verlander PC, et al.The need for more accurate and timely diagnosis in Fanconi anaemia: a report from the International Fanconi Anaemia Registry.Paediatrics 1993; 91:111 6-1120.

 

[53]-Perel Y, Butennandt O, Carrere A, Saura R, Fayon M, Lamireau T, Vergnesd P, Oesophageal atresia, VACTERL association:Fanconis anaemia related spectrum of anomalies. Arch Dis Child (April) 1998; 78:375-376

[54]-Cervenka J, Arthur D, Yasis C.Mitomycin C test for diagnostic differentiation of idiopathic aplastic anemia and Fanconi anemia. Pediatrics 1981; 67:119-27.

[55]-Windass, B: Vowels, MR: Hughes, DO: White, L.Aplastic anaemia in Childhood: prognosis and approach to therapy.Med-J-Aust.1987 Jan 5; 146(1):15-9.

[56]-Sloand EM Maciejewski JP Kirby M Kim S Young NS.Bone marrow and peripheral blood lymphocytes of patients with severe aplastic anaemia contain interferon gamma detectable by flow cytometric analysis (Abstract) Blood.1997.90 (suppl).20 b.

[57]-Ball SE,Gibson FM,Rizzo S,Tooze JA,March JC,Gordon Smith EC.Progressive telomere shortening in aplastic anaemia .Blood 1989;91.3582 -92.

[58]-Reid MM, Summerfield GP.Distinction between aleukaemic prodrome of childhood acute lymphoblastic leukaemia and aplastic anaemia.The Journal of Clinical Pathology 1992; 45:697-700.

[59]-Butturini A, Gale RP,Verlander PC,Adler-Brecher B,Gillio AP,Auerbach AD:Haematologic abnormalities in Fanconi anaemia:An international Fanconi anemia Registry Study. Blood 1994; 84:1650.

[60]-Tischkowitz M, Dokal I: Fanconi anaemia and Leukaemia-clinical and molecular aspects.Br J Haematol 2004, 126(2):176-191.

[61]-Swift M. Fanconis anaemia in the genetics of Neoplasia.Nature 1971; 230:370.

[62]-Swift M, Caldwell RJ, Chase C. Reassessment of cancer predisposition of Fanconi anaemia heterozygotes.J Natl Cancer Inst 1980; 65:863.

[63]-Potter NU, Sarmousakis C, Li FP.Cancer in relatives of patients with aplastic anaemia.Cancer Genet Cytogenet 1983.9(1):61-65.

[64]-Matthew CC. Fanconi anaemia genes and susceptibility to cancer.Oncogene 2006.25(43):5875-5884.

[65]-Berwick M, Satagopan JM, Ben-Porat L, Cralson A, Mah

K, Henry R, Diotti R, Milton K et al.Genetic heterogeneity among Fanconi anaemia

heterozygotes and risk of cancer. Cancer Res 2007.67(19):9591-9596.

[66]Awan A, Malcolm Taylor G, Gokhale D A. Increased Frequency of Fanconi Anaemia Group C Genetic Variants in Children with Sporadic Acute Myeloid Leukaemia.Blood .1998; 12:4813-4814.

[67]-Giuseppe C,Ciro G.C,Maria Napolitanoa,AsciertoP.A.Immunological Phenotype analysis of Patients with Fanconis Anaemia and Their Family Members.Acta Haematol 1998;100:39-43.

 

                                                                                               

 

June 2018                                                     Classics Revisits Sci. Med.  2018; 5(1)

 

ISSN: 0796-191X Classics and Revisits in Scientific Medicine Jun 2018 Vol 5 Issue No 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

Table of contents———————————————————————————–

 

Back ground and Purpose———————————————————————–

 

Editorial Policy for Classics Revisits Sci. Med.——————————————— 

 

Editorial for Classics Revisits Sci. Med.  2018; 5(1) ————————————–

 

Exploratory OBSERVATIONAL and Problem Solving PRE- Experimental Study. On Achieving The Diagnosis of Probable Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome or Congenital Nephritic Syndrome Through A Retrospective Historical Charting and Chronicles OF the Earliest Timing OF the Onset OF Symptomatologies OF Oedema In Infant Children with The Triad OF Hypoalbuminaemia, Proteinurias And Oedema. (Especially Those Subsets with Steroid –Non Responsive or recidivist Oedema and Proteinuria) Is Prognostically And Prophylactically Rewarding Since Their Specific Diagnostic And Therapeutic Interventions Remarkably Differs.——————————————————————————–

A Combined evaluative Explanatory Survey With Meta-Content Analysis For Several Subsets of Periodic Paralysis. On The Occasional Very Deleterious Impact Of Transient Periodic Paralysis Overlapping With Unclassifiable Paroxysmal Events OR Chronic Fatigue Syndrome (Fibromyalgia) Supports The Use Of An Indepth Clinical Pathological Electrophysiological Evaluations Of Cases With Thyroid Dysfunctions, Migrainous Cephalgias with or without Neurological Sequelae For Compatible Features.————————————————————————-

 

An informative mix of education and novel Data.

Naturalistic Inquiry, Participant Observation, structured Interviews And Documentary Content Analysis in addition to Media analysis for the

Illustrative instructive Epitomes of the range/and impact of electric shock related injuries. The age gender and seasonal differential variations in the pathophysiological effects of different intensities of electric current suggests the role of environmental genetic, humoral, hormonal, metabolic, constitutional idiosyncratic factors and pathological states in the diathestic predispositions to electrical injuries and electrocutions.

 

Acknowledgements——————————————————————————-

 

CLASSICS REVISITS SCI. MED. JUNE 2018

 

ISSN: 0796-191X CRS [Med.] June 2018 Volume 5 Issue Number 1

 

The section Classics and Revisits in Scientific Medicine [CRSM] Volume 5 NO. 1 June 2018.

 

                        Classics and Revisits in Scientific Medicine

                                                                                                                  

Back ground

This is the Classics and Revisits in Scientific Medicine CRS [Med.]

CRS [Med] is a balanced portal of continuing medical education information,

Purpose

The intent is that CRS [Med.] could provide a fairly well effective reciprocal communicative pathway for continuing medical education development in Scientific Medicine.

The text delivers the details of good basic and clinical dermatology practice clearly and concisely .It is a unique contribution to medical specialty practice development nationally, regionally and globally, in the context of ongoing health trends. Although the current directions in health care developments were highlighted, an unpretentious emphasis to quite often unavailable advanced technological innovations and models were reasonably weighted.

Focus and Theme

Throughout the series efforts were made to balance the emphasis on the scientific fundamentals and the basic principles of management and prevention with research directions and recent advances in investigations and interventions.

In order to make it more reader friendly and handy, efforts were made to minimize the volume while at the same time not compromising the contents.

On this basis, suggestions were made that it should be a regular and frequent topical medical periodical in scientific basic and clinical medicine.

It is hoped that these compendia will be found most rewarding by medical practitioners, health professionals undergoing their undergraduate and postgraduate medical trainings and other health conscious professionals and individuals.

This is a legendary textbook of scientific medicine in a journal format.

Issues and Future Trends

In this edition of the CRS [Med], a preamble of the format   of the publications is suggested.

However, it would be worthwhile to hasten to say that it is likely that there may be considerable alterations in these serial publications with regards to their academics structure, print layout, constituent parts, focus and certainly contents and periodicity. Therefore suggestions and opinions on contents inclusions and modifications are welcome.

In principle, publications would normally follow positive peer and editorial reviews, revisions and decisions.

 

Specialty Focused Journal Supplements

For clarity sake, this serial medical scientific publications and channels of classics and revisits in scientific Medicine, which will normally be published periodically as attached, merged or adhoc as isolated supplements to the parent journal CRS [Med]

 

June 2018   Volume 5 Issue 1     Classics and Revisits in Scientific Medicine.

                                                                                                                                               

Editorial Policy

We are pleased to consider papers in the following categories.

Original Articles from primary and secondary research:

The original articles could normally be up to 3000 words.

The documentations of the original papers should follow the traditional IMRAD pattern introduction, methods/ patients, results.discussion.conclusion, acknowledgements and references

The contents are expected to be precise, factual and as concise as possible.

Illustrative colour, black and white photographs and line drawings could be used if they could make the contents more lucid.

The abstract or the summary section should be structured and limited to 250 words or less.

Review Articles:

Review articles would generally be less than 3000 words.

It should be well researched and referenced.

Short Reports and Brief Communications:

Short reports and brief communications may contain up to 1000 words.

No summary or abstracts are required, but authors could decide to include them.

The contents should be logically ordered, but division into sections is optional and up to ten references may be used.

This may be suitable for the presentation of descriptive studies, some personal experience/observation and some field studies.

Case Reports and Case Series

This is the format most suitable for the presentation of individual case reports of particular interest or an illustrative series of cases.

Correspondence to the Editor

This could be on any topic related to the subject areas of the journal, which could be new topics or based on articles which have appeared in the series.

Current Topical Issues, opinions, view points, annotations and perspectives

This part of the series will provide a forum for expert opinion on topical issues in the area relevant to the series.

Appropriate submissions may include proposals for action such as:

[I]-Sound clinical judgment and good practice.

[II]-Appraisal or critiques of ongoing practice or principles.

[III-Responses to published statements.

The length of submissions in this section should normally be less than 1000 words. The presentations are expected to be precise, succinct and factual.

Usually about 20 references or less will suffice.

Occasional papers

Manuscripts of reasonable academic or clinical relevance belonging to this category could be published in the journal or in its supplements.

                                                                                                                                               

 

June 2018 Classics and Revisits in Scientific Medicine. Volume One.

                                                                                                                                               

Research Letters:

This is a good medium for communicating research findings, which are too brief for short reports or brief communications.

Supplements:

Supplements to the series by Consulting Guest Editors on emerging topical issues will be published with a specialty based focus, periodically and on ad-hoc basis.

Normally these specialty focused supplements will be published as attachments, merged or isolated and detached supplements to the parent journal CRS [Med.]

Technical Notes, Methods and Devises:

Papers describing procedures, techniques or equipment adapted by authors to their own conditions of work are welcome.

Medical Highlights and Forum Digest:

Summaries or Abstracts of ongoing and emerging topical medical issues will be published in the relevant sections of the journal or its specialty supplements.

Normally, these abstracts and summaries will be limited to 350 words or less and are best presented unstructured.

Editorials:

Normally, each series will be accompanied by an editorial perspective which as much as possible will aim to illuminate on the most significant contributions in the series.

Periodically, and on ad hoc basis editorials by consulting academic clinical guest editors will also be included, in the journal series or its supplement.

Book updates, Book Reviews and the Academic Clinicians Book shelf:

The series will consider book reviews, book updates relevant to the specialty series. A book shelf highlighting other updated books relevant to the specialty could be mentioned or displayed.

Report of the Highlights of Meetings and Conference Proceedings:

Proceedings of meetings and conferences relevant to the theme of the series could be published along the main journal series or as a supplement.

The specialty relevant highlights of appropriate medical scientific meetings will be published in the journal series or as supplements.

Academic Clinicians Web-Blog watch and alert:

Clinicians and medical scientists could be made aware of interesting Web sites and web-blogs in their relevant specialties.

Expert Opinions and View Points:

This involves a best evidence based expert advise and answer on a difficult or ambiguous academic or clinical encounter in any area relevant to the scope of the series. Normally the question or the scenario would be presented in a contextual format.with no more than 250 words.

The interventional answer or the solution to the difficulty will then be printed along with the question in the journal or a supplement following consultations with academic clinical experts in the topic and specialty.

                                                                                                                                               

                                                                                                                                               

December 2018   5(1)                     Classics and Revisits in Scientific Medicine.

                                                                                                                                                 

 

Ongoing and forthcoming medical conferences, courses and pathways to medical career opportunities and progressions.

The series will from time to time and on adhoc basis publish a list of accreditated medical conferences, courses and achievable pathways to medical career progressions and opportunities.

Health News

The series will from time to time publish a balanced scientific perspective of the medical health literature on emerging clinical issue of public health importance.

Profile of Medical Journals and other related Publications

Editors of Medical Journals or other relevant scientific medical publications could

proffer copies of their publications to the Classics and Revisits in Scientific Medicines.

A compilation of these publications would then be sent to our consulting guest editors, referees and reviewers for short listing, vetting and selection. The publications will then be showcased in the upcoming issues of CRS [Med,] or its supplements.

Clinical debates and Round Table discussions.

Logical and constructive debates and discussions on emerging topical health issues in scientific dermatology, on clinical issues which could influence practice positively will be published in the journal or its supplements periodically or on adhoc basis.

Text Presentation Format:

Text should be double spaced and all pages should be numbered.

The first page should include the title and the full names of authors with their academic and professional qualifications and/or job title and institutional affiliations at the time of writing, postal and E-mail addresses, telephone and   fax numbers or other relevant contact co-ordinates for correspondence.

Tables, figures and text boxes should appear on separate pages at the end of the document and be appropriately labeled.

Text Boxes

Text boxes should be used for tangential information, such as contact details or background information of organizations relevant to the article, lists of very short case studies or descriptions of related research/projects and details of elements of a study or project, such as a survey, which for reasons of clarity are best removed from the main body of the text.

References and Acknowledgements:

References and acknowledgements should each start on a new page.

References should be outlined using the Vancouver referencing style, as originally published by the International Committee of Medical Journal Editors (ICMJE) References should be listed numerically in the order in which they appear in the text. The numbers of the references in the text could be in superscript.

A corresponding numerical list of the references is supplied at the end of the text after conclusive remarks.

                                                                                                                  

 

 

June  2018   Volume One Classics and Revisits in Scientific   Medicine.           

References should be adequate, but redundant references should be avoided.

The full list of references should include the names and initials of the authors up to six authors could be listed then followed by et al for the outstanding authors, title of the paper, journal title, year of publication, volume number, first and last page numbers.

References to books should give the book title, place of publication, publisher and year, those of multiple authorship should also include  

chapter title, first and last page numbers and the names and initials of the editors.

Papers accepted but not yet published should be included in the references followed by (in press)

Those in preparation (and any submitted for publication), personal communications and unpublished observations should be referred to as such in the body of the text.

Consent:

[I]-Original sentences and paraphrases replicated and quoted from other authors should be cited in a standard manner and be referenced appropriately.

[II]-The consent of patients and approval of the protocol by an ethical

committee or relevant authority on ethical matters should be confirmed for human investigations.

[III]-Any potentially defamatory statement or those construed to be defamatory must be eschewed.

[IV]-Any tables or illustrations previously published should be accompanied by the written consent of the copyright holder to republication, an acknowledgement included in the caption and the full reference should be included in the list.

Patient confidentiality:

Where a patient might be identified through an illustration or from the text, it is essential that written permission is obtained from the patient and forwarded with the manuscript.

Proofs and off prints

Proofs are sent to authors designated to receive them and corrections should be made within specified guidelines.

Covering Letter:

A covering letter signed by all of the authors must be submitted with the articles, and original or secondary research papers.

E-mail submissions should be sent to the Classics and Revisits in Scientific Medicine editorial section with record of all approved authors e-mail accounts.

The letter must contain the following information:

[I]-Why the submission is appropriate for publication in Classics and Revisits in Scientific Dermatology and what it adds to the existing body of medical scientific knowledge.

[II]-The manuscript category that the paper is for.

                                                                                                                  

June  2018 Volume 5   Issue (1)              Classics and Revisits in               Scientific Medicine.

 [III]-Confirmation that the paper meets the requirements for the category as laid out in this document, stating word count and confirming that references were formatted in the Vancouver style as detailed below.

[IV]-Confirmation that the paper has not been published elsewhere.

[V]-Declaration of competing interests or the absence of competing interests and the disclosure of all sources of funding.

[VI]-Original research must declare ethical approval from an appropriate body and consent from participants.

[VII]-Name the corresponding author and provide full contact details.

[VIII]-Authors should also include written consents from those individuals being acknowledged in their paper.

 

Key Words

 

Authors are advised to include about five main key words before their introduction; this will facilitate the indexing of the article.

 

Language Support

Ideally, authors are advised to seek the assistance of a native English linguist for a linguistic editorial revision, however if this is unachievable, the Editors will provide the necessary linguistic support.

Copyright.

Before publication, authors would be asked to transfer the copyright of their contribution to the publishers of the Journal or its relevant supplement.

Check Lists for Authors:

Please ensure inclusion of the following before the manuscript submission:

.Manuscript in Microsoft word.

.Manuscript corresponding authors name, qualifications, degrees and/or job title 

contact co-ordinates outlining their institutional affiliations, postal address, e-mail and telephone/ fax numbers.

.Submission covering letter.

 

Consent forms where applicable.

Papers may be submitted in one of the following ways:

.Two copies of the manuscripts typed and double spaced.

.On a disk accompanied by one printed copy.

.Via E-mail to:

Dr.Emmanuel.G.U. Onyekwelu

Honorary Editor-in-Chief & Publisher

Classics and Revisits in Scientific Medicine.

P.O.BOX 2696

Serrekunda Post Office

The Gambia.

West Africa.

Tel: +220/9908295/2207357804.

E-mail:euonyekwelu@hotmail.com

Website: cottageclinicdoctors.wordpress.com

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Editorial

The role of the Scientific Editor as a gate keeper and umpire.

Scientific Editors have the most challenging, difficult and occasionally impossible jobs.

What made their work awkward are the expectations of some contributors.

This attitude was epitomized by the opinion of an unwary contributor, who when asked what do you expect from editors, said that not only do I expect all the editors to accept all my papers, accept them as they were submitted, and publish them promptly, but I also expect them to scrutinize all the other papers with the utmost care, especially those of my competitors.

Someone once said, Scientific Editors are in my opinion a lowly form of life, and with regards to belligerence were inferior to the viruses and only slightly superior to the academic deans. And then there is the story about the legendary celebrity   and the Scientific Editor who lived contemporaneously and arrived to an occasion simultaneously. They were subjected to the usual initial processing and thereafter were assigned their ceremonial quarters. The legendary celebrity looked around his apartment and found it to be spartan indeed.

The Scientific Editor on the other hand, was assigned to magnificent apartment, with plush furnishings, deep pile carpets and superb appointments.

When the Legendary celebrity saw this, he went to the master of ceremony and said, perhaps there has been a mistake .I am a celebrated legend very popular  and admired by all, I delayed  and deferred every other engagement and invitations to attend your ceremony,

I have been assigned to a shabby quarters, whereas this lowly scientific editor has been assigned to a lovely apartment. Then the master of the ceremony answered.

Well in my opinion there isn’t anything very special about you. We have admitted over two hundred legendary celebrities in the last two years, but this is the very first scientific editor who ever made it to our ceremonial events. So we see that a scientific editor should have a hermit as a brother so that he should have somebody to look up to. It has been said that the role of the scientific editor is to separate the wheat from the chaff and then make sure that the chaff gets printed.

Besides which, the contributors should never be afraid to talk to scientific editors.

With very rare exceptions, scientific editors are overall generally nice people. Never consider them adversaries; they are on your side as a contributor. Their only goal as scientific editors , academic goal keepers and umpires is to see that the articles are well reviewed and refereed, so as to ensure that only good science gets published in an understandable language.

However, if that is not your goal as a good willed bona-fide scientific contributor, then you will be dealing with a deadly adversary indeed, whereas if you share the same goal, you will find the scientific editor to be a resolute ally, then you will be likely to receive advice that you could not possibly buy.  Perhaps, the most important point to remember when dealing with scientific editors is that the scientific editor is a mediator between the contributor and the reviewers. If the contributor corresponds   with the scientific editor academically and could defend their work scientifically then their chances of getting published will be considerably enhanced.

The scientific editors and the reviewers are usually on the side of the contributors, their primary function is to assist the contributors to express themselves effectively, and provide them with the assessment of the science involved. What scientific editors aim to achieve is that of ensuring that only good science gets published and will be available to the scientific world. It will be worthwhile for the contributors, if they aim to follow their guidelines as much as will be achievable. The possible outcomes of the scientific editorial process could be neatly described as declined, modify or accept. The modern metaphor for scientific editing would be a car wash through which all cars headed for a goal must pass. Very dirty cars were turned away, dirty cars emerge much cleaner, whilst clean cars were little changed.

Having spent the proverbial more years than I could remember as a contributor, and an associate scientific editor and scientific editor to several notable and visible mainstream, newsletters, Journals and the Grey Medical Literature. I am totally convinced that, were it not for the goal keeper or umpire role so valiantly maintained by scientific editors, that our scientific journals would soon be reduced to unintelligible gibberish garbage.

No matter how unkindly or unthoughtfully you think that you were treated by the scientific editors, try somehow to maintain a bit of sympathy for members of that benighted profession.     

I recall with nostalgia, when a couple of years ago I wrote one of my favorite literary mentors equally a scientific editor in chief of a notable medical scientific journal and informed him of my flair, wish and desire to oversee the editing of a multispecialty medical scientific journal, he replied and wrote me a letter dated 15th June 2012, Dear Scientific Editor in Chief to be, I note what you say about your aspiration to edit a scientific medical Journal.

I am sending you by this mail an imaginary twelve multi-chambered revolver, load it and fire every one shot into your head. You will thank me very profusely after you get to life beyond and learn from other editors how dreadful   their job was whilst they were on earth.

I must say that I do not have all the answers, I thought I did when I was a bit younger and inexperienced. Perhaps I could trace my character developments, and reciprocal attitudes in the two way communicative pathways with contributors several years ago, when one Dr. Perseverance a veteran repeater contributor submitted to one of the   associated Medical Scientific Journals I worked with a surprisingly and an unexpectedly well-written and well prepared manuscripts, his previous manuscripts were poorly written and badly organized messes. After a review of his new manuscript, the chief-editor replied and wrote, Dear Dr, Perseverance, we are happy to accept your superbly written paper for publication, in our Journal, however, before we move on and complete the publication process, I just couldn’t help adding, please could you tell me, who wrote it for you?

Dr.Perseverance replied and answered, Dear Editor-in- Chief, I am delighted that you found my, manuscript acceptable, this time, and that its publication will soon be underway, but before I go on to celebrate with my associates, I eagerly wish, that you could tell me, who read it for you this time? [1]-

This issue of the classics and revisits in scientific medicine proffers several Collegiate Academic Transactions. Through serial Editorial Symposia:

 

An Editorial for congenital nephrotic syndrome in the Classics and Revisits in Scientific Nephrology dissects the seminal aspects of Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome entitled an

Exploratory OBSERVATIONAL and Problem Solving PRE- Experimental Study. On Achieving The Diagnosis of Probable Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome or Congenital Nephritic Syndrome Through A Retrospective Historical Charting and Chronicles OF the Earliest Timing OF the Onset OF Symptomatologies OF placentomegaly and effusive disease in neonates and Infant Children with The Triad OF Hypoalbuminaemia, Proteinurias And Oedema. (Especially Those Subsets with Steroid –Non Responsive or recidivist disease) Is Prognostically And Prophylactically Rewarding Since Their Specific Diagnostic And Therapeutic Interventions Remarkably Differs. ————————————————————–

 

CNS which implies Nephrotic syndrome in the first three months of life, is most common in the Nordic region especially Finland, where the pathology is described as microcystic disease. A nephrotic syndrome is called congenital if it presents within the first three months of life, this definition is based on the natural history of the Finnish type, the most common type of nephrotic syndrome in new born infants. Congenial nephrotic syndrome is a rare uniformly fatal renal disorder which is often observed in multiple siblings in a single family.An autosomal recessive inheritance has been suggested on the basis of the 1973 article on this theme by Burke & Others, on Familial nephrotic syndrome.

 

Other types with minimal lesion histology, diffuse Mesangial sclerosis or related to the tubulo-interstitial nephritis of congenital syphilis were occasionally described and reported sporadically in the global medical literature.

These Finnish types are now more frequently seen in the descendants of other Caucasian ancestry and the condition is inherited in an autosomal recessive fashion.

Oedema is noted in the first weeks of life with placentomegaly and prematurity being common precursors. There is no specific treatment but transplantation could be considered if survival is longer than eighteen months to twenty four months.

Elevated amniotic fluid alpha fetoprotein, if the fetus is affected, allows prenatal diagnosis.

Reviews on the Aetiopathogenesis of Congenital Nephrosis suggests that

For a long time Its precise  pathogenesis was unknown .A fundamental immunologic incompatibility between the mother and her affected  infant is perhaps responsible, since mothers reject skin grafts of these nephrotic infants more rapidly than control mothers reject grafts of normal infants. Evidence of the immune injuries to the kidneys relates to the finding of gammaglobulin and complement components on the glomerular loops. This was buttressed by the 1972 data from the genetic and immunological studies in congenital nephrosis by Conwald and McIntoch.

With regards to the Finnish Type of Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome, the Clinical Presentation and Laboratory Findings for The Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome Finnish Type (CNF) infers that the incidence of congenital nephrotic syndrome was estimated at about 1.2 per 10,000 births in Finland. Epidemiological data on this theme was provided by Huttunen from his scholarship on congenital nephrotic syndrome of Finnish type following a study of 75 patients in 1976.

Low birth weight with an obstetrics history of large placenta, wide cranial sutures, delayed ossification, and oedema are commonly noted at birth .The edema, however, may be apparent  only after the first few weeks or months of life.Anarsarca follows, and the abdomen is distended by ascites .

Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome should be suspected if there is a history of Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome in a sibling, hydrops fetalis or oedema of the placenta (i.e a placental weight of more than twenty five percent) birth weight or an elevated alpha-fetoprotein or total protein concentration in the amniotic fluid.

Huttunen in 1976, remarked that since the disease begins in utero in all patients, an increased alpha-fetoprotein more than ten standard deviations above the mean amniotic fluid concentration during the second trimester) is a reliable indicator of the disease.

The natural history of the disease is based on experience before the availability of renal transplantation   in young patients. Histriographically, several natural history data on CNF exists, Huttunen in 1976, Huttunen, Vehaskari, Vihikari et al in 1980 and Norio and Rapola’s scholarships data on .Congenital and infantile nephrotic syndromes in the .Genetics of kidney disorders by Bartsocas in 1989.

The mean gestational age was thirty six and half weeks  +-(one and half weeks) weeks (mean +-SD) and about three in five of the infants were premature of less than thirty seven completed gestational age.

Many of the infants were small for gestational age (SGA), especially those that attained a gestational age of or above thirty seven completed gestational age.

Massive proteinuria associated with typical nephrotic serum protein electrophoresis and hyperlipidaemia is the rule.Haematuria is not uncommon.

If the patient lives long enough, progressive renal failure occurs. Most affected infants succumb to infections at the age of a few months.

In some patients, the typical signs of nephrotic syndrome such as oedema, proteinuria, and hypoalbuminaemia did not develop until the third month of life.

The evolution of the disease was not affected by the administration of steroids or cytotoxic medications. Complications included severe failure to thrive and ascites in all patients, severe bacterial infections in about four out of five cases, pyloric stenosis in one in eight cases, and thrombotic events in about one of ten cases. .An increase in P-creatinine or Blood Urea Nitrogen (BUN) was observed in approximately one of five of the patients, but none had frank ureamia.

 

One-half of the patients died by the age of six months, and all of them by four years of age. The immediate cause of death appeared to be infection in one three cases

Autopsy revealed thrombi in large vessels in about one in five cases .However the survival rates appears to be getting more and more better because of intensive interventions.

The Laboratory Features For The Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome Finnish Type (CNF)Indicates that  the proteinuria which was initially very selective and usually almost entirely albumin as a result of increased permeability of the glomerulus only for small proteins, increases progressively and becomes nonselective, corresponding to an increased filtration and sieving co-efficients and to tubular   damage.

In 1980, Proteinuria in congenital nephrotic syndrome of the Finnish type was tackled by Huttunen , Vehaskari and Vihikari et al.  Data from previous and ongoing studies depict that the chemical pathological profile is significant for low serum albumin concentration and total thyroxine concentration as a result of low thyroxine binding globulin, a normal or mildly elevated P creatinine and hyperlipidaemia.

Ultrasonography reveals enlarged kidneys, increased echogenicities of the renal cortex compared to the liver and the spleen, decreased differentiation between the renal cortex and the renal medulla, and poor visualization of the pyramids.

The ultrasonic features of the congenital nephrotic syndrome of the Finnish type. Was discussed in 1989 by Lanning, Uhari and Kolivanen K, et al.

Tubular   dilatations may be misinterpreted as due to other causes of cystic disease, including Autosomal Recessive Polycystic Kidney Disease. [ARPKD]

In addition to other scholarship endvours by Bratton, Ellis and Seibert  on the  Ultrasonic findings in congenital nephrotic syndrome in  1990.

The diagnosis is confirmed at renal biopsy.

The Histopathological Findings in Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome. Finnish Type (CNF) demonstrates that The kidneys are pale and large and may show microcystic dilatations of the proximal tubules and glomerular changes. The latter consists of proliferation, crescent formation, and thickening of capillary walls.

Although the basic defect in congenital nephrotic syndrome is unknown, the pathologic findings are characteristic and pathognomonic.

Glomerular changes were seen by scanning electron microscopy in human fetuses at thirteen to twenty four weeks. of gestational age. In 1983 Atiuo-Harmainen and Rapola seminally discussed and disseminated their data on the thickness of the glomerular basement membrane in congenital nephrotic syndrome of the Finnish type.

Renal biopsy in infancy reveals irregularities of the glomerular basement membranes and thinning of the lamina densa. According to this data of Atiuo-Harmainen and Rapola followed by fusion of the epithelial cells foot processes, all of which were similar to the findings in minimal- change, steroid-sensitive nephrotic syndrome.

On light microscopy, the mature glomeruli initially typically   show only minimal abnormalities, including mild mesangial hyper-cellularity and an increase in mesangial matrix.

Immature-appearing glomeruli demonstrates a dilated urinary space surrounding   a small glomerular tuft .Progressive changes include obliteration of capillary loops ,and glomerlar hyalinization .Immune deposits become visible by electron microscopy within the mesangium only at late stages of the disease.

Except in the early stages, the biopsy frequently shows dilated tubules from both proximal and distal origin, such as was seen in microcystic disease .Although these cystic changes were used by some neonatologists as diagnostic criterion, they were not pathognomonic and have caused some confusion in the differential diagnosis.

Although the aetiology of the tubular dilatation is unknown, it has been attributed to heavy proteinuria.

Following the immnohistochemical and ultra structural studies of Rapola, Sariola and Ekblom on the .Pathology of fetal congenital nephrosis: in 1984.

Progressive interstitial fibrosis and tubular atrophy develop, the latter is well correlated with increasing proteinuria.

This aspect was confirmed by Huttunen in his 1976 scholarship entitled congenital nephrotic syndrome of Finnish type: study of 75 patients.

On the Treatment and Prognosis for the Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome Finnish Type (CNF)

Although supposedly, routine therapeutic interventions for nephrosis has nothing to offer. Prevention and effective management of urinary tract infections are important, immunosuppressives such as cyclosporine A appeared to extend renal function for a period.

Infants with congenital nephrotic syndrome require intensive management, which includes repetitive administration of albumin and diuretics for ascites, oral and parenteral hyper- alimentation and the treatment of multiple complications. Chronic renal insufficiency develops between the sixth and the twenty third months of life

As a consequence most patients eventually receive dialysis whilst awaiting transplantation.

All reported infants treated before the availability of renal transplantation died, mostly of infection.In one report, of the patients who received renal transplantation, the twenty four months patient and graft survival rates were eight in ten and seven in ten respectively.

Recurrence of nephrotic syndrome was not observed after transplantation. Most infants had a normal or accelerated growth, although the mean height remained significantly lower than normal. Although well over ninety percent had delayed psychomotor development at the time of transplantation, marked improvement was evident twelve months after, and about eighty percent of the surviving children had normal school and social performance.

 

Disappointingly, even though some infants with congenital nephrotic syndrome were found to have minimal change disease on biopsy, the application of corticosteroid and cyclosporine A therapy proved unrewarding.

However, thereafter pharmacotherapeutic interventions with Indomethacin and Captopril .in addition to other prototypes ACE inhibitors were tried with noteworthy success, in this way the disease progressions were thought to be attenuated and several candidates were assisted from progression to renal transplantation.

The exposition on the other causes of congenital nephrotic syndrome and its differential diagnostic considerations other than Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome of the Finnish Type. (CNF) depicts that several pathological and syndromic entities were associated with congenital nephrotic syndromes. An increase in alpha fetoprotein may be observed in these conditions, but this is far less consistent than that which was observed in frank Idiopathic congenital nephrotic syndrome.

Although therapy with corticosteroids and cytotoxic agents invariably has proven ineffective, specific therapy may be available for some subsets such as those related to the congenital TORCHES Complex infections. Classification of a patient into one of the major entities on the basis of aetiology or idiopathy may not be possible, hence such cases were denoted as unclassifiable or unclassified. If the Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome tantamount to Diffuse Mesangial Sclerosis and Its Other Differentials of The Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome Finnish Type (CNF) and The Drash Syndrome related Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome were Compared and Contrasted. It could be appreciated that Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome tantamount to Diffuse Mesangial Sclerosis is the second most common cause of congenital nephrotic syndrome, and it appears to be a heterogeneous group.

According to the 1989 data of Norio and Rapola on Congenital and infantile nephrotic syndrome edited by Bartsocas as book chapters of Genetics of kidney disorders, the onset may be as late as one year of life. In contrast to Congenital Nephrotic syndrome of the Finnish type, Chronic Renal Failure (CRF) develops rapidly in these patients, and is the major cause of demise in the absence of renal replacement therapy or renal transplantation.

Renal venous thrombosis is a frequent complication .In other instances, in most families, diffuse

Mesangial sclerosis was genomically determined and was transmitted as an autosomal recessive trait.

Histologic examination of the glomeruli demonstrates mesangial cells embedded   in a periodic acid Schiff positive and silver-positive fibrillar network occluding the capillaries.

Although the associated renal tubular changes for this subset were similar to those in the CNFHowever, the accompanying renal interstitial fibrosis for this subset were more pronounced than that encountered in CNF.

The Drash Syndrome related Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome was described following the observation that in some infants, diffuse mesangial sclerosis is part of a Drash syndrome, which also includes ambiguous genitalia, most often male pseudo-haemophrodism (i.e. 46XY karyotype) and Wilms tumour.

A detailed review on the nephropathy associated with male pseudohaemophroditism and Wilms tumour (Drash syndrome) as a distinctive glomerular lesion with report of ten cases was provided by Habib, Sariola and Gubler et al in 1985.

Patients with the Drash syndrome present between two weeks to thirty-three months of age with or without nephrotic syndrome, sometimes haematuria, often arterial hypertension and progressive Chronic Renal Failure leading to End Stage Renal Disease within a few months to two years from the onset. Several patients have presented with incomplete forms of Drash-Syndrome (i.e. only two of the three signs of the triad. In some Dennis-Drash Syndrome, CNF presents in the setting of a child with Wilms’ tumour and hemi hypotrophy without pseudo-haemophroditism.

With regards to Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome related to Congenital Infections,

Several authors inferred that nephrotic syndrome due to congenital infection was most commonly seen in congenital syphilis. Several histriographic data on this theme exists,

In 1961, Papaioannou , Asrow and Schuknell implicated .Nephrotic syndrome in early infancy as a manifestation of congenital syphilis. .

Where as in 1973, Wiggelinkhuzen, Kaschula and Uys et al approached congenital syphilis and glomerulonephritis with evidence for immune pathogenesis.

In which case the lesion was characterized by epimembranous or proliferative glomerlopathy, with diffuse deposits of gamma-immunoglobulin and treponemal antigen along the glomerlar capillaries and sub-epithelial  electron dense deposits.

The condition responds remarkably well to the application of the penicillomic acid derivatives. The congenital nephrotic syndrome associated with congenital toxoplasmosis is also possible but less common than that tantamount to congenital syphilitic leutic disease.

.Classic data on .Congenital nephrotic syndrome associated with congenital toxoplasmosis was presented by Shahin, Papadopoupou and Jenis in 1974.

A Parisian scholarship by Couvreur ,Allison and Coccon-Gibod L,et al. Investigated and discussed the Kidneys and toxoplasmosis in 1984.Entiltled «  Rein et toxoplasmose. », the lesion is characterized by the deposition in the glomeruli of immunoglobulins, complement and Toxoplasma gondi antigen and antibody complexes. It may respond to the administration of pyrimethamine, sulfadiazine and steroids.

Although case reports of congenital nephrotic syndrome in association with congenital cytomegalovirus infection exists, it was inconclusive whether or not the nephrotic process was mediated by or related to the infection, incidentally, co-incidentally, epiphenomenally or not.

In 1986, Neonatal cytomegalovirus infection with pancreatic cystadenoma and nephrotic syndrome was reported and discussed by Amir, Hurvitz and Neeman et al.

Also, Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome related to other miscellaneous aetiological Factors have been described,

Some cases of syndromic and non-syndromic dysmorphisms were associated with congenital nephrotic syndromes, such dysmorphic features included, primary microcephalies related to Cornelia de Lange Syndromes, The Carpenters syndrome,etc, bupthalmos(congenital glaucoma) or disturbances of neuronal neuroblasts migrations including but not confined to lissenencephaly, cortical dysplasias and the pachygyrias

Congenital microcephaly, hiatus hernia and nephrotic syndrome in an autosomal recessive syndrome was reported as Birth defects in 1976 by Shapin, Duncan and Fansworth et al.

Robain and Deonna in 1983 included Pachygyria and congenital nephrosis as an association of disorders of migration and neuronal orientation.

This associational entity was further strengthened in 1986 by the scholarship investigations of Palm, Hagerstrand and Kristofferson et al on the theme entitled the Nephrogenesis and disturbances of neuronal migration in male siblings as a new hereditary disorder.

Transient cases of congenital nephrotic syndrome have been described related to maternal transmission.

Lagrue , Braneller and  Niauder  et al in 1991,dwelt on the Transmission of nephrotic syndrome to two neonates and its spontaneous regression.

CNS was also related to mercury intoxications (minimata disease.) or the yellow nail patella syndrome associated with lymphoedema congenita.

In 1970; Simila, Vesa and Wasz-Hockert discussed the Hereditary onycho-osteodysplasis (the nail-patella syndrome) with nephrosis- like renal disease in a new born boy.

Case reports of one three month old infant with infantile SLE who reportedly had steroid-responsive membranous glomerulopathy and other instructive cases were available.

In 1979, Ty and Fine presented Membranous nephritis in infantile systemic lupus erythematosus associated with chromosomal abnormalities.

The interventions for these secondary Nephrotic syndromes will be contingent on managing the associated primary pathological processes.

Exponentially, several informative novel genetic data on CNS are getting increasingly more and more available. [2]-

 

The Classics and Revisits in Scientific Neurology presents

 

A Combined evaluative Explanatory Survey With meta-Content Analysis for several Subsets of Periodic Paralysis on the Occasional Very Deleterious Impact of Transient  Periodic Paralysis Overlapping With Unclassifiable Paroxysmal Events Or Chronic Fatigue Syndrome (Fibromyalgia) Supports The Use Of An Indepth Clinical Pathological Electrophysiological Evaluations Of Cases With Thyroid Dysfunctions ,migranous cephalgias with or without neurological sequelae  for Compatible Features.

 

 

and secondarily aims to analyse the Research question, hypothesis and paradigm of achieving a distinction for the conundrum and continuum from hypokalaemic through normokalaemia to hyperkalemic Periodic Paralysis, suggests the need to consider normokalaemic periodic paralysis as an intermediate mosaic of the two extremes, which implies that serum potassium levels should not be the sole criteria for inclusion or exclusion of compatible cases.

 

Traditionally, periodic paralysis (PP) is a rare autosomally inherited genetic disease leading to muscle weakness ,paresis or paralysis .Its clinical impact is spectral ranging from non-incapacitating occasional muscle weakness with ambulatory difficulties to permanent muscle decimation leading to a fatal respiratory muscle paralysis. It usually presents following common triggers such as cold, heat, unduly high carbohydrate meals, fasting state related hypoglycaemia, stress, emotional activities, excitement in addition to unduly vigorous activities.

At the molecular level, the underlying defects were  skeletal muscle cell membranes ion channels malfunctions allowing electrically charged ions to leak in and out of the muscle cell, causing them to depolarize and become excited( a form of channelopathy)  It could be hyperthyroidism related or associated (thyrotoxic (PP)

 

In hypokalaemic (PP) Potassium leaks into the muscle cells from the blood stream, it could interact with a co-existing or epiphenomenal genetically inherent abnormalities in calcium channels in muscle cells, occasionally with sodium /potassium channels.

 

In hyperkalaemic Periodic Paralysis (PP) (Adynamia Episodica Hereditaria)  potassium leaks out of the cells into the blood stream and interacts with genetically determined abnormalities in sodium channels.This form is usually accompanied by Paramyotonia congenita, the primary symptom of Paramytonia is muscle contractures which develops during activities .Also similarly Paramyotonia congenita attacks may also be triggered off by hypokalaemia.

Usually, it manifests as sudden collapse following prolonged standing, in public places, or it may be occupationally related.

 

The diagnosis of periodic paralysis were unusually difficult, with parents often reporting many futile efforts of several years with misdiagnosis and interventions with worsening symptomatologies.Part of this may be due to the fact that unclassifiable paroxysmal events were present in up to half of the cases with overlapping symptomatologies such as migranous cephalgias, speech difficulties, visual, auditory tactile and multisensory auras .Diagnostic accuracy was confounded and compounded by the facts that DNAs testings were available and achievable for only some common gene mutations 

EMG results were normal except during attacks, however a properly performed exercise –EMG (compound Muscle Test) in the appropriate clinical setting could provide an accurate diagnosis in most instances. Most cases will function fairly well with appropriate pharmacotherapy, environmental manipulations and lifestyle modifications.

 

The onset of hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis is in childhood, whereas the ones of the hypokalaemic type is in early childhood to adulthood (one to twenty five years of age),although this anecdotal concept has been challenged, the serum potassium levels do not necessarily have to range outside the normal limits to cause serious life threatening paralysis .Indeed against its classification schemes, these clinical features do not usually fit in neatly into hyperkalaemia or hypokalaemia and as such, they should not be managed categorically.

In both these cases, the total body potassium is usually normal, but it just in the wrong place .The gene mutation, the ion channel affected and the amount of genetic change or expression could have significant impact on disability and therapeutic interventions.The progression of the hyperkalaemic Periodic Paralysis somewhat slows down towards middle age, whereas that of hypokalaemic periodic paralysis could be quite progressive and deleterious.

The hypokalaemic Periodic Paralysis were more common in males. Electrocardiographic features compatible with hypokalaemia or hyperkalaemia were more indicative of the total body potassium compared to the serum/blood potassium levels .The changes of the blood potassium levels in the secondary forms were always marked, but this was not the case in the primary forms.

Also hypermagnesaemia of any cause could be a cause of periodic paralysis.

 

Furthermore some genetic forms of Periodic Paralysis were associated with significant rhythm dysfunctions .Carbonic anhydrase inhibitors such as acetozolamide and dichlorophenamide were initially tried in patients with Periodic Paralysis on the basis of their kaliuretic effect for hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis and then based on serendipitously made observations, and probably because of its induction of alkalosis in hypokalaemic Periodic Paralysis. On the basis of our experience, for us Acetozolamide is probably a wonder drug. In the management of Periodic Paralysis of several aetiologies because of its modifying effects on channelopathies. It was found to increase extracellular proton concentrations which strongly inhibit ionic permeations through open calcium channels .They could also equally function by activating potassium calcium channels thereby modifying their myogenic pace setting activities.

 

On the essence and objective of this paper, Since we have previously identified, presented, reported and discussed other domains of primary idiopathic myopathies in addition to acquired secondary systemic paralytic myoneuropathies.This paper aims to further report unusual and severe cases of presumptive primary idiopathic Periodic Paralysis in adolescent and adult males and females managed successfully by the authors.

 

The employed methodology involves  Case Studies with Triangulated Analytical Techniques and Methodological approach with Analysis of Empirical observations of Presentations and Document Research through the use of Structured Qualitative and Quantitative independent content analysis, of Nominal and Ordinal data from the mainstream Journals and the Grey Medical Literature.

 

The investigators  experience with periodic paralysis in childhood were highlighted with  extremely severe cases of non-familial possibly dyskalaemic, normokalaemic, normocalcaemic normonatriemic, non-diurnal idiopathic periodic paralysis cases in previously healthy females with unclassifiable paroxysmal events initially inferred as convulsive equivalents associated with  non-diurnal non myotonic tachycardiac recurrent episodic severely frank tetraparetic paralytic events lasting for about twenty four hours in each instance ,

 

And subsets of adolescent males with a new onset recurrent episodic prolonged paraparesis with visual difficulties occasionally lasting up to a week in some instances none of the parents were consanguineously married. Good outcome measures were achieved with appropriate conventional interventions in all instances with acetozolamide, environmental and life style modifications in addition to physical therapies

The global regional literature were examined to buttress the import of achieving the diagnosis at the milder and earlier spectra of the defect, plausible diagnostic, therapeutic and prophylactic options were proffered and discussed.

 

This paper highlights cases at the upper range of the defect, given the spectral nature of the defect, it is likely that there are still many defects out there at the milder spectrum with minimal expressivities which could be therapeutically

amenable at this stage compared to when progressed to decimated myopathic paralysis. This is one aspect where basic evaluations with in-depth comprehensive historical and clinical evaluation, applying commonly available inclusive biochemical profile, electrocardiogram and exclusive neuroimaging a tentative diagnosis could be achieved, fortunately this condition is amenable to commonly  available diuretics/salts ,medical interventions and specific/generic deterrent options .

A review of the literature compares these cases with others described previously in the global medical literature and offers a systematic and standardized diagnostic and therapeutic approach and strategies for the more enigmatic and difficult cases.

 

The Transient and Periodic Paralysis as a group of neuromuscular disorders is characterized by attacks of acutely developing paralysis, which spontaneously recover to complete normality, usually within a few hours. These conditions the periodic paralysis cause recurrent attacks which are usually associated with alterations of serum potassium concentrations .The clinical features like its inherited nature achieves the distinction between these forms from the acute and subacute monophasic conditions where the recovery is much slower such as the inflammatory, immune or neoplastic related dermatomyositis -polymyositis syndromes and electrolyte imbalance related paralysis or paresis including the other forms of potassium related disturbances in itself. They also differ from the disorders of neuromuscular transmission where there is increased weakness with superadded exercise-induced fatigue.

 

They differ from the numerous central nervous system causes of transient loss of muscle power, which include syncope, .seizures, transient ischaemic attacks of the brain, cataplexy, hydrocephalic attacks, and idiopathic drop attacks .It is most important to realize that any cause of excessively high or low serum potassium will produce diffuse muscle paresis by an effect on the resting sarcolemmal membrane potential .Hyperkalaemia causes hyperpolarisation, preventing the end-plate potential  from reaching the critical depolarization potential required to fire the muscle fibre. Hypokalaemia produces depolarization, which produces depolarization inactivation (closure of the off-gate) of sodium channels in the sarcolemmal .Conditions such as excessive potassium administration and renal failure cause hyperkalaemia; and primary hyperaldosteronism (Conn’s syndrome) and diuretic (kaliuretic) and corticosteroids therapy may cause hypokalaemia.

In contrast, the familial periodic paralysis cause attacks of considerably greater muscle weakness than expected from the change in serum potassium. In fact, some patients have paralytic attacks without change in the serum potassium concentration .These observations suggest that the serum potassium changes may be secondary to some basic abnormality in the sarcolemmal.

 

At least five different syndromes of transient muscle weakness have now been identified these are:[I]-Familial hypokalaemic periodic paralysis.[II]-Hyperthyroidism with hypokalaemic periodic paralysis.[III]-Familial hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis (adynamia episodica hereditaria of Gamstorp)[Iv]-Paramyotonia congenita of von Eulenberg.[v]-Normokalaemic Periodic Paralysis.

 

In each of these conditions, over a period of a few minutes or hours the patient develops a disorder of skeletal muscle which may vary from mild weakness of limb muscles to total paralysis and which subsides and disappears completely after a few hours or days. There are a few clinical features which suggest the exact type of periodic paralysis that is present, but generally, the diagnosis rests on determining the serum potassium level in an attack and on tests which attempt to precipitate paralytic attacks either by increasing or decreasing the serum potassium concentration. [3]-

 

Finally, the Classics and Revisits In Interdisciplinary Medical Themes presents An informative mix of education and novel Data from

Naturalistic Inquiry, Participant Observation, structured Interviews And Documentary Content Analysis in addition to Media analysis on Illustrative instructive Epitomes of the range/and impact of electric shock related injuries .

The environmental, age and gender differential variations in the pathophysiological effects of different intensities of electric current suggests the role of environmental,genetic,humoral,hormonal ,metabolic , constitutional idiosyncratic factors and pathological states  in the diathesistic predispositions to electrical injuries and electrocutions.

This article is an informative mix of education and novel Data. On Electrical Injuries achieved through  

Pre-experimental studies with  Triangulated Research Methodological Approach comprising an employ of Naturalistic Inquiry, Participant Observation, structured Interviews and Documentary Content Analysis in addition to

Media analysis (news papers, magazines) films (movies) Radio, television (advertisements, news and broadcasts) and other acquired documentary informative data.

Descriptive systems for the evaluation and creation of distinctions for lightning and electric current related events were still unharmonised.there appears to be no records of adverse cardiopulmonary and cerebrovascular or myogenic events and vital end organ dysfunctions following frank, bur especially with subtle lightning events. Global demographics are lacking for policy and decision making.

This article equally aims to propose the evaluation of the following hypothesis, research questions and Paradigms and proffer complimentary mitigating measures that, Firstly, the seasonality and additive effect in electric and lightning current related injuries warrants temporal differential deterrent preventive options, slanted and weighted to the wet seasons.

 

Secondly, although previously electrical injuries used to be an urban cosmopolitan phenomenon, but the additive impact of the availability of electricity and multiple bodies of water in the hinterlands warrants an augmented and directed electrical and lightning injuries educational and environmental modification deterrent and preventive options.

 

Thirdly, with regards to electrical and lightning injuries; a little overdose may matter in some individuals with certain genetic and acquired pathological conditions because of aneurysmal formation in those with connectivopathiies such as the Elans Danlos syndromes, Marfans syndromes or  Osteogenesis Imperfecta, or acquired metabolic or infective defects such as cardiovascular syphilitic leutic diseases, metabolic syndromes etc  Since aneurysms occur following prolonged coagulative coaliquative necrosis of the fibromuscular medial intima of the large blood vessels especially the aorta following electrical shock injuries. Aneurysms predisposes to thrombo-embolic phenomenon as do the arrhythmias associated with electric shock injuries, both could cause dizzy spells.

 

Also, since aneurysms predispose to thrombo-embolic phenomenon as do the arrhythmias associated with electric shock injuries with both presenting with   dizzy spells such individuals with predisposing diathesis to aneurysmal formation  will need at least a non-invasive survey for the evolution of  the aneurysm such as trans thoraco-abdominal  ultrasound in addition to  haemoglobin estimation and complete blood counts.

Similarly individuals with arrythmogenic predisposing homeostatic metabolic or structural cardiopulmonary or neurogenic dysfunctional/ diathesis will need evaluation with ultrasound, ECG and if imperative EEG.

 

Fourthly, in addition, Electrical and lightning injuries by causing fatty tissue necrosis could predispose to cryptogenic acute, then subacute and chronic pancreatitis with calcific fibrosis leading to a fibrocalculous chronic pancreatitis with enzymic and hormonal insufficiencies.

 

Finally, the stress of electric shock could lead to an irreversible diabetogenic hormone release, the enhanced impact of electrical injury in pregnancy being grave may well be related to the exacerbated humoural endocrine factors at play in pregnancy.

This review explores the wider impact or connotations of electrical injuries through the following problem solving paradigm such as the case for the position of the elderly and certain metabolic vital organ dysfunctions associated cardiopulmonary difficulties and neuropathies in this scale may warrant an enhanced anti-electric shock measures for this subsets as a group.

 

Therefore electrically injured patients should receive a more comprehensive evaluation for renal injuries, neurological deficits; in addition to longer term ophthalmological follow ups for cataracts. As a group patients with electric shock injuries will need longer term and more diligent follow ups.

These aspects are prophylactically, diagnostically and therapeutically unexplored but crucial concepts.

 

Although electrical trauma, accidents or “shock” are very common and almost everyone has been exposed to these. Severe electrical injury is a relatively infrequent but potentially devastating form of multisystem injury with high morbidity and mortality. Most electrical injuries in adults are occupationally related, whereas children encounter these injuries in the domiciliary settings. Natural electrical injury is related to lightning events, with immense and utmost morbidity and mortality.

The severity of the injury depends on the intensity of the electrical current (determined by the voltage of the source and the resistance of the victim).the pathway it follows through the victims body and the duration of the contact with the source of the current .Immediate death may occur either from current-induced ventricular fibrillation or asystole or from respiratory arrest secondary to paralysis of the central respiratory control system or due to paralysis of the respiratory muscles. Presence of severe burns (common in high voltage electrical injury), myocardial necrosis, the level of central nervous system injury, and the secondary multiple system organ failure determines the subsequent morbidity and long term prognosis .There is no specific therapy for electrical injury, and the management is somewhat generic and symptomatic. Although advances in the intensive care unit, and especially in burn care, have improved the outcome, prevention remains the best way to minimize the prevalence and severity of electrical injury.

Although frequently categorized collectively as a single entity, electrical injuries were actually spectral ranging from mild as seen with low voltage outdoor electrical injuries, through high voltage occupational injuries to lightning injuries, however in younger children an occasional in door larger household electrical injury may be associated with very deleterious consequences.

Electrical injuries, although uncommon are inevitably encountered by most clinicians. Adult electrical injuries usually occur in occupational settings, whereas children are primarily injured in the domestic domiciliary settings. The spectrum of electrical injury is broad, ranging from minimal injury to severe multiorgan involvement to death.

Injuries could result from spontaneous atmospheric electricity (lightening injuries) or generated electricity, such as household or industrial electrical currents

(electrical injuries)

 

Reviews on the Principles of Electricity indicates that Electrical current passing through the body generates heat, which burns and destroys tissues .Burns can affect internal tissues as well as the skin. An electrical shock could short circuit the body’s own electrical circuitry systems, augmenting their impedance, thereby inhibiting   neuronal impulse transmissions or make the body to transmit impulses in an unregulated erratically inconsistent manner. This anomalous and abnormal impulse transmission could affect the predominantly myogenic organs and systems, including the cardiac muscles inciting tetany or cardiac arrhythmias which could lead to falls or cardiac arrest. It could equally affect the central nervous system causing convulsive or non-convulsive seizures, loss of consciousness, in addition to multimodal sensory abnormalities. An electrical injury occurs when a current passes through the body, interfering with the function of an internal organ or sometimes burning tissues.

 

More often than not the main symptom is a skin burn, but not in all instances will there be conspicuously observable injuries.

In the initial evaluation, the patient should be assessed for   abnormal cardiac rhythm, fractures, dislocations, spinal cord and other injuries.

The abnormal cardiac rhythms are observed, the burns are managed, and if the burn caused extensive internal damage, intravenous fluids are given.

 

Where as some electrical injuries such as low to high voltage electrical injuries were somewhat partly preventable, others such as severe thundering/lightening were not. Anecdotally, electric injuries were most frequent in young adults in the second to the fourth decades of their lives, probably due to more frequent occupationally related, domiciliary or outdoor exposures. Obtaining detailed information regarding the characteristics of the involved agents has major impact on workup, management, and outcome in cases.The relevant details will include the amount of current, whether it is low voltages (one hundred and twenty to four hundred and forty Volts), High Tension ;Voltage ( more than one thousand volts), type current (alternating current)(AC) or direct current(DC) ,path-of-current ( hand-to-hand) ,hand-to-foot ,foot-to-foot ),the length of contact ( tetany ,locked-on phenomenon ),and the- events-associated with the injury (falls-,burns, water contact ) On the basis of the conductivities /resistivties of various body tissues ,the consequences of the injuries could be inferred. The resistivity of the body is estimated to be between five hundred to one thousand ohms, with bones, tendons and fat providing the most resistant to electric current.

Nerves, blood vessels, mucus membranes and muscles were the best conductors. With regards to electrical burns, the cross sectional areas were inversely proportional to tissue damage. Therefore small areas such as ball and socked or hinge  joints receive maximal injuries .The current pathways plays an important  role in determining injury with a vertical being more dangerous than a horizontal hand to hand pathway. Skeletal muscles were usually stimulated into tetany by currents with frequencies of forty to one hundred and ten Hetz.Most low and high tension electrical currents are AC.AC produces tetany and the locked on phenomenon although tetany occurs in all muscles that are stimulated, the flexor muscle groups are usually strongly and more predominantly affected. As a result an individual’s grasp is uncontrollably locked onto an object, which could increase the length of time that the current passes through the body and may result in greater injury. In contrast, DC current tends to produce a single large muscular contraction that often throws the child away from the source, they often involve adventurous outdoor cases as demonstrated in our editorial cases.Cardipulmonary arrests and comas were very rare, if ever observed. At low voltages AC injuries had three times the morbidity and mortality rates as DC current injuries. However, at high voltages both AC/DC produce similar effects. Electrocutions by lightening injuries were not accurately reported injuries and as such accurate statistics were lacking .Occasionally, the presentations were so subtle that the correct diagnosis may be missed entirely.  Low voltage electric injuries without loss of consciousness and/or arrest were the injury patterns most described for infants and young children who bite into electrical cords of common household domestic appliances or in older children during the repair of household appliances, neurological sequelae such as global comatose encephalopathies, transverse myelitis and peripheral neuritis were the most frequently encountered defects in most cases ,cardiac arrhythmias ,myoglobunuria ,hyperkalaemia ,renal cortical, renal tubular  necrosis and renal insufficiencies were commonly associated complications. Electrical energy is perceptible to the touch at a current as low as 12 mA. A narrow range exists between perceptible current and the “let go” current:, the maximum current at which a person can grasp and then release the current before muscle tetany makes it impossible to let go.The symptomatologies associated with the physico-chemical effects of electrical currents of different strengths, yields, interesting diagnostic, prophylactic and therapeutic data.

Pins, needles and Tingling sensations occur at a current between one to four milliamperes.The “let go” current for the average child is three to five Milliamperes, this is well below the fifteen to thirty Amperes of common household circuit breakers .For adults, the “let go” current is six to nine milli-Amperes, slightly higher for men than for women at a Let-go current- for women of six to eight milli-Amperes. And a Let-go current for Men of seven to nine milli-Amperes, skeletal muscle tetany occurs at sixteen to twenty milliamperes. Respiratory muscle paralysis occurs between twenty to fifty milli-amperes and ventricular fibrillation can occur at currents of fifty to one hundred and twenty milli-Amperes. These clinico-pathophysiologic correlative aspects of electrical injuries were illuminated upon in 2002. by Koumbouris in his scholarships on electrical injuries.

 

So in conclusion, this article is of prospective health importance, given the occasional covert presentations of some cases of electrical injuries, electrical circuitry related catastrophes must be excluded in all cases of sudden syncope and sudden cardiac arrest, especially when preceded by a scream due to involuntary contraction of the chest muscles.

Though this presumption is achieved with a case series, if these speculations  were extrapolated further, it seems that there is a tendency that most cases of severe electrical injuries in teenagers and adults could lead to cardiac dysfunctions where as in children a global cerebral dysfunction may be the rule

A lot of cases could have been unreported or managed peripherally either by orthodox means or otherwise detailed information regarding the specifics of the associated injuries which has major impacts on the work ups, management and outcomes were vitally important factors in determining the outcome of these cases.

 

Given the occasionally hypothetical or proven paradoxical outcomes of some cases of electrical injuries a basic evaluation of all cases which could very easily be proposed in most settings is warranted which could imply the application of a long strip twelve lead electrocardiogram (ECG) or rhythm strip, complete blood counts (CBCs). In addition to biochemical profiles and muscle enzymologies .Urine examination and urinalysis for haemoglobunurias, myoglobunurias as a minimum investigative workup, because deaths from ARF were known to occur even with supposedly minor voltage incidents, also age specific deterrent options should be proffered.. [4]

 

This is all aimed towards the preservation and perfection of the artistic and scientific medical knowledge through the advancement of fellowship of Medicine.

 

With this notes we welcome you to this edition of Classics and Revisits in Scientific Medicine.

 

Dr.Emmnauel Onyekwelu.

Honorary Editor in Chief &Publisher.

Classics and Revisits in Scientific Medicine.

 

 

 

 

A                                                                             B

 

 

References

 

[1]-Editorial for Classics Revisits Sci. Med.  2018; 5(1) ———————————–

 

 

[2]-An Exploratory OBSERVATIONAL and Problem Solving PRE- Experimental Study. On Achieving The Diagnosis Of Probable Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome or Congenital Nephritic Syndrome Through A Retrospective Historical Charting And Chronicles OF the Earliest Timing Of the Onset OF Symptomatologies OF placentomegaly, effusive disease in neonates, Infants or Children with The Triad OF Hypoalbuminaemia, Proteinurias And Oedema. (Especially Those Subsets With Steroid –Non Responsive or recidivist Oedema And Proteinuria) Is Prognostically And Prophylactically Rewarding Since Their Specific Diagnostic And Therapeutic Interventions Remarkably Differs. ——————————————————————————-

 

[3]-A Combined evaluative Explanatory Survey With Meta-Content Analysis For Several Subsets of Periodic Paralysis. On The Occasional Very Deleterious Impact Of Transient Periodic Paralysis Overlapping With Unclassifiable Paroxysmal Events OR Chronic Fatigue Syndrome (Fibromyalgia) Supports The Use Of An Indepth Clinical Pathological Electrophysiological Evaluations Of Cases With Thyroid Dysfunctions, Migranous Cephalgias with or without Neurological Sequelae For Compatible Features.——————————————

 

 [4]-An informative mix of education and novel Data from

Naturalistic Inquiry, Participant Observation, structured Interviews And Documentary Content Analysis in addition to Media analysis on

Illustrative instructive Epitomes of the range/and impact of electric shock related injuries. The age gender and seasonal differential variations in the pathophysiological effects of different intensities of electric current suggests the role of environmental ,genetic, humoral, hormonal, metabolic, constitutional idiosyncratic factors and pathological states in the diathestic predispositions to electrical injuries and electrocutions.———————————————————–

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ISSN: 0796-191X                      Classics Rev. Sci. Med.  Neonatology.Vol 5, No,1

                                                                                                                                                              

The Classics and Revisits in Scientific Nephrology VOLUME 5 ISSUE 1

 

 

Original Action Document Research and OBSERVATIONAL         PRE-             Experimental Studies.                                                                                                           

 

Exploratory Observational and Problem Solving Pre- Experimental Study. On Achieving The Diagnosis Of Probable Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome or Congenital Nephritic Syndrome Through A Retrospective Historical Charting And Chronicles Of the Earliest Timing Of the Onset Of Symptomatologies Of Placentomegaly ,Oedema In Infant Children with The Triad Of Hypoalbuminaemia, Proteinurias And Oedema. (Especially Those Subsets With Steroid –Non Responsive or recidivist disease) Is Prognostically And Prophylactically Rewarding Since Their Specific Diagnostic And Therapeutic Interventions Remarkably Differs.

 

ABSTRACT

 

Introduction:

 

Congenital nephrotic syndrome is a disorder of autosomal recessive trait characterized by the development of nephrotic syndrome at the time of or shortly after birth. It occurs with highest frequency in families of Finnish ancestry or extraction Affected individuals have gross placentomegaly, low birth weight, anasarca, polycytheamia, and an initially normal GFR.Alpha fetoprotein levels are increased in amniotic fluid and maternal serum. Proteinuria is usually very heavy and very unselective.Nephrotic syndrome appearing several months after birth is usually due to other causes, especially minimal change disease or focal glomerular sclerosis. Congenital TORCHES infections spectrum could produce similar syndrome and should be excluded.Pathologically, microcystic transformation of the cortical nephrons, due to proximal tubular dilatation is found.Glomerular changes are nonspecific .Extensive effacement of the focal foot processes and sclerosis of the glomerular tufts are seen by electron microscopy.Immunoflouresence findings are either negative or nonspecific.

 

The course is progressive, and few patients survive the first year of life. Death is usually due to inanition, infection, or renal failure. All forms of treatment have been ineffective. A few patients may survive long enough to be considered for renal transplantation.

 

Methodology:

 

Original Action Document Research and Observational Pre- Experimental Studies.

 

Results:

 

Although previously, a lot of the pathogenesis of CNS were Enigmatic speculative and its diagnostic and therapeutic interventions empirical

Exponentially, several informative novel diagnostic and therapeutic directing genetic data on CNS are getting increasingly more and more available, globally,

However, it may take some time before this is widely available in several settings and circumstances.The need to circumvent rapid progression to end stage renal insufficiency makes the employ and application of an appropriate index of suspicion with diagnostic and therapeutic directing focused selective historical, clinical and prophylactic interventions expedient in most circumstances and settings.

 

Discussion:

 

Although Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome which implies nephrotic syndrome in the first three months of life is most common in the Nordic region especially Finland, where the pathology is described as microcystic disease,however,other types with minimal lesion histology, diffuse mesangial sclerosis or related to the tubulo-interstitial nephritis congenital syphilis were occasionally seen, described and reported sporadically in the global medical literature.These Finnish types are now more frequently seen in the descendants of other European communities and the condition is inherited in an autosomal recessive fashion.

Oedema is noted in the first weeks of life with placentomegaly and prematurity being common precursors. There is no specific treatment but transplantation could be considered if survival is longer than eighteen months to twenty four months. Elevated amniotic fluid alpha fetoprotein, if the fetus is affected, allows prenatal diagnosis.

Nephrotic syndrome is defined by the association of marked proteinuria less than one grammes per metre squared  per day associated with a hypoalbuminaemia of less than two and a half grammes per deciliters. A nephrotic syndrome is called congenital if it presents within the first three months of life, this definition is based on the natural history of the Finnish type, the most common type of nephrotic syndrome in new born infants. Previously, congenial nephrotic syndrome is a rare uniformly fatal renal disorder which is often observed in multiple siblings in a single family.An autosomal recessive inheritance has been suggested on the basis of the 1973 article on this theme by Burke & Others, on Familial nephrotic syndrome. Reviews on the Aetiopathogenesis of Congenital Nephrosis suggests that.the pathogenesis is unknown .A fundamental immunologic incompatibility between the mother and the infant is perhaps responsible, since mothers reject skin grafts of these nephrotic infants more rapidly than control mothers reject grafts of normal infants. Evidence of the immune injuries to the kidneys relates to the finding of gammaglobulin and complement components on the glomerular loops. This was buttressed by the 1972 data from the genetic and immunological studies in congenital nephrosis by Conwald and McIntoch.

 

On the Finnish Type of Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome, the Clinical Presentation and Laboratory Findings for The Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome Finnish Type (CNF) infers the incidence of congenital nephrotic syndrome was estimated at about one and one fifth of ten thousand births in Finland. Epidemiological data on this theme was provided by Huttunen from his scholarship on congenital nephrotic syndrome of Finnish type following a study of about seventy five patients in 1976.

Low birth weight with an obstetrics history of large placenta, wide cranial sutures, delayed ossification, and oedema are commonly noted at birth .The edema, however, may be apparent  only after the first few weeks or months of life.Anarsarca follows, and the abdomen is distended by ascites .

Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome should be suspected if there is a history of Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome in a sibling, hydrops fetalis or oedema of the placenta (i.e a placental weight of more than twenty five percent) birth weight or an elevated alpha-fetoprotein or total protein concentration in the amniotic fluid.

Huttunen in 1976, remarked that since the disease begins in utero in all patients, an increased alpha-fetoprotein more than 10 standard deviations above the mean amniotic fluid concentration during the second trimester) is a reliable indicator of the disease. The natural history of the disease is based on experience before the availability of renal transplantation   in young patients. Histriographically, several natural history data on CNF exists, Huttunen in 1976,

Huttunen, Vehaskari, Vihikari et al in 1980

and Norio and  Rapola scholarships data on .Congenital and infantile nephrotic syndromes in the .Genetics of kidney disorders by Bartsocas in 1989.

The mean gestational age was about thirty five to thirty seven completed  weeks  and two of five of the infants were premature of less than thirty seven completed gestational age.

Many of the infants were of small for gestational age (SGA), especially those that attained a gestational age of or above thirty seven completed gestational age.

Massive proteinuria associated with typical nephrotic serum protein electrophoresis and hyperlipidaemia is the rule.Haematuria is not uncommon.

If the patient lives long enough, progressive renal failure occurs. Most affected infants succumb to infections at the age of a few months.

In some patients, the typical signs of nephrotic syndrome such as oedema, proteinuria, and hypoalbuminaemia did not develop until the third month of life.

The evolution of the disease was not affected by the administration of steroids or cytotoxic medications.

Complications included severe failure to thrive and ascites in all patients, severe bacterial infections in eighty five percent, pyloric stenosis in twelve percent, and thrombotic events in ten percent. .An increase in P-creatinine or Blood Urea Nitrogen (BUN) was observed in approximately twenty percent of the patients, but none had frank ureamia. One-half of the patients died by the age of six months, and all of them by four years of age. The immediate cause of death appeared to be infection in one third.

Autopsy revealed thrombi in large vessels in about nineteen percent .Since this early report aggressive management has considerably improved the survival rate.

The Laboratory Features For The Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome Finnish Type (CNF)Indicates that  the proteinuria which was initially very selective and usually almost entirely albumin as a result of increased permeability of the glomerulus only for small proteins, increases progressively and becomes nonselective, corresponding to an increased filtration and sieving co-efficients and to tubular   damage.

In 1980, Proteinuria in congenital nephrotic syndrome of the Finnish type was tackled by Huttunen, Vehaskari and Vihikari et al.  

The chemical pathological profile is significant for low serum albumin concentration and total thyroxine concentration as a result of low thyroxine binding globulin, a normal or mildly elevated P creatinine and hyperlipidaemia.

Ultrasonography reveals enlarged kidneys, increased echogenicities of the renal cortex compared to the liver and the spleen, decreased differentiation between the renal cortex and the renal medulla, and poor visualization of the pyramids.

The ultrasonic features of the congenital nephrotic syndrome of the Finnish type. Was discussed in 1989 by Lanning, Uhari and Kolivanen K, et al.

Tubular   dilatations may be misinterpreted as other causes of cystic disease, including Autosomal Recessive Polycystic Kidney Disease. [ARPKD]

In addition to other scholarship endvours by Bratton, Ellis and Seibert  on the  Ultrasonic findings in congenital nephrotic syndrome in  1990.

The diagnosis is confirmed at renal biopsy.

The Histopathological Findings in Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome. Finnish Type (CNF)

The kidneys are pale and large and may show microcystic dilatations of the proximal tubules and glomerular changes.

 The latter consist of proliferation, crescent formation, and thickening of capillary walls.

Although the basic defect in congenital nephrotic syndrome is unknown, the pathologic findings are characteristic and pathognomonic.

Glomerular changes were seen by scanning electron microscopy in human fetuses at thirteen to twenty four weeks. of gestational age. In 1983 Atiuo-Harmainen and Rapola seminally discussed and disseminated their data on the thickness of the glomerular basement membrane in congenital nephrotic syndrome of the Finnish type.

Renal biopsy in infancy reveals irregularities of the glomerular basement membranes and thinning of the lamina densa. According to this data of Atiuo-Harmainen and Rapola

followed by fusion of the epithelia; cells foot processes, all of which were similar to the findings in minimal- change, steroid-sensitive nephrotic syndrome.

On light microscopy, the mature glomeruli initially typically   show only minimal abnormalities, including mild mesangial hyper-cellularity and an increase in mesangial matrix.

Immature-appearing glomeruli demonstrates a dilated urinary space surrounding   a small glomerular tuft .Progressive changes include obliteration of capillary loops ,and glomerlar hyalinization .Immune deposits become visible by electron microscopy within the mesangium only at late stages of the disease.

Except in the early stages, the biopsy frequently shows dilated tubules from both proximal and distal origin, such as was seen in microcystic disease .Although these cystic changes were used by some neonatologists as diagnostic criterion, they were not pathognomonic and have caused some confusion in the differential diagnosis.

Although the aetiology of the tubular dilatation is unknown, it has been attributed to heavy proteinuria.

Following the immnohistochemical and ultra structural studies of Rapola, Sariola and Ekblom on the .Pathology of fetal congenital nephrosis: in 1984.

Progressive interstitial fibrosis and tubular atrophy develop, the latter is well correlated with increasing proteinuria.

This aspect was confirmed by Huttunen in his 1976 scholarship entitled congenital nephrotic syndrome of Finnish type: study of seventy five patients.

 

On the Treatment and Prognosis for the Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome Finnish Type (CNF)

Although supposedly, routine therapeutic interventions for nephrosis has nothing to offer. Prevention and effective management of urinary tract infections are important immunosuppressive such as cyclosporine A appeared to extend renal function for a period.

Infants with congenital nephrotic syndrome require intensive management, which includes repetitive administration of albumin and diuretics for ascites, oral and parenteral hyper- alimentation and the treatment of multiple complications. Chronic renal insufficiency develops between the sixth and the twenty third months of age.

As a consequence most patients eventually receive dialysis whilst waiting for transplantation.

All reported infants treated before the availability of renal transplantation died, mostly of infections.

In one report, of the seventeen patients who received renal transplantation, the two year patient and graft survival rates were eighty two percent and seventy one percent respectively.

Recurrence of nephrotic syndrome was not observed after transplantation. Most infants had a normal or accelerated growth, although the mean height remained significantly lower than normal. Although sixteen of seventeen had delayed psychomotor development at the time of transplantation, marked improvement was evident one year later, and twelve of fifteen surviving children had normal school and social performance for children ranged from early  preschool age to late adolescent period.

Disappointingly, even though some infants with congenital nephrotic syndrome were found to have minimal change disease on biopsy, the application of corticosteroid and cyclophosphamide therapy proved unrewarding.

However, thereafter pharmacotherapeutic interventions with Indomethacin and Captopril were tried with noteworthy success, in this way the disease progressions were thought to be attenuated and several candidates were assisted from progression to renal transplantation.

Other causes of congenital nephrotic syndrome and differential diagnostic considerations other than Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome of the Finnish Type. (CNF)

Several pathological and syndromic entities were associated with congenital nephrotic syndromes. An increase in alpha fetoprotein may be observed in these conditions, but this is far less consistent than that which was observed in frank Idiopathic congenital nephrotic syndrome.

Although therapy with corticosteroids and cytotoxic agents invariably has proven ineffective, specific therapy may be available for some subsets such as those related to the congenital TORCHES Complex infections. Classification of a patient into one of the major entities on the basis of aetiology or idiopathy may not be possible, hence such cases were denoted as unclassifiable or unclassified. Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome tantamount to Diffuse Mesangial Sclerosis and Its Other Differentials of The Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome Finnish Type (CNF) and The Drash Syndrome related Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome Compared and Contrasted.

Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome tantamount to Diffuse Mesangial Sclerosis

The second most common cause of congenital nephrotic syndrome is diffuse mesangial sclerosis which appears to be a heterogeneous group.

According to the 1989 data of Norio and Rapola on Congenital and infantile nephrotic syndrome edited by Bartsocas as book chapters of Genetics of kidney disorders the onset may be as late as one year of life. In contrast to Congenital Nephrotic syndrome of the Finnish type, Chronic Renal Failure (CRF) develops rapidly in these patients, and is the major cause of demise in the absence of renal replacement therapy or renal transplantation.

Renal venous thrombosis is a frequent complication .In other instances, in most families, diffuse

Mesangial sclerosis was genomically determined and was transmitted as an autosomal recessive trait.

Histologic examination of the glomeruli demonstrates mesangial cells embedded   in a periodic acid Schiff positive and silver-positive fibrillar network occluding the capillaries.

Although the associated renal tubular changes for this subset were similar to those in the CNFHowever, the accompanying renal interstitial fibrosis for this subset were more pronounced than that encountered in CNF.

The Drash Syndrome related Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome

In some infants, diffuse mesangial sclerosis is part of a Drash syndrome, which also includes ambiguous genitalia, most often male pseudo-haemophrodism (i.e. 46XY karyotype) and Wilms tumour.

A detailed review on the nephropathy associated with male pseudohaemophroditism and Wilms tumour (Drash syndrome): a distinctive glomerular lesion –report of ten cases. Was provided by Habib, Sariola and Gubler et al in 1985.

Patients present between two weeks to thirty-three months of age with or without nephrotic syndrome, sometimes haematuria, often arterial hypertension and progressive CRF leading to ESRD within a few months to two years from the onset. Several patients have presented with incomplete forms of Drash-Syndrome (i.e. only two of the three signs of the triad. In some Dennis-Drash Syndrome, CNF presents in the setting of a child with Wilms’ tumour and hemi hypotrophy without pseudo-haemophroditism.

Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome related to Congenital Infections.

Several authors inferred that nephrotic syndrome due to congenital infection was most commonly seen in congenital syphilis.Histriographic data on this theme exists,

In 1961, Papaioannou, Asrow and Schuknell implicated .Nephrotic syndrome in early infancy as a manifestation of congenital syphilis. .

Where as in 1973, Wiggelinkhuzen, Kaschula and Uys et al approached congenital syphilis and glomerulonephritis with evidence for immune pathogenesis.

in which case the lesion was characterized by epimembranous or proliferative glomerlopathy, with diffuse deposits  of gamma-immunoglobulin and treponemal antigen along  the glomerlar capillaries and sub-epithelial  electron dense deposits.

The condition responds remarkably well to the application of the penicillomic acid derivatives. The congenital nephrotic syndrome associated with congenital toxoplasmosis is also possible but less common than that tantamount to congenital syphilitic leutic disease.

Classic data on .Congenital nephrotic syndrome associated with congenital toxoplasmosis was presented by Shahin, Papadopoupou and Jenis in 1974.

A Parisian scholarship by Couvreur J,Allison F,Coccon-Gibod L,et al. Investigated and discussed the Kidneys and toxoplasmosis in 1984.Entiltled «  Rein et toxoplasmose. », the lesion is characterized by the deposition in the glomeruli of immunoglobulins, complement and Toxoplasma gondi antigen and antibody complexes. It may respond to the administration of pyrimethamine, sulfadiazine and steroids.

Although case reports of congenital nephrotic syndrome in association with congenital cytomegalovirus infection exists, it was inconclusive whether or not the nephrotic process was mediated by or related to the infection, incidentally, co-incidentally, epiphenomenally or not.

In 1986, Neonatal cytomegalovirus infection with pancreatic cystadenoma and nephrotic syndrome was reported and discussed by Amir, Hurvitz and Neeman et al.

Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome related to other miscellaneous aetiological Factors.

Some cases of syndromic and non-syndromic dysmorphisms were associated with congenital nephrotic syndromes, such dysmorphic features included, primary microcephalies related to Cornelia de Lange Syndromes, The Carpenters syndrome,etc, bupthalmos(congenital glaucoma) or disturbances of neuronal neuroblasts migrations including but not confined lissenencephaly, cortical dysplasias and the pachygyrias

Congenital microcephaly, hiatus hernia and nephrotic syndrome: an autosomal recessive syndrome was reported as Birth defects in 1976 by Shapin, Duncan and Fansworth et al.

Robain and Deonna in 1983 included Pachygyria and congenital nephrosis as an association of disorders of migration and neuronal orientation.

This associational entity was further strengthened in 1986 by the scholarship investigations of Palm, Hagerstrand and Kristofferson et al on the theme entitled the Nephrogenesis and disturbances of neuronal migration in male siblings: a new hereditary disorder. Transient cases of congenital nephrotic syndrome have been described related to maternal transmission.

Lagrue , Braneller and  Niauder  et al in 1991,dwelt on the Transmission of nephrotic syndrome to two neonates and its spontaneous regression.

CNS was also related to mercury intoxications (minimata disease.) or the yellow nail patella syndrome associated with lymphoedema congenita.

In 1970; Simila, Vesa and Wasz-Hockert discussed the Hereditary onycho-osteodysplasis (the nail-patella syndrome) with nephrosis- like renal disease in a new born boy.

Reports of one three month old infant with infantile SLE who reportedly had steroid-responsive membranous glomerulopathy and other instructive cases were available.

In 1979, Ty and Fine presented Membranous nephritis in infantile systemic lupus erythematosus associated with chromosomal abnormalities.

The interventions for these secondary Nephrotic syndromes will be contingent on managing the associated pathological process.

 

 

Conclusions:

 

At the present, the main challenge in CNS is to identify the cause of disease for individual patients. To make a definitive diagnosis, with the exclusion of infection related CNS and maternal associated disorders, pathology, family history, inheritance mode, and other accompanying congenital malformations are sometimes, but not always useful indicators for diagnosing genetic CNS.Next-generation sequencing would be a more effective method for diagnosing genetic CNS in some patients, however, there are still some challenges with next generation sequencing that need to be resolved in the future.

 

Unexplained prolonged ill heath in infants with features of renal impairment should be explored for CNS, especially those subsets with recidivists or resistant proteinuria, even if selective given the considerable overlap between the clinicopathological features of CNS and the minimal change disease, as much as would be achievable cases of unexplained sudden infant deaths should have a histopathological examination of  vital end organs ,but especially the kidneys for features suggestive of CNS.

The authors propose that to circumvent ambiguity, and to improve diagnostic accuracy, although not absolutely pathognomonic,that  the nosological histopathological nomenclature of microcystic disease and mesangial glomerular sclerosis  should be borne in mind in the evaluation of these subsets since this is diagnostically, prognostically, prophylactically and therapeutically more encompassing and rewarding compared to a chronologically temporal one  of congenital nephrotic syndrome which might implicate other  nephrotic glomerulopathy such as allergic nephritis or Alports nephritis occurring equally within this period ,but without microcystic tubular dilatations.

 

This shortcoming warrants  retrospective historical inquiry that could offer clues to the earliest onset of oedema ( especially with facial puffiness or pedal oedema which is the most clinically overt of the triad of hypoalbunaemia ,proteinuria and oedema ,this will imply reviews of child’s infant welfare health cards ,weight charts for sudden unexplained earlier weight  gains and urinary colour ,frequency and volume.

Also children with nephrotic syndrome commonly present with abdominal pains which as a result of intestinal bowel oedema, ascites or SBP and respiratory difficulty due to significant pleural effusions, in addition, as a group nephrotic children are prone to a miscellaneous subset of infectious diseases  especially respiratory tract and renal parenchymal infections disease spectrum which may point to a covert CNS, These aspects should be retrospectively enquired and reviewed in all children presently overtly with supposedly innocuous minimal change nephrotic syndrome.

 

In utero Nuchal translucency as a pointer to congenital lymphoedema and in all those cases should be evaluated for, and all cases where this is demonstrated, a search, determination and follow up for other features of congenital nephrotic syndrome should be aimed for, radiologically, pathologically and genetically.

 

The performance of a renal biopsy, at least amongst adults is required for the accurate diagnosis of recidivist nephrotic syndromes and for the formulation of a rational therapeutic interventional plan, however the situation is different for children who need not always be subjected to renal biopsy since careful clinical and non invasive laboratory studies could achieve diagnostic accuracy in several instances of congenital nephrotic or congenital nephritic syndrome.

 

Since considerations for the possibility of congenital nephritic syndrome has been under appreciated.

Blood pressure measurements, blood urea nitrogen .urinalysis and twenty four hour urinary outputs if routinely undertaken in this age group would identify those cases in the nephritic range of this congenital glomerulopathy with the opportunity for earlier intervention and the probability of a more favourable prognosis.

 

MAIN TEXT

 

The Classics and Revisits in Scientific Nephrology VOLUME 3 ISSUE 3

 

MAIN TEXT:

 

Exploratory OBSERVATIONAL and Problem Solving PRE- Experimental Study on Achieving The Diagnosis Of Probable Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome or Congenital Nephritic Syndrome Through A Retrospective Historical Charting AND Chronicles OF the Earliest Timing OF the Onset OF Symptomatologies OF placentomegaly and  effusive disease in neonates, infants or  Children with The Triad OF Hypoalbuminaemia, Proteinurias And Oedema. (Especially Those Subsets With Steroid –Non Responsive or recidivist disease is Prognostically And Prophylactically Rewarding Since Their Specific Diagnostic And Therapeutic Interventions Remarkably Differs.

 

Background, Introduction and Nomenclature:

 

Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome which Implies Nephrotic syndrome in the first three months of life is most common in the Nordic region especially Finland, where the pathology is described as microcystic disease. Other types with minimal lesion histology, diffuse mesangial sclerosis or related to the tubulo-interstitial nephritis and congenital syphilis were occasionally seen, described and reported sporadically in the global medical literature. These Finnish types are now more frequently seen in the descendants of other Caucasian communities and the condition is inherited in an autosomal recessive trait pattern, with a gene frequency of one in two hundred.Histriographic molecular genetic data on the heredity in congenital nephrotic syndrome produced by Norio has been in existence since 1966. [1]

 

 

 

The Problematic Statement and the Purpose of the Study:

 

The astonishing overlap, association and intertwined complications course between CNF, Congenital Lymphoedema(Milroy’s Syndrome) ,Turners Syndrome,Hypothyrodism and  the Aneuploidy Trisomys,and CNS ,TORCHES complex infectious spectrum, Infantile Beriberi, Oedematous Protein Energy Malnutrition, Congenital Cardiac Defects, Myocarditis  or Congenital infantile Anaemias Related Heart Failures and Malabsorptive Intestinal Failures , weights the overall diagnostic and therapeutic intents towards a high index of suspicion for an early timely specific intervention for Renal Insufficiency in those cases of CNS which could present covertly as these pathological associational entity  or the congenital nephritic syndrome.

.

Methodology:

 

Original Action Document Research and Observational Pre- Experimental Studies.

Reviews on the Aetiopathogenesis of Congenital Nephrosis suggests that

 

Infections, such as congenital syphilis and toxoplasmosis are possible pathogenic agents, especially for those infants conceived and delivered in the regions between the Tropics of Cancer and Capricorn. Infection should be excluded as the cause of CNS before instituting the investigations for genetic CNS, because it is important for selecting an apposite therapeutic strategy and for long term prognosis in most cases. In the opinion of several investigators, the current main challenge for CNS is how to identify the aetiology of CNS in the individual patient. Establishing a therapeutic strategy is also another major challenge, but it is not the primary difficulty, because it depends on the cause of CNS.For this reason, the objective of most diagnostic and therapeutic protocols will be to compile a list of the possible causes of CNS in a given setting, and  to identify the aetiological factors in their index cases, before the commencement of specific  therapeutic interventions, and also to exclude infectious causes for CNS, such as the TORCHES infections in some patients, before the initiation of therapy.

 

Results and Discussions.

 

Congenital nephrotic syndrome (CNS), presents with heavy proteinuria, hypoalbuminaemia, hyperlipidaemia and edema with presentations in the first three  months of life, besides the genetic and the idiopathic cryptogenic forms it may be caused by, associated  with or related to  congenital syphilis, toxoplasmosis or congenital viral infections (such as cytomegalovirus).However, overall, the majority of CNS cases are caused by monogenic defects of structural proteins that form the glomerular filtration barrier in the kidneys. Congenital nephrotic syndrome as a thematic concept was approached by Jalanko in 2009.

[2]

Whereas, congenital nephrotic syndrome (CNS) defined as nephrotic syndrome (NS) presenting in the first three months of life, is a relatively rare glomerular disease globally compared with infantile nephrotic syndrome (those NS appearing between four to twelve  months after birth) Nephrotic syndrome manifesting after three months of age is called childhood nephrotic syndrome.The rationale for this classification is based on the difference in aetiology.Primary nephrotic syndrome, described as the tetralogy of massive proteinuria, hypoalbuminaemia, hyperlipidaemia and oedema, is the most common glomerular disorder in children, with an incidence of approximately one to three  per one hundred thousand  children less than sixteen years of age.

 

Though a great deal of published evidence has suggested that massive proteinuria by a particular gene defect or pathogen can manifest at various ages through out the life span of  individuals, the clinical features and therapeutic strategies between CNS and later-onset Nephrotic Syndrome (NS) remarkably differs. The approach of the investigators was to explore the possibility of this diagnosis in those cases of compatible congenital nephrotic syndrome on the basis of chronological age of onet,of the symptomatologies, after having excluded the differentials ,complications,comorbidities or epiphenomenal incidental, accidental or co-incidental pathologies of congenital lymphoedema(Milroy’s Syndrome) ,Turners Syndrome, Beriberi, Oedematous Protein Energy Malnutrition, Congenital Cardiac, defects ,Myocarditis  or Anaemia Related Heart Failures, in addition to Malabsorptive Intestinal Failures and Hypothyrodism or Trisomy 21.

 

Demographic Research and the Geographical and Molecular Genetic Epidemiology of CNF of the Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome.

 

The aetiology of CNS is heterogeneous, although genetic defects account for the vast majority of CNS cases.

 

Cil, Besbas, Duzova, TOPAloglu, Peco-Antic, Korkmaz, et al.discussed the Genetic abnormalities and prognosis in patients with congenital and infantile nephrotic syndrome in 2015. [3]

Employing an Australasian cohort In 2007, Wong characterized the biological behavioural  aspects of nephrotic syndrome in  children through a study and analysis of its demographic, clinical features, initial management and outcome after twelve-month follow up as part of the results of a three-year national surveillance study. [4]

Since 1998, an increasing number of genetic defects have been identified and implicated for their involvements in the pathogenesis of CNS, including but not confined to genetic mutations of NPHS1(Nephrin),

Kestila, Lenkerri, Mannikko, Lamerdin, McCready, Putaala et al in 1998 hypothesized, studied and discussed that positionally cloned gene for a novel glomerular protein –nephrin-is mutated in congenital nephrotic syndrome. [5]

The role of NPHS1 (Nephrin) mutations in the aetiopathogenesis of childhood onset nephrotic syndrome as was elucidated and discussed by Philippe, Nevo, Esquivel, Reklaityte, Gribouval, Tete, et al.that Nephrin mutations can cause childhood onset steroid-resistant nephrotic syndrome in 2008 was employed to reaffirm this stance,[6]

 

Geographical and Molecular Genetic Epidemiology of CNF of the Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome.

 

With regards to NPHS2 (Podocin) mutations in CNS, Maruyama, Iijima, Ikeda, Kitamura, Tsukaguchi and Yoshiya et al implicated .NPHS2 mutations in sporadic steroid-resistant nephrotic syndrome in Japanese children in their investigations on this theme of 2003.[7]

In a similar endevour on this theme, in 2004, Weber, Gribouval, Esquivel, Moriniere, Tete, Legendre et al argued and proposed that .NPHS2 mutation analysis demonstrates genetic heterogeneity of steroid-resistant nephrotic syndrome and low post-transplant recurrence. [8]And several molecular epidemiological scholarships on this theme exist.

 

In 2005,Sako , Nakanishi ,Obana ,Yata ,Hoshii ,Takahashi , et al  presented and discussed the Analysis of NPHS1,NPHS2,ACTN4,and WT1 in Japanese patients with congenital nephrotic syndrome . [9]

Lipska, Balasz-Chmielewska, Wasielewski, Vetter, Borzecka, et al. approached Mutational analysis in Podocin associated hereditary nephrotic syndrome in Polish patients with a founder effect in the Kashubian population in 2013. [10]

 

Previous epidemiological scholarships by Mao, Zhang, Du, Dai, Gu, Liu et al identified and dissected NPHS1 and NPHS2 gene mutations in Chinese children with sporadic nephrotic syndrome in 2007. [11]

 

In 2008, Hinkes, Vlangos, Heeringa, Mucha, Gbadegesin, Liu, et al hypothesized and demonstrated that .Specific Podocin mutations correlate with age of onset in steroid-resistant nephrotic syndrome. [12]

 

At the experimental molecular level, Roselli, Heidet, Sich, Henger, Kretzler, Gubler et al demonstrated early Glomerular Filtration Defect and severe renal disease in Podocin –deficient mice in 2004. [13]

 

Previous investigations by Schwarz ,Simons ,Reiser ,Saleem ,Faul and Kriz  et al in 2001.proposed that Podocin a raft-associated component  of the glomerular slit diaphragm ,interacts with CD2AP and nephrin. [14]

 

With regards to the WT1, PLCE1 (NPHS3) and LAMB2 (Laminin-B2) genetic entities.Togawa, Nakanishi, Mukaiyama, Hama, Shima, Nakano, et al. reported and discussed the First Japanese case of Pierson syndrome with mutations in LAMB2.in  2013. [15]

 

The functional diversity of the laminins was approached by Domogatskaya, Rodin, and Tryggvason in 2012. [16]

 

Dietrich, Matejas, Bitzan, Hasmi, Kiraly-Borri, Lin, et al. tackled the Analysis of genes encoding laminin beta2 and related proteins in patients with Galloway-MOWAT syndrome.in 2008. [17]

 

In 2006, Hasselbacher, Wiggins, Matejas, Hinkes, Mucha and, Hoskins et al proposed and discussed that recessive missense mutations in LAMB 2 expand the clinical spectrum of LAMB 2-associated disorders. [18]

 

Also, thereafter, in  2007,Hinkes ,Mucha ,Vlangos , Gbadegesin ,Liu ,Hasselbacher ,et al.hypothesised that pertaining to Nephrotic syndrome in the first year of life that  two thirds of cases were caused by mutations in 4 genes(NPHS1,NPHS2,WT1,and LAMB2) [19]

 

Other scholarships by Chen, Kikkawa and Miner in 2011 proposed that .A missense LAMB2 mutation causes congenital nephrotic syndrome by impairing laminin secretion. [20]

Where as Debiec ,Nauta ,Coulet ,van der Burg ,Guigonis ,Shurmans , et al seminally analysed and presented  the role of truncating mutations in MME gene in Fetomaternal alloimmunisation and antenatal glomerulonephritis.in  2004;.[21]

 

Denamur, Bocquet, Mougenot, Da Silva, Martinat, Loirat, et al demonstrated and published that Mother to-child transmitted WT1 splice-site mutation is responsible for distinct glomerular diseases. [22]Whereas ,Zenker ,Aigner ,Wendler ,Tralau , Mintefering and Fenski ,et al. reported and discussed Human Laminin beta 2 deficiency causes congenital nephrosis with mesangial sclerosis and distinct eye abnormalities in  2004.[23]

 

Other forms of CNS have been associated with maternal systemic lupus erythematosus, mercury poisoning, renal vein thrombosis, and neonatal alloimmunisation against neutral endopeptidase.In 2002, Debeic, Guigonis, Mougenot, Decobert, Haymann, Bensman, et al approached antenatal membranous glomerulonephritis due to anti-neutral endopeptidase antibodies.

[24]

 

Also, Congenital nephrotic syndrome: a novel phenotype of type I carbohydrate –deficient glycoprotein syndrome was introduced and discussed in 1996 by

van der Knaap, Wevers, Monnens, Jacobs, Jaeken .Van Wijk. [25]

 

Geographical and Molecular Genetic Epidemiology of CNF of the Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome.

 

Although the Finnish congenital nephrotic syndrome is a rare disease ,it could have been because it was underreported, but for the other forms of congenital nephrotic syndrome which are geographically more widespread globally ,the confounding  effect of its other differential diagnosis ,in the setting of infections and shared features with other more commonly occurring childhood pathologies  weights  diagnostic policies towards its utmost consideration with a high index of suspicion to facilitate earlier  diagnosis with a more overall positive outcome implications.

 

Huttunen from his scholarship on congenital nephrotic syndrome of Finnish type following a study of seventy five patients in 1976 provided an epidemiological data on this theme which infers that the incidence of congenital nephrotic syndrome was estimated at about one and a fifth per ten thousand births in Finland. [26]

 

Until recently, the biochemical defect in this disease was unknown, but in view of the heavy proteinuria, abnormalities in the glomerular filtration barrier have been suggested. In 1994, using a candidate gene approach to linkage analysis Kestila, Mannikko, and Holmberg et al excluded defects in the genes encoding the type IV collagen chains alpha1-alpha 4; BLe, B2e, and B2t chains of laminin; and the perlecan gene, summarizing and publishing their results as the exclusion of eight genes as mutated loci in congenital nephrotic syndrome of the Finnish type. [27]

In a closely related experimental endevour, in the same year of 1994, using a random mapping approach to linkage analysis, the same group of Kestila et al assigned the gene responsible for Finnish congenital nephrotic syndrome (the CFN gene) to the long arm of chromosome 19 and disseminated a conclusive result that congenital nephrotic syndrome of the Finnish type maps to the long arm of chromosome nineteen. [28]

Furthermore, linkage disequilibrium was demonstrated, suggesting a founder effect owing to a common ancestral mutation in this population.In 1998, Kestilas, Lenkkeri and Mannikko et al as a group identified a gene on which four different mutations segregate with the disease. [5]

The gene encodes a 1241 amino acid transmembrane protein called nephrin, whose function remains unclear.

Genetic linkage analysis undertaken in several families other than Finland or the other Nordic regions in whom DNA extraction from their blood samples were achieved resulted in the locus being mapped to the same region on chromosome 19 as in the Finnish families, suggesting that these non Nordic families share the same disease locus as the Finnish and the other Nordic subsets.Infact the disease was not exclusive to the Scandinavia or those of Irish ancestry, but has been described globally, in other reported cases of CNF from apparently non endogamous or non-consanguineous  families; there were no evidence of consanguinity or Finnish ancestry in any of these families.

Lenkkeri, Mannikko, McCready, Lamerdin ,Gribouval, Niaudet et al. analysed and discussed the Structure of the gene for congenital nephrotic syndrome of the Finnish type (NPHS1) and proffered a characterization of its associated mutations in  1999.[29]

The elevated amniotic fluid alpha fetoprotein, in an affected, fetus  allows prenatal diagnosis.Nephrotic syndrome is defined by the association of marked proteinuria less than one grammes per metre squared  per day associated with a hypoalbuminaemia of less than two and a half grammes per deciliters. A nephrotic syndrome is called congenital if it presents within the first three months of life, this definition is based on the natural history of the Finnish type, the most common type of nephrotic syndrome in new born infants. Congenial nephrotic syndrome is a rare uniformly fatal renal disorder which is often observed in multiple siblings in a single family.An autosomal recessive inheritance has been suggested on the basis of the 1973 article on this theme by Burke & Others, on Familial nephrotic syndrome. [30]

Oedema is noted in the initial weeks of life, with placentomegaly and prematurity being common precursors. There is no specific therapeutic interventions for CNS, but transplantation could be considered if survival is longer than eighteen months to twenty four months. Previous reviews summarized the current knowledge of genetic and non-genetic causality factors for CNS, the rational scheme for molecular sequencing and the current difficulties and challenges. [3]

 

At the moment, the main challenge of Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome (CNS) is to identify the cause of disease for individual patients. To make a definitive diagnosis, with the exclusion of infection-related CNS and maternal-associated disorders, pathology, family history, inheritance mode, and other accompanying congenital malformations are sometimes, but not always useful indicators for diagnosing genetic CNS.

Next generation sequencing would be a more effective method for diagnosing genetic CNS in some patients, however, there are still some challenges with next-generation sequencing that need to be resolved in future.

The pathogenesis is unknown .A fundamental immunologic incompatibility between the mother and the infant is perhaps responsible, since mothers reject skin grafts of these nephrotic infants more rapidly than control mothers reject grafts of normal infants. Evidence of the immune injuries to the kidneys relates to the finding of gammaglobulin and complement components on the glomerular loops. This immunopathology was buttressed by the 1972 data from the genetic and immunological studies in congenital nephrosis by Conwald and McIntoch. [31]

 

The Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome Finnish Type [CNF]

 

On the Clinical Presentation of the   Finnish Type of Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome,

 

The relative rarity of the classically typical CNF, both within the Nordic regions and elsewhere infers that there would be paucity of data regarding this pathological entity, as investigations were confined to case series compromising statistical power.

 

Most infants with CNF will present within the first five weeks of life, most at birth Details of the pregnancy, may be available in up to one half of cases, in about one third  of the cases, the course of the pregnancy would be entirely innocuous. In about one of twenty, prenatal isolated frank proteinuria was present in the very terminal period of the pregnancy, in another one of twenty, microscopic and frank haematuria, and proteinuria in addition to hypertensive disease in pregnancy were associated features towards term.

 

The mean gestational age was usually about thirty six completed weeks (ranging from twenty nine and half to forty one and half weeks of gestation) and the mean birth weight was two and four fifths kilogrammes with a range of one and two thirds to three and four fifths kilogrammes about one in five of the cases will have a low birth weight of less than two and half kilogrammes. The placentas will reveal pronounced placentomegaly with placental weight of about one thousand grammes or more, with relatively pronounced placentomegaly of between thirty nine to fifty percent of the newborns total birth weight.

 

The natural history of the disease is based on experience before the availability of renal transplantation   in young patients. Histriographically, several natural history data on CNF exists, Huttunen in 1976, [26]

Huttunen, Vehaskari, Vihikari et al in 1980. [32] and Norio and Rapola scholarships data on .Congenital and infantile nephrotic syndromes in the .Genetics of kidney disorders by Bartsocas in 1989. [33]

The mean gestational age was about two fifty six days  and two of five  of the infants were premature of less than thirty seven completed gestational age.Many of the infants were of small for gestational age (SGA), especially those that attained a gestational age of or above thirty seven completed gestational age.

Affected infants are usually born early (at about thirty five to thirty eight weeks), showing signs of fetal distress, and are below gestational weight for age. Low birth weight with an obstetrics history of placentomegaly (which accounts for more than a quarter of the babies weight, low bridged nose, widely separated cranial sutures, delayed ossification, with large widely spaced anterior and posterior fontanel’s and oedema are commonly noted characteristics features at birth of  CNF infants.

Morgan, Postlethwaite and Savage in 1981 detailed on the congenital structural abnormalities, stigmata and dysmorphology in children with congenital nephrotic syndrome (Finnish Form) [34]

Most cases are oedematous at birth or develop typical features within the first week .Some form of dropsy of any recognized clinical character was the most frequent presenting feature.

 

Clinical Pathological Correlates for The Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome Finnish Type (CNF)

 

Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome should be suspected if there is a history of Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome in a sibling, hydrops fetalis or oedema of the placenta (i.e a placental weight of more than one in four of the infant’s birth weight or an elevated alpha-fetoprotein or total protein concentration in the amniotic fluid.

Huttunen in 1976, remarked that since the disease begins in utero in all patients, an increased alpha-fetoprotein more than ten standard deviations above the mean amniotic fluid concentration during the second trimester) is a reliable indicator of the disease. [26]

Since, the Finnish congenital nephrotic syndrome is an extremely severe disease of early childhood, prenatal diagnosis is often requested by families who have previously had an affected child .A raised alpha fetoprotein concentration in the amniotic fluid caused by fetal proteinuria has been used to identify those at risk, but this is not a test for a specific marker, and could only be performed after the fifteenth week.

An increase in maternal serum alpha fetoprotein could also be used as a less sensitive general screening method. In 1993, Ryynanen, Seppala, Kuusela, et al discussed prenatal screening for congenital nephrosis in Finland by maternal serum alpha-fetoprotein. [35]

For a comprehensive overview see the seminally disseminated classic scholarships of Seppala, Rapola, and Huttenen et al.of 1976 on congenital nephrotic syndrome: prenatal diagnosis and genetic counselling by the estimation of the amniotic fluid and maternal alpha-fetoprotein. [36]

On the basis of the 1997 scholarships of Mannikko, Kestila and Lenkkerri et al,

Improved prenatal diagnosis of Finnish congenital nephrotic syndrome, based on DNA analysis of chorionic villus tissue, is now achievable. [37]

 

Results of subsequent linkage and haplotype analyses can reduce the risk of false positive diagnosis based on alpha fetoprotein concentrations alone.

The identification of the mutated gene in congenital nephrotic syndrome of the Finnish type will allow for accurate prenatal and carrier detection in those at risk without the need for unduly undirected family studies and will provide valuable insights into the mechanisms of proteinuria and glomerular function. Common haplotypes of markers have been described in both Finnish and the non-Finnish affected families suggesting that one or two ancestral mutations account for most cases of the Finnish congenital nephrotic syndrome. Currently, there are several studies examining additional markers in the non-Scandinavian families in an attempt to define a common haplotype in these families, which might further narrow down the region of interest and accelerate the cloning of the CNF gene.

 

Although the renal function of the affected infants on presentation is usually normal or mildly impaired for the first six months, but the babies fail to thrive and are particularly prone to infection and thromboembolism.The florid features of nephrotic syndrome commonly predominate and appears early, proteinuria is typically severe at about more than twenty grammes per litre, when the serum albumin is corrected to more than fifteen grammes per litre  and associated with pronounced hypoalbuminaemia at less than ten grammes per litre  at presentation. The edema, however, may be apparent only after the first few weeks or months of life.Anarsarca follows, and the abdomen is distended by ascites.These clinicopathological aspects were eloquently discussed by

Holmberg, Laine, Ronnholm, et al in their scholarships on the congenital nephrotic syndrome. [38]

Massive proteinuria associated with typical nephrotic serum protein electrophoresis and hyperlipidaemia is the rule. Up to thirty nine grammes per twenty four hours has been recorded .The minimal range being about two grammes per twenty four hours, which was also invariably associated with severe oedema and ascites and reflected a low serum albumin level.Haematuria, is not uncommon. If the patient lives long enough, progressive renal failure occurs. Most affected infants succumb to infections at the age of a few months. In some patients, the typical signs of nephrotic syndrome such as oedema, proteinuria, and hypoalbuminaemia did not develop until the third month of life.The evolution of the disease was not affected by the administration of steroids or cytotoxic medications. Other recognized features include hypothyroidism, seizures, umbilical hernia. bony deformities and developmental delays.

The Laboratory Features For The Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome Finnish Type (CNF)

 

This indicates that  the proteinuria which was initially very selective and usually almost entirely albumin as a result of increased permeability of the glomerulus only for small proteins, increases progressively and becomes nonselective, corresponding to an increased glomerular filtration  co-efficients in addition  to tubular   damage. In 1980, Proteinuria in congenital nephrotic syndrome of the Finnish type was tackled by Huttunen, Vehaskari and Vihikari et al.  [3D]

 

The chemical pathological profile is significant for low serum albumin concentration and total thyroxine concentration as a result of low thyroxine binding globulin, a normal or mildly elevated P creatinine and hyperlipidaemia.Since infection is a common complication, blood cultures and latex particle agglutinations tests if antimicrobials have been employed, in addition to other advanced electronic pathogen detection techniques should be applied in a rigorous algorithm , some series have reported an incidence of one in twenty  of streptococcal pneumoniae spontaneous bacterial peritonitis, Haemophilus influenzae meningitis and pseudomonas septicaemia in addition to other polymicrobial septicaemic processes.Hypothyrodism related to urinary loss of thyroid binding globulin in the urine may warrant thyroid replacement therapy.

 

An increase in P-creatinine or Blood Urea Nitrogen (BUN) was observed in approximately one in five of the patients, but none may have frank ureamia.

Children, who survive this early complications progress to renal failure and, without treatment, die in their early childhoods.Hallman, Norio, Kouvalainen in 1976 highlighted the classically typical salient features and clinical course of the congenital nephrotic syndrome Finnish type. [39]

 

Ultrasonography:

 

The  scholarship endvours by Bratton, Ellis and Seibert  on the  Ultrasonic findings in congenital nephrotic syndrome in  1990.[39]suggests that ultrasonography reveals enlarged echogenic kidneys, increased echogenicities of the renal cortex compared to the liver and the spleen, decreased differentiation between the renal cortex and the renal medulla (with loss of  corticomedullary distinction), and poor visualization of the pyramids. As a seminal data, the ultrasonic features of the congenital nephrotic syndrome of the Finnish type was previously presented and discussed in 1989 by Lanning, Uhari and Kolivanen K, et al. [40]

 

The diagnosis of CNF could be reaffirmed at renal biopsy demonstrating the characteristic irregular dilatation of proximal convoluted tubules (microcystic disease)

Tubular   dilatations may be misinterpreted as a sequelae of other causes of cystic disease, including Autosomal Recessive Polycystic Kidney Disease. [ARPKD]

Although the aetiology of the tubular dilatation is idiopathic- cryptogenic, it has been attributed to heavy proteinuria. On the basis of the data from the immnohistochemical and ultra structural studies of Rapola, Sariola and Ekblom on the .Pathology of fetal congenital nephrosis: in 1984. [41]

Progressive interstitial fibrosis and tubular atrophy develop, the latter is well correlated with increasing proteinuria. These aspects were confirmed by Huttunen in his 1976 scholarship entitled congenital nephrotic syndrome of Finnish type a study of 75 patients. [26]

 

Findings in Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome. Finnish Type (CNF)

 

In CNF, there is usually pallid nephromegaly, which may be accompanied by proximal tubular microcystic dilatations and glomerulopathy. There is proliferation of the glomerulus, crescent formation, and thickening of the capillary walls. For a long time, although the basic defect in congenital nephrotic syndrome is somewhat elusive, the pathologic findings are characteristic and almost pathognomonic. Glomerulopathy could be demonsrated by scanning electron microscopy in human fetuses as early as thirteen to twenty four weeks. of gestational age. In 1983 Atiuo-Harmainen and Rapola seminally discussed and disseminated their data on the thickness of the glomerular basement membrane in congenital nephrotic syndrome of the Finnish type. [42]

According to this data of Atiuo-Harmainen and Rapola, renal biopsy in infancy reveals irregularities of the glomerular basement membranes and thinning of the lamina densa. Followed by fusion of the epithelia cells of the foot processes, all of which were similar to the findings in minimal- change, steroid-responsive nephrotic syndrome. On light microscopy, the mature glomeruli initially typically   show only minimal abnormalities, including mild mesangial hyper-cellularity and an increase in mesangial matrix.

Immature-appearing glomeruli demonstrates a dilated urinary space surrounding   a small glomerular tuft .Progressive changes include obliteration of capillary loops ,and glomerlar hyalinization .Immune deposits become visible by electron microscopy within the mesangium only at the later stages of the disease. Except in the early stages, the biopsy frequently shows dilated tubules of both proximal and distal origin, such as was seen in microcystic disease .Although these cystic changes were used by some neonatologists as diagnostic criterion, they were not pathognomonic and have been contentiously discussed with regards to its other  diagnostic differentials.[42]

 

THE MOLECULAR GENETIC STUDIES FOR CONGENITAL NEPHROTIC SYNDROME FINNISH TYPE.

 

GENETIC LINKAGE ANALYSIS:

 

The advent of specific genomic data for CNF has revolutionized its diagnostic accuracy and precision.

Many of the hereditary diseases that have recently been analysed at a molecular level have revealed genetic heterogeneity. At least two loci have been identified for adult polycystic kidney disease (PKD1 and PKD2) and Alport syndrome (COL4A5, COL4A3, and COL4A4) In the Nordic families, the CNF locus was mapped to chromosome 19q13.113. Fairly more recent data on this theme has emerged. In 1996, Mannikko, Lenkerri and Kashtan et al undertook a haplotype analysis of congenital nephrotic syndrome of the Finnish type in non-Finnish families and eminently disseminated their results. [43]

 

Ideally, the genetic linkage analysis for Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome Finnish Type were apposite in those families with one affected index case and one unaffected family member to be employed as a control, however occasionally, some of the affected children may not have an unaffected sibling, or in other instances, the index case may not have a living sibling at all, making achieving rigorous results of genetic analysis of inheritance of chromosome nineteen markers flanking known in CNF locus seven daunting. Several research genetic laboratories could proffer flanking microsatellite oligoprimers .Polymerase chain reaction (PCR) could be employed to amplify the polymeric region in a reaction volume of ten microlitres containing twenty five nano grammes DeoxyRiboNucleic Acid, The Polymerase Chain Reaction products could be separated by electrophoresis in a six percent denaturing polyacrylamide gel and visualized by autoradiography.

This localization and focalization of the CNF gene to chromosome nineteen has also been confirmed recently in populations of non-Finnish ancestry.

Fuchshuber, Niaudet and Gribouval et al in 1996 demonstrated and discussed congenital nephrotic syndrome of the Finnish type and its linkage to the locus in a non-Finnish population. [44]

 

The Computation of Lod Scores

 

Genetic heterogeneity in the Nordic families could be  searched for by the performance of linkage analysis using microsatellite markers on chromosome 19.Because linkage disequilibrium had been demonstrated in the Nordic families with the markers D19S220 and D19S224, recombination events with these markers in any of the Nordic families would suggest heterogeneity. Using five polymorphic microsatellite markers in this region, the disease gene could be  mapped to the same area on chromosome 19 as in the Nordic families, with a maximum Lod score of 2.6.This demonstrates a further non-Nordic population in whom the disease has been mapped to chromosome 19 consistent with locus homogeneity.

Lod scores and Alleles scores could be calculated using the MLINK program from the computer package LINKAGE. An achievement of a positive Lod scores with all the five markers using two point linkage analysis would raise the Lod score up to 2.60 between the markers D19S224 and D19S422.

For a user friendly programme see the Easy calculations of lod scores and genetic risks on small computers by Lathrop and Lalouel of 1984. [45]

There may be no evidence of a common haplotype with these markers to indicate linkage disequilibrium. Family pedigrees could demonstrate haplotypes for markers D19S416, D19S224, D19S220, D19S422 and D19S223.

 For interpretative clarity, the two point linkage analysis between disease gene and chromosome 19 markers could be depicted in an illustrative tabular form.

Fairly recently in 2013, Gbadegesin, Winn and Smoyer presented and discussed .as a seminal theme, the genetic testing in nephrotic syndrome with its overall challenges and opportunities. [46]

 

Complications of the Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome (Finnish Type)

 

Complications of CNF included severe to profound failure to thrive and universal ascites, severe bacterial infections in about eight to nine of ten instances, hypertrophic obstructive pyloric stenosis in one of eight instances, and thrombotic events in one of ten cases in addition to cerebral palsy, hemiplegia and seizures in about one of twenty instances respectively. Thrombotic complications were particularly common, troublesome and affect a large number of children with CNF, in most series advanced neuroimaging of the cerebral cytoarchitechtonics   revealed and identified evidence of intracerebral lesions shortly after birth, suggesting intrauterine cerebral thrombosis. Neurological complications   were most prominent topographically as eloquent spastic cerebral palsy, unilateral hemiplegia and polygraphic seizures. Also asymptomatic pelvic veins thrombosis demonstrated at the point of transplantation, in addition to principal tributary venous system thrombosis related to venous catheterizations in about one of twenty cases respectively were associated pathologies of concern It is becoming more and more popular and acceptable that these sets as a group should receive anticoagulation, preferably heparanisation during the neonatal period and warfarinization thereafter. Other complications worthy of consideration in CNS were related to transplantation, especially hypercouagulability, adult type acute respiratory distress syndrome, primary aspiration pneumonitis and host versus graft disease in addition to the multisystemic pathological impact of transplantation related immunosuppression.

 

Differential Diagnostic Considerations for Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome.

 

Congenital Lymphoedema ,Milroy’s Disease, Turners and Noonans Syndrome, Hypothyrodism (cretinism) and the aneuploidy Trisomys are differential diagnostic pathological entities of CNF worthy of exploring to exclude CNF.

 

The myxoedema of Cretinism and its anthropometrical stigmata mimics those of CNF and in itself, cretinism could present with congenital nephrotic syndrome.

When Trisomys 21, Turners and Noonans syndromes are associated with Congenital structural cardiac defects they could be complicated by biventricular congestive cardiac failures with dropsy and mimics very closely the CNS/CNF.

The umbilical hernias and other dysmorphology of Trisomy 21 very easily parallel those of CNS and CNF.

 

On the Therapeutic Interventions and Prognosis for the Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome Finnish Type (CNF)

 

Although supposedly, routine therapeutic interventions for nephrosis has very little to offer. Prevention and effective management of urinary tract infections are important prophylactic therapeutic considerations.Disease modifying Immunosuppressives such as cyclosporine A appeared to extend renal function for a period. Infants with congenital nephrotic syndrome require intensive management, which includes early repetitive administration of albumin supplementation to replace the renal losses, and diuretics for ascites, nutritional support with enteral and parenteral hyper- alimentation, multiple essential multivitamin and micronutrients, thyroxine replacement and the treatment of multiple complications especially related to infective and thrombo-embolic pathological factors will encourage the achievement of a steady state at the first instance..

 

The application of a twenty percent albumin solution to deliver three to four kilogrammes of albumin intravenously, initially in two divided doses of three to four hours duration ,and later as a single overnight infusion over six to eight weeks .A loop diuretic such as frusemide is usually given at a dose of one half milligrammes per deciliter  with the albumin infusion .Nutrition is supplemented  with nasogastric or gastrotomy tube feeding delivering one half milliliters per Kilogrammes of four grammes per kilogrammes  protein each day and dietary fat manipulation ,this regimen is followed by bilateral nephrectomy at the age of six to ten months , and peritoneal dialysis leading to improvements in feeding and growth ,which allow the child to reach a weight  and body size( usually  eight  to ten kilogrammes) at which  renal transplantation can be successful .Angiotensin converting enzyme inhibitors such as captopril and Indomethacin to diminish urinary protein loss has  been a successful alternative to bilateral nephrectomy in  a few selected series.

The aim of the generic interventional approach is to sustain nutrition and growth so that children can tolerate bilateral nephrectomy at twelve months of age, with the sequential management of renal failure with cycling peritoneal dialysis until a suitable weight and size for renal transplantation is achieved.

 

In 1995, Pomeranz, Wolach, Korzets and Bernhiem following their therapeutic trial reported and discussed the successful management of Finnish congenital nephrotic syndrome with Captopril and Indomethacin. [47]

Chronic renal insufficiency develops between the sixth and the twenty third months of life. On this basis, most candidates will eventually receive dialysis whilst waiting for transplantation. All reported infants treated before the availability of renal transplantation died, mostly of infectious complications. In one report, of the patients who received renal transplantation, the twenty four months patient and graft survival rates were eight to nine of ten and three of four cases respectively.

 

Recurrence of nephrotic syndrome was not observed after transplantation. Most infants had a normal or accelerated growth, although the mean height remained significantly lower than normal. Although sixteen of seventeen had delayed psychomotor development at the time of transplantation, marked improvement was evident twenty four months after, and twelve of fifteen surviving children had normal school and social performance (range thirty months to eighty four months of age)

Discouragingly, even though some infants with congenital nephrotic syndrome were found to have minimal change disease on histopathology, the application of corticosteroids or disease modifying drugs such as cyclophosphamide or cyclosporine A therapy proved unrewarding.

However, thereafter pharmacotherapeutic interventions with Indomethacin and Captopril were tried with noteworthy success, in this way the disease progressions were thought to be attenuated and several candidates were assisted from progression to the need for a renal transplantation.

 

Most children surviving within the initial six to twelve months would have undergone bilateral nephrectomy before eighteen months. Although staged nephrectomy was initially very fashionable and popular there appears to be no evidential proof of its superior benefit. In most series about one of seven of the cases overall may meet the specific criteria to progress to renal transplantation through bilateral nephrectomy.In most dedicated renal transplantation units, the twelve month graft survival following renal transplantation was computed at about  three of four  to eight to nine of ten cases, however these figures appears to be improving with the perfection of the selection criteria of  the appropriate transplantation candidates, in addition to operative and postoperative immunosuppressive techniques.Peri-operative deaths were estimated at about one in ten cases. With improvements in immunosuppressive approach, graft rejection was negligible at about one in twenty cases and this figure appears to be getting more and more diminutive with an enhanced lucid comprehension of the immunopathology of transplantation rejection. With the recent improvement in the comprehension of the immunopathology of transplantation related rejection, more and more children with CNF are sustaining the first and repeat transplantations from donor siblings and recidivist renal transplantations rejections are getting less frequent to being a thing of the past.

 

Denovo infective and  immune related nephrotic syndrome of a disparate and divergent  aetiopathological entity of undetermined prognostic significance which were occasionally reported perturbations in the grafted kidney were commonly reported as relating to a post  transplantation upper respiratory tract infection, in these instances,masangial proliferative glomerulonephritis rather than evidence of recurrent disease of mesangial sclerosis were the most commonly demonstrated histopathological phenomenon at renal biopsy.

Fortunately, these cases were satisfactorily responsive to renal replacement therapy, with encouraging graft response. Even massive proteinurias more than two and half grammes  per twenty four  hours several months after transplantation resolved satisfactorily with an augmentation of the steroid or disease modifying drugs pharmacotherapeutic regimens including Cyclosporine A with no relapse at follow ups.

 

Other causes of congenital nephrotic syndrome and differential diagnostic considerations other than Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome of the Finnish Type. (CNF)

Several pathological and syndromic entities were associated with congenital nephrotic syndromes. An increase in alpha fetoprotein may be observed in these conditions, but this is far less consistent than that which was observed in frank Idiopathic congenital nephrotic syndrome. Although therapy with corticosteroids and cytotoxic agents invariably has proven ineffective, specific therapy may be available for some subsets such as those related to the congenital TORCHES Complex infections. Classification of a patient into one of the major entities on the basis of aetiology or idiopathy may not be possible, hence some of such cases were denoted as unclassifiable or unclassified.

 

A reasonably recent data on the clinicopathological correlations of congenital and infantile nephrotic syndrome over two decades was achieved by Kari, Montini, Bockenhauer, Brennan, Rees and Trmpter et al in 2014. [48]

 

 

 

 

Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome tantamount to Diffuse Mesangial Sclerosis and Its Other Differentials of The Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome Finnish Type (CNF) and The Drash Syndrome related Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome Compared and Contrasted.

 

Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome (Tantamount to Diffuse Mesangial Sclerosis.

 

The second most common cause of congenital nephrotic syndrome is Idiopathic Cryptogenic diffuse mesangial sclerosis which appears to be a heterogeneous histopathological group.

According to the 1989 data from the book chapters of Norio and Rapola on Congenital and infantile nephrotic syndrome edited by Bartsocas in the book Genetics of kidney disorders the onset CNS may be as late as twelve months of life. In contrast to Congenital Nephrotic syndrome of the Finnish type, Chronic Renal Failure (CRF) develops rapidly in these patients, and is usually the major cause of demise in the absence of renal replacement therapy or renal transplantation. Renal venous thrombosis is also another frequent complication In other instances, in most families, diffuse mesangial sclerosis was genomically determined and was transmitted as an autosomal recessive trait.

 

Histologic examination of the glomeruli demonstrates mesangial cells embedded in a periodic acid Schiff positive and silver-positive fibrillar network occluding the capillaries.

Although the associated renal tubular changes for this subset of CNS were similar to those in the CNF with regards to dilatations and microcystic deformations, However, the accompanying renal interstitial fibrosis for this subset were more eloquent and florid than that encountered in CNF.These aspects were further analysed in the book chapters of Norio and Rapola on Congenital and infantile nephrotic syndromes in the book Genetics of kidney disorders edited by Bartsocas and published. by Alan Liss in 1989. [33]

In addition to the scholarships of Habib, Gubler, Antignac and Gagnadoux on Diffuse mesangial sclerosis as a congenital glomerulopathy with nephrotic syndrome of 1993. [49]

The performance of a renal biopsy, at least amongst adults is required for the accurate diagnosis of resistant or recidivist nephrotic syndromes and for the formulation of a rational therapeutic interventional plan, however the situation is different for children who need not always be subjected to renal biopsy since careful historical, clinical and non invasive laboratory studies could lead to accurate diagnosis in several instances,

 

 

 

 

 

 

The Differential Diagnostic Considerations worthy of inclusion for the Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome Tantamount to Diffuse Mesangial Sclerosis.

 

Since in CNS, pathlogically, microcystic transformation of the cortical nephrons due to proximal tubular dilatation is demonstrated, and the glomerular changes nonspecific, the extensive effacement of the podocytes and sclerosis of the glomerular tufts demonstrated by electron microscopy non pathognomonic,in addition to the negative or non-specific immunological findings makes the probable differential diagnostic considerations in CNS  extensive.

 

Given this clinico-pathological conundrum, other causes of primary and secondary nephrotic syndrome should be considered, in the appropriate clinicopathological settings such as, but not confined to:

 

[I]-The histopathological features of Nephrotic syndromes from Primary glomerular Diseases.

 

+Minimal change diseases (could also be associated with allergy.

 

+Mesangial proliferative glomerulonephritis (including Berger’s Disease (IgA nephropathy).

 

+Focal and segmental glomerulosclerosis.

 

+Membranous proliferative glomerulosclerosis.

 

+Membrano-proliferative glomerulonephritis.Types I, II & III.

 

+Other uncommon lesions such as Crescentic glomerulonephritis, Focal, segmental and other unclassifiable lesions.

 

+Also worthy of differential diagnostic considerations will be the nephrotic syndrome secondary to other diseases such as The Post Streptococcal Glomerulonephritis, endocarditis shunt nephritis, secondary syphilis, leprosy, hepatitis B, infectious mononucleosis ,malaria,schistosomiasis and filiariasis.

 

+Drugs use in mother or infant such as organic gold, inorganic and elemental mercury, penicillamine, street heroin, probenecid, captopril, tridione  ,mesantoin,perchlorate,antivenom ,antitoxins and contrast media are equally worthy of consideration from the aetiological points of views.

 

+Neoplastic conditions such as Hodgkin’s disease, lymphomas, leukaemias, carcinomas, melanomas and Wilms tumour should be considered in the infantile periods.

 

+Multisystemic Disorders:

 

Systemic lupus erythromatosus, Honech-Scholein purpura, vasculitis, Good pastures syndrome, dermatomyositis, dermatitis, herpetiformis, amyloidosis, sarcoidosis Sjogrens syndrome and rheumatoid arthritis.

 

+Heredofamilial diseases such as Diabetes mellitus, Alports syndrome, sickle cell disease, Fabrys disease, nail-patella syndrome, lipodystrophy in addition to congenital nephrotic syndrome itself.

 

Miscellaneous :

 

Cor Pulmonale, neonatal and infantile thyroiditis, cretinism, malignant infantile obesity, renovascular hypertension, chronic interstitial nephritis with vesicoureteric reflux, allograft rejections and bee stings.

 

The Dennis-Drash Syndrome related Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome.

 

In some infants, diffuse mesangial sclerosis is part of a Drash syndrome, which also includes ambiguous genitalia, most often male pseudo-haemophrodism (i.e. 46XY karyotype) and Wilms tumour.A detailed review on the nephropathy associated with male pseudohaemophroditism and Wilms tumour (Drash syndrome) as a distinctive glomerular lesion and a report of ten cases was provided by Habib, Sariola and Gubler et al in 1985. [50]

 

Commonly, patients present between two weeks to thirty-three months of age with or without nephrotic syndrome, sometimes haematuria, often arterial hypertension and progressive CRF leading to ESRD within a few months to two years from the onset. Several patients have presented with incomplete forms of Drash-Syndrome (i.e. only two of the three signs of the triad. In some Dennis-Drash Syndrome, CNS presents in the setting of a child with Wilms’ tumour and hemi hypertrophy without pseudo-haemophroditism.

 

Frasier syndrome showing splice mutations in Wilms tumor gene (WT1) Intron. .

 

Eminent data from Fujita, Sugimoto, Miyazawa, Yanagida, Tabata and Okada, et al. in 2010 reported and discussed a female infant with Frasier syndrome showing splice mutations in Wilms tumor gene (WT1) Intron. . [51]

 

Congenital nephrotic syndrome in epidermolysis bullosa congenita.

 

Another association worthy of consideration and discussion is that between congenital nephrotic syndrome and epidermolysis bullosa congenita.

 

In the year 2000, Kambham, Tanji, Seigle, Markowitz, Pulkkinen and Uitto et al demonstrated, reported and discussed congenital focal segmental glomerulosclerosis associated with beta 4 integrin mutations and epidermolysis bullosa. [52]

 

Thereafter, Nephrotic syndrome and aberrant expression of laminin isoforms in glomerular basement membranes in an infant with Herlitz junctional epidermolysis bullosa was presented and reviewed by Hata, Miyazaki, Seto, Kadota, Muso, Takasu, et al.in 2005.[53]

 

The respiratory chain deficiency related congenital nephrotic syndrome.

 

Also the respiratory chain deficiency could present as congenital nephrotic syndrome. A case study of respiratory chain deficiency presenting as congenital nephrotic syndrome was demonstrated , reported and discussed by Goldenberg, Ngoc, Thouret, Cormier-Daire, Gagnadoux, Chretien, et al. in 2005.[54]

 

Fairly recently in 2010, Machuca, Benoit, Nevo, Tete, Gribouval, Pawtowski, et al. analysed and discussed the genotype-phenotype correlations in non-Finnish congenital nephrotic syndrome. [55]

 

Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome related to Congenital Infections.

 

Reviews on the Aetiopathogenesis of Congenital Nephrosis suggests that

infections, such as congenital syphilis and toxoplasmosis are possible pathogenic agents, especially for those infants conceived and delivered in the regions between the Tropics of Cancer and Capricorn. Infection should be excluded as the cause of CNS before instituting the investigations for genetic CNS, because it is important for selecting an apposite therapeutic strategy and for long term prognosis in most cases. In the opinion of several authors, the current main challenge for CNS is how to identify the aetiology of CNS in the individual patient. Establishing a therapeutic strategy is also another major challenge, but it is not the primary difficulty, because it depends on the cause of CNS.For this reason, the objective of most diagnostic and therapeutic protocols will be to compile a list of the possible causes of CNS in a given setting, and circumstance, to identify the aetiological factors in their index cases, before the commencement of specific  therapeutic interventions, and also to exclude infectious causes for CNS, such as the TORCHES infections in some patients, before the initiation of therapy.

 

Syphilitic (Luetic Disease)

 

Anecdotally, for a long time congenital syphilis has been implicated as a causative factor for CNS. Several Asiatic epidemiological surveys on these themes exists, but this is probably lacking in several other emerging settings. Although, syphilitic (leutic disease) is a commonly occurring pathological entity in several tropical settings. Way back in 1993, Niemsiri undertook an epidemiological field survey on congenital syphilitic nephrosis and there after reported and seminally disseminated his results. [56]

Several authors inferred that nephrotic syndrome due to congenital infection was most commonly seen with congenital syphilis.Histriographic data on this theme exists, In 1961, Papaioannou, Asrow and Schuknell implicated nephrotic syndrome in early infancy as a manifestation of congenital syphilis. [57]-

 

In a very closely related academic endevour several decades after in 2005, Vachvanichsanong, Mitarnun, Tungsinmunkong and Dissaneewate studied and discussed congenital and infantile nephrotic syndrome in Thai infants and implicated congenital syphilitic leutic disease as a causative factor.[58]

 

Where as in 1973, Wiggelinkhuzen, Kaschula and Uys et al approached congenital syphilis and glomerulonephritis with evidence for immune pathogenesis in which case the lesion was characterized by epimembranous or proliferative glomerlopathy, with diffuse deposits  of gamma-immunoglobulin and treponemal antigen aligned along  the glomerlar capillaries and sub-epithelial  electron dense deposits. The condition responds remarkably well to the application of the penicillomic acid derivatives.Histriographically, several data on this aetiological associational entity exists notably but not confined to those of Kaplan, Wiglesworth, Marks and Drummond of 1972 on the glomerulopathy of congenital syphilis as an immune deposit disease. [59]

 

In another related scholarship, in 1973.Wiggelinkhuzen, Kaschula and Uys et al studied and discussed congenital syphilis and glomerulonephritis with evidence for immune pathogenesis in its aetiology.Further epidemiological surveys by Lago and Garcia on Congenital syphilis as an emerging emergency also in Brazil in the year 2000 infers that Nephrotic syndrome in congenital syphilis generally appears between two to three months of age. [60]

Corroborating the age of incidence range proposed by the previous epidemiological surveys of Niemsiri et al on this pathological associational entity. [56]

In addition to the 1973 data of Wiggelinkhuzen, Kaschula and Uys et al on congenital syphilis and glomerulonephritis with an evidence for immune pathogenesis. [61]

Paraphrasing the excerpts from the histriographic data of Suskind, Winkelstein and Spear of 1973 on. Nephrotic syndrome in congenital syphilis, the extent of clinical renal involvement may vary from microscopic haematuria through nephritic syndrome to more significant features, such as frank nephrotic syndrome. [62]

Vachvanichsanong, Mitarnun, Tungsinmunkong and Dissaneewate on their scholarship on congenital and infantile nephrotic syndrome in Thai infants of 2005 reported a two and half percent prevalence of congenital syphilis that caused congenital nephrotic syndrome amongst four hundred and fifty five neonates or infants in Thailand. [58]

Lago and Garcia on the basis of their scholarship on congenital syphilis as an emerging emergency also in Brazil of the year 2000 demonstrated that

Membranous nephropathy is a common histopathological feature in renal biopsy, with immune deposits in the region of the glomerular basement membrane, this observation implicates the immune system in the pathogenesis of syphilis-associated CNS. [60]

 

If the diagnosis was made early, the prognosis is good because antimicrobial therapy, usually penicillomic acid derivatives, is curative, provided that irreversible renal lesions have not developed. Neonates with congenital syphilis may present with fever, hepatosplenomegaly, persistent rhinitis, neurosyphilis, hepatitis, anaemia, erythematous patches with superficial bullae or desquamations. These could co-exist with the CNS. Timely therapeutic interventions with penicillomic acid derivatives could be curative in several forms of syphilitic leutic disease including CNS as a group.

 

Toxoplasmosis:

 

Congenital nephrotic syndrome associated with congenital toxoplasmosis is also possible but less common than that tantamount to congenital syphilitic leutic disease.Beale ,Strayer ,Kissane and Robson  reported .Congenital glomerulosclerosis and nephrotic syndrome in two infants and discussed its Speculations and pathegenesis in 1979 .These infants who had extensive glomerulosclerosis manifested by nephrotic syndrome ,severe oliguria, and progressive renal failure.Both patients had intrauterine infections.Therefore the screening for congenital toxoplasmosis infection is necessary for high-risk CNS infections.[63]

 

Fan ,Zhang and Wang et al presented and reported one case of congenital nephrotic syndrome secondary to congenital toxoplasmosis in 2005 ,this case was that oa 3-month-old girl presented with massive proteinuria ,anarsarca ,hypoalbumnaemia and positive serum antibody IgM for toxoplasmosis .Her mother also presented with positive serum IgM antibody to toxoplasmosis.After treatment with spiramycin  for three weeks ,the patient became negative for proteinuria,and serum toxoplasmosis  IgM antibody titre will vanish simultaneously .[64]

Classic histriographic data on this theme of congenital nephrotic syndrome associated with congenital toxoplasmosis was provided in 1974 by Shahin ,Papadopoulou and Jenis.[65]

 

A Parisian scholarship by Couvreur ,Allison ,Coccon-Gibod ,et al. Investigated and discussed the implication of the kidneys in toxoplasmosis in 1984.Entiltled «  Rein et toxoplasmose. », the renal  lesion is characterized by the deposition in the glomeruli of immunoglobulins, complement and Toxoplasma gondi antigen and antibody complexes. It may respond to the administration of pyrimethamine, sulfadiazine and steroids. [66]

This reported was corroborated by other future reports by Roussel ,Pinon ,Birembaut ,Rullier and Pennaforte  et al in 1987 on Congenital nephrotic syndrome associated with congenital toxoplasmosis,which was that  of a one month old infant presenting with congenital toxoplasmosis  associated with nephrotic syndrome and microscopic hemmaturia,in this case percutaneous renal biopsy demonstrated a diffuse mild increase in mesangial cells and matrix,but immunoflorescence was negative.[67]

So toxoplasmosis is a possible cause of nephrotic syndrome ,with the majority of cases being associated with congenital infection. Haskell ,Fusco ,Ares and Sublay reported and discussed disseminated toxoplasmosis presenting as symptomatic orchitis and nephrotic syndrome.in  1989 .[68]

 

Cytomegalovirus Inclusion Disease:

 

Although previous histriographic case reports of congenital nephrotic syndrome in association with congenital cytomegalovirus infection exists, it was inconclusive whether or not the nephrotic process was mediated by or related to the infection, incidentally, co-incidentally, epiphenomenally or not as was epitomized by the reports of the observations of Frishberg, Rinat, Feinstein, Becker-Cohen, Megged, Schlesinger on Mutated Podocin manifesting as CMV-associated congenital nephrotic syndrome of  2003.[69]

 

However, several sporadic associations of neonatal cytomegalovirus (CMV) infection and CNS that were also reported lends weight to the causality of this associational entity. In many cases, diffuse mesangial sclerosis (DMS) in histology is often found and the patients clearly respond to gangiclovir therapy.

 

Besbas, Bayrakci, Kale, Cengiz, Akcoren, Akinci, et al.presented and discussed Cytomegalovirus-related congenital nephrotic syndrome with diffuse mesangial sclerosis in 2006. This report described CNS associated with cytomegalovirus infection in a 2-month -old girl.

Histopathological examination on her renal biopsy demonstrated diffuse mesangial sclerosis and cytomegalovirus inclusion bodies in the tubular cells and in some glomeruli.Cytomegalovirus (CMV) Polymerase Chain Reaction (PCR) titer in the serum was high .Remission of pulmonary and renal symptoms was achieved with gangiclovir in three weeks. No recurrence of proteinuria was observed during the fourteen month follow up period. Their findings suggested a causal relationship between congenital nephrotic syndrome and CMV infection.

[70]

In 1986, Neonatal cytomegalovirus infection with pancreatic cystadenoma and nephrotic syndrome was reported and discussed by Amir, Hurvitz and Neeman et al. [71]

However, thereafter, fairly more recent data was provided in 1993 by

Batisky, Roy and Gaber which reaffirmed congenital nephrotic syndrome and neonatal cytomegalovirus infection as a clinico-pathological association.

[72]

Nevertheless, however, Frishberg et als report of this girl with CNS associated with CMV infection; and histological findings on renal biopsy suggested a causal relationship between CNS and CMV infections.However, since she was subsequently found to be a homozygous for a nonsense mutation in the NPHS2 gene encoding Podocin (R138X), which is the true cause of her CNS.So when specific antiviral treatment is not effective in the patient with cytomegalovirus infection and CNS, one should consider other causes of CNS, especially the genetic factors.[73]

 

Other infectious Pathogens.

 

Congenital Rubella

 

Also, furthermore; rare infants with CNS associated with congenital rubella have been described. Histriographic classic scholraship on this associational pathological entity was proffered by Esterly and Oppenheirmer in 1969 on the pathological lesions due to congenital rubella. [74]

In a similar research endevour, Menser, Robertson, Dorman, Gillespie and Murphy in their 1967 scholarship with compilation, itemization, enumeration and annotated discussions dissected the renal lesions in congenital rubella.  [75]

 

Human Immunodeficiency Virus:

 

So also the Human Immunodeficiency virus could present with congenital nephrotic syndrome. About two of five of all HIV infected children in the North America present with renal complications. Massive proteinuria and nephrotic syndrome usually appear in children older than one year of age, some affected infants have been reported.In 1998, Attolou, Bigot, Ayivi and Gninafon presented and discussed the renal complications associated with human acquired immunodeficiency virus infection in a population of hospital patients at the Hospital and University Centre in Cotonou. Benin Republic. [76]

 

Bhimma, Purswani and Kala on the basis of their observational results on the investigations of Kidney disease in children and adolescents with perinatal HIV-1 infection.in 2013 proposed that severe proteinuria is more prevalent in African children. [77]

Where as the 2012 scholarships of Ramsuran, Bhimma, Ramdial, Naicker, Adhikari and Deonarain, et al approached the spectrum of HIV-related nephropathy in children. [78]

Although ,anecdotally, frank CNS cases caused by HIV infection is rather presumptive, however it is axiomatic that bye and large that this associational entity remains a very plausible diagnostic consideration in newborns and young infants within this age range.This pathological associational  link could be a possibility  on the basis of the extrapolations from the inferences of the scholarships of Attolou, Bigot, Ayivi and Gninafon on the renal complications associated with human acquired immunodeficiency virus infection in a population of hospital patients at the Hospital and University Centre in Cotonou.of 1998.

[79]

In addition to those of Glacomet, Erba, Di Nello, Colett, Vigano and Zuccotti on proteinuria in paediatric patients with human immunodeficiency virus infection.of 2013. [80]

And the 1987 collective approach to the types of renal disease in the acquired immunodeficiency syndrome by Rao, Friedman and Nicastri. [81]

In addition, several other scholarships on this associational pathological entity are becoming increasingly more and more available.

 

Hepatitis B Virus.

Although more common in children, Hepatitis B virus-related nephropathy could occur at any age including the neonatal period. Already, there are several existing scholarships on this aetiopathological associational theme.Appel presented viral infections and the kidney with relevance to HIV, hepatitis B, and hepatitis in 2007. [82]

Where as fairly recent literature on an International Data Analysis in Hepatitis B virus-associated nephropathy was achieved by Khedmat and Taheri in 2010. [83]

 

Differential Diagnostic Considerations for the Parainfectious or Post infectious Nephrotic Syndromes.

 

Infantile Beriberi, Oedematous Protein Energy Malnutrition, Congenital Cardiac Defects, Myocarditis or Congenital and Infantile Anaemia Related Heart Failures and Malabsorptive Intestinal Failures are important considerations for the infectious related congenital nephrotic syndrome,the consideration of other commonly occurring infections and infestations are of utmost importance in tropical countries especially in helminthic and malaria endemic regions, with the possibility of congenital and infantile malaria complicated  by anaemic heart failure and glomerulonephropathy.

 

The congenital nephrotic syndrome is a recognized complication of Plasmodium malariae infestation, (here the histopathological feature is an intermediate dimorphism between a membranous glomerulonephritis and a glomerulosclerosis) where as congenital nephritic syndrome is a probability in acute Plasmodium falciparium infection. (here the histopathological finding is that of a (membranoproliferative glomerulonephritis)

 

Also helminthic hookworms infestations with (Strongyloides stercoralis, Necator americanus and Ancylostoma deudenale) which cause severe anaemia, and intense dropsy through continual blood and albumin dissipation with heavy worm load will be other major differential diagnostic concerns with those children with historical notes of dropsy.

 

The case for application of steroids for the management of congenital nephrotic syndrome in affected children with Strongyloides stercoralis infection is one of major concern, since this has been known to be associated with disseminated strongyliodiasis which is known to translocate bacterial pathogens systemically.

 

Dropsy is a constant feature of the micronutrient and macronutrient deficiency of oedematous protein energy malnutrition (Kwashiorkor and marasmic kwashiorkor) and the micronutrient deficiency of wet cardiac decompensated Beriberi (thiamine-vitamin B1 deficiency) Both the cyanotic and the acyanotic congenital cardiac defects and congenital and infantile anaemias of diverse aetiological origins could be complicated by dropsy related to cardiac insufficiency or albumin loss mimicking CNS.

 

 Current Challenges for infection-related CNS.

 

However using the present diagnostic procedure of temporal coincidental, incidental or epiphenomenal approach, to the diagnosis of infection related CNS, the incidence of infection-related CNS may be over-estimated. Cytomegalovirus as a probable pathogen implicated in the pathogenesis of congenital nephrotic syndrome was discussed by Besbas, Bayrakci, Kale, Cengiz, Akcoren and Akinci, et al in their reports on Cytomegalovirus-related congenital nephrotic syndrome with diffuse mesangial sclerosis in   2006.[70]

 

Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome related to other miscellaneous aetiological Factors.

 

Syndromic and non-syndromic dysmorphisms were associated with congenital nephrotic syndromes,

 

Some cases of syndromic and non-syndromic dysmorphisms were associated with congenital nephrotic syndromes, such dysmorphic features included, primary microcephalies related to Cornelia de Lange Syndromes, The Carpenters syndrome,etc, bupthalmos(congenital glaucoma) or disturbances of neuronal neuroblasts migrations including but not confined to lissenencephaly, cortical dysplasias and the pachygyrias.Congenital microcephaly, hiatus hernia and nephrotic syndrome as an autosomal recessive syndrome were reported as birth defects in 1976 by Shapin, Duncan and Fansworth et al.[84]

Robain and Deonna in 1983 included Pachygyria and congenital nephrosis as an association of disorders of migration and neuronal orientation in their annotated compilation. [85]

This associational entity was further strengthened in 1986 by the scholarship investigations of Palm, Hagerstrand and Kristofferson et al on the theme entitled the nephrogenesis and disturbances of neuronal migration in male siblings: a new hereditary disorder. [86]

Transient cases of congenital nephrotic syndrome have been described related to maternal transmission.Lagrue, Braneller and Niauder et al in 1991, detailed on the Transmission of nephrotic syndrome to two neonates and its spontaneous regression.[87]

 

Mercury intoxications (minimata disease.)

 

Anecdotally, CNS was also related to mercury intoxications (minimata disease.) [88]

 

 

 

 

The nail patella syndrome

 

Or the yellow nail patella syndrome associated with lymphoedema congenita.

In 1970; Simila, Vesa and Wasz-Hockert discussed the Hereditary onycho-osteodysplasis (the nail-patella syndrome) with nephrosis- like renal disease in a new born boy. [89]

 

The nail patella syndrome is an autosomal dominant disorder .linked to the ABO blood groups and characterized by dystrophic nails, absence of one of patellae, iliac horns and renal disease. Previously recognized renal manifestations of the nail patellae syndrome includes, isolated proteinuria and haematuria and the congenital nephrotic syndrome. Progressive renal failure is relatively uncommon .Glomerular lesions by light microscopy are non-specific, but electron microscopy reveals a characteristic moth-eaten appearance of the glomerular basement membrane associated with intramembranous collagen fibrils. The prognosis is generally favourable .No treatment is known to be effective as such.

Further reviews on the nephropathy of the nail-patella syndrome was proffered by Bongers , Gubler , Knoers scholarships on Nail-Patella Syndrome  an Overview on clinical and molecular findings of  2002.[90]

 

The association of the nail-patella syndrome with the congenital nephrotic syndrome lends weight to the need to explore the all cases of suspected CNS for abnormal dermatoglyphics features.

 

Systemic lupus erythematosus associated with chromosomal abnormalities.

 

Case reports of one three month old infant with infantile SLE who reportedly had steroid-responsive membranous glomerulopathy and other instructive cases were available. In 1979, Ty and Fine presented Membranous nephritis in infantile systemic lupus erythematosus associated with chromosomal abnormalities. [91]

 

Renal vein thrombosis

 

Histriographically, renal vein thrombosis was proposed as an   aetiological factor for congenital nephrotic syndrome [92]

In 1971, Alexander, and Campbell approached and discussed congenital nephrotic syndrome and renal vein thrombosis in infancy. Axiomatically, just like it is a known aetiological factor for neonatal, earlier infancy, later infancy, childhood and adult nephrotic syndromes. As a seminal investigational topic, the nephrotic syndrome and renal vein thrombosis. Was tackled by Kaplan, Chesney and Drummond in 1978. [93]

 

 

 

 

Previous PROGNOSIS for CNF.

 

In early years, the prognosis of CNF was poor, with most children dying within the first year of life, predominantly from sepsis.

One-half of the patients died by the age of six months, and all of them by four years of age. The immediate cause of death appeared to be infection in one third. Autopsy revealed thrombi in large vessels in about one in five instances.

Since this early report aggressive management has considerably improved the survival rate.

Historically, all children died, usually within the first six months of life, but now with aggressive treatment an extended survival can be achieved.

This chronologically progressively increasing positive outlook for these groups of children was presented and discussed by Holmberg, Antikainen Ronnholom, Ala-Houhala and Jalanko in 1995 in their scholarships on the management of congenital nephrotic syndrome of the Finnish type.[94]

 

Current Medical interventions have positive Implications on Prognosis.

 

All children are now treated initially with daily intravenous albumin infusions. Nutrition is supplemented with nasogastric or gastorostomy tube feeds high in energy and protein. All children are anticougulated routinely with warfarin after the neonatal period. Early bilateral nephrectomy is used to prevent the massive urinary protein losses. After dialysis and subsequent renal transplantation many of these children have now achieved an excellent quality of life and good long term prognosis. However, more and more reports of successful management of congenital nephrotic syndrome with prolonged survival without renal replacement therapy are becoming more and more available. Fairly recent reports on this promising outlook was achieved by Wong, Morris and Kara on Congenital nephrotic syndrome with prolonged renal survival without renal replacement therapy of 2013. [95]

 

The interventions for these secondary Nephrotic syndromes will be contingent on managing the associated pathological process.

 

Of equal importance in the management of these patients is the screening and intervention for infective complications, which complicates the clinical course and the therapeutic responsiveness of both CNF and CNS, by inciting an exacerbating additional immunopathological pathway in addition to a prolonged proteinuria resolution time.In the authors experience the presence of infections in general, but specifically especially urinary tract infections confounds the interventions for this subsets in several  ways, besides the delayed the proteinuria resolution time until these infections were managed with the appropriate antimicrobial therapy,urinary tract infections confounds the accurate estimations of the urine dipstick examinations for proteinuria ,erythrocyturias and glycosurias.Equally,during infective events, the serum protein levels and the urinary selectivity ratios and coefficients are disturbed through the liberation of  increased amounts of  gamma globulins ,complements and specific and non-specific acute phased proteins associated with infectious,parainfectious or postinfectious events.

Also, the several complications of infections and septicemias yielded end vital organs and blood haemostatic disturbances which retarded the stabilization of these patients towards complete recovery.

 

CONCLUSIVE REMARKS&Recommendations.

 

At the present, the main challenge in CNS is to identify the cause of disease for individual patients. To make a definitive diagnosis, with the exclusion of infection related CNS and maternal associated disorders, pathology, family history, inheritance mode, and other accompanying congenital malformations are sometimes, but not always useful indicators for diagnosing genetic CNS.Next-generation sequencing would be a more effective method for diagnosing genetic CNS in some patients, however, there are still some challenges with next generation sequencing that need to be resolved in the future.

 

Unexplained prolonged ill heath in infants with features of renal impairment should be explored for CNS, especially those subsets with recidivists or resistant proteinuria, even if selective given the considerable overlap between the clinicopathological features of CNS and the minimal change disease, as much as would be achievable cases of unexplained sudden infant deaths should have a histopathological examination of  vital end organs ,but especially the kidneys for features suggestive of CNS.

 

The nosological histopathological nomenclature of microcystic disease should be borne in mind in the evaluation of these subsets since this is diagnostically, prognostically, prophylactically and therapeutically more encompassing and rewarding compared to a chronologically temporal one  of congenital nephrotic syndrome which might implicate other  nephrotic glomerulopathy such as allergic nephritis or Alports nephritis occurring equally within this period ,but without microcystic tubular dilatations.

 

This shortcoming warrants  retrospective historical inquiry that could offer clues to the earliest onset of oedema (such as placentomegaly ,but  especially with facial puffiness or pedal oedema which is the most clinically overt of the triad of hypoalbunaemia ,proteinuria and oedema ,this will imply reviews of child’s infant welfare health cards ,weight charts for sudden unexplained earlier weight  gains and urinary colour ,frequency and volume.

 

Also children with nephrotic syndrome commonly present with abdominal pains which as a result of intestinal bowel oedema, ascites or SBP and respiratory difficulty due to significant pleural effusions, in addition, as a group nephrotic children are prone to a miscellaneous subset of infectious diseases  especially respiratory tract and renal parenchymal infections disease spectrum which may point to a covert CNS, these aspects should be retrospectively enquired and reviewed in all children presently overtly with supposedly innocuous minimal change nephrotic syndrome.In utero Nuchal translucency at  gestational ultrasound is a pointer to congenital lymphoedema and in all those cases should be evaluated for, and all cases where this is demonstrated, a search, determination and follow up for other features of congenital nephrotic syndrome should be aimed for, radiologically, pathologically and genetically.

 

The performance of a renal biopsy, at least amongst adults is required for the accurate diagnosis of recidivist nephrotic syndromes and for the formulation of a rational therapeutic interventional plan, however the situation is different for children who need not always be subjected to renal biopsy since careful historical, clinical and non invasive laboratory studies could lead to an accurate diagnosis in several instances,

 

Since considerations for the possibility of congenital nephritic syndrome has been under appreciated.

Blood pressure measurements, blood urea nitrogen .urinalysis and twenty four hour urinary outputs if routinely undertaken in this age group would identify those cases in the nephritic range of this congenital glomerulopathy with the opportunity for earlier intervention and the probability of a more favourable prognosis compared to the nephrotic phases.

 

 

DEFINITIVE REFERENCES FOR CONGENITAL NEPHROTIC SYNDROME.

 

[1]-Norio R. Heredity in congenital nephrotic syndrome .Ann Paediatr Fenn.1966; 12:1-94

 

[2]- Jalanko H.Congenital nephrotic syndrome Pediatr Nephrol 2009; 24:2121-2128.

 

[3]-Cil O Besbas N, Duzova A, Topaloglu R, Peco-Antic A, Korkmaz E, et al.Genetic abnormalities and prognosis in patients with congenital and infantile nephrotic syndrome.Pediatr Nephrol  2015;30:1279-1287.

 

[4]-Wong W.Idiopathic nephrotic syndrome in New Zealand children, demographic, clinical features, initial management and outcome after twelve-month follow up: results of a three-year national surveillance study.J Paediatr Child Health 2007;43:337-341.

 

[5]-Kestila M,Lenkerri U,Mannikko M,Lamerdin J,McCready P,Putaala H,et al.

Positionally cloned gene for a novel glomerular protein –nephrin-is mutated in congenital nephrotic syndrome .Mol Cell 1998; 1:575-582.

 

[6]-Philippe A, Nevo F,Esquivel EL,Reklaityte D,Gribouval O,Tete MJ ,et al.Nephrin mutations can cause childhood onset steroid-resistant nephrotic syndrome .J Am Soc Nephrol 2008;19:1871-1878.

 

[7]-Maruyama K,Iijima K,Ikeda M,Kitamura A,Tsukaguchi H,Yoshiya K et al .NPHS2  mutations in sporadic steroid-resistant nephrotic syndrome in Japanese children.Pediatr Nephrol 2003;18:412-416.

 

[8]-Weber S,Gribouval O,Esquivel EL,Moriniere V,Tete MJ,Legendre C et al.NPHS2 mutation analysis SHOWS genetic heterogeneity of steroid-resistant nephrotic syndrome and low post-transplant recurrence. Kidney Int 2004; 66:571-579.

 

[9]-Sako M, Nakanishi K,Obana M,Yata N,Hoshii S,Takahashi S, et al .Analysis of NPHS1,NPHS2,ACTN4,and WT1 in Japanese patients with congenital nephrotic syndrome .Kidney Int 2005;67:1248-1255.

 

[10]-Lipska BS, Balasz-Chmielewska I, Wasielewski K, Vetter D, Borzecka H, et al.Mutational analysis in Podocin associated hereditary nephrotic syndrome in Polish patients: founder effect in the Kashubian population.J Appl Genet 2013; 54:327-333.

 

[11]-Mao JH,Zhang Y,Du LZ,Dai YW,GuWZ,Liu AM, et al.NPHS1 and NPHS2 gene mutations in Chinese children with sporadic nephrotic syndrome.Pediatr Res 2007;61:117-122.

 

[12]-Hinkes B,Vlangos C,Heeringa S,Mucha B,Gbadegesin R,Liu J , et al.

Specific Podocin mutations correlate with age of onset in steroid-resistant nephrotic syndrome.J Am Soc Nephrol 2008; 19:365.

 

[13]-Roselli S,Heidet L, Sich M,Henger A, Kretzler M,Gubler MC et al.

Early Glomerular Filtration Defect and severe renal disease in Podocin –deficient mice.Mol Cell Biol 2004; 24:550-560.

 

[14]-Schwarz K,Simons M,Reiser J,Saleem MA,Faul C,Kriz W, et al.Podocin a raft-associated component  of the glomerular slit diaphragm ,interacts with CD2AP and nephrin.J Clin Invest 2001;108;1621-1629.

 

[15]-Togawa H,Nakanishi K,Mukaiyama H,Hama T,Shima Y,Nakano ,M, et al.First Japanese case of Pierson syndrome with mutations in LAMB2.Pediatr Int 2013;55:229-231.

 

[16]-Domogatskaya A, Rodin S, Tryggvason K.Functional diversity of laminins. Annu Rev Cell Dev Biol 2012; 28:523-553.

 

[17]-Dietrich A,Matejas V, Bitzan M,Hasmi S,Kiraly-Borri C,Lin SP , et al.Analysis  of genes encoding laminin beta2 and related proteins in patients with Galloway-MOWAT syndrome.Pediatr Nephrol 2008;23:1779-1786.

 

[18]-Hasselbacher K, Wiggins RC, Matejas V, Hinkes BG, Mucha B, Hoskins BE, et al.Recessive missense mutations in LAMB 2 expand the clinical spectrum of LAMB 2-associated disorders. Kidney Int 2006; 70:1008-1912.

 

[19]-Hinkes BG,Mucha B,Vlangos CN,  Gbadegesin R,Liu J,Hasselbacher K,et al.Nephrotic syndrome in the first year of life: two thirds of cases caused by mutations in 4 genes(NPHS1,NPHS2,WT1,and LAMB2) .Pediatrics 2007;119:e3-e4.

 

[20]-Chen YM, Kikkawa Y, Miner JH.A missense LAMB2  mutation causes congenital nephrotic syndrome by impairing laminin secretion.J Am Soc Nephrol 2011;22:849-858.

 

[21]-Debiec H,Nauta J,Coulet F,van der Burg M,Guigonis V,Shurmans T, et al.Role of truncating mutations in MME gene in Fetomaternal alloimmunisation and antenatal glomerulonephritis.Lancet 2004;364:1252-1259.

 

[22]-Denamur E,Bocquet N,Mougenot B,Da Silva F,Martinat L,Loirat C, et al.Mother to-child transmitted WT1 splice-site mutation is responsible for distinct glomerular diseases.J Am Soc Nephrol 1999;10:2219-2223.

 

[23]-Zenker M,Aigner T,Wendler O,Tralau T, Mintefering H,Fenski ,et al. Human Laminin beta 2 deficiency causes congenital nephrosis with mesangial sclerosis and distinct eye abnormalities. Hum Mol Genet 2004; 13:2625-2632.

 

[24]-Debeic H,Guigonis V,Mougenot B,Decobert F,Haymann JP,Bensman A,et al.Antenatal  membranous glomerulonephritis due to anti-neutral endopeptidase antibodies.N Engl J Med 2002;346:2053-2060.

 

[25]-van der Knaap MS, Wevers’ RA,Monnens L,Jacobs C,Jaeken J.Van Wijk JA.Congenital nephrotic syndrome : a novel phenotype of type I carbohydrate –deficient glycoprotein syndrome.J Inherit Metab Dis 1996;19:787-791.

 

[26]-Huttunen NP. Congenital nephrotic syndrome of Finnish type: study of 75 patients .Arch Dis Child 1976; 51:344-348.

 

[27]-Kestila M, Mannikko M, Holmberg C, et al. Exclusion of eight genes as mutated loci in congenital nephrotic syndrome of the Finnish type. Kidney Int. 1994; 45:986-990.

 

[28]-Kestila M, Mannikko M, Holmberg C, et al. Congenital nephrotic syndrome of the Finnish type maps to the long arm of chromosome 19.Am J Hum Genet.1994; 54:757-764.

 

[29]-Lenkkeri U,Mannikko M,McCready P,Lamerdin J, Gribouval O,Niaudet PM, et al.Structure of the gene for congenital nephrotic syndrome of the Finnish type (NPHS1) and characterization of mutations. Am J Human Genet 1999; 64:51-61.

 

[30]-Burke EC & Others, Familial nephrotic syndrome .J Pediatr .1973; 82:202.

 

[31]-Conwald WR and McIntoch RM, Immunological studies in congenital nephrosis .J Med Genet.1972; 9:245.

 

[32]-Huttunen NP, Vehaskari M, Vihikari M et al. Proteinuria in congenital nephrotic syndrome of the Finnish type .Clin Nephrol .1980; 13:12.

 

[33]-Norio R, Rapola J.Congenital and infantile nephrotic syndromes.In: Bartsocas CS, ed.Genetics of kidney disorders. New York .Alan R Liss, 1989; 179.

 

[34]-Morgan G, Postlethwaite RJ, Savage JM Physical abnormalities in children with congenital nephrotic syndrome. Arch Dis Child 1981; 56:959-961.

 

 

[35]-Ryynanen M,Seppala M,Kuusela P,et al  Antenatal screening for congenital nephrosis in Finland by maternal serum alpha-fetoprotein.Br J Obstet Gynaecol. 1993; 90:437-442

 

[36]-Seppala M, Rapola J, Huttenen N-P, et al. Congenital  nephrotic syndrome : prenatal diagnosis and genetic counseling by the estimation of the amniotic fluid and maternal alpha-fetoprotein. Lancet 1976; ii: 123-125.

 

[37]-Mannikko M, Kestila M, Lenkkerri U, et al Improved prenatal diagnosis of the congenital nephrotic syndrome of the Finnish type based on DNA analysis. Kidney Int. 1997; 51:868-872.

 

[38]-Holmberg C,Laine J,Ronnholm K,et al.Congenital  nephrotic syndrome .Kidney Int 49:551-556.

 

[39]-Hallman N, Norio R, and Kouvalainen K .Main features of the congenital nephrotic syndrome.Acta Paediatr Scand .1976; 172:75-77.

 

[40]-Lanning P, Uhari  P,Kolivanen K ,et al. Ultrasonic features of the congenital nephrotic syndrome of the Finnish type .Acta Paediatr Scand 1989;78:717.

 

[41]-Rapola J, Sariola H, and Ekblom P.Pathology of fetal congenital nephrosis: immnohistochemical and ultra structural studies .Kidney Int. 1984; 25:701.

 

[42]-Atiuo-Harmainen .H.Rapola J.The thickness of the glomerular basement membrane in congenital nephrotic syndrome of the Finnish type.Nephron 1983; 34:48.

 

[43]-Mannikko M, Lenkerri U, Kashtan C, et al. Haplotype analysis of congenital nephrotic syndrome of the Finnish type in non-Finnish families.J Am Soc Nephrol. 1996; 7:2700-2703.

 

[44]-Fuchshuber A, Niaudet P, Gribouval O, et al. Congenital nephrotic syndrome of the Finnish type: linkage to the locus in a non-Finnish population.Pediatr Nephrol. 1996; 10:135-138.

 

[45]-Lathrop G, Lalouel J Easy calculations of lod scores and genetic risks on small computers. Am J Hum Genet.1984; 36:460-465.

 

[46]-Gbadegesin RA, Winn MP, Smoyer WE.Genetic testing in nephrotic syndrome-challenges and opportunities. Nat Rev Nephrol 2013; 9:179-184.

 

[47]-Pomeranz A,Wolach B,Korzets Z,Bernhiem J.Successful treatment of Finnish congenital nephrotic syndrome with Captopril and Indomethacin .J Pediatr 1995; 126:140-142.

 

[48]-Kari JA,Montini G,Bockenhauer D,Brennan E,Rees L,Trmpter RS, et al Clinicopathological correlations of congenital and infantile nephrotic syndrome

over twenty years.Pediatr Nephrol 2014; 29:2173-2180.

 

[49]-Habib R, Gubler MC, Antignac C and  Gagnadoux MF.Diffuse mesangial sclerosis : a congenital glomerulopathy with nephrotic syndrome.Adv Nephrol Necker Hosp 1993;22:43-57.

 

[50]-Habib R, Sariola C, Gubler MC, et al.The nephropathy associated with male pseudohaemophroditism and Wilms tumour (Drash syndrome): a distinctive glomerular lesion-report of ten cases. Clin Nephron 1985; 24:269-278.

 

[51]-Fujita S,Sugimoto K,Miyazawa T, Yanagida H,Tabata N,Okada M, et al. A female infant with Frasier syndrome showing splice mutations in Wilms tumor gene (WT1) INTRON 9 .Clin Nephrol 2010;73:487-491.

 

[52]-Kambham N,Tanji N,Seigle RL, Markowitz GS ,Pulkkinen L,Uitto J,et al.Congenital focal segmental glomerulosclerosis associated with beta 4 integrin mutation and epidermolysis bullosa.Am J Kidney Dis 2000;36:190-196.

 

[53]-Hata D,Miyazaki M,Seto S,Kadota E,Muso E,Takasu K,et al.Nephrotic syndrome and aberrant expression of laminin isoforms in glomerular basement membranes for an infant with Herlitz junctional epidermolysis bullosa.Pediatrics 2005;116:e3-607.

 

[54]-Goldenberg A, Ngoc LH,Thouret MC, Cormier-Daire V,Gagnadoux MF, Chretien D, et al.Respiratory chain deficiency presenting as congenital nephrotic syndrome.Pediatr Nephrol 2005;20:465-469.

 

[55]-Machuca E,Benoit G,Nevo F,Tete MJ,GRIBOUVAL O Pawtowski A,et al. Genotype-phenotype correlations in non-Finnish congenital nephrotic syndrome.J Am Soc Nephrol 2010;21:1209-1217.

 

[56]-Niemsiri S.Congenital syphilitic nephrosis .Southeast Asian J Trop Med Public Health 1993; 24:595-600.

 

[57]-Papaioannou AC, Asrow GC, Schuknell NH.Nephrotic syndrome in early infancy as a manifestation of congenital syphilis. Pediatrics 1961; 27:636.

 

[57]-Papaioannou AC, Asrow GC, Schuknell NH.Nephrotic syndrome in early infancy as a manifestation of congenital syphilis. Pediatrics 1961; 27:636.

 

[58]-Vachvanichsanong P, Mitarnun W, Tungsinmunkong K, Dissaneewate P.Congenital and infantile nephrotic syndrome in Thai infants.Clin Pediatr( Phila) 2005;44:169-174.

 

[58]-Vachvanichsanong P, Mitarnun W, Tungsinmunkong K, Dissaneewate P.Congenital and infantile nephrotic syndrome in Thai infants.Clin Pediatr( Phila) 2005;44:169-174.

 

[59]-Kaplan BS, Wiglesworth FW, Marks MI, Drummond KN .The glomerulopathy of congenital syphilis – an immune deposit disease .J Pediatr .1972; 81:1154-1156.

 

[60]-Lago EG, Garcia PC.Congenital syphilis; an emerging emergency also in Brazil.J Pediatr (Rio J) 2000; 76:451-465.

 

[61]-Wiggelinkhuzen, J, Kaschula ROC, Uys CJ, et al. Congenital syphilis and glomerulonephritis with evidence for immune pathogenesis. Arch Dis Child 1973; 48:375

 

[62]-Suskind R, Winkelstein JA, Spear GA.Nephrotic syndrome in congenital syphilis .Arch Dis Child 1973; 48:237-239.

 

[63]-Beale MG,Strayer DS,Kissane JM,Robson AM,.Congenital glomerulosclerosis and nephrotic syndrome in two infants.Speculations and pathegenesis .Am J Dis Child 1979 ;133 :842-845.

 

[64]-Fan SY,Zhang BL,Wang WH.One case of congenital nephrotic syndrome secondary to congenital toxoplasmosis.Chin J Nephrol 2005 ;21 :644.

 

[65]-Shahin G, Papadopoupou ZL, Jenis EH.Congenital nephrotic syndrome associated with congenital toxoplasmosis.J Pediatr 1974;85:366-370.

 

[66]-Couvreur J,Allison F,Coccon-Gibod L,et al.Rein et toxoplasmose.Ann Pediatr(Paris)1984;31:847.

 

[67]-Roussel B,Pinon JM,Birembaut P,Rullier J,Pennaforte F.Congenital nephrotic syndrome associated with congenital toxoplasmosis.Arch Fr Pediatr 1987 ;44 :795-797.

 

[68]-Haskell L,Fusco MJ,Ares L,Sublay B.Disseminated toxoplasmosis presenting as symptomatic orchitis and nephrotic syndrome.Am J Med  Sci 1989 ;298 :185-190.

 

[69]-Frishberg Y,Rinat C,Feinstein S,Becker-Cohen R,Megged O,Schlesinger Y.Mutated Podocin manifesting as CMV-associated congenital nephrotic syndrome .Pediatr Nephrol 2003’18:273-275.

 

[70]-Besbas N,Bayrakci US,Kale G,Cengiz AB,Akcoren Z,Akinci D,et al.Cytomegalovirus-related congenital nephrotic syndrome with diffuse mesangial sclerosis.Pediatr Nephrol  2006;21:749-742.

 

[71]–Amir G, Hurvitz .H, Neeman Z et al.Neonatal cytomegalovirus infection with pancreatic cystadenoma and nephrotic syndrome. Pediatr Pathol 1986; 6:393.

 

[72]-Batisky DL, Roy S, Gaber LW .Congenital nephrotic syndrome and neonatal cytomegalovirus infection: a clinical association .Pediatr Nephro.1993; 7:741-743

 

[73]-Frishberg Y,Rinat C,Feinstein S,Becker-Cohen R,Megged O,Schlesinger Y.Mutated Podocin manifesting as CMV-associated congenital nephrotic syndrome .Pediatr Nephrol 2003;18:273-275.

 

[74]-Esterly JR, Oppenheirmer EH.Pathological lesions due to congenital rubella. Arch Pathol 1969; 87:380-388.

 

[75]-Menser MA,Robertson SE,Dorman DC,Gillespie AM, Murphy AM.Renal lesions in congenital rubella. Pediatrics 1967; 40:901-904.

 

[76]-Attolou V,Bigot A,Ayivi B,Gninafon M.Renal complications associated with human acquired immunodeficiency virus infection in a population of hospital  patients at the Hospital and University Centre in Cotonou.Sante 1998;8:283-286.

 

[77]-Bhimma R, Purswani MU, Kala U.Kidney disease in children and adolescents with perinatal HIV-1 infection.J Int AIDS Soc.2013;16:18596.

 

[78]–Ramsuran D,Bhimma R,Ramdial PK,Naicker E,Adhikari M,Deonarain J,et al.The spectrum of HIV-related nephropathy in children.Pediatr Nephrol 2012;27:821-827.

 

[79]-Attolou V,Bigot A,Ayivi B,Gninafon M.Renal complications associated with human acquired immunodeficiency virus infection in a population of hospital  patients at the Hospital and University Centre in Cotonou.Sante 1998;8:283-286.

 

[80]-Glacomet V,Erba P,Di Nello F,Colett S,Vigano A,Zuccotti G.Proteinuria in paediatric patients with human immunodeficiency virus infection. World J Clin Cases 2013; 1:13-18.

 

[81]-Rao TK, Friedman EA, Nicastri AD.The types of renal disease in the acquired immunodeficiency syndrome N Engl J Med 1987;316:1062-1068.

 

[82]-Appel G, Viral infections and the kidney.HIV, hepatitis B, and hepatitis C.Cleve Clin J Med 2007; 74:353-360.

 

[83]-Khedmat H, Taheri S. Hepatitis B virus-associated nephropathy: an International Data Analysis. Iran J Kidney Dis 2010; 4:101-105.

 

[84]-Shapin LR, Duncan PA, Fansworth PB, et al.Congenital microcephaly, hiatus hernia and nephrotic syndrome: an autosomal recessive syndrome. Birth defects 1976; 12:275.

 

[85]-Robain O, Deonna T.Pachygyria and congenital nephrosis: disorder of migration and neuronal orientation, Acta Neuropathol 1983; 60:137.

 

[86]-Palm L, Hagerstrand I, Kristofferson U, et al.Nephrogenesis and disturbances of neuronal migration in male siblings: a new hereditary disorder? Arch Dis Child 1986.1986:61-545.

 

[87]-Lagrue G, Braneller A, Niauder P et al. Transmission of nephrotic syndrome to two neonates: spontaneous regression.Presse Med 1991:20:255.

 

[88]-Miller S,Pallan S, Gangji AS, Lukic D,Clase CM.Mercury associated  nephrotic syndrome: a case report and systematic review of the literature.

Am J Kidney Dis 2013; 62:135-138.

 

[89]-Simila S, Vesa L, Wasz-Hockert O.Hereditary onycho-osteodysplasis (the nail-patella syndrome) with nephrosis- like renal disease in a new born boy. Pediatrics 1970; 46:61.

 

[90]-Bongers EM, Gubler MC, Knoers NV. Nail-Patella Syndrome .Overview on clinical and molecular findings.Pediatr Nephrol 2002; 17:703.

 

[91]-Ty A, Fine B. Membranous nephritis in infantile systemic lupus erythematosus associated with chromosomal abnormalities. Clin Nephrol 1979; 12:137.

 

[92]-Alexander F, and Campbell WA.Congenital nephrotic syndrome and renal vein thrombosis in infancy.J Clin Pathol 1971; 24:27-40.

 

[93]-Kaplan BS, Chesney RW, Drummond KN, The nephrotic syndrome and renal vein thrombosis. Am J Dis Child 1978; 132:367-370.

 

[94]-Holmberg C,Antikainen M,Ronnholom K,Ala-Houhala M,Jalanko H.Management of congenital nephrotic syndrome of the Finnish type.Pediatr Nephrol.1995 8:87-93.

 

[95]-Wong W, Morris MC, Kara T.Congenital nephrotic syndrome with prolonged renal survival without renal replacement therapy .Pediatr Nephro 2013;28:2313-2321.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CLASSICS AND REVISITS IN SCIENTIFIC NEUROLOGY. Volume 5 Issue 2

 

Editorial Symposium from  Collegiate Academic Transactions.

 

 

TITLE:

 

A Combined evaluative Explanatory Survey With Meta-Content Analysis For Several Subsets of Periodic Paralysis. On The Occasional Very Deleterious Impact Of Transient Periodic Paralysis Overlapping With Unclassifiable Paroxysmal Events OR Chronic Fatigue Syndrome (Fibromyalgia) Supports The Use Of An Indepth Clinical Pathological Electrophysiological Evaluations Of Cases With Thyroid Dysfunctions, Migranous Cephalgias with or without Neurological Sequelae For Compatible Features.

 

 

Research question, hypothesis and paradigm:

 

 [II]-The need to achieve a distinction for the conundrum and continuum from hypokalaemic through normokalaemia to hyperkalemic Periodic Paralysis, suggests the need to consider normokalaemic periodic paralysis as an intermediate mosaic of the two extremes implying that serum potassium levels should not be the sole criteria for inclusion or exclusion of compatible cases.

 

 

 

 

Abstract:

 

 

Context, Conceptual Framework & Theory Literature.

 

Traditionally, periodic paralysis (PP) is a rare autosomally inherited genetic disease leading to muscle weakness, paresis or paralysis .Its clinical impact is spectral ranging from non-incapacitating occasional muscle weakness with ambulatory difficulties to permanent muscle decimation leading to a fatal respiratory muscle paralysis. It usually presents following common triggers such as cold, heat, unduly high carbohydrate meals, fasting state related hypoglycaemia, stress, emotional activities /excitement in addition to unduly vigorous activities.

At the molecular level, the underlying defects were skeletal muscle cell membranes ion channels malfunctions allowing an unregulated sarcolemmal influx or efflux of electrically charged ions, leading to depolarization and excitation (it is a form of channelopathy).  It could be hyperthyroidism related or associated (thyrotoxic (PP)

 

In hypokalaemic (PP) Potassium leaks into the muscle cells from the blood stream, it could interact with a co-existing or epiphenomenal genetically inherent abnormalities in calcium channels in muscle cells, occasionally with sodium or potassium channels.

 

In hyperkalaemic Periodic Paralysis (PP) (Adynamia Episodica Hereditaria)  potassium leaks out of the cells into the blood stream and interacts with genetically determined abnormalities in sodium channels.This form is usually accompanied by Paramytonia Congenita, the primary symptom of Paramytonia is muscle contractures, which develops during activities .Also similarly Paramyotonia Congenita attacks may also be triggered off by hypokalaemia.

 

Usually as sudden collapse following prolonged standing, in public places, or it may be occupationally related.

 

The diagnosis of periodic paralysis were unusually difficult with parents often reporting many futile efforts of several years with misdiagnosis and interventions with worsening symptomatologies.Part of this may be due to the fact that unclassifiable paroxysmal events were present in up to half of the cases with overlapping symptomatologies such as migranous cephalgias, speech difficulties, visual, auditory tactile and multisensory auras .Diagnostic accuracy was confounded and compounded by the facts that DNAs testings were available and achievable for only some common gene mutations 

EMG results were normal except during attacks, however a properly performed exercise –EMG (compound Muscle Test) in the appropriate clinical setting could provide an accurate diagnosis in most instances. Most children will function fairly well with appropriate pharmacotherapy, environmental manipulations and lifestyle modifications.

 

The onset of hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis is in childhood, whereas the ones of the hypokalaemic type is in early childhood to adulthood (one to twenty five years of age),although this anecdotal concept has been challenged, the serum potassium levels do not necessarily have to range outside the normal limits to cause serious life threatening paralysis .Indeed against its classification schemes, these clinical features do not usually fit in neatly into hyperkalaemia or hypokalaemia and they should not be managed categorically. .In both these cases, the total body potassium is usually normal, but it just in the wrong place .The gene mutation, the ion channel affected and the amount of genetic change or expression could have significant impact on disability and therapeutic interventions.The progression of the hyperkalaemic Periodic Paralysis somewhat slows down towards middle age, whereas that of hypokalaemic periodic paralysis could be quite progressive and deleterious.

The hypokalaemic Periodic Paralysis were more common in boys. Electrocardiographic features compatible with hypokalaemia or hyperkalaemia were more indicative of the total body potassium compared to the serum/blood potassium levels .The changes of the blood potassium levels in the secondary forms were always marked, but this was not the case in the primary forms. Also hypermagnesaemia of any cause could be a cause of periodic paralysis.

 

Furthermore some genetic forms of Periodic Paralysis were associated with significant rhythm dysfunctions .Carbonic anhydrase inhibitors such as acetozolamide and dichlorophenamide were initially tried in patients with Periodic Paralysis on the basis of their kaliuretic effect for hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis and then based on serendipitously made observations, and probably because of its induction of alkalosis in hypokalaemic Periodic Paralysis. On the basis of our experience, for us Acetozolamide is probably a wonder drug. In the management of Periodic Paralysis of several aetiologies because of its modifying effects on channelopathies. It was found to increase extracellular proton concentrations which strongly inhibit ionic permeations through open calcium channels .They could also equally function by activating potassium calcium channels thereby modifying their pace making activities.

 

ESSENCE&OBJECTIVE

 

We have previously identified, presented, reported and discussed other domains of primary idiopathic myopathies in addition to acquired secondary systemic paralytic myoneuropathies.This paper aims to further report unusual and severe cases of presumptive primary idiopathic Periodic Paralysis in adolescent and adult males and females managed successfully by the authors.

 

Methodology:

 

Case Study with Triangulated Analytical Techniques and Methodological approach with Analysis of Empirical observations of Compatible Cases  and Document Research through the use of Structured Qualitative and Quantitative independent content analysis, of Nominal and Ordinal data from the mainstream Journals and the Grey Medical Literature.

 

Case Study with Comprehensive Literature Reviews

 

 

The authors  experience with periodic paralysis in childhood were highlighted with  extremely severe cases of non-familial possibly dyskalaemic, normokalaemic, normocalcaemic normonatriemic, non-diurnal idiopathic periodic paralysis cases in previously healthy females with unclassifiable paroxysmal events initially inferred as convulsive equivalents associated with  non-diurnal non myotonic tachycardiac recurrent episodic severely frank tetraparetic paralytic events lasting for about 24 hours in each instance ,and subsets of adolescent males with a new onset recurrent episodic prolonged paraparesis with visual difficulties occasionally lasting up to a week in some instances None of the parents were consanguineously married. Good outcome measures were achieved with appropriate conventional interventions in all instances with acetozolamide, environmental and life style modifications in addition to physical therapies. The global regional literature was briefly examined to buttress the import of achieving the diagnosis at the milder and earlier spectra of the defect, plausible diagnostic, therapeutic and prophylactic options were proffered and discussed.

 

CONCLUSIONS& SIGNIFICANCE.

 

This paper highlights cases at the upper range of the defect, given the spectral nature of the defect, it is likely that there are still many defects out there at the milder spectrum with minimal expressivities which could be therapeutically

Amenable at this stage compared to when it has progressed to decimated myopathic paralysis. This is one aspect where basic evaluations with in-depth comprehensive evaluation, applying commonly available inclusive biochemical profile, electrocardiogram and exclusive neuroimaging a tentative diagnosis could be achieved, fortunately this condition is amenable to commonly  available diuretics/salts ,medical interventions and specific/generic deterrent options .

A review of the literature compares these cases with others described previously in the global medical literature and offers a systematic and standardized diagnostic and therapeutic approach/strategies for the more enigmatic and difficult cases.

 

 

 

 

 

 

MAIN TEXT:

 

INTRODUCTION

 

BACKGROUND, CONTEXT NOMENCLATURE& NOSOLOGY 

 

THE TRANSIENT AND PERIODIC PARALYSIS:

 

This group of neuromuscular disorders is characterized by attacks of acutely developing paralysis, which spontaneously recover to complete normality, usually within a few hours. These conditions the periodic paralysis cause recurrent attacks which are usually associated with alterations of serum potassium concentrations .The clinical features like its inherited nature achieves the distinction between these forms from the acute and subacute monophasic conditions where the recovery is much slower such as the inflammatory, immune or neoplastic related dermatomyositis -polymyositis syndromes and electrolyte imbalance related paralysis or paresis including the other forms of potassium related disturbances in itself. They also differ from the disorders of neuromuscular transmission where there is increased weakness with superadded exercise-induced fatigue.

 

They differ from the numerous central nervous system causes of transient loss of muscle power, which include syncope, .seizures, transient ischaemic attacks of the brain, cataplexy, hydrocephalic attacks, and idiopathic drop attacks .It is most important to realize that any cause of excessively high or low serum potassium will produce diffuse muscle paresis by an effect on the resting sarcolemmal membrane potential .Hyperkalaemia causes hyperpolarisation, preventing the end-plate potential  from reaching the critical depolarization potential required to fire the muscle fibre. Hypokalaemia produces depolarization, which produces depolarization inactivation (closure of the off-gate) of sodium channels in the sarcolemmal .Conditions such as excessive potassium administration and renal failure cause hyperkalaemia; and primary hyperaldosteronism (Conn’s syndrome) and diuretic (kaliuretic) and corticosteroids therapy may cause hypokalaemia.

In contrast, the familial periodic paralysis cause attacks of considerably greater muscle weakness than expected from the change in serum potassium. In fact, some patients have paralytic attacks without change in the serum potassium concentration .These observations suggest that the serum potassium changes may be secondary to some basic abnormality in the sarcolemmal.

At least five different syndromes of transient muscle weakness have now been identified these are:

 

[I]-Familial hypokalaemic periodic paralysis.

 

[II]-Hyperthyroidism with hypokalaemic periodic paralysis.

 

[III]-Familial hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis (adynamia episodica hereditaria of Gamstorp)

 

[Iv]-Paramyotonia congenita of von Eulenberg.

 

[v]-Normokalaemic Periodic Paralysis.

 

In each of these conditions, over a period of a few minutes or hours the patient develops a disorder of skeletal muscle which may vary from mild weakness of limb muscles to total paralysis and which subsides and disappears completely after a few hours or days. There are a few clinical features which suggest the exact type of periodic paralysis that is present, but generally, the diagnosis rests on determining the serum potassium level in an attack and on tests which attempt precipitate paralytic attacks either by increasing or decreasing the serum potassium concentration.

 

FAMILIAL HYPOKALAEMIC PERIODIC PARALYSIS.

Primary Hypokalaemic Periodic Paralysis:

 

This condition is inherited as an autosomal dominant trait, with decreased occurrence in females, but it may appear sporadically. A family history of migraine is often present. The onset is usually about the end of the first decade of life.The proximal muscles are affected first .The muscles innervated by the cranial nerves are spared such as the extraocular muscles ,the muscles of facial expression ,mastication ,and swallowing ,and the tongue muscles .

 

The diaphragm, is usually spared because its embryologic origin is from the bulbar territory, offering it a different neuronal impulsations.Attacks of weaknesses could be precipitated by rest after exercise, exposure to cold, emotional stress, high dietary intake of carbohydrates and sodium ,and administration of corticosteroids.

 

Attacks may last for days, but may be aborted by minimal non-physically demanding activities. These attacks may progress to a chronic form of weakness and atrophy, but in general attacks are less frequent after middle age.The serum potassium is low during an attack exposure to cold should be avoided. The disorder is consistent with a normative life expectancy

 

Familial hypokalaemic periodic paralysis is probably the most common of the periodic paralysis, though it is still a rare disorder. It is usually inherited as a Mendalian Dominant Trait. The patients have a normal strength except during well-demarcated episodes in which intense weakness or complete paralysis of limb and trunk muscles develops .The attacks begin in the second decade and are more frequent in adolescence or early adult years. A single attack may last from a few minutes to several days, the average duration being from half a day to about two days. The attacks seldom occur more frequently than every one month to one and half months. During the episode, marked hypotonia of the affected muscles and hyporreflexia are encountered, during the paralytic attacks, the affected muscles are refractory to electrical stimulation. The facial, pharyngeal, thoracic, and diaphragmatic muscles are rarely affected, however respiratory embarrassments and death have been reported. Although, the cardiac muscles are not directly involved, but there may be ECG changes related to the hypokalaemia.

 

The attacks are precipitated by several factors, such as rest after exercise, ingestion of sodium chloride or a large carbohydrate meal. Attacks commonly begin during sleep and are present upon awakening. Profuse diaphoresis may precede the attack .Often no precipitating cause can be discovered. Patients can often abort an attack by gentle exercise as soon as the first symptomatologies are perceived. On the average patient, there is no evidence of progressive muscular disease, and physical examination between attacks frequently demonstrates no abnormality .Rarely, there may be eyelid myotonia exacerbated by cold. Exceptionally, some degree of weakness, usually mild, persists after the termination of the attack and is cumulative in successive attacks. This sometimes causes a slowly progressive vacuolar myopathy of pelvi-femoral muscles during middle and late adult life (Gold flam)

 

Pathology:

 

Despite the striking paralysis, muscle biopsies often are normal, even in an acute paralytic attack .At other times, there is a significant vacuolization of muscle fibers. The vacuoles are filled with clear fluid, but in glycogen stains a few positive-reacting granules may be seen. Under the electron microscope the vacuoles appear to originate from the dilatation of the longitudinal endoplasmic reticulum. In the chronic state, the vacuoles probably communicate with the extracellular space.

 

Pathogenesis:

 

During the attack, the serum potassium level drops sharply .though rarely to very low values. This apparently results from the sudden passage of potassium into the cells of the body since the urinary excretion of potassium diminishes at the same time. The intracellular potassium levels of muscles have been demonstrated to rise during the attacks. According to the scholarships of Layzer on this theme. [1]

The resting membrane potential of the sarcolemmal is decreased both in the interactal period or to a greater extent during the attack. The primary abnormality in familial hypokalaemic periodic paralysis is not known but may be of one or more of the ion channels and ion pumps in the sarcolemma.As was stated above, the entry of potassium into the muscle may be a secondary process.

The relation to excess carbohydrate intake is probably connected with the fall in serum potassium level and rise in intracellular levels of potassium in muscle and liver which occur during rapid glycogen storage.However, the timing of these two events differs. The initial potassium changes occur during the first few hours after carbohydrate ingestion, while the attack of periodic paralysis is frequently delayed for about eight to twelve hours.

 

DIAGNOSTIC ASPECTS OF HYPOKALAEMIC PERIODIC PARALYSIS.

 

This rests on the finding of a low potassium concentration in a spontaneous attack .The diagnosis can be confirmed by the precipitation of a paralytic attack by the intravenous infusion of glucose at two grammes per kilogram body weight, followed ten minutes later by the intravenous injection of ten to twenty units of soluble insulin. Provocative tests which induce weakness and thus confirm the diagnosis include [I]-Exercise and [II] giving insulin, a quarter units per kilogrammes subcutaneously, simultaneously with glucose four fifths grammes per .kilogrammes orally.

 

Therapeutic interventional aspects for Hypokalaemic periodic paralysis.

 

Episodes of familial hypokalaemic periodic paralysis are treated by the oral administration of potassium salts in doses of 30 to 120 mEq until the attack is relieved.In the rare instances where acute respiratory or pharyngeal paralysis appears, it may be necessary to give potassium intravenously though great care should be taken with this route of administration

Apposite therapeutic interventions and its maintenance imply giving potassium chloride, two to ten grammes orally, to terminate an, attack, and two to ten grammes at bedtime in between attacks. The patient should be encouraged to eat a low-carbohydrate, low-sodium diet Thiamine may abort the effects of carbohydrates, and unnecessary

The serum potassium concentration, ECG, and muscle strength should be followed at fifteen minutes intervals, the attack usually begins within one and half hours and may be aborted by oral or if necessary intravenous potassium .Patients do not develop a paralytic attack when given thirty to fifty milliequivalence of potassium orally, unlike the reaction seen in the hyperkalaemic form of periodic paralysis.

In patients with frequent attacks of familial hypokalaemic periodic paralysis, sixty  to one hundred and twenty  milli equivalence of potassium per day by mouth in divided doses and avoidance of meals high in carbohydrate are helpful in preventing attacks .Acetozolamide (Diamox), up to two grammes  per day in divided doses may also prevent paralytic attacks. This serendipitous effect is paradoxical, since this carbonic anhydrase inhibitory diuretic is mildly kaliuretic, and the presumptive action appears to rest on the alkalosis which it induces.

 

HYPERTHYROIDISM WITH HYPOKALAEMIC PERIODIC PARALYSIS.

 

Attacks of hypokalaemic periodic paralysis are frequently due to thyrotoxicosis particularly in Orientals, but also in the Occidentals .These attacks are identical to those in the familial condition, but patients generally do not have a positive family history.The pathogenesis of this condition is not clearly understood, but the attacks disappear with the correction of the hyperthyroidism.

 

FAMILIAL HYPERKALAEMIC PERIODIC PARALYSIS (ADYNAMIA EPISODICA HEREDATARIA OF GARMSTORP)

 

This is also a Mendelian dominant condition and is characterized by periods of weakness or paralysis of skeletal muscle not unlike those of familial hypokalaemic periodic paralysis. The onset is between the ages of five and ten years .The attacks are frequent and may last for one to many hours and then tend to occur during rest after physical exertion, particularly if the patient is wet, cold or hungry. Tingling of the lips, fingers or toes may occur at the onset of attack .Weakness varies in degree. Respiratory embarrassment is virtually never seen, between attacks, the patient is symptom free, though in some cases mild weakness persists for days or weeks at a time. Some patients have clinical and electromyographic myotonia.

 

The diagnosis rests on the finding of a serum potassium concentration that rises transiently in the attack. Paralysis may be present with a serum potassium concentration of five to six milli-equivalents per litre.The diagnosis can be confirmed by the precipitation of an attack by the oral administration of thirty to one hundred and fifty milli-equivalence of potassium. The ECG, muscle strength and serum potassium should be monitored every fifteen minutes. This test should be avoided if there is renal or cardiac insufficiency and the patient should have an intravenous route for the administration of glucose and insulin if reversal of the hyperkalaemia or paralysis is imperative. Muscle biopsy is usually normal, and electromyography shows electrical silence in the paralysed muscles.

 

The pathogenesis of familial hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis is uncertain but probably due to some abnormality of sarcolemmal ion channels or ion pumps.

An increased sodium permeability has been suggested as an explanation of the observed partial depolarization of the sarcolemmal membrane during the interactal period and the greater depolarization during the attack. If correct, the release of potassium from muscle into the serum is a compensatory flux tending to repolarise the sarcolemma.The acute attacks should be treated by oral glucose, a kaliuretic diuretic such as the thiazides prevents attacks in some patients. However, the latter agents may exacerbate the myotonia in patients where this is prominent.Acetazolomide up to 2g per day in divided doses, is often effective in preventing attacks.

 

 

PARAMYOTONIA CONGENITA OF VON EULENBERG.

 

The principal feature of this disease is stiffness (myotonia) and weakness or paralysis following exposure to cold .It is inherited in a Mendelian dominant trait.

The myotonic features of this disease are usually the most prominent, though in some cases there are rare attacks of weakness similar to those of periodic paralysis which may or may not be related to cold. The serum potassium concentration may rise in attacks, and the administration of potassium may induce an attack the resting membrane potential of muscle fibers during the attack is reduced. The myotonia in this syndrome may be limited to the eyelids or tongue. Muscle biopsy reveals no abnormality, vacuolization is seldom seen.

 

Normokalaemic PERIODIC PARALYSIS

 

Although, previous few reports of patients having attacks of periodic paralysis without changes in the serum potassium concentration exists, however more and more reports on this theme are increasingly becoming available ,some of these attacks respond to the intravenous infusion of sodium chloride ,attacks may be precipitated by oral potassium administration ,and not by intravenous glucose and insulin. Thus there are features linking this condition to familial hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis, but its nosological position remains to be clarified.

 

Methodological Issues:

 

Case Studies with Triangulated Analytical Techniques and Methodological approach with Analysis of Empirical observations of Compatible Cases  and Document Research through the use of Structured Qualitative and Quantitative independent content analysis, of Nominal and Ordinal data from the mainstream Journals and the Grey Medical Literature. The global regional literature was examined to buttress the import of achieving the diagnosis at the milder and earlier spectra of the defect, plausible diagnostic, therapeutic and prophylactic options were proffered and discussed.

 

Results, Literature Reviews and Discussions:

 

Histriographic Background & Archival Historical Research:

 

Primary Hyperkalemic Periodic Paralysis. (Adynamia Episodica Hereditaria of Gamstrorp.) or Hyperkalaemic Periodic Paralysis:

 

Hyperkalaemic PP was originally described in 1951 by Tyler et al

In their original classic article, Tyler, Stephens, Gunn and Perkoff detailed on the Studies in disorders of muscle.VII.Clinical manifestations and inheritance of a type of periodic paralysis without hypopotassemia.and seminally disseminated their results. [2]

Hyperkalaemic PP was further extensively investigated by Gamstrop in 1957, who attached the nomenclature adynamia episodica hereditaria. (of Gamstorp) to it. [3]

The term was later changed to hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis on the basis of the provocative impacts of acute potassium intake, in addition to the rise in serum potassium levels associated with its episodic, instantaneous and spontaneous attacks.Hyperkalaemic PP is an autosomal dominant myogenic channelopathy with an almost absolute complete penetrance.it is occasionally associated with nondystrophic myotonias.These aspects were further characterized by Lehmann-Horn, Rudel and Jurkat-Rott et al in their book chapters on Nondystrophic myotonias and periodic paralysis.In the book on Myology edited by Engel and, Franzini-Armstrong published  by NcGraw-Hill Professionals.[4]

This form of periodic paralysis which has its onset in the first decade of life, is usually detected in infancy because of “starring eyes” (myotonic form of lid lag), or the mother may note that the infant has a very feeble cry, especially on waking. It is inherited in an autosomal dominant form .Pseudohypertrophy of the calf muscles is often present. There is in increased incidence of diabetes mellitus

 

The attacks are relatively short, lasting about thirty minutes to two hours and may be precipitated by rest after exercise, cold and fatigue .Attacks usually occur in school age children and then abates. The serum potassium rises during attacks. The EMG may demonstrate myotonia of the external ocular and facial muscles. Treatment is with hydrochlorothiazide fifty milligrammes orally daily, or acetozolamide (Diamox) two hundred and fifty milligrammes orally daily .Dichlorophenamide (Daranide), fifty milligrammes  orally daily, has also been recommended. The dose must be adjusted for each case. The disorder is consistent with a normal life span.

 

Normokalaemic Periodic Paralysis.

 

In this disorder, the onset is in the first decade of life. It is inherited in an autosomal dominant fashion. Attacks come on during rest after exercise, with cold, following ingestion of foods high in potassium (such as many fruit juices), and following ingestion of alcohol .The attacks may last for days.

 

In normokalaemic paralysis, serum electrolytes do not change during attacks. Muscle biopsy may demonstrate vacuolar myiopathy.Treatment consists of increased salt intake; acetozolamide (Diamox|), two hundred and fifty milligrammes daily orally, with dosages adjusted for each case; and fludrocortisones one tenth milligrammes daily orally. The overall prognosis is generally good. In 1964.Pearson classically discussed the periodic paralysis its differential features and pathological observations in permanent myopathic weakness. [5]

 

A Comparative overview of the different forms of Periodic Paralysis:

 

Nosology, Literature &Theory.

 

Periodic paralysis is a rare neuromuscular disorder, related to a defect in muscle ion channels, characterized by episodes of painless muscle weakness, which may be precipitated by vigorous exercise, fasting or high carbohydrate meals.

 

Periodic paralysis (PP) is classified as hypokalaemic when episodes occur in association with low potassium, or high- carbohydrate meals.

Periodic Paralysis (PP) is classified as normokalaemic when episodes occur in association with normal potassium blood levels or as hyperkalaemic when episodes can be induced by elevated potassium levels.

 

Where as the patients suffering from type 1 hypokalaemic periodic paralysis (Hypo PP1) experience attacks of muscle paralysis associated with hypokalaemia.

Hypokalaemic periodic paralysis arises from missense mutations in the genes encoding the gated myogenic ion channels. Fairly recent data on this theme by Allard and Fuster of 2018 suggests that: insights into the pathophysiology of type 1 hypokaelemic periodic paralysis could be deciphered when muscle Ca2+ channels carry monovalent cations through gating pores is appreciated.[6]

 

For a fairly long time it has been axiomatic that most cases of hypokalaemic PP are hereditary, usually with an autosomal dominant inheritance pattern. This concept has stood the test of time and has been reaffirmed by the inferential scholarships of Ober in 1992 [7] and reaffirmed by those of Fontaine, Lapie and Plassart of 1996. [8]

 

Aggregating the data from the 2006 studies of Venance, Cannon and Fialho, et al.The primary periodic paralysis, diagnosis, pathogenesis and treatment proposes that .however in approximately thirty three percent of cases, of hypokalaemic PP, the inheritance pattern is consistent with new mutations, thereby distorting the inheritance pedigree pattern anticipated from an autosomal dominant pattern.[9]

This concept on new mutations is corroborated by previous data from the 2004 investigations of Miller, Dias da Silva and Miller et al on the Correlation of the   phenotype and genotype in the periodic paralysis. [10]

Also, in the same vein, although Hyperkalaemic PP is typically hereditary in an autosomal dominant fashion, de novo new mutations have also been equally described and reported. An indepth scholarship on the genetics and hereditary aspects of hyperkalaemic PP was proffered by Schpira and Griggs in the book chapters on Muscle disease provided in the blue books of practical neurology. And published  by Elsevier in 1991. [11]

 

Acquired cases of hypokalaemic PP have been described in association with hyperthyroidism. Thyrotoxic periodic paralysis (TPP) Belongs To A Group of Muscle Diseases called channelopathies, which present with painless generalized muscle weakness without exertion. Very recent report on the consistency of this specific endocrinological myopathic association with the iatrogenic impact of its therapeutics has been provided by Ahamed, McCalley and Sule on their observational annotation that Steroids and Thyrotoxicosis Precipitate Periodic Paralysis of  2018. [12]

And several previous inferences of the consonance of this specific hypokalaemic endocrinological myopathological linkage exists.Kung in 2006, highlighted and discussed this causality in his Clinical review. On Thyrotoxic paralysis: as a diagnostic challenge. [13]As did Lin in his annotations and discussions on Thyrotoxic periodic paralysis of 2005. [14]

And also Ko, Chow and Yeung et al alluded to this hypokalaemic Thyrotoxic periodic paralysis in a Chinese population.in 1996. [15]

In addition to the data results on the vivo and invitro sodium pump activity in subjects with thyrotoxic periodic paralysis proffered by Chan, Shinde and Chow et al of 1991. [16]

And chronologically more and more data buttressing the strength of the implication of thyrotoxicosis in periodic paralysis are increasingly being made available by several authors.

 

Anderson’s disease.

 

Anderson’s disease could be associated with Periodic Paralysis (PP) 

Tawil, Ptacek, and Pavlakis, et al in 1994 proposed Andersen’s syndrome as a potassium sensitive periodic paralysis, ventricular ectopy, and dysmorphic features. [17] And this proposition was corroborated by the 1997 scholarships of Sansone, Griggs and Meola et al on this multifaceted pathological associational entity in Andersen’s Syndrome. [18]

 

Large comparative clinical, laboratory, electrophysiological and genetic studies on Periodic Paralysis are lacking, making the aggregation of available data crucial for a more lucid and encompassing dissection of its character especially the elusive, paradoxical and obscure aspects of its pathobiophysiology and therapeutics.

 

Data from Previous Epidemiological & Demographic Research.

 

Fontaine in his concerted  scholarship of  2008 on this theme proposed that Hypokalaemic Periodic Paralysis (PP) is the most common of the periodic paralysis, but is still relatively quite  rare, with an estimated prevalence of one  in  a  hundred thousand.However,It is twice as common as the hyperkalaemic form of PP.[19]- Several epidemiological studies on hypokalaemic periodic paralysis exists. Phakdeekitcharoen, Ruangraska and Radinahamed in 2004 rigorously approached Hypokalaemia and paralysis in the Thai population and eminently disseminated the results of their research. [20]

Whereas according to the scholarships of Lehmann-Horn, Rudel, Jurkat-Rott et al of 2004, the Hyperkalaemic PP affects approximately one in every two hundred thousand individuals. [4]

Overall myotonia and paramyotonia appear to affect a larger proportion of individuals with hyperkalaemic Periodic Paralysis than was previously recognized.

 

The Genetic Inheritance Pattern of Periodic Paralysis.

 

Results of fairly recent scholarships by Vicart of 2010 asserts that in hyperkalaemic PP, Point mutations in the SCN4A gene encoding the alpha subunit of the skeletal muscle voltage-gated sodium channel Navl 4 lead to defective channel function.This disrupts the normal exchange of ions in skeletal muscles, consequently reducing their ability to contract and resulting in attacks of muscle weakness or paralysis. [21] And there after other corroborative resources emerged. [22]

In Hyperkalaemic PP, the same mutations can have variable expressivity within and between families, with the severity of the attacks quite erratic or spectral. [21]

Whereas phenotypically, the disorder of hypokalaemic periodic paralysis (PP) is more eloquent and symptomatologically expressed in the male gender with a male to female ratio of about seven is to two, probably because, clinical penetrance is often incomplete in the feminine gender. These Gender differences in penetrance and phenotype in hypokalaemic periodic paralysis was highlighted and speculated upon by Ke, Luo, Qi, et al in 2013, [23] as did the previous familial molecular epidemiological reviews of Elbaz, Vale-Santos, Jurkat-Rott, et al on Hypokalemic periodic paralysis and the dihydropyridine receptor (CACNL 1A3) with genotype and phenotype correlations for two predominant mutations and evidence for the absence of a founder effect in 16 Caucasian families of 1995. [24]

In most investigations, the genetic diagnosis of Periodic paralysis is focused specifically to those cases with mutations such as : A499T,El702K,F1311V,G1306A,G1456E,I1160V,I1495T,I693T,L1436P,L1489H,L433R,M1360V,M1592V,R1448C,R1448H,S804F,T1313M,T704M,and V12931 with the occasional mention of the other identified but unreported candidate mutations.

 

In at least one of eight to one of nine instances there is a report of an affected relative with hyperkalaemic Periodic Paralysis, in those instances without a family member diagnosed with Hyperkalaemic Periodic Paralysis, several reported a

Family history of multiple relatives with Paramyotonia Congenita (PMC), but without associated hyperkalaemic Periodic Paralysis events. In such instances, those index cases without associated hyperkalaemic Periodic Paralysis or Paramyotonia Congenita (PMC) apparently were related to de novo mutations.

Familial cases tend to have a predilection for the same shared symptomatologies for the paramyotonia and myotonia respectively.

An Asian Chinese familial molecular epidemiological study of 2005.on the genetics of hypokalaemic periodic paralysis was proffered by Wang, Liu, Xu, et al.on Novel CACNA1S mutation causes autosomal dominant hypokalaemic periodic paralysis in a Chinese family. [25]And another familial Asian Korean genetic study of 2005.by Kim, Lee and Hur on A Korean family of hypokalaemic Periodic Paralysis with Mutation in a voltage-gated calcium channel (R1239g) is available. [26]

A Scandinavian familial molecular epidemiological study of 1997 by Sillen, Sorensen T, Kantola I, et al on the Identification of mutations in the CACNL 1A3 gene in thirteen families of Scandinavian origin having hypokalaemic periodic paralysis and evidence of a founder effect in Danish families dissected the genetics of the familial hypokalaemic periodic paralysis and seminally discussed their results. [27]And several other genetic studies exist.

Morrill, Brown Jr Cannon approached the Gating of the L-type Ca channel in human skeletal myotubes as an activation defect caused by the hypokalaemic periodic paralysis mutation R528H in 1998. [28]

In 1999, a novel sodium channel mutation in a family with hypokalaemic periodic paralysis was the topic of interest of Bulman, Scoggan and van Oene et al. [29]

In addition to the 2001 scholarship of Sternberg, Maisonabe and Jurkat-Rott, et al on Hypokalaemic periodic paralysis type 2 caused mutations at codon 672 in the muscle sodium channel gene SCN4A. [30]

 

Previously in 1996,Lapie , Goudet  and  Nargeot  et al.studied and discussed the electrophysiological properties of  the hypokalaemic periodic paralyses mutation(R528H) of the skeletal muscle alpha 1 S subunit as expressed in mouse l cells . [31]

 

The Genetic defects in Andersen’s syndrome has been deciphered

 

Tristani-Firouzi, Jensen and, Donaldson et al. researched, reviewed and discussed the Functional and clinical characterization of KCNJ2 mutations associated with LQT7 (Andersen’s syndrome) in 2002. [32]

 

Whereas Davies, Imbrici, and Fialho et al analysed, discussed and seminally dissected Andersen-Tawl syndrome as new potassium channel mutations and possible phenotypic variation in   2005. [33]

 

Fairly recently, Belus, Rogers and Bats experimentally demonstrated that EA Kir 2.1 is important for efficient BMP signaling in mammalian face development. And concluded that Mutations that disrupt the inwardly rectifying potassium channel Kir 2.1 lead to Andersen-Tawil syndrome that includes periodic paralysis, cardiac arrhythmias, cognitive deficits and craniofacial dysmorphology. [34]

Although the symptomatologies and expressivities could be greatly attenuated in some subsets of familial periodic paralysis with incomplete penetrance, other subsets with florid and markedly severe extensive disease has been described in several large families.Caciotti, Morrone and Domenici, et al in 2003 demonstrated and identified a severe prognosis in a large family with hypokalaemic periodic paralysis. [35]

 

Aetiology, inciting and risk factors associated with Periodic Paralysis.

 

Perturbations in the sodium-potassium ATPase gated channel pump has been proposed by several authors as the implicated factor in both the hypokalaemic and hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis. Chronologically, in 1982 Layzer tackled and reconciled the periodic paralysis and the sodium-potassium pump as a thematic concept. [1]

Tanabe, Beam, Powell and Numa demonstrated, dissected and eminently disseminated the restoration of excitation-contraction coupling and slow calcium current in dysgenic muscle by dihydropyridine receptor complementary DNA in  1988.[36] In 1999, Ruff demonstrated and reiterated that Insulin acts in hypokalaemic periodic paralysis by reducing inward rectifier K+ current.[37]

 

 

The impairment of skeletal muscle adenosine triphosphate-sensitive K+ channels in patients with hypokalaemic periodic paralysis was studied and discussed by Tricarico, Servidel and Tonali et al in 1999. [38]

As a seminal and emerging concept, gating pore current in an inherited ion channelopathy was tackled and dissected by Sokolov, Scheuer and Catherall in 2007. [39]

Whereas in 2009, Matthews, Labrum and Sweeney et al.hypothesised and demonstrated that voltage sensor charge loss accounts for most cases of hypokalaemic periodic paralysis. [40] In addition to the, discoveries of Leaky sodium channels from voltage sensor mutations in periodic paralysis.but not paramyotonia by Francis, Rybalchenko, Strucyk and Cannon of 2011. [41]

Paralytic attacks in hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis could be incited or precipitated by the restive state following a rigorous exercise.

Hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis could be provoked by or worsened by anaesthesia, potassium replete crystalloids infusion, relative hypothermias in chilly environments, a famish state, psychogenically challenging emotive dysthymic dispositions, corticosteroids use ,in addition to the gestational state.

For further reviews on the inciting agents of hyperkalemic periodic paralysis See the 2010 scholarships on this theme by Vicart. [21] 

During pregnancy, about one nine in of the women reported an increase in the attack frequency, however a total of one in eight reported an improvement in muscle weakness during attacks, where as three quarters to four in five reported worsening of stiffness, a quarter suggested some improvement in muscle stiffness during pregnancy. So overall, on the average the general impression during pregnancy happens to be increased attack frequency, improved muscle weakness during attacks, and worsened muscle stiffness during attacks.

Common pathological associations and phenomenological risk factors linked and related to Familial Periodic Paralysis include thyroid abnormalities, cardiac arrythmias, migranous cephalgias and hyperlipidaemias (hypercholesterolaemia and hypertriglyceridaemias)

 

Although more commonly associated with hypokalaemic periodic paralysis, however,anecdotally thyroid dysfunctions were computed to affect about one in five of the hyperkalaemic Periodic Paralysis cases, putting them at a relative risk(RR)  of three to four compared to the general population and this achieved both statistical and clinical significance (p<0.0001)These aspects of  thyroid dysfunction periodic paralysis  were addressed by Bjoro, Holmen, Kruger, Midthjell, Hunstad, Schreiner, Sandnes and Brochmann on their scholarship on the Prevalence of thyroid disease, thyroid dysfunction and thyroid peroxidase antibodies in a large, unselected population (The Health Study of Nord-Trondelag (HUNT) of the year 2000.[42]

Where as Cardiac arrhythmias were reported in about one in ten by several population studies, which though not statistically significant compared to the general population (p=0.04) statistical significance requires a p value of (0.005), was clinically significant

Electrcardiographic changes suggestive of hyperkalaemia or hypokalaemia could be demonstrated in these subsets of periodic paralysis, although this is not invariable. These aspects were comprehensively dealt with elsewhere by Rose and Post on their scholarship on the Clinical Physiology of Acid-Base and Electrolyte Disorders of 2001. [43]

However, neither the prevalence of migranous cephalgias nor of hyperlipidaemias is exacerbated in Familial Periodic Paralysis compared to the general population. Prior to achieving the diagnosis of hyperkalaemic Periodic Paralysis, subjects were misdiagnosed with pathologies such as malingering, conversion disorders, hypokalaemic Periodic Paralysis, Paramyotonia congenita and depressive or dysthymic symptomatologies.

Suggested attack inducers that exist for hyperkalaemic Periodic Paralysis are quote diverse and on a continual basis, new inciters are being added to those previously reported As many as one in seven have reported chilly cold environments as a precipitant of symptomatologies for both the hyperkalaemic and the hypokalaemic subsets. This diathesis to cold induced susceptibility is more common in mutant SCN4A, as was highlighted by Sugura, Makita and Li et al in their scholarship of 2003,that  Cold induces shifts of voltage dependence in mutant SCN4A, causing hypokalaemic periodic paralysis [44]

 

Rest after exercise in one half, stress or fatigue in one half, alcoholic beverages in about two in five cases, hunger in about two in five cases ,marked alteration in the rate of physical activities normally undertaken by the individual in a third ,potassium in the food ingested by the individual in a third, identified specific beverages or foods in a third, alterations in the humidity in a third, excessive sleeping in the afternoons  in a quarter, pregnancy in a third ,uncharacterized ill health in about  one fifth, menstruation in about one sixth, medications in one sixth and one seventh potassium supplements.

 

Sleep is comparable to a restive state following a vigorous activity in inciting or inducing attacks of hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis.

 

As for hypokalaemic periodic paralysis several associated factors have been determined notably but not confined to: syndromic associations such as Gitelman syndrome.Ng, Lin and Hsu et al in 2006 undertook a familial case study of Hypokalaemic paralysis due to Gitelman syndrome: [45]

 

Associations of Periodic Paralysis with Autoimmune disorders:

 

Previous reports of presentations unusually in association with Sjogrens syndrome presenting as hypokalaemic periodic paralysis and respiratory arrest exists. Primary Sjogrens syndrome presenting as hypokalaemic periodic paralysis and respiratory arrest, was reported and discussed by Fujimoto, Shiiki, Takahi and Dohi in 2001. [46]

Myasthenic symptoms in both the hereditary and acquired forms of Myasthenic gravis overlap with those of periodic paralysis especially those of hypothyroidism with shared associations between MG and PP.

 

Pharmacotherapeutic agents as precipitants of Periodic Paralysis.

 

Tucker and Villanueva on the basis of their observational scholarships of 2013 on this theme intimated that attacks of acute hypokalaemic periodic paralysis could possibly be precipitated by albuterol. [47]

 

Malignancies as aetiological Factor for Periodic Paralysis:

 

Malignancies such as prostatic carcinomas was implicated as a covert and insidious cause of hypokalaemic paralysis in a patient with prostate cancer by Cheng, Chen, Chau and Lin in 2004. [48]

 

Autoimmune Endocrinopathies and Metabolic Conditions:

 

Thyrotoxicosis:

 

Agarawol, Wadwa and Wali reiterated the axiom that Hypokalaemic periodic paralysis is associated with thyrotoxicosis in 1994. [49]

This was corroborated by the 1999 scholarship of Manoukian, Foote and Crapo on the Clinical and metabolic features of thyrotoxic periodic paralysis in 24 episodes [50]

 

Diabetes Ketoacidosis with Hypophosphataemia.

 

Liu and Jeng reported severe hypophosphataemia in a patient with diabetic ketoacidosis and acute respiratory failure as a form of acquired acute periodic paralysis in 2004. [51]

 

This illustrative and instructive case study with literature reviews describes the authors experience with compatible cases of periodic paralysis .Study objectives include to buttress and reiterate previously reported descriptions of the disease, to decipher new and previously undescribed and unreported features and associations, and to provide a more lucid comprehension of the experience of patients with periodic paralysis. It also summarizes the position statements and evidence on the Periodic Paralysis to date, and critically appraises and evaluates some of the concepts and data in the literature.

 

With the employ of independent research document content analysis, the extant, modern and current global medical literature were rigorously examined to characterize the epidemiology, symptomatologies, diagnostic ,therapeutic and prophylactic options and unusual associations of hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis. This applied to cases with specific and definite genetic mutation data, in addition to severe amino acid substitutions in typical and classical hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis.

 

THE NATURAL HISTORICAL, CLINICAL AND ELECTROPHYSIOLOGICAL (EMG, EEG.ECG)

PHENOMENOLOGIES OF PERIODIC PARALYSIS.

 

The clinical presentation of hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis could be very covert and indeed elusive especially to the unwary, because in between attacks lid lag secondary to eyelid myotonia may be the only clinical sign present

 

This occasional diagnostic clinical conundrum was fairly recently highlighted and discussed by.Jurkat-Rott and, Lehmann-Horn in their 2011 Hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis type 1.Gene Reviews. [52]

And previous scholarships on this theme by Amato and Russell are available in their eminently published and disseminated work on the neuromuscular disorders. [53]

,in this way of unusual presentation with lid lag, familial hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis  could mimic hyperthyroidism unassociated or uncomplicated with periodic paralysis  in its myotonic phase ,but also hyperthyroidism associated or complicated by periodic paralysis in its paretic or paralytic form,in the absence of an overt  orthotopic goiter this makes the consideration of  an ectopic proximate  retrosternal  or lingual thyroid  or a distant metastatic teratomatous ovarian tissue ( struma ovarii )imperative in such cases  ,other differential diagnostic considerations will include the Myasthenia gravis denovo or thyroiditis related myasthenia in addition to the Eaton Lamberts syndrome in association with Oat cell carcinoma of the Lungs in an appropriate clinical and pathological setting,

Previous experience of the author on childhood and adolescent myasthenia gravis and periodic paraluysis included hyperthyroidism. [54]

 

The term periodic paralysis is a misnomer,

 

The term periodic paralysis is a misnomer, especially when applied in the context of  Hyperkalaemic PP which  is characterized by attacks of flaccid  muscle weakness that are infact episodic, paroxysmal ,rather than periodic in character as is implied by its nomenclature. Although it was not entirely explored previously, on the average, the fact that attacks of Periodic Paralysis typically commences in infancy to later childhood, before adolescence and pubertal period, its relationship to endocrinopathies especially hyperthyroidism and its response to acetozolamide may well suggest the role of hormonal, in addition to other humoural factors such as prostaglandins in its aetiopathophogenesis.

 

In Hyperkalaemic PP, Bouts of paralysis typically commences in the first ten years of life, with increasing events cumulatively until it finally climaxes in the late adolescence age. Fortunately in some cases, the hyperkalaemic PP event gets considerably more seldom in midlife .This was previously remarked upon and annotated on by the fairly recent contributions of Jurkat-Rott and Lehmann-Horn of (2011) on Hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis type 1.Gene Reviews. [52]

 

Jurkat-Rott et al opined that however the persistence of symptomatologies of hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis does not augur well with a favourable outlook, because prognostically these subsets have been noted to suffer attacks of chronic progressive myopathy that can cause permanent muscle decimation and weakness. [52] As did Lehmann-Horn and Jurkat-Rott in their scholarships and reviews on Genotype-phenotype correlation and therapeutic rationale in hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis neurotherapeutics of 2007. [55]

 

In hyperkalaemic PP, paralytic attacks demonstrates no diurnal variation as such,

 

Although hyperkalaemic PP, paralytic  attacks  may occur at any time, anecdotally and evidentially, they frequently occurs in the morning before the first meal of the day in about three fifths of the cases, However, more recent reports have given more weight to sleeping offering a figure of about one half and other series proffered a figure of two in five in the awakening post hypognonomic state ,where as the afternoon (post cibal period) and the evening periods were reported in one in five to one third of the  cases in other series respectively.

Typically, these attacks may last for up to sixty minutes or more with an undertermined, erratic and staggered recovery temporal course.

For excellent reviews on the thematic aspects of the natural history of Periodic Paralysis see the fairly recent reviews of 2012 on this theme by Dugdale, Lin and, Zieve on Hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis abstracted, catalogued and indexed at the U.S.National Library of Medicine. [56]

In addition to the re-echos of these of aspects by Jurkat-Rott and Lehmann-Horn and Amato and Russell in 2011 and 2008.respectively. [52] [53]

 

In other instances, attacks could last anywhere from thirty minutes to several hours

Data from the clinical trials of Venance ,Cannon ,Fialho ,Fontaine ,Hanna ,Ptacek ,Tristani-Firouzi ,Twill and,Griggs et al on behalf of the ,CINCH investigators. on The primary periodic paralysis; diagnosis, pathogenesis and treatment. Of 2006; infers that exceptionally, with progressive disease, attacks have been prolonged for several days continually. [57]

 

Whereas those with hypokalaemic periodic paralysis experience generalized flaccid paralysis, those with hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis seldom, experience a global flaccid paralysis.

 

Hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis cases seldom, experience widespread flaccid paralysis but rather are inclined towards focal muscular weaknesses, especially implicating the thigh and calf muscles  Also, in addition the muscular dysnergia and hypotonia in hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis subsets tends to be [i]-exclusive of myotonia in one subset ,[ii]-associated with ,inclusive of  or existing incidentally with  a clinically overt  myotonia  in another or  [ii]  co-existing epiphenomenally with a coincidentally clinically covert but electromyographically(EMG)  demonstrated  Myotonia  or  in  the setting of a [iv]-  myogenic dysnergia expressed synonymously with a denovo paramyotonia congenita(PMC)

These aspects were thematically illustrated by Canon and George in their book chapters on the Pathophysiology of myotonia and periodic paralysis .In the book the Diseases of the Nervous System, edited by Asbury, McKhann and McDonald WI, et al in 2002. [58]

 

In some instances of hyperkalaemic Periodic Paralysis, the co-existence of myotonia or paramyotonia may not be conclusively established because even after a life or video assisted illustration, most subjects could not confidently assert that they has these phenomenologies.Between 2007 and 2008, Lehmann-Horn, Jurkat-Rott, Amato and Russell comtemperonously but independently proposed that the clinical pattern of the paralytic attacks is uninfluenced by the .subtype of myotonia. [55] [53]

 

During the paralytic attacks, the superficial abdominal and the deep tendon reflexes during an attack may be absent or diminished, and exceptionally, there may be dysphonia, dysphagia and dyspnoea related to bulbar and respiratory muscle pathological implications.

Amato and  Russell  opines that Although, normally, since hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis is a motor myogenic pathology, the sensations to the stimuli modalities of touch, pain, temperature, vibration, kineasthology, pressure were not ordinarily implicated, but perturbations of sensations reported during bouts of hyperkalaemic PP attacks included but were not confined to: prodromes and aura of myogenic paraesthesias, tingling, needles and pins sensations and variable degrees of relative rather than absolute numbness.

Furthermore, also several other subjects reported focal muscular tenderness, several myogenic nociceptive or   unpleasant and discomforting sensations of some disabling or dysfunctional character, [53]

Observational follow up studies by Jurkat-Rott and Lehmann-Horn in 2011 opines that However normally overall, most attacks in affected subjects were not usually complicated by arrythmogenic cardiomyogenic events or cardiopulmonary insufficiency of any suspicious flair or deleterious character.

[52]

In the other outstanding instances, in between attacks individual cases with known hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis will have normal sensation, normal muscle stretch reflexes and muscle length. In 2008,Amato and  Russell observed that although, certain individuals may experience myotonia in between paretic or paralytic events in hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis, however overall, the myotonia is often mild  ,could be precipitated and aggravated  with  muscular groups activations through tapping or manoeuvres involving the facial, the lingual ,the forearm muscles and the thenar eminence. It does not generally hinder voluntary motions, and myotonia is usually ameliorated by repetitive muscular activities.The emphasis is on myotonia (i.e., defined by Dorland’s as repetitive but non-tetanic myogenic spasms) [59]

Since the normal course of myotonia in association with hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis in innocuous, with regards to achieving a distinction between these subsets and other subsets of periodic paralysis, though of clinical and therapeutic relevance in exceptional instances, overall this distinctiveness is more of an academic activity. [53]

The only exception to the benign course of the myotonia in hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis appears to be those subsets with paramyotonia congenita (PMC), who experience muscular rigidity and stiffness which increases instead of decreases with continued activities, in addition to cold induced exacerbations of its symptomatologies.An elegant overview on this clinicopathological overview and its nosological characterization has been achieved in the Myology Monograph of 2004 authored by Lehmann-Horn, Rudel and Jurkat-Rott on Nondystrophic myotonias and periodic paralysis.and edited by: Engel, Franzini-Armstrong.[4]

Prevalence studies of myotonia and paramyotonia in individuals with hyperkalaemic Periodic Paralysis computed an approximate ratio of one in two for paramyotonia, in addition to a myotonia occurrence in one in two of these paramyotonic subsets.

Also Myotonia could confound threatening miscarriage or premature onset of labour because of its occasional exacerbations during pregnancy, making the abdominal and uterine muscles to contract continually.

Since menstrual cycle and pregnancy were implicated as inciting factors several authors propose the implication of oestrogenic hormones in its aetiopathogenic causal pathways.

 

Pertaining to the prodromal symptoms, the affected individuals with Hyperkalaemic Periodic Paralysis complained of experiencing prodromal symptomatologies before the onset of a florid paralysis attack, the prodromal symptomatologies range from fatigue, lethargy, lassitude weakness, irritability, and/or restlessness.

 

Immediately preceeding an attack most of the subjects complained of hyperhydrosis, myalgias, stiffening, rigidity, weakness, restlessness, tingling and/or numbness. The attack interval from these prodromal symptomatologies range from a third of an hour to several hours, however interestingly this interval is not predictably constant for any particular individual. Many subjects reported being melancholic, dysthymic, irritable and depressed pre, peri and post periodic paralytic events. Although this is not invariable, but overall most subjects reported an alteration of the muscular sensation and hyperhydrosis.

 

However, some subjects reported that their attacks happen more commonly than they will otherwise would as they are now medically controlled. Attack frequency ranged from one to three attacks per month in a third, to once a week in one fifth and to about two to six in a quarter. Although previous literature described attacks of Periodic paralysis as lasting for about sixty minutes to one twenty minutes, in duration, and seldom lasting for days, other series have reported a duration of more than twenty four hours in a fifth of their subjects, and a fifth reported typical attacks lasting an hour and another one eight reported attacks lasting about a quarter of an hour to half an hours.In a fifth of the patients their longest attack was reported to be over a week.

Pertaining to the topographical involvement of the appendicular skeleton .most subjects could report those areas of the body affected most during attacks.

The arms and hands are just as frequently affected during attacks as do the thighs and calves. However, it is of much concern that the facial and the respiratory musculature are affected during attacks in a significant number of individuals.

Several emerging and ongoing data are divergent from previous reports in the literature which stated that lid lag secondary to eyelid myotonia may be the only clinical sign present between attacks.

The reported severity of attacks varied greatly between individuals, with the largest subsets, two fifths of the respondents described the majority of

their attacks as mild (defined as having some perceptible limitations on motion, About one sixth reported their attacks as severe (because it is accompanied by aphasia or functionally disabling dysphasia) in more recent series, the majority of individuals reported mild or no symptoms between attacks However, one eight reported severe symptomatologies in between attacks that impair their functional professional and domiciliary capabilities. Previous data on these themes achieved by Jurkat-Rott and Lehmann-Horn in (2011) [52] And Amato and, Russell of 2008 respectively. [53] Are in consonance.

 

Following attacks, previous series reported myalgia in about two fifths pre and post attack, where as one fifth denied any associated myalgia.

 

However, more recent series includes other more or less eloquent or vague symptomatologies such as malaise, clumsiness, extreme fatigability, unexplained tiredness, listlessness, lethargy, weakness, and/or irritability, frightening symptomatologies reported include dyspnoea and palpitations.

 

An evaluation of the natural history of periodic paralysis yielded some interesting data, with regards to the manner in which their symptomatologies have altered chronologically, it was reported that attacks typically increased in frequency during childhood in nine of ten cases, where as in four of every five cases, during the adolescence and teenage years. From the second decade to well into the third decade, the pattern was heterogeneous with one half reporting increasing attack frequencies and a third reporting no change in the attack frequencies and one sixth reporting a decrease in the attack frequency. .From the fourth decade to well into the sixth decade, about three fifths of the subjects reported an increased frequency of the attacks, whereas one fifth reported that the symptoms stayed as the same, and the other one fifth diminished in attack frequency.

 

Overall several subjects commented that their attack frequency has remained the same throughout their lives.

 

Regarding changes in the severity of muscle weakness during attacks, in individuals within the first two decades of life, there were no observable pattern and the changes were erratic, unpredictable and more or less characterless. Between the second decade and well into the third decades of life, about three fifths reported improvement in the periodic paralysis symptomatologies, and between the fourth and well into the sixth decade of life, about one half reported improvement in their symptomatologies where as two fifths reported worsening symptomatologies.

 

With regards to changes in muscle stiffness during attacks over time, several subjects frequently reported worsening stiffness during childhood in about eight to nine of ten instances and in seven of ten cases of the pubertal, adolescence or teenage age groups. From the second decade of life to well into the third decade, a third of the subjects reported no alteration in the muscle stiffness, a worsening of muscle stiffness and improvement in muscle stiffness respectively respectively. From the fourth decade to well into the sixth decade, about one half reported worsening and one fifth reported improvements in muscle stiffness 

 

The majority of the subjects noted progressive permanent muscle wellness during childhood in seven of ten cases, whilst only a one third minority of individuals reported such changes during the teenage years and from the second into well the third decades respectively. This is in marked contrast to the opinion of the previous literature that reported that permanent muscle weakness to be the problem of older adults principally.

 

This chronologically dependent clinico-pathological association was inferentially buttressed by nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopic imaging data by Amarteifo, Nagal, Weber, Jurkat-Rott and Lehmann-Hom on Hyperkalemic periodic paralysis and permanent weakness: 3-T MR imaging depicts intracellular 23 Na overload-initial results of .2012. [60]

 

As did the re-echos of the contemporaneous reviews of Jurkat-Rott and Lehmann-Horn on Hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis type 1.Gene Reviews. [52]

 

However most studies concur with previous studies that in eight to nine of every ten cases, that cases aged from their fourth decades onwards, reported permanent muscle weakness thereafter.

 

Overall, in summary, the general trend in most series is that of a chronologically increasing attack frequency, which is especially prevalent during childhood and adolescence, improving muscle weakness during attacks from young adulthood onwards ,worsening muscle stiffness during attacks prior to adulthood, and progressive permanent muscle weakness during childhood and after the fourth decade. Permanent muscle weakness is equally a feature of hypokalaemic periodic paralysis. as was indicated by Links, Zwarts and, Wilmink et al on their scholarships on Permanent muscle weakness in familial hypokalaemic periodic paralysis .Clinical, radiological and pathological aspects of 1990.[61]

 

The degree of incapacitation caused by hyperkalaemic Periodic Paralysis is quite variable, with some being intervally dependent on their next of kins during attacks for  their domestic needs ,to instances of being bedridden and confined to a hospital bed. In several instances, participants reported their initial attack of hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis in the second decade of life, in contrast to the accepted notion that attacks usually commences in the first ten years of life. (Jurkat-Rott K, Lehmann-Horn F (2011) Hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis type 1.Gene Reviews.)[52]

 

Compared to the Index case in an affected family, the diagnosis of Periodic Paralysis is usually more rapidly achieved  in the subsequent subjects,

 

Diagnostic delay could be as long as the index cases life span, because of several confounding variables, unusual, or atypical presentation, leading to low suspicion index, in addition to restricted diagnostic options. Following diagnosed index cases, familial screening and education diagnosis has been very rapid in the other affected members because of a heightened suspicion index. An average diagnostic delay time of about two decades was reported by the earlier series. The other area of interest is the identification of Familial Periodic Paralysis with certain medical specialty from the diagnostic accuracy point of view such as but not confined to acute neurology most commonly, but also a genetist, a Paediatrician or an internist. Although overall, the epidemiological, familial, genetic, clinicopathoradiological and social aspects of Familial Periodic Paralysis had a multidisciplinary and interdisciplinary intent, but however on the average the utmost diagnosis was usually achieved within the Neurology and Neurosciences domain. Interestingly ongoing and conclusive reports have suggested a higher incidence of myotonia more than the previous reports of one case in five instances.

(Venance ,Cannon ,Fialho ,Fontaine ,Hanna ,Ptacek ,Tristani-Firouzi ,Twil and Griggs on behalf of CINCH investigators.The primary periodic paralysis;diagnosis,pathogenesis and treatment.  (2006)[57]

In addition to the physical effects of their disease, subjects reported other associated difficulties. Especially, subjects reported their condition having negative impacts on their vocation in about seven of ten instances, an undermining Factor to their overall physical health ,in addition to their academic, didantic activity in three of five instances respectively, as well as their nuclear and extended familial and domiciliary undertakings in four of ten cases, some of the affected subjects thought that periodic paralysis compromised their global and holistic psychosocial well being in a third of cases and perturbations of social relationships and networking was reported in a quarter of cases.

 

The effects on the overall physical health reported include weight gain, inability to exercise, and cardiac dysarrythmias.

 

Severe attacks have made punctuality and attendance at school and work burdensome if not impossible increasing the rates of absenteeism and sick leave off days. Moderate attacks are equally incapacitating through making activities more demanding, uncomfortable, painful, tardy. exhaustive and tiring. Domiciliary familial life is particularly undermined by the limited range of activities permissible for the affected cases, especially their children or wards.

Also the progressive myopathy with muscle dysfunction encountered in about a third of subjects contributes to such limitations.

 

The age aggregate of those reporting limitations of activity range from the end of the first two decades of life to mid seventies, with a median age of mid forties.

 

Overall, on the basis of the complaints of cases of hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis, the overall impact of periodic paralysis extend far beyond the chronological boundaries of acute paralytic episodes.Interestingly, with regards to their overall emotional and mental well-being, in thinking about their lives with periodic paralysis, most affected cases perceived their overall psych-social well-being as complacent, delightful, accomplished or non despondent. Whereas a simple minority described their state as being dysthymic, melancholic, despondent and sober.

 

Several subjects narrated their grave difficulties in life tantamount to their hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis, such experiences include but not confined to falls whilst outdoors and being trampled upon whilst lying in a crowdy environment following an attack, apprehensions from occasional and festive phobias because of the possibility  of a periodic paralysis event  and lack of independence especially having to rely on unknown strangers for support following attacks , in addition to perceptions of empathy from  unfamiliar attack witnesses.

The recommendations offered by subjects with hyperkalaemic Periodic Paralysis, to others with similar symptomatologies include but not confined to getting educated on the natural history, diagnostic therapeutic and prophylactic interventions for periodic paralysis and seek prompt support.

Lifestyle modification with regards to dietetics, physical activities, and knowledge on medications needed to manage the paralytic events. In addition to enrollment  into  Periodic Paralysis support groups for experiences sharing  and obtaining educative information from other PP subjects.

 

 

 

 

Other proffered recommendations include counseling others about the disorder, with honest nonjudgmental probity, whilst acknowledging the individualities in the required therapeutics and divergence in the degrees of attack severities.

Affected individuals and their families were equally counseled to undertake in positive health seeking activities which they consider worthwhile in giving meaning to their lives, whilst not forgetting to take their medications,

prophylactic options should aim as much as possible to eschew  thoughts dwelling on  the condition as much as will be achievable.

 

THE DIAGNOSTIC ASPECTS AND FEATURES OF HYPERKALAEMIC PERIODIC PARALYSIS.

 

The diagnosis of hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis is based on clinical grounds, sometimes with the use of provocative tests in cases of diagnostic ambiguity and uncertainty. Fairly recent reviews by Jurkat-Rott and Lehmann-Horn of (2011) on Hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis type 1.Gene Reviews dissected these diagnostic modalities. [52]

The diagnosis is suggested by historical notes of attacks of weakness or paralysis, a positive family history, and the presence of myotonia or paramyotonia.

Serum creatinine (CK) values may be elevated, and some individuals exhibit calf muscle hypertrophy. On the average, the muscles are typically well-developed. Excellent updates on the myogenic and neuro-myogenic aspects of periodic paralysis were achieved by the independent collective efforts of the groups of Schpira and Griggs and that of Amato and Russell in 1991 and 2008 respectively. [11], [53]

 

However, a large proportion of individuals with hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis develop a chronic progressive decimating proximal myopathy as they advance chronologically.

 

In their 2012 scholarship Amarteifo, Nagal, Weber, Jurkat-Rott and Lehmann-Hom .demonstrated that in  Hyperkalemic periodic paralysis with  permanent weakness that  3-T Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopic  imaging depicts intracellular 23- Na overload-initial results . It was speculative that this might connote predisposition for these groups of myogenic cells to cytotoxic and osmotic injury with hydropic vacoulative degeneration. [60]

Previous reports from  other experimental studies by Venance ,Cannon ,Fialho ,Fontaine ,Hanna ,Ptacek ,Tristani-Firouzi ,Twil and ,Griggs on behalf of the  ,CINCH investigators. On the primary periodic paralysis; diagnosis, pathogenesis and treatment in 2006 highlighted on the nonreversible chronological down hill course of some cases of periodic paralysis. [57]

Although more modern literature refutes this notion, previous reviews indicate that paradoxically, individuals without interactal myotonia are much more susceptible to developing this progressive myopathy than are individuals with myotonia. Reviews of Jurkat-Rott and Lehmann-Horn et al dissected these aspects lucidly. [52], [4]

 

Muscle biopsy though non-specific, will frequently reveal muscle fibre atrophy with vacuolopathy.

 

In 1992, on the basis of a diligently studied case report and comprehensive literature reviews, Gold and Reichmann proposed that muscle pathology correlates with permanent muscle weakness in hypokalaemic periodic paralysis.

[62]

The histopathological features of the myopathy of periodic paralysis were equally analysed and presented by Amato and Russell and Vicart in 2008 and 2912 respectively [53], [21]

Genetic testing is positive in approximately sixty percent of individuals who meet clinical diagnostic inclusion criteria.

 

THE LABORATORY FEATURES OF PERIODIC PARALYSIS.

 

During attacks, individuals may be hyperkalaemic or normokaelemic. [22]

Scholarships and reviews by Schpira and  Griggs suggests that the simultaneous, synchronous or contemporaneous elevation of the serum potassium levels may spectrally range from upper normal values to figures in the cardiomyogenic arrythmogenic inciting ranges [11] However, on the basis of their meticulous study on the theme, Genotype-phenotype correlation and therapeutic rationale in hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis. Lehmann-Horn and Jurkat-Rott in 2007 pointed out that following an episode of hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis, serum potassium may be paradoxically temporarily diminutive due to rapid renal clearance of potassium in addition to enhanced cellular myogenic potassium reuptake. [55] On the average in the interval between paralytic attacks, in the hyperkalaemic PPs, most affected subjects will have a normal serum potassium level.

Regarding the association between serum potassium and attack characteristics, no specific trends were noted. Of those who had their serum potassium measured during attacks, the majority reported being hyperkalemic, although several reported normokalaemic and in occasional  instances  being hypokalaemic was reported.However, overall regardless of the serum potassium levels, most subjects reported feeling stiff and weak during attacks.There is no existing report or data on specific potassium level threshold at which attacks would occur,Curiously, in one of eight instances, episodes of weakness that improved with potassium intake was paradoxically reported by the affected subjects with supposedly known hyperkalaemic PP.

 

 

 

 

 

 

ELECTROPHYSIOLOGICAL STUDIES IN HYPERKALAEMIC PERIODIC PARALYSIS.

 

In hypokalaemic periodic paralysis, these electrophysiological tests are largely reversible. In 2014 an Indian Asian Study by Sharma, Nath and Parekh discussed reversible electrophysiological abnormalities in hypokalaemic paralysis: and reported two cases. [63]

An EMG may show myotonic risks to the patient but may be done to support the diagnosis, although approximately half of those with the most common mutations show no such signs. Several aspects of clinico-genetic electrophysiological correlations in periodic paralysis were discussed by Jurkat-Rott and Lehmann-Horn   in 2011 in the theme Hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis type 1.Gene Reviews. [52]

Venance et al on behalf of the CINCH Investigators indicated that electrical myotonia could be demonstrated on EMG in about one half to three quarters of patients with hyperkalaemic PP, while less than one fifth were symptomatologically overt. [57]

 

THE DIAGNOSTIC ASPECTS OF HYPOKALEMIC PERIODIC PARALYSIS:

 

EXERCISE TESTS.

 

Previous data on the exercise test in periodic paralysis by McManis, Lambert and Daube of 1986 infers that the exercise tests could be applied to achieve the diagnosis of hypokaelemic periodic paralysis. [64] Or For the monitoring of the progress of the disease activity or in response to pharmacotherapeutic interventions as was proposed comtemperonously in 2004 by Fournier, Arzel and Sternberg, et al in their investigative scholarships that electromyography guides toward subgroups of mutations in muscle channelopathies.[65]And The exercise test as a monitor of disease status in hypokalaemic periodic paralysis by Tengan, Antunes, Gabbal and Manzano.[66]In addition to the previous data on this theme in 2000 by Kuntzer, Flocard and Vial et al which discussed .exercise test in muscle channelopathies and other muscle disorders. [67]

Provocative tests such as the potassium challenge test pose obvious risks to the patient but may be done to support the diagnosis, although approximately half of those with the most common mutation show no such signs. The limitations and shortcomings of these provocative tests have been provided and discussed by several authors (Jurkat-Rott and Lehmann-Horn (2011) [52] (Amato and Russell (2008) [53] and (Vicart (2010) [21]

Previous scholarships by Streeten, Speller and Fellerman of 1993 demonstrated and discussed the use of corticotrophin-induced potassium changes in the diagnosis of both hypo- and hyperkalemic periodic paralysis. [68]

However, the availability of genetic testing and elctrophysiologic studies largely undermines the need for such cautious diagnostic approaches.

 

 

Differential Diagnostic challenges:

 

A majority of the misdiagnosis for Familial Periodic Paralysis implicates the psychiatric and psychosomatic conditions. In cases of hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis with overwhelming myotonia other diagnostic considerations will include Schwartz-Jampel syndrome (SJS) which according to the scholarships and reviews of Godai of 2017 is a rare syndrome characterized by myotonia and skeletal abnormalities .Most reports regarding SJS have stated that patients with this condition have symptomatologies mimicking ParaMyotonia Congenita. (PMC) [69]

On the basis of their recent scholarships of 2017 on the Analysis of Clinical and Metabolic Profile of Acute Neuromuscular Weaknesses Related to Hypokalaemia, Kumar Singh, Kumar MaURYA and Kumar Thacker suggested that other secondary causes of muscle weakness related to hypokalaemia ought to be considered before pursuing the establishment of the diagnosis of familial periodic paralysis. [70]

 

Complications

 

Non-anaesthetic related surgical complications were reported in one in five instances, and complete paralysis lasting several days up to a week has been recorded. Other complications encountered include malignant hyperthermia, hypernatreamia and respiratory difficulties these anaesthetic complications could be greatly ameliorated, if these cases are placed first on the operating list and their conditions discussed fully with the anesthesiologists in the pre-operative grand ward rounds so that no unsafe or contraindicated anaesthesia could be used on people with hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis. These aspects were detailed by (Lehmann-Horn et al (2004) [4]

Following local anaesthesia, about one in ten of the cases reported an untoward effect, specifically complete paralysis lasting several hours, respiratory depression, palpitations and muscle stiffness. The complication rate with general anaesthesia is higher at one of every three cases, which includes, but not confined to severe paralysis, involving the respiratory muscles, stiffness weakness ,hyperthermia and especially with propofol,a propofol induced heavy weakness, Although the anesthetic agents or implicated surgical procedures were noncategorically  identified by the subjects,however,overall individuals with hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis are clearly at risk for complications from surgery and anaesthetics.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Management with GENERIC PREVENTIVE MEASURES.

 

Gleanings from classic histriographic data of 1968 by Resnick, Engel, Griggs and Stam suggests that Acetozolamide prophylaxis has been proposed by several authors, especially for the hypokalaemic form of familial periodic paralysis. [71]

 

Prophylactic measures include eating frequent carbohydrate-rich meals and the continous use of diuretics that reduce potassium levels, such as thiazides or carbonic anhydrase inhibitors. Equally important is the avoidance of potassium rich foods, medications that raise the serum levels of potassium, fasting strenuous work, and exposure to cold.Mexileten is beneficial in the management of myotonia .Early in the course of an attack, abortive or attenuating measures include mild exercise, carbohydrate ingestion, and beta-adrenergic agonist inhalation. Severe attacks warrant treatment with intravenous glucose and insulin Calcium carbonate is used in cases of severe hyperkalaemia to stabilize the myocardium to prevent arrhythmias. This prophylactic therapeutic modality was highlighted and positively discussed by Jurkat-Rott and Lehmann-Horn (2011)

[52] (Amato and Russell (2008.)[53] And (Schpira and Griggs (1991). [11]

 

In their scholarships on periodic paralysis and qas specifically reechoed by Griggs, Resnik and, Engel in their investigation on Intravenous treatment of hypokalaemic periodic paralysis of 1983. [72]

Patients with hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis must avoid depolarizing anesthetics, such as suxamethonium and anticholinesterase agents, as they aggravate myotonia and can interfere with intubation and mechanical ventilation.

Histriographically, several discussions and reviews on this theme was provided

 

In 1970, Griggs .Engel and Resnick in discussing .Acetozolamide treatment of hypokalaemic periodic paralysis .Prevention of attacks and improvement of persistent weakness highlighted these anaesthetic complications. [73]

As did Links, Smit and Molenaar et al in their reviews of Familial hypokalaemic periodic paralysis with regards to its clinical, diagnostic and therapeutic aspects of 1994. [74]

And Dalakas and Engel in their discussions on the treatment of “permanent “muscle weakness in familial Hypokalaemic Periodic Paralysis of 1983. [75]

In addition to the fairly recent reviews of Jurkat-Rott and Lehmann-Horn F Hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis type 1.Gene of 2011. [52]

 

The therapeutic intervention for thyrotoxic periodic paralysis deserves special attention, especially with regards to the potassium replacement therapy for the hypokaelemic subsets. These aspects were illuminated up on by Loh, Hsu and Chiu et al in their scholarships on Thyrotoxic periodic paralysis complicated by near fatal ventricular arrhythmias of 2005.[76] And previous scholarships by Lu, Pinheiro and Ng. of 2004.highlighted these aspects on the effects of potassium supplementation on the recovery of thyrotoxic periodic paralysis.

[77]

 

Therapeutic Environmental Manipulations for Periodic Paralysis.

 

Some candidates discussed realistic and innovative solutions that they have conceived and implemented to facilitate the modification of their domiciliary environment to factor in the demands of their periodic paralysis, such as making handy those materials that could ameliorate an attack, notably, but not confined to, magnesium, sugar cane, etc, or muscle strengthening exercise equipment.

In addition to wheel chairs, lavatory and bathrooms assistive devices.

 

Other proposed domiciliary or ergonomics assistive modifications such as high energy powered automated scooters, in addition to the adornment of an identification emergency alert bracelet or devices. In other instances, isotonic less rigorous or physically demanding exercises such as walking, biking and swimming were employed to avoid attacks. Inculcating these ideas and specifications into an individual’s domiciliary and routine itenary may augment safety and assist one to deal more effectively with PP disease associated limitations.

 

Therapeutic Interventions and Management.

 

The length of time required to achieve a fairly well satisfying apposite therapy was quite variable, with about one half  suggesting about ten years or more, where as one fifth suggested that it took from about half a decade to a decade to find a psychologically and functionally satisfying therapeutic option.

 

A quarter proffered about twelve to sixty months as the interval for the period that elapsed between the sentinel symptomatology and encountering a beneficial management regimen.

 

In another one of twelfth cases a therapeutically useful intervention was achieved within the first twelve months, on the average overall it took about twelve years for a psychologically, socially and functionally rewarding therapeutic intervention to be achieved. However, dauntingly, several candidates of hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis commented that they are still searching to achieve the utmost and perfect therapeutic regimens for their symptomatologies.

 

In most instances about one half of the subjects think that their treatment somewhat needs some form of improvement, where as nine of twenty of the cases, perceives that their therapeutic interventions mostly controls the symptomatologies adequate enough to preclude attacks of periodic paralysis in most instances, whereas one in twenty considers  their management to be optimal and utmost.

 

Interestingly, about one of six cases in the frequently controlled persons denied taking continual medications, where as three fifths of those describing their disease status as needing improvement denied taking continual medications.

Therefore those not taking medications have a relative risk of about two to three (p<0.0001) for experiencing inadequate disease control compared to those taking chronic medications. Therefore clinicians should be proactive in prescribing medications when appropriate.

 

The efficacy of these therapeutic modalities have been demonstrated at both the the clinical and experimental levels.On the basis of the results of their investigations on this theme,

Tricarico, Barbieri and Mele et al in 2004, demonstrated that Carbonic anhydrase inhibitors are specific openers of skeletal muscle BK channel of K+ deficient rodent models. [78]

In the author’s experience from his series, Acerazolomide is probably a wonder drug for PP of various aetiological origin.

Many participants reported some combination of medications and carbohydrate rich food as their primary therapeutic regimen. The majority of subjects consume medium-sized meals, and at least a quarter consume smaller sized meals.

Most subjects with hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis ingest three to five square meals a day and carbohydrate rich snacks every sixty to ninety minutes. Ingested carbohydrate sources reported include candy, sugar, bread, and pasta .Overall, most subjects with hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis will avoid alcoholic liquors , a whole lot of potassium enriched food substances ,diet soda, and cold foods and beverages.

 

Concerning those medications used by the frequently controlled cases, one fifth used hydrochlorothiazide and mexiletene respectively, where as one eight used fleicanide. Previously experimentally, local anaesthetics have been employed as candidate therapeutic options for hyperkalemic periodic paralysis.

In 1998, Sah et al examined the ability of local anaesthetics to correct altered inactivation properties of rat skeletal muscle Na+ channels containing the equine hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis (eq-HPP) mutation. [79]

Most affected individuals tend to use beta- 2 agonists or their routine continual medications in the acute setting. With regards to the maneuver that most subjects identified as effective for ameliorating acute attacks outside of their long-term treatment regimens.Common practices include doing gentle exercise, keeping warm, eating sweet foods, encouraging muscular relaxations and drinking water. However, dishearteningly in about two fifths instances aborting an attack with these maneuvers were unachievable or very occasionally useful.

 

With reference to the dietetics practices with utmost positive influence on Familial Periodic Paralysis, by terminating or ameliorating acute attacks of periodic paralysis a miscellaneous variety of specific food items and beverages which were replete in carbohydrate, although otherwise this seems to reflect personal taste rather than any nutritional trend. Food items of preference include chocolate bars, cookies, crackers, Coca-cola, Gatorade, and sugar.

 

 The majority of subjects deny any difference between impact of solid versus liquid carbohydrates. Subjects reported carbohydrates take effect in anywhere from one fifth of a minute to about four to six hours, the majority reporting an effect within an hour. Subjects commented that it is also very important to drink a lot of fluids, such as water or tea, Carbohydrates and hydration appear to be a key part of nonmedical intervention for PP.

 

Some Speculations and observations on the Negative Impact of Acetozolamide on Periodic Paralysis:

 

Intriguingly, the role of acetozolamide was controversially discussed in the global medical literature, because several reports of acetozolamide inciting the exarcebation of familial hypokalaemic periodic paralysis exist.

In 2001, Bendahhou, Cumminis and Griggs et al. presented and discussed that Sodium channel inactivation defects are associated with acetozolamide-exacerbated hypokalaemic periodic paralysis. [80]

Earlier reviews by Tores, Griggs, Morley and Bender of 1981 on Hypokalaemic periodic paralysis exacerbated by acetozolamide alluded to this untoward iaotrogenic effect. [81]

In 2000, Tawil, McDermott and Brown et al.on behalf of the Working Group on Periodic Paralysis on the basis of their Randomized trials of dichlorophenamide in the periodic paralyses proposed the trial of dichlorophenamide another carbonic anhydrase inhibitor in those instances where the use of acetozolamide is precluded, unachievable or suspected to be exacerbating the symptomatologies of periodic paralysis. [82]

Several other therapeutic options have been proposed for familial periodic paralysis.Chronologically, In 1996 Ligtenberg, Van Haeften and Van Der Kolk et al presented and discussed normal insulin release during sustained hyperglycaemic periodic paralysis and the   role of the potassium channel opener pinacidil in impaired muscle strength. [83]

Links, Arnoldus and Wintzen et al presented and discussed the specialized therapeutic role of the calcium channel blocker verapamil in hypokalaemic periodic paralysis .in 1998. [84]

In a similar therapeutic endevour, the role of topiramate in the treatment of hypokaelemic periodic paralysis was proposed and advanced by Fiore and Strober in 2011. [85]

A systematic review of the metaanalysis of several data from the global literature has been proffered by Sansone, Meola and Links, et al on the therapeutic aspects of periodic paralysis in 2008) [86]

 

Data on the predictive role of the genotype response to acetozolamide in familial periodic paralysis was provided by Mattews, Portaro and Ke et al following their investigative scholarships on Acetozolamide efficacy in hypokalaemic periodic paralysis and the predictive role of genotype of 2011. [87]

 

Discussions on what is known axiomatically of this topic relative to what the reviews introduces as a new knowledge or adds to an existing body of knowledge.

 

What is already known on this topic and a guide to the explanation of the patient and his family on what PP entails)

 

+Periodic Paralysis is an autosomal dominantly inherited disorder (only one affected parent is needed to pass the trait on to an offspring) that causes sudden attacks of weakness and paralysis. There are several forms.

 

Background & Essence:

 

+Muscles do not respond normally to stimulation, usually when the blood potassium is too low or high.

 

+Weakness is intermittent affecting mainly the limbs, and is often brought on by exercising or eating too much or too little carbohydrates.

 

+ The diagnosis is based on the symptoms and a check of the potassium level in the blood.

 

+Avoiding triggers that cause attacks and taking drugs can prevent attacks effectively.

 

During an attack of periodic paralysis .muscles do not respond to normal nerve impulses or even to artificial stimulation with an electronic instrument .The precise form that the disorder takes.

 

Symptomatologies and DIAGNOSTIC CONSIDERATIONS AXIOMS.

 

During an attack of weakness, the person remains completely awake and alert.

Muscles in the eyes and the face are not affected. Weakness may affect only certain muscles of all four limbs .In the hypokalaemic form attacks generally first appear before the age of sixteen, but may appear during the twenties and always by age thirty.

 

The attacks last up to twenty four hours ,occasionally even longer .Often the person awakens the day after vigorous exercise with an attack of weakness.However,eating meals rich in carbohydrates( sometimes hours or even the day after) can cause attacks.

 

Eating carbohydrates and exercising vigorously drive sugar into the cells .Potassium moves with the sugar, and the result is lowered potassium levels in the blood. In the hyperkalaemic form of the disorder, attacks often begin by age ten years, The attacks last fifteen minutes to sixty minutes. Weakness tends to be less severe than in the hypokalaemic form. Fasting, exercise, strenuous work, and exposure to cold may precipitate attacks.

 

A clinician’s best clue to the diagnosis is a person’s description of a typical attack. If possible, the clinician takes a  blood sample while an attack is ongoing to verify if  the of potassium level is abnormal, clinicians will  usually undertake additional tests to be sure that the abnormal potassium levels are not from other causes. Occasionally, a physician may give the person intravenous drugs that increase or decrease the levels of potassium in the blood to see whether an attack results.

 

RECOGNISED PREVENTIVE  AND THEREAPEUTIC OPTIONS FOR PERIODIC PARALYSIS:

 

Acetozolamide, a drug that alters the bloods acidity, may prevent attacks in all types of periodic paralysis. People with the hypokalaemic form can take potassium chloride in an unsweetened solution while an attack is in progress. Usually symptoms improve considerably within an hour. People with the hypokalaemic form should also avoid meals rich in carbohydrates and salt in addition to alcoholic beverages or strenuous exercise. People with the hyperkalaemic form can prevent attacks by eating frequent meals rich in carbohydrate and low in potassium and by avoiding fasting, strenuous activity, and exposure to cold. If an attack is severe or persistent, drugs (such as a thiazide diuretic or inhaled albuterol) can help lower the potassium level.

The potassium levels vary amongst different families .In some families, the paralysis is related to low levels of potassium in the blood (hypokalaemia) in a rare form potassium levels are normal during attacks.

 

CONCLUSIVE REMARKS and What this Study adds.

 

The periodic paralyses are a group of skeletal muscle channelopathies characterized by intermittent attacks of muscle weakness often associated with altered serum potassium levels. This definition has stood the test of time as was reaffirmed by Fialho, Griggs and Matthews on their recent scholarship on Periodic paralysis of 2018. [88]

The facts in more recent studies that add to the current body of knowledge or that counter scientific literature regarding hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis include but are not confined to the following points. Progressive myopathy affects approximately one-third of individuals regardless of the presence of concomitant myotonia.The relative risk of thyroid dysfunction in certain population studies could be as much as 3.6 compared to the general population. However, the trend toward an increased rate of cardiac arrhythmias although not statistically significant, but being statistically superior may be clinically significant and relevant.

About one in four of individuals experience their sentinel attack between the ages of twenty and thirty years. Symptomatic myotonia may be reported in three out of every five cases.

Alcoholic beverages, changes in humidity, sleep, illness, medications and menstruations may trigger off attacks of hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis.

 

Attacks may affect the facial and/or respiratory muscles; some subjects experience urinary or faecal incontinence.  An average of one in eight of the subjects reported severe symptomatologies between attacks that impair their activities of daily living. Individuals may experience permanent muscle weakness starting from childhood.

Those with no routine continual treatment regimen have a relative risk (RR) of two to three for reporting relatively poorer disease control than those taking long-term medications. During acute attacks, over one in ten of the cases may note some improvement with potassium intake. Considerations of these factors will allow physicians to develop appropriate and patient specific management plans to best cater for each affected individuals.

 

In the female subjects who are supposedly more commonly affected by attacks, some cases could present covertly with symptomatologies mimicking chronic tension fatigue syndromes, fibromyalgia, hysteria, convulsive equivalents or unclassifiable paroxysmal events [89] and will therefore need to be evaluated indepth for periodic paralysis especially the normokalaemic subsets.

 

The Limitations of this review, include recall bias inherent in the resources where this review was derived from, over and under reporting of symptomatologies and the probability of an inadequate and non-uniform characterization of myotonia distinctively from PMC (Para myotonia congenita)

 

Also, the interview candidate’s ability to report peculiar symptomatologies de novo connotes that those responses would have been more widely reported, if they had been included amongst the several options interview questionnaires.

 

Several existing studies on hyperkalaemic periodic PP are not adequately powered enough for the utmost elucidation of the several possibilities in the hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis phenotype/genotype subsets. This study needs an intensive and sustained follow up for an ultimate elucidation of its natural history.

 

 

 

DEFINITIVE REFERENCES:

 

[1]-Layzer RB .Periodic paralysis .Ann Neurol. 1982.;11:547.

 

[2]-Tyler F,Stephens F,Gunn F,Perkoff G.Studies in disorders of muscle.VII.Clinical manifestations and inheritance of a type of periodic paralysis without hypopotassemia.J Clin Invest .1951;30:482-592.doi:10.1172/JC1102465.

 

[3]-Gamstorp I. Adynamia episodica hereditaria/Acta Genet Stat Med.1967; 7:325-328.

 

[4]-Lehmann-Horn F,Rudel R,Jurkat-Rott K,Nondystrophic myotonias and periodic paralysis.In:Engel A,Franzini-Armstrong C,editors.Myology 3,New York :NcGraw-Hill Professional ;2004.pp.1257-1300.

 

[5]-Pearson CM: The periodic paralysis: Differential features and pathological observations in permanent myopathic weakness. Brain 87:341, 1964.

 

[6]-Allard B, Fuster C.When muscle Ca2+ channels carry monovalent cations through gating pores: insights into the pathophysiology of type 1 hypokaelemic periodic paralysis.J Physiol 2018.

 

[7]-Ober KP.Thyrotoxic periodic paralysis in the United States.Report of 7 cases and review of the literature.Medicine (Baltimore) 1992; 71:109.

 

[8]-Fontaine B, Lapie P, Plassart E, et al.Periodic paralysis and voltage gated ion channels. Kidney Int 1996;49:9.

 

[9]-Venance SL,Cannon SC,Fialho D,et al.The primary periodic paralysis ,diagnosis,pthogenesis and treatment .Brain 2006;129:8.

 

[10]-Miller TM, Dias da Silva MR, Miller HA, et al. Correlating  phenotype and genotype in the periodic paralysis.Neurology 2004;63:1647.

 

[11]-Schpira A, Griggs R.Muscle disease: blue books of practical neurology. New York: Elsevier; 1991.

 

[12]-Ahamed R, McCalley S, Sule AA.Steroids and Thyrotoxicosis Precipitate Periodic Paralysis .Cureus 2018 JAN 23; 10(1): e2106.

 

[13]-Kung AW.Clinical review.Thyrotoxic paralysis: a diagnostic challenge.J Clin Endocrinol Metab 2006; 91:2490.

 

[14]-Lin SH.Thyrotoxic periodic paralysis.Mayo Clinic Proc 2005; 80:99.

 

[15]-Ko GT, Chow CC, Yeung VT   et al.Thyrotoxic periodic paralysis in a Chinese population.QJM 1996; 89:453.

 

[16]-Chan A, Shinde R, Chow CC, et al.In vivo and invitro sodium pump activity in subjects with thyrotoxic periodic paralysis.BMU 1991; 303:1086.

 

[17]-Tawil R, Ptacek LJ, Pavlakis SG, et al. Andersen’s syndrome: a potassium sensitive periodic paralysis, ventricular ectopy, and dysmorphic features .Ann Neurol   1994; 35:326.

 

[18]-Sansone V, Griggs RC, Meola G, et al .Andersons syndrome: potassium-sensitive periodic paralysis .Ann Neurol 1997; 42:305.

 

[19]-Fontaine B.Periodic paralysis.Adv Genet 2008;63:3.

 

[20]-Phakdeekitcharoen B, Ruangraska C, Radinahamed P.Hypokalaemia and paralysis in the Thai population .Nephrol Dial Transplant 2004; 19:2013.

 

[21]-Vicart S (2010) hyperkalemic periodic paralysis.Orphanet.http://www.orpha.net/consor/cgibin/OC/Exp.php?Ing=EN&Expert=682.Accessed 12Aug 2012.

 

[22]-Hyperkalaemia periodic paralysis.Genetics Home Reference http://ghr :nlm nih .gov/condition/hyperkalemic-periodic paralysis.Accessed 12 Aug 2912.

 

[23]-Ke Q, Luo B, Qi M, et al.Gender differences in penetrance and phenotype in hypokalaemic periodic paralysis. Muscle Nerve 2013; 47:41.

 

[24]-Elbaz A,Vale-Santos J,Jurkat-Rott K,et al.Hypokalemic periodic paralysis and the dihydropyridine receptor (CACNL 1A3): Genotype / phenotype correlations for two predominant mutations and evidence for the absence of a founder effect in 16 Caucasian families. Am J Hum Genet 1995;56:374.

 

[25]-Wang Q,Liu M,Xu C, et al.Novel CACNA1S  mutation causes autosomal dominant hypokalaemic periodic paralysis in a Chinese family.J Mol Med(Berl) 2005;83:203.

 

[26]-Kim JB, Lee KY, Hur JK, A Korean family of hypokalaemic Periodic Paralysis With Mutation in a voltage-gated calcium channel (R1239g) J Korean Med Sci 2005;20:162.

 

[27]-Sillen A, Sorensen T, Kantola I, et al.Identification of mutations in the CACNL 1A3 gene in 13 families of Scandinavian origin having hypokalaemic periodic paralysis and evidence of a founder effect in Danish families. Am J Med Genet 1997; 69:102.

 

[28]-Morrill JA, Brown RH Jr Cannon SC.Gating of the L-type Ca channel in human skeletal myotubes: an activation defect caused by the hypokalaemic periodic paralysis mutation R528H .J Neurosci 1998; 18:10320.

 

[29]-Bulman DE, Scoggan KA, van Oene MD et al.A novel sodium channel mutation in a family with hypokalaemic periodic paralysis.Neurology 1999; 53:1932.

 

[30]-Sternberg D,Maisonabe T,Jurkat-Rott K, et al.Hypokalaemic periodic paralysis type 2 caused mutations at codon 672 in the muscle sodium channel gene SCN4A.Brain 2001;124:1091.

 

[31]-Lapie P, Goudet C, Nargeot J, et al.Electrophysiological properties of  the hypokalaemic periodic paralyses mutation(R528H) of the skeletal muscle alpha 1 S subunit as expressed in mouse l cells. Febs Lett 1996;382:244.

 

[32]-Tristani-Firouzi M,Jensen JL,Donaldson MR et al.Functional and clinical characterization of KCNJ2 mutations associated with LQT7 (Andersen’s syndrome J Clin Invest 2002;110:381.

 

[33]-Davies NP, Imbrici P, Fialho D, et al.Andersen-Tawl syndrome: new potassium channel mutations and possible phenotypic variation. Neurology 2005; 65:1083.

 

[34]-Belus MT, Rogers MA, Bats EA Kir 2.1 is important for efficient BMP signaling in mammalian face development. (In press Dev Biol)

 

[35]-Caciotti A,Morrone A,Domenici R,et al ,Severe prognosis in a large family with hypokalaemic periodic paralysis.Muscle Nerve 2003;27:165.

 

[36]-Tanabe T, Beam KG, Powell JA, Numa S.Restoration  of excitation-contraction coupling  and slow calcium current in dysgenic muscle by dihydropyridine receptor complementary DNA .Nature 1988;336:134.

 

[37]-Ruff RL.Insulin acts in hypokalaemic periodic paralysis by reducing inward rectifier K+ current .Neurology 1999; 53:1556.

 

[38]-Tricarico D, Servidel S, Tonali P, et al. Impairment  of skeletal muscle adenosine triphosphate-sensitive K+ channels in patients with hypokalaemic  periodic paralysis .J Clin Invest 1999;103:675.

 

[39]-Sokolov S, Scheuer T, Catherall WA.Gating pore current in an inherited ion channelopathy.Nature 2007;446:76.

 

[40]-Matthews E, Labrum R, Sweeney MG, et al.Voltage sensor charge loss accounts for most cases of hypokalaemic periodic paralysis.Neurology 2009; 72:1544.

 

[41]-Francis DG,Rybalchenko V,Strucyk A,Cannon SC.Leaky sodium channels from voltage sensor mutations in periodic paralysis.but not paramyotonia.Neurology 2011;76:1635.

 

[42]-Bjoro T,Holmen J.Kruger O,Midthjell K,Hunstad K,Schreiner T,Sandnes L,Brochmann H.Prevalence of thyroid disease, thyroid dysfunction and thyroid peroxidase antibodies in a large, unselected population(The Health Study of Nord-Trondelag(HUNT) Eur J Endocrinol 2000’143:639-647.

 

[43]-Rose BD.Post TW.Clinical Physiology of Acid-Base and Electrolyte Disorders, 5th, McGraw-Hill, New York 2001, p.836.

 

[44]-Sugura Y, Makita N, Li L, et al.Cold induces shifts of voltage dependence in mutant SCN4A, causing hypokalaemic periodic paralysis .Neurology 2003; 61:914.

 

[45]-Ng HY, Lin SH, and Hsu CY, et al .Hypokalaemic paralysis due to Gitelman syndrome: a family study .Neurology 2006; 67:1080.

 

[46]-Fujimoto T,Shiiki H,Takahi Y,Dohi K.Primary Sjogrens syndrome presenting as hypokalaemic periodic paralysis and respiratory arrest.Clin Rheumatol 2001;20:365.

 

[47]-Tucker C, Villanueva L.Acute hypokalaemic periodic paralysis possibly precipitated by albuterol .Am J Health Syst Pharm 2013; 70:1588.

 

[48]-Cheng CJ, Chen YH, Chau T, Lin SH. A hidden cause of hypokalaemic paralysis in a patient with prostate cancer. Support Care Cancer 2004;12:810.

 

[49]-Agarawol AK, Wadwa S, Wali M.Hypokalaemic periodic paralysis  associated with thyrotoxicosis.J Assoc Physicians India 1994;42:261.

 

[50]-Manoukian MA, Foote JA, Crapo LM.Clinical and metabolic features of thyrotoxic periodic paralysis in 24 episodes .Arch Intern Med 1999;159:601.

 

[51]-Liu PY, Jeng CY.Severe hypophosphataemia in a patient with diabetic ketoacidosis and acute respiratory failure.J Chin Med Assoc 2004;67:355.

 

[52]-Jurkat-Rott K, Lehmann-Horn F (2011) Hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis type 1.Gene Reviews .http://www.ncbi.nlm.gov/books/NBK 1496/Accessed 12 Aug 2012

 

[53]-Amato A, Russell J.Neuromuscular disorders .New York: McGraw Hill Professional ;2008.

 

[54]-Onyekwelu E.The complexity and intricacies

In the heterogeneity of the pathobiology and clinical features of myasthenia gravis.Paediatric Research 2010.

 

[55]-Lehmann-Horn F, Jurkat-Rott K.Genotype-phenotype correlation and therapeutic rationale in hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis.Neurotherapeutics 2007; 4:216-224.doi 10.1016/j.nurt 2007.02.001.

 

[56]-Dugdale D,Lin H,Zieve D(2012) Hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis.U.S.National Library of Medicine.http://wwwnlmnih.gov/medlineplus/ency/article/000316.htm.Accessed 12 Aug 2012.

 

[57]-Venance SL,Cannon SC,Fialho D,Fontaine B,Hanna MG,Ptacek LJ,Tristani-Firouzi M,Twil R,Griggs RC,CINCH investigators.The primary periodic paralysis;diagnosis,pathogenesis and treatment. Brain 2006; 29:5-17.

 

[58]-Canon SC, George AL.Pathophysiology of myotonia and periodic paralysis .In: Diseases of the Nervous System, 3rd ed, Asbury AK, McKhann GM, McDonald WI,et al(Eds) ,Cambridge University Press, Cambridge 2002,p.1183.

 

[59]-Dorland’s Illustrated Medical Dictionary .W.B.Saunders Company Philadelphia.

 

[60]-Amarteifo E, Nagal AM, Weber MA, Jurkat-Rott K, Lehmann-Hom F .Hyperkalemic periodic paralysis and permanent weakness: 3-T MR imaging depicts intracellular 23 Na overload-initial results .Radiology .2012; 264:154-163.

 

[61]-Links TP, Zwarts MJ, Wilmink JT et al.Permanent muscle weakness in familial hypokalaemic periodic paralysis .Clinical, radiological and pathological aspects. Brain 1990; 113(Pt 6): 1873.

 

 

[62]-Gold R, Reichmann H.Muscle pathology correlates with permanent muscle weakness in hypokalaemic periodic paralysis: a case report .Acta Neuropathol 1992; 84:202.

 

[63]-Sharma CM, Nath K, Parekh J.Reversible electrophysiological abnormalities in hypokalaemic paralysis: Case report of two cases .Ann Indian Acad Neurol 2014; 17:100.

 

[64]-McManis PG, Lambert EH, Daube JR.The exercise test in periodic paralysis. Muscle Nerve 1986; 9:704.

 

[65]-Fournier E,Arzel M,Sternberg D,et al.Electromyography guides toward subgroups of mutations in muscle channelopathies .Ann Neurol  2004;56:650.

 

[66]-Tengan CH,Antunes AC,Gabbal AA,Manzano GM.The exercise test as a monitor of disease status in hypokalaemic periodic paralysis.J Neurol Neurosurg Psychiatry 2004;75:497.

 

[67]-Kuntzer T, Flocard F, Vial C, et al .Exercise test in muscle channelopathies and other muscle disorders. Muscle Nerve 2000; 23:1089.

 

[68]-Streeten DH, Speller PJ, Fellerman H.Use of corticotrophin-induced potassium changes in the diagnosis of both hypo- and hyperkalemic periodic paralysis.Eur Neurol 1993; 33:103.

 

[69]-Godai K.Schwartz-Jampel syndrome (SJS) is a rare syndrome that is clinically characterized by myotonia and skeletal abnormalities.JA Clin Rep 2017; 3(1):32.

 

[70]-Kumar Singh A, Kumar MaURYA P, Kumar Thacker A.

Analysis of Clinical and Metabolic Profile of Acute Neuromuscular Weakness Related to Hypokalaemia.Acta Neurol Taiwan 2017 Sep 15; 26(3)’97-105.

 

[71]-Resnick JS, Engel WK, Griggs RC, Stam AC.Acetazolamide prophylaxis in hypokalaemic periodic paralysis .N Engl J Med 1968; 278:582.

 

[72]-Griggs RC, Resnik J, Engel WK.Intravenous treatment of hypokalaemic periodic paralysis .Arch Neurol 1983; 40:539.

 

[73]-Griggs RC.Engel WK.Resnick JS.Acetazolamide treatment of hypokalaemic periodic paralysis .Prevention of attacks and improvement of persistent weakness .Ann Intern Med 1970; 73:39.

 

[74]-Links TP, Smit AJ, Molenaar WM, et al.Familial hypokalaemic periodic paralysis .Clinical, diagnostic and therapeutic aspects.J Neurol Sci 1994; 122:33.

 

[75]-Dalakas MC, Engel WK.Treatment of “permanent “muscle weakness in familial Hypokalaemic Periodic Paralysis .Muscle Nerve 1983;6:182.

 

[76]-Loh KC, Hsu YJ, Chiu JS et al.Thyrotoxic periodic paralysis complicated by near fatal ventricular arrhythmias. Singapore Med J 2005; 46:88.

 

[77]-Lu KC, Pinheiro L, Ng KS.Effects of potassium supplementation on the recovery of thyrotoxic periodic paralysis.Am J Emerg Med 2004;22:544.

 

[78]-Tricarico D, Barbieri M, Mele A, et all. Carbonic anhydrase inhibitors are specific openers of skeletal muscle BK channel of K+ deficient rats.FASEB J 2004;18:760.

 

[79]-Sah RL, Tsushima RG, Back PH.Effects of local anaesthetics on Na+ channels containing the equine hyperkalaemic periodic paralysis mutation. Am J Physiol Cell Physiol 1998 Aug 01; 275(2):C389-C400.

 

[80]-Bendahhou S,Cumminis TR,Griggs RC, et al.Sodium channel inactivation defects are associated with acetozolamide-exacerbated hypokalaemic periodic paralysis.Ann Neurol 2001;50:417.

 

[81]-Tores CF, Griggs RC, Morley RT, Bender AN, Hypokalaemic periodic paralysis exacerbated by acetozolamide .Neurology 1981; 31:1423.

 

[82]-Tawil R, McDermott MP,Brown R Jr, et al.Randomised trials of dichlorophenamide in the periodic paralyses. Working Group on Periodic Paralysis .Ann Neurol 2000; 47:46.

 

[83]-Ligtenberg JJ, Van Haeften TW, Van Der Kolk LE, et al.Normal insulin release during sustained hyperglycaemic periodic paralysis:  role of the potassium channel opener pinacidil in impaired muscle strength .Clin Sci (Lond) 1996; 91:583.

 

[84]-Links TP, Arnoldus EP, Wintzen AR, et al.The calcium channel blocker verapamil in hypokalaemic periodic paralysis.Muscle Nerve 1998; 21:1564.

 

[85]-Fiore DM, Strober JB. Treatment of hypokaelemic periodic paralysis with topiramate .Muscle Nerve 2011; 43:127.

 

[86]-Sansone V, Meola G, Links TP, et al.Treatment of periodic paralysis. Cochrane Database Syst Rev 2008: CD005045.

 

[87]-Mattews E, Portaro S, Ke Q, et al.Acetazolamide efficacy in hypokalaemic periodic paralysis and the predictive role of genotype .Neurology  2011;77:1960..

 

[88]-Fialho D, Griggs RC, Matthews E. Periodic paralysis .Handb Clin Neurol 2018;148:505-520.

 

[89]-Onyekwelu E: The case for a gender differential approach in the evaluations and intervenmtions in cases of uncommon childhood paroxysmal events.Eur Journal of Neurology 2011.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CLASSICS AND REVISITS IN INTERDISCIPLINARY MEDICAL THEMES

 

An informative mix of education and novel Data through Naturalistic Inquiry, Participant Observation, structured Interviews And Documentary Content Analysis in addition to Media analysis for

Illustrative instructive Epitomes of the range/and impact of electric shock related injuries. The age ,gender and seasonal differential variations in the pathophysiological effects of different intensities of electric current suggests the role of environmental genetic, humoral, hormonal, metabolic, constitutional idiosyncratic factors and pathological states in the diathestic predispositions to electrical injuries and electrocutions.

 

Hypothesis, Paradigms& Research Questions:

 

Firstly, the seasonality and additive effect in electric and lightning current related injuries warrants temporal differential deterrent preventive options, slanted and weighted to the wet seasons.

 

Secondly, although previously electrical injuries used to be an urban cosmopolitan phenomenon, but the additive impact of the availability of electricity and multiple bodies of water in the hinterlands warrants an augmented and directed electrical and lightning injuries deterrent and preventive options.

 

Thirdly, with regards to electrical and lightning injuries; a little overdose may matter in some individuals with certain genetic and acquired pathological conditions because of innate aneurysmal formations in those with connectivopathiies, such as the Elans Danlos syndromes, Marfans syndromes or  Osteogenesis Imperfecta, or acquired metabolic or infective defects such as cardiovascular syphilitic leutic diseases, metabolic syndromes etc  Since aneurysms occur following prolonged coagulative coaliquative necrosis of the fibromuscular medial intima of the large blood vessels especially the aorta following electrical shock injuries. Aneurysms predisposes to thrombo-embolic phenomenon as do the arrhythmias associated with electric shock injuries, both could cause dizzy spells.

 

Also, since aneurysms predispose to thrombo-embolic phenomenon as do the arrhythmias associated with electric shock injuries with both presenting with   dizzy spells such individuals with predisposing diathesis to aneurysmal formation  will need at least a non-invasive survey for the evolution of  the aneurysm such as trans thoraco-abdominal  ultrasound in addition to  haemoglobin estimation and complete blood counts.

Similarly individuals with arrythmogenic predisposing homeostatic metabolic or structural cardiopulmonary or neurogenic dysfunctional/ diathesis will need evaluation with ultrasound, ECG and if imperative EEG.

 

Fourthly, in addition, Electrical and lightning injuries by causing fatty tissue necrosis could predispose to cryptogenic acute, then subacute and chronic pancreatitis with calcific fibrosis leading to a fibrocalculous chronic pancreatitis with enzymic and hormonal insufficiencies.

 

Finally, the stress of electric shock could lead to an irreversible diabetogenic hormone release, the enhanced impact of electrical injury in pregnancy being grave may well be related to the exacerbated humoural endocrine factors at play in pregnancy.

This review explores the wider impact or connotations of electrical injuries through the following problem solving paradigm such as the case for the position of the elderly and certain metabolic vital organ dysfunctions associated cardiopulmonary difficulties and neuropathies in this scale may warrant an enhanced anti-electric shock measures for this subsets as a group.

 

Therefore electrically injured patients should receive a more comprehensive evaluation for renal injuries, neurological deficits; in addition to longer term ophthalmological follow ups for cataracts. As a group patients with electric shock injuries will need longer term and more diligent follow ups.

 

Pre-experimental studies Through document Content Analysis Research.

 

MAIN TEXT

 

ELECTRICAL INJURIES.

 

ABSTRACT:

 

Introduction & Background

 

Although electrical trauma, accidents or “shock” are very common and almost everyone has been exposed to these, severe electrical injury is a relatively infrequent but potentially devastating form of multisystem injury with high morbidity and mortality. Most electrical injuries in adults are occupationally related, whereas children encounter these injuries in the domiciliary settings. Natural electrical injury are related  to lightning events, with immense and utmost morbidity and  mortality .The severity of the injury depends on the intensity of the electrical current ( determined by the voltage of the source and the resistance of the victim).the pathway it follows through the victims body and the duration of the contact with the source of the current .Abrupt and rapid fatality may be related to  either electric current-induced ventricular fibrillation or asystole or from respiratory arrest secondary to paralysis of the central respiratory control system  or due to paralysis of the respiratory muscles. Presence of severe burns (common in high voltage electrical injury), myocardial necrosis, the level of central nervous system injury, and the secondary multiple system organ failure determines the subsequent morbidity and long term prognosis .There is no specific therapy for electrical injury, and the management is symptomatic. Although advances in the intensive care unit, and especially in burn care, have improved the outcome, preventive and prospective health options remains the best way to minimize the incidence, prevalence, impact and severity of electrical injury. Although frequently categorized collectively as a single entity, electrical injuries were actually spectral ranging from mild as seen with low voltage outdoor electrical injuries, through high voltage occupational injuries to lightening injuries, however in younger children an occasional in door larger household electrical injury may be associated with very deleterious consequences.

 

Electrical injuries, although uncommon are inevitably encountered by most clinicians. Adult electrical injuries usually occur in occupational settings, whereas children are primarily injured in the household settings. The spectrum of electrical injury is broad, ranging from minimal injury to severe multiorgan involvement to death.

Injuries could result from spontaneous atmospheric electricity (lightening injuries) or generated electricity, such as household or industrial electrical currents

(electrical injuries)

 

Electrical current passing through the body generates heat, which burns and destroys tissues .Burns can affect internal tissues as well as the skin.

An electrical shock can short circuit the body’s own electrical systems, causing nerves to stop transmitting impulses or to transmit impulses erratically .Abnormal impulse transmission can affect the   muscles including the cardiac muscles  inciting  tetany or cardiac arrhythmias which could lead to falls or cardiac arrest.

It could equally affect the central nervous system causing convulsive or non-convulsive seizures, loss of consciousness, in addition to multimodal sensory abnormalities.

An electrical injury occurs when a current passes through the body, interfering with the function of an internal organ or sometimes burning tissues.

 

More often than not the main symptom is a skin burn, but not all the people have visible injuries.

 

In the initial evaluation, the patient should be checked for   abnormal cardiac rhythm, fractures, dislocations, and spinal cord and other injuries.

 

 The abnormal heart rhythms are monitored, burns are treated, and if the burn caused extensive internal damage, intravenous fluids are given.

 

Notes on Injuries Pattern:

 

Where as some electrical injuries such as low to high voltage electrical injuries were somewhat partly preventable others such as severe thundering/lightening were not. Anecdotally, electric injuries were most frequent in young adults aged in the second to the fourth decades of their lives probably due to more frequent exposures. Obtaining detailed information regarding the characteristics of the involved agents has major impact on workup, management, and outcome in cases.The relevant details will include the amount of current whether low voltages between one hundred and twenty to four hundred and forty Volts), High Tension Voltage (>more than one thousand volts), type current (alternating current)(AC) or direct current(DC) ,path-of-current ( hand-to-hand) ,hand-to-foot ,foot-to-foot ),the length of contact ( tetany ,locked-on phenomenon ),and the- events-associated with the injury (falls-,burns, water contact ) On the basis of the conductivities /resistivties of various body tissues ,the consequences of the injuries could be inferred. The resistivity of the body is estimated to be between five hundred to one thousand ohms, with bones, tendons and fat providing the most resistant to electric current.

Nerves blood vessels, mucus membranes and muscles were the best conductors. With regards to electrical burns, the cross sectional areas were inversely proportional to tissue damage. Therefore small areas such as joints receive maximal injuries .The current pathways plays an important  role in determining injury with a vertical being more dangerous than a horizontal hand to hand pathway. Skeletal muscles were usually stimulated into tetany by currents with frequencies of forty to one hundred and ten Hetz.

Most low and high tension electrical currents are AC.AC produces tetany and the locked on phenomenon. Although tetany occurs in all muscles that are stimulated, the flexor muscle groups are usually stronger and predominant. As a result an individual’s grasp is uncontrollably locked onto an object, which could increase the length of time that the current passes through the body and may result in greater injury. In contrast, DC current tends to produce a single large muscular contraction that often throws the child away from the source, they often involve risk taking behaviours.Cardipulmonary arrests and comas were very rare, if ever observed. At low voltages AC injuries had three times the morbidity and mortality rates as DC current injuries. However, at high voltages both AC/DC produce similar effects. Electrocutions by lightening injuries were not reportable injuries and as such accurate statistics were lacking .occasionally, the presentations were so subtle that the correct diagnosis may be missed entirely.  Low voltage electric injuries without loss of consciousness and/or arrest were the injury patterns most described for infants and young children who bite into electrical cords of common household domestic appliances or in older children during the repair of household appliances, neurological sequelae such as global comatose encephalopathies, transverse myelitis and peripheral neuritis were the most frequently encountered defects in most cases ,cardiac arrhythmias ,myoglobunuria ,hyperkalaemia ,renal cortical, renal tubular  necrosis and renal insufficiencies were commonly associated complications.

 

 

 

Methodology:

 

Pre-experimental studies Through A Triangulated Research Methodological Approach.

 

Naturalistic Inquiry, Participant Observation, Interviews and Documentary Content Analysis. In addition to Media analysis (news papers, magazines) films (movies) Radio, television (advertisements, news and broadcasts) informative data.

 

 

Descriptive systems for the evaluation and creation of distinctions for lightning and electric current related events were still unharmonised.there appears to be no records of adverse cardiopulmonary and cerebrovascular or myogenic events and vital end organ dysfunctions following frank, bur especially with subtle lightning events. Global demographics are lacking for policy and decision making. This review explores the wider impact or connotations of electrical injuries through the following problem solving paradigm such as the case for the position of the elderly and certain metabolic vital organ dysfunctions associated cardiopulmonary difficulties and neuropathies in this scale may warrant an enhanced anti-electric shock measures for this subsets as a group.

 

Since, a little overdose may matter for electrical and lightning injuries in some individuals with certain genetic and acquired pathological conditions because of aneurysmal formation and arrythmogenic predisposing haemostatic metabolic and cardiopulmonary neurogenic dysfunctional structural diathesis. Electrically injured patients should receive a more comprehensive evaluation for renal injuries, neurological deficits; in addition to short, interval and longer term ophthalmological follow ups for cataracts and aneurysms formations.

 

Aneurysms occur following prolonged coagulative coaliquative necrosis of the fibromuscular medial intima of the large blood vessels especially the aorta following electrical shock injuries.

 

Aneurysms predisposes to thrombo-embolic phenomenon as do the arrhythmias associated with electric shock injuries both could cause dizzy spells.

 

Electrical and lightning injuries by causing fatty tissue necrosis could predispose to acute and chronic pancreatitis with calcification and fibrosis leading to a fibrocalculous chronic pancreatitis.

 

The stress of shock could lead to an irreversible diabetogenic hormone release, the effect of electrical injury in pregnancy being grave may well be related to the exacerbated humoural endocrine factors at play in pregnancy.

 

As a group patients with electric shock injuries will need longer term and more diligent follow ups.

 

These aspects are prophylactically, diagnostically and therapeutically unexplored but crucial concepts.

 

Results ,Case Studies and Discussions:

 

Extremely remarkable cases of severe electric current related injuries with unblemished favourable outcomes observed and managed by the authors  were identified, itemized and analysed further for information gathered about the circumstances of the electric shock related injuries, the features on an indepth comprehensive physical examination ,cardiopulmonary, renal and vital end organs activities monitoring in addition to other presumably unforeseen or unseen injuries as epitomes of highlighting the range of plausible complications in childhood electric burn injuries and adolescence ,the pathophysiological mechanisms of several putative electrical related injuries were outlined extant and recent global literature concerned were reviewed, the diagnostic evaluations ,emergent and amenable prophylactic generic and specific deterrent options were proffered and discussed.

 

In one illustrative event a premorbidly healthy teenage male higher school leaver participating in an out door adventurous activity climbed unto a mango tree close to an electric pole, unintentionally placed his hands in contact with a high voltage overhead electric cable he was seen cyanosed, in hypertonus with cries and a firm sustained clenched titanic hand grip on an electric wire cable by passers by he was hinged down by rescuers with a wooden ladder.

 

When seen in the emergency department he was regaining normal muscle tone and control but was still cyanosed and hypothermic with poor capillary refill associated with bradycardia induced probably by dysystole or central apnea suggestive of a hand to hand flow of current across the heart. After an initial period of resuscitation he became tachycardiac, dysarrythmic and hypotensive .In this instance recovery was rapid and remarkable without sequelae following intensive prolonged cardiopulmonary resuscitations, the hearts automaticities restarted the heart to normal sinus rhythm.

On cutaneous examination, he had flash burns on both hands .On x-ray radiological surveys there were no associated musculoskeletal acute titanic, traumatic injuries or fractures, but he complained of dysasthesias, tingling, numbness and paresthesias especially of the upper limbs, there were no lenticular opacities or cataracts.

 

On otoscopy his tympanic membranes were intact. In another illustrative instance a six year old premorbidly healthy girl was seen after being rushed into the emergency department with a history consistent with being thrown to the floor after accidentally coming in contact with a household electrical appliance extension cord with recurrent convulsive seizures followed by progressive impairment of consciousness she was seen in convulsive status epilepticus with an arc and contact burns with a smaller more discreet entrance point at the upper trunk and a more pronounced blowout exit circuits in the right thigh in keeping with a prolonged severe direct contact energizing electrical current  injuries with the possibility of immense internal injuries evoked.

She was oliguric with concentrated but non bloody, non haemoglobunuric or non myoglobunuric urine with an impaired consciousness level with a GCS of 12/15 Following an initial cardiopulmonary resuscitations, judicious fluid and electrolyte therapies, seizure control and impatient closer monitoring, hospitalizations and support with specific interventions, she recovered without sequelae, there were no lenticular opacities or cataracts on otoscopy her tympanic membranes were intact.

 

Conclusions & Importance:

 

Given the occasional covert presentations of some cases of electrical injuries, electrical circuitry related catastrophes must be excluded in all cases of sudden syncope and sudden arrest, especially when preceded by a scream due to involuntary contraction of the chest muscles. Though this presumption is achieved with a case series, if these presumptions were extrapolated elsewhere, it seems that there is a tendency that most cases of severe electrical injuries in teenagers and adults could lead to cardiac dysfunctions where as in children a global cerebral dysfunction may be the rule .A lot of cases could have been unreported or managed peripherally either by orthodox means or otherwise Detailed information regarding the specifics of the associated injuries which has major impacts on the work ups ,management and outcomes were vitally important factors in determining the outcome of these cases.

 

Given the occasionally hypothetical or proven paradoxical outcomes of some cases of electrocution injuries a basic evaluation of all cases which could very easily be proposed in most settings is warranted which could imply the application of a long strip 12 lead electrocardiogram (ECG) or rhythm strip, complete blood counts (CBCs) as a minimum investigative workup. In addition to biochemical profiles and muscle enzymologies .Urine examination and urinalysis for haemoglobunurias, myoglobunurias, because deaths from ARF were known to occur even with supposedly minor voltage incidents, also age specific deterrent options should be proffered.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

MAIN TEXT:

 

Introduction

 

HISTORICAL PERSPECTIVE FROM ARCHIVAL RESEARCH:

 

Although electricity is a relatively recent invention, humans have always been exposed to electrical injuries caused by lightning. The catastrophic impact of the formidable effect of lightning was terrific and horrific. Perceived as non-amenable to any form of therapeutic intervention, it was accorded a punitive mystical origin and intent.Mythologically, Zeus, the ruler of the ancient Hellenic gods, was symbolically illustrated holding thunderbolts, which he used for cautionary and punitive purposes for disobedience to his ordinances. However, the invention and extensive employ of electricity in energy saving rapid machineries, improved ergonomics  and the domiciliary settings in  the mid-1800s some what partly demystified the mythological and diabolical concepts overwhelming electrical prowess, whilst comtemperonously introducing electrical injuries as a common problem at occupational  or domiciliary settings.

The first reported and documented electrical fatality was recorded in a Parisian setting in 1879.The 1994 classics and eminent scholarships of Bernstein chronicled and reviewed the historical aspects of electrical injuries, it equally presented and discussed the electrical engineers perspective on this theme and proffered a position statement. [1]

 

Classifications of electrical injuries generally focus on the power source (lightning or electrical), voltage (high or low voltage), and the type of current (alternating or direct), each of which is associated with certain injury patterns.

 

Two modalities of electrical current has been recognized, the alternating current (AC) and the direct current (DC) .In the former, the electrons flow pattern is usually bidirectional (backwards and forwards) through a conductor in a cyclic pattern. This type of current is the most commonly used in households and offices, and it is standardized to a frequency of about sixty cycles per second (approximately sixty Hetz) in the later when the current is direct,(DC) the electrons flow only forward (unidirectionally).

This pattern of current motion is produced by various batteries and is used in certain medical equipment such as defibrillators, pacemakers, and electric scalpels.

 

Although AC is considered to be a far more efficient way of generating and distributing electricity, it is also more dangerous than DC (approximately three times) because it causes tetanic muscle contractions that prolong the contact of the victim with the source. In 1968, histriographic data on the pros and cons of either forms of current source (AC versus DC) was proffered by Taussig in his scholarship on the Death “from lightning and the possibility of living again. [2]

 

Whereas, Cooper presented and discussed the emergent care of lightning and electrical injuries.in 1995. [3]

On the basis of their scholarship on the pathophysiology of acute electric injuries of 1976 Hunt, Mason and Masterson et al. proposed that nerves and blood vessels, are the best conductors; the former because they are innately designed to carry electrical currents and the later due to their high water content. It has been suggested that these properties create the path of least resistance for current after it enters the body, thus affecting primarily the nerves and blood vessels. In reality it seems that internal tissues of the body act as a single resistor and not as a compendium of multiple resistors in themselves. [4]

And other previous reviews by -Stresser et al on .Lightning injuries of 1977 exists. [5]

This article proffers an explanatory survey of the historical aspects, demographics and pathophysiology, in addition to the diagnostic and therapeutic aspects of electrical injuries caused by manufactured electricity.

 

Methodology:

 

Pre-experimental studies Through A Triangulated Research Methodological Approach.

 

Naturalistic Inquiry, Participant Observation, Interviews and Documentary Content Analysis. In addition to Media analysis (news papers, magazines) films (movies) Radio, television (advertisements, news and broadcasts) informative data.

 

 

Descriptive systems for the evaluation and creation of distinctions for lightning and electric current related events were still unharmonised.there appears to be no records of adverse cardiopulmonary and cerebrovascular or myogenic events and vital end organ dysfunctions following frank, bur especially with subtle lightning events. Global demographics are lacking for policy and decision making. This review explores the wider impact or connotations of electrical injuries through the following problem solving paradigm such as the case for the position of the elderly and certain metabolic vital organ dysfunctions associated cardiopulmonary difficulties and neuropathies in this scale may warrant an enhanced anti-electric shock measures for this subsets as a group.

 

Since, a little overdose may matter for electrical and lightning injuries in some individuals with certain genetic and acquired pathological conditions because of aneurysmal formation and arrythmogenic predisposing haemostatic metabolic and cardiopulmonary neurogenic dysfunctional structural diathesis. Electrically injured patients should receive a more comprehensive evaluation for renal injuries, neurological deficits; in addition to short, interval and longer term ophthalmological follow ups for cataracts and aneurysms formations.

 

Aneurysms occur following prolonged coagulative coaliquative necrosis of the fibromuscular medial intima of the large blood vessels especially the aorta following electrical shock injuries.

 

Aneurysms predisposes to thrombo-embolic phenomenon as do the arrhythmias associated with electric shock injuries both could cause dizzy spells.

 

Electrical and lightning injuries by causing fatty tissue necrosis could predispose to acute and chronic pancreatitis with calcification and fibrosis leading to a fibrocalculous chronic pancreatitis.

 

The stress of shock could lead to an irreversible diabetogenic hormone release, the effect of electrical injury in pregnancy being grave may well be related to the exacerbated humoural endocrine factors at play in pregnancy.

 

As a group patients with electric shock injuries will need longer term and more diligent follow ups.

 

These aspects are prophylactically, diagnostically and therapeutically unexplored but crucial concepts.

 

Results and Literature Reviews:

 

Existing Epidemiological and Demographic Research Data for Electrical Injuries.

 

This review concerns electrical and lightning injuries. Approximately, about one thousand deaths per year are due to electrical injuries in the North America, with a mortality rate of about three to five percent. Electrical injuries have increasingly attracted a lot of interest following the report of  the first human fatality from accidental electrocution  in 1879.In several North American series, approximately one thousand deaths occur annually from electrical current related accidents, while another one hundred and fifty to two hundred and fifty persons die as a result of being struck by lightening .In addition, major electrical burns presently constitute nearly one in twenty of all admissions to burn centres on the average. Electrical injuries occur most commonly among utility pole linesmen and construction workers who come in contact with high tension current, but nearly a third result from accidents in the home or other settings including the hospital with its many electrically powered instruments and appliances. As a seminal concept the intensive care management of electrical injuries was approached by Koumbouris in 2002. [6] And corroborative data by Spies and Trohman on the .Narrative Review of Electrocution and life-threatening electrical injuries was produced in 2006.[7] Due to the nature of occupational hazards with electricity, electrical injuries represent the fourth leading cause of work related traumatic death (five to six percent of all workers deaths) No racial susceptibility to electrical burns exists. Occupational trends indicate that traces people in high-risk occupations to be disproportionately Caucasian; therefore, this group may be more likely than other races in the North America to experience occupation-related electrical injuries. An institutional report and position statement on the overview of electrical hazards in Worker Deaths by Electrocution which is a summary of NIOSH Surveillance and Investigative Findings of the Department of Health and Human Services (NIOSH) Washington, DC, USA was proffered by Casani in 1998. [8] Electrical injuries are responsible for about three to five percent of emergency department burn visits in the paediatric population. Rai, Jeschke, Barrow and Herndon on the basis of their thirty year review of electrical injuries of 1999 proposes that  some evidence exists that the incidence of low-voltage injuries amongst children is declining, perhaps because of widespread use of ground fault circuit interrupters (GFCIs), but rates of high-voltage injuries usually involving power lines or rail sources, has remained steady.[9]

 

GENDER PREVALENCE:

 

Rates of childhood electrical injury are higher amongst boys than girls. And the incidence of adult injury are significantly higher in men than in women; likely because of occupational predisposition .Most series demonstrate that more than eighty percent of electrical injuries occur in men.[3]

 

AGE:

 

A bimodal distribution of electrical injuries exist amongst the very young

(Children less than six years of age) and amongst young and working-aged adults. Patterns of electrical injuries vary by age (e.g household low-voltage exposures amongst toddlers and high-voltage exposures amongst risk-taking adolescents and via occupational exposure. In 1976, Hunt, Mason and Masterson et al discussed and characterized the epidemiology, pathophysiology of acute electric injuries in the childhood   population. [4] This was corroborated by the 1995, data of Cooper on the emergent care of lightning and electrical injuries. [3]

The most common mode of electrical injury in young children is from chewing or biting on electrical cords.Histriographic data on this theme was provided by Thomson, Juckes and Farmer in their reviews on electrical burns to the mouth in children of 1965. [10] In addition to the 1989 scholarships of Baker and Chiavello on Household electrical injuries in children with relevance to its epidemiology and identification of avoidable hazards. [11]

 

The Health Economics and Occupational Health Aspects of Electrical Injuries:

 

The health economic aspects of electrical injuries was of much historical interests when the case of protection against injuries over cost effectiveness became an overwhelming  one in the era following the advent of  electricity .Thomas Edison (who invented advanced  and promoted  DC) was at log aheads with  George Westinghouse (who innovated  and enhanced AC) To demonstrate  the deleterious properties and effect  of AC, Edison  with persuasion  and cohesion made  the New York State legislature to apply  AC for the first death penalty by electrocution ( coined as”Westing-housed”)

 

To date, electrocution is still used as a form of capital punishment in some circumstances. As a seminal theme, the combined topic of emergent care of lightning and electrical injuries was approached and dissected by Cooper in 1995, [3]

An institutional report and position statement on the overview of electrical hazards in Worker Deaths by Electrocution which is a summary of NIOSH Surveillance and Investigative Findings of the Department of Health and Human Services (NIOSH) Washington, DC, USA was proffered by Casani in 1998. [12]

Reviews  by Kisner and  Casini  on the Epidemiology of electrocution Fatalities: 1998.In”Worker Deaths by Electrocution: A summary of NIOSH Surveillance and Investigative Findings .Washington D.C ,Department of Health and Human Services (NIOSH) proposes that ,despite significant improvements in product safety, electrical injury is still the cause of many fatalities and considerable morbidity. Electrical injuries (excluding lightning) are responsible for more than five hundred deaths per year in the USA.A little more than half of them occur in the workplace and constitute the fourth leading cause of work-related traumatic death(about five to six percent  of all workers deaths) [13]

Electrocutions at home account for more than two hundred deaths per year, and they are mostly associated with malfunctioning or misapplication of consumer products [14]

Electrical injuries are also the cause of considerable morbidity .Electrical burns account for approximately two to three percent of all burns in children that require emergency department attention (more than two thousand cases per year) the vast majority of electrical burns in children take place at home and are associated with electrical and extension cords (in about sixty to seventy percent of the incidents) and with wall outlets, which account for another ten to fifteen percent of cases. As a topical concept of public health importance, Hiser on behalf of the Report Safety Commission, a Division of Hazard Analysis, and Directorate For Epidemiology, presented electrocution Associated with Consumer Products in 2001. [14]

 

As for the epidemiological figures for lightning related injuries, Lopez and Holle on the basis of their data on the demographics of lightning casualties of 1995 indicates that

Lightning is responsible for an average of ninety to one hundred deaths annually in the North America, whereas its associated morbidity is estimated to be between five to ten times higher than that due to other forms of electrical injury.

[15]

Because severe electrical injuries tend to occur primarily in the work place, they usually involve adults, and therefore, they account for a small percentage of the overall number of admissions to pediatric intensive care units (ICUs).However, considering that both the home and work environments are full of electrically powered devices, the potential of accidental injury is ever present, and it is necessary for the intensivist  to know the characteristics and the principles of management of this type of injury. In the distant past, an interesting data on the changing concepts of the pattern of electrical injury was provided by Artz in 1974.

[16] Histriographically, other seminal data on the public and community health aspects of electrical injuries was provided by Lievens in 1970. [17]

Of particular importance is the possibility of iatrogenic electrical injury in the ICU (and in the operating room and electrophysiology suites), where several procedures are performed utilizing high-voltage energy for diagnostic and therapeutic purposes (e.g., defibrillators, Gibbs, Eisenberg and Damon reviewed and discussed dangers of defibrillation injuries to emergency personnel during patient resuscitation in 1990.[18] And in 1998, extensive pectoral muscle necrosis after defibrillation by nonthermal skeletal muscle damage caused by electroporation was highlighted and explored by Vogel, Wanner and Bultmann.

[19]Also, Gilbert, Shaffer and Matthews reported and discussed electrical shock by dislodged spark gap in bipolar electrosurgical device in 1991. [20]

In addition, a combined defibrillator and pacemaker injuries was highlighted by

Kim, Furman and Matos et al in their reports of automatic implantable cardioverter defibrillator inciting inadvertent discharges during permanent pacemaker magnet tests of 1987. [21]

 

Case Studies and Discussions:

 

Extremely remarkable cases of severe electric current related injuries with unblemished favourable outcomes observed and managed by the authors  were identified, itemized and analysed further for information gathered about the circumstances of the electric shock related injuries, the features on an indepth comprehensive physical examination ,cardiopulmonary, renal and vital end organs activities monitoring in addition to other presumably unforeseen or unseen injuries as epitomes of highlighting the range of plausible complications in childhood electric burn injuries and adolescence ,the pathophysiological mechanisms of several putative electrical related injuries were outlined extant and recent global literature concerned were reviewed, the diagnostic evaluations ,emergent and amenable prophylactic generic and specific deterrent options were proffered and discussed.

 

In one illustrative event a premorbidly healthy teenage male higher school leaver participating in an out door adventurous activity climbed unto a mango tree close to an electric pole, unintentionally placed his hands in contact with a high voltage overhead electric cable he was seen cyanosed, in hypertonus with cries and a firm sustained clenched titanic hand grip on an electric wire cable by passers by he was hinged down by rescuers with a wooden ladder.

 

When seen in the emergency department he was regaining normal muscle tone and control but was still cyanosed and hypothermic with poor capillary refill associated with bradycardia induced probably by dysystole or central apnea suggestive of a hand to hand flow of current across the heart. After an initial period of resuscitation he became tachycardiac, dysarrythmic and hypotensive .In this instance recovery was rapid and remarkable without sequelae following intensive prolonged cardiopulmonary resuscitations, the hearts automaticities restarted the heart to normal sinus rhythm.

On cutaneous examination, he had flash burns on both hands .On x-ray radiological surveys there were no associated musculoskeletal acute titanic, traumatic injuries or fractures, but he complained of dysasthesias, tingling, numbness and paresthesias especially of the upper limbs, there were no lenticular opacities or cataracts.

 

On otoscopy his tympanic membranes were intact. In another illustrative instance a six year old premorbidly healthy girl was seen after being rushed into the emergency department with a history consistent with being thrown to the floor after accidentally coming in contact with a household electrical appliance extension cord with recurrent convulsive seizures followed by progressive impairment of consciousness she was seen in convulsive status epilepticus with an arc and contact burns with a smaller more discreet entrance point at the upper trunk and a more pronounced blowout exit circuits in the right thigh in keeping with a prolonged severe direct contact energizing electrical current  injuries with the possibility of immense internal injuries evoked.

She was oliguric with concentrated but non bloody, non haemoglobunuric or non myoglobunuric urine with an impaired consciousness level with a GCS of 12/15 Following an initial cardiopulmonary resuscitations, judicious fluid and electrolyte therapies, seizure control and impatient closer monitoring, hospitalizations and support with specific interventions, she recovered without sequelae, there were no lenticular opacities or cataracts on otoscopy her tympanic membranes were intact.

 

The Physics of Electricity with the nosological aspects and Pathogenesis of electrical injuries.

 

Electricity is produced by the flow of electrons (the negatively charged outer particles of an atom) across a potential gradient from a high gradient to a low one through an electrical conductor. Any substance which accumulates electrons becomes negatively charged, and the efflux of electrons   from this substance through an electrical conductor, creates an electric current, which is estimated in amperes.

The voltage, the propulsive drive to the flow of electrons, is estimated in volts.

Impedance of any character to the flow of electrons through an electrical conductor espouses an electrical resistance, which is gauged in ohms.

 

 

 

ELECTRIC SHOCK AND ELECTRIC BURNS:

 

The danger of injury from electric shock depends upon the voltage and the frequency. Alternating current is more dangerous than direct current. At a frequency of 25- 300 cycles, voltages below 230 volts can produce ventricular fibrillation .High voltages (which may be encountered in television circuits) produce respiratory failure .Faulty wiring of home appliances may lead to electric shock .In homes with young children, it is advisable to install occlusive safety outlets in the play area.

 

The Physics of Electricity with the Pathophysiology and the Determinants Of Electrical Injury.

 

Although the end result of the passage of an electric current through the human body is unpredictable in the individual case, many factors are known to influence the nature and severity of electrical injuries. Electrical injury involves both direct and indirect mechanisms. The direct damage is caused by the actual effect that the electric current has on various body tissues (such as the myocardium) or by the conversion of electrical to thermal energy that is responsible for various types of burns. Indirect injuries tend to be primarily the result of severe muscle contractions caused by electrical injury. In general, the type and extent of an electrical injury depends on the intensity (amperage) of the electric current.

 

Electrical injury may result from contact with faulty electrical appliances or machinery or inadvertent contact with household wiring or electrical power lines.

 

For adults getting shocked from touching an electrical outlet in the home or by a small appliance is rarely serious, but accidental exposure  to high voltage causes about half a million deaths each year according to several  North American series. However these figures are not directly applicable or extrapolateable to most other settings especially the developing units.

 

The severity of electrical injuries ranges from mild through severe to catastrophic and deadly. The severity of electrical injuries is contingent on the following factors.

 

[I]-The intensity of the voltage and the generated current.

 

[II]-The Form of the electrical current Circuit.

 

[III]-The pathway of the current through the body.

 

[iv]-The duration of exposure to the current.

 

[V]-The electrical resistance to the current.

 

THE VOLTAGE

 

The voltage (V) represents the magnitude of this potential difference and is usually determined by the electrical source. The type and extent of an electrical injury is determined by voltage, the strength of the current, the resistance to electrical flow, the duration of contact with the source of electricity, the pathway of flow, and the type of current (i.e direct or alternating).

In understanding the fundamental aspects of electrical current injuries, it is helpful to consider some electrical principles. For an electric current to flow, there must be a closed pathway or circuit, and a  potential difference or voltage must exist between two points in a wholesome circuit.

 

Anecdotally, electrical injuries were traditionally and typically categorized into high-voltage or low-voltage injuries, using about five hundred or one thousand Volts as the cutoff.

 

On the basis of the narrative review on electrocution and life-threatening electrical injuries by Spies and Trohman of 2006, it could be inferred that in North America, typical household electricity provides about one hundred and ten volts for general use and two hundred and forty Volts for high-powered appliances, while industrial electrical and high-tension power lines can have more than one hundred thousand Volts. [7]

In 1997, High morbidity and mortality has been described in a six hundred voltage direct current injury associated with railroad “third rail” contact, by Rabban, Adler, Rosen, Blair and Sheridan in their scholarship on electrical injury from subway third rails with serious injuries associated with immediate voltage contact burns. [22]

Lightning is a form of Direct Current that occurs when the electrical difference between a thundercloud and the earthy sandy surface outstrips the insulating capabilities of the encircling atmospheric air. The current of a lightning strike rises to a peak in about 2Usec, and it lasts for only 1-2 msec.The voltage of a lightning strike is in excess of one million volts and it can generate currents of more than two hundred thousand amperes. Transformation of the electrical energy to heat can generate temperatures as high as 50,000 degrees Farenheight. However, the extremely short duration of lightning prevents struck objects from melting. Reviews on lightening related injuries were provided by Ghezzi in his scholarships on the unique treatment challenge of Lightning injuries of 1989.[23]And Fahmy, Brinsden and Smith et al.on Lightning the multisystem group injuries of 1999.[24]

Current:-The intensity of the current.

 

The intensity of the current is measured in volts and amperes .Ordinary household current in most installations is usually about one hundred and ten volts to two hundred and twenty voltages. Voltages above five hundred are considered to be high .High voltages can jump (arc) through the air anywhere from an inch up to several feet, depending on the voltage. Thus a person may be injured simply by coming too close to a high voltage line. High voltage causes more severe injuries than low voltages and is more likely to cause internal damages.

These aspects were dissected by Casani in his1998 overview of electrical hazards in Workers Deaths by Electrocution in A summary of NIOSH Surveillance and Investigative Findings. Washington, DC, Department of Health and Human Services (NIOSH) [12]

The volume of electrons flowing across a gradient is the current, which is represented in amperes (I); it is an estimate of the amount of energy that flows through a body.

 

[V]-The resistance and the conductivity of the electrical current by the body tissues.

 

The impedance to the flow of electrons across a gradient is the resistance® and varies depending on the electrolyte and water content of the body tissue through which electricity is being conducted. Blood vessels, muscles and nerves have high electrolyte and water content, and thus low resistance, and are good conductors of electricity –better than bone, fat, and skin.

 

Most of the body’s resistance is concentrated on the skin .The thicker the skin is, the greater is its resistance .A thick, callused palm or sole, for example, is much more resistant to electrical current than an area of thin skin, such as an inner arm, the skins resistance is compromised when there is a disruption or discontinuation of its integrity such as when it is punctured or scraped or when it is wet. If the skins resistance is augmented, more of the damage is circumscribed and localized, often only causing skin burns. If the skins resistance is compromised, more of the damage of electrical injuries affects the internal organs. Therefore, the damage is mostly, internal if people who are wet come in contact with electrical current, for example, when one attempts to work on an electric grinder after washing some vegetables or fruit or touching a high tension out door cable on a wet day.

 

RESISTANCE.

 

The flow of electrical currents is directly related to the voltage difference and inversely proportional to the electrical resistance between two points in the circuit (ohms law) High resistance paths allow relatively small currents to flow, while low resistance between two points permit larger currents to flow .When the voltage is very high, the flow of current will likewise be relatively great, unless the resistance is increased proportionally to the voltage; how-ever ,if the potential difference between the two points can be minimized ,the current flow can also be minimized regardless of resistance.

Body tissues vary considerably in their resistance to the flow of current, with conductivity being roughly proportional to water content. Bone and skin offer relatively high resistance, while blood, muscle, and nerve are good conductors. The resistance of normal skin can be lowered by moisture, and this factor alone can convert what might ordinarily be a mild injury to a fatal shock.

 

[II]-The type or Form of Electrical Current Circuit:

 

Electrical current is categorized as direct current (DC) or alternating current (AC).

Direct current, such as current generated by batteries, flows in the same direction constantly. Alternating currents such as currents available through household wall sockets, changes direction fifty to sixty times per second. Alternating current which is used in most households in North America and Europe is more dangerous than direct current. Direct current tends to cause a single  muscle contraction often strong enough to force people away from the currents source, where as alternating current causes a continuing muscle contraction, often preventing people from releasing their grip on the currents source. As a result, exposure may be prolonged .Even a small amount of alternating current barely enough to be felt as a mild shock –may cause the grip to freeze, slightly more alternating current can cause the chest muscles to contract, making breathing impossible .Even more current can cause deadly abnormal heart rhythms( arrhythmias)

 

Types of Circuit:

 

Electrical current can flow in one  of two types of circuits, the direct current (DC) in which the current flows linearly in a forward direction  or alternating current (AC), in which the flow of electrons changes direction in rhythmic fashion or sinusoidal.pattern.AC is the most common type of electricity in homes and offices, standardized to a frequency of sixty cycles/second (Hetz).High-voltage DC often causes a large single muscle contraction that throws the victim away from the source, resulting in a brief duration of contact with the source flow.In contrast, AC of the same voltage is considered to be approximately three  times more dangerous than DC, because the cyclic flow of electrons causes muscle tetany that prolongs victims exposure to the source.

Muscle tetany occurs when fibres are stimulated at forty to one hundred and ten Hetz; the standard sixty Hetz of household current is within the tetanic range. If the source contact point is the hand, when tetanic muscle contraction occurs the extremity flexors contract, causing the victim to grasp the current and resulting in prolonged contact with the source. An electrical injury will occur when a person comes into contact with the current produced by a source. This source could be an artificially made one (such as the power line of a utility company) or a natural one, such as lightning. [Casani1998,)[12]

 

Electrical power is generated and transmitted via a system of three conductors with the same voltage but with waveforms that reach their peak at a different phase. This three-phase system allows for a more efficient generation and transmission of power. Power lines used by utility companies are classified according to their voltage from phase to phase, and they range from “low” (when they carry more than six hundred volts) to “ultrahigh” (with voltage of more than one million volts) .Utility power lines with high voltages tend to be located in sparsely populated areas, and therefore, the possibility of an accidental contact with them is relatively limited for the general population. Through a succession of transformers, the voltage is gradually reduced, and the power lines that distribute electricity for homes, buildings, and the general industry carry low voltage, defined by the National Electrical Code as less than six hundred volts .Most houses in North America.)

 

Have a one hundred and twenty to two hundred and forty volts, single phase system that provides the two hundred and forty for the high-power appliances and the one-hundred and twenty volts for general use.The latter accounts for most of the accidental injuries .The household voltage in most other countries is usually higher (220V) Bernstein 1994 Electrical injury: Electrical engineers perspective and an historical review.)[1]

The pathophysiological effects of electrical currents of variable intensities generated by common household voltage is of interest because almost everyone has been implicated in this effect.In this way, this concept is of utmost public health importance.

At a current strength of one milliampere ,the probable effect is that of a tingling sensation which may almost be imperceptible by some individuals, a current of sixteen milli-Amperes is the maximum current that a person can grasp and let go, a current of seven to nine  milli-Amperes  is a let go current for an average man ,  a current  of six to eight milli-Amperes is a let go current for an average woman ,a current of  three to five milli-Amperes  is a let go current for an average child ,at a current of sixteen to twenty milli-Amperes , there is tetany of the skeletal muscles ,at a current of twenty to fifty milli-Amperes  there is paralysis of the respiratory muscles and respiratory arrest ,the current of fifty to one hundred and twenty milliamperes   is the threshold for ventricular  fibrillation ,and at current greater than two Amperes there could be asystole.

 

Most common house hold circuit breakers will have a current of between fifteen to thirty Amperes and the maximum intensity of house hold currents in the North America is about two hundred and forty Amperes. These clinico-pathophysiologic correlative aspects of electrical injuries were illuminated upon by Koumbouris in his scholarships on electrical injuries .in 2002. [6]

And by [Cooper (1995.Emergent care of lightning and electrical injuries.)[3]

 

Voltage is directly proportional to current and indirectly proportional to resistance as expressed by Ohms Law: V=I X R; where I= current, V= voltage, R= resistance.

 

 

 

 

 

THE RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN THE RESISTANCE AND RATE OF CURRENT FLOW:

 

Thus, exposure of different parts of the body to the same voltage will generate a different current (and by extrapolation, a different degree of damage) because resistance varies significantly between various tissues. The least resistance is found in nerves, blood, mucous membranes, and muscles, whereas the greatest resistance is found in bones, fatty tissues, and tendons with the skin having an intermediate resistance. These aspects were dissected by Cooper in his 1995 Scholarships on Emergent care of lightning and electrical injuries. [3]

 

From a practical point of view ,one could make a distinction between the external resistance ( represented by the skin ) and the internal resistance ( which includes all the other tissues) of the body .The skin is the primary resistor against  the electrical current ,with a resistance ranging in adults between forty thousand  and one hundred thousand  ohms depending on its thickness ( i.e., the thicker the skin ,the higher is  its resistance).Thus, the intensity  of the electrical shock produced by a certain voltage will vary between victims of different gender  and age.For,instance, exposure to the common household voltage of about one hundred and twenty volts  of an adult Labourer with thick. calloused palms whose resistance may be in excess of one hundred thousand ohms will create a current of approximately one milliamperes, which is barely perceptible.

In contrast, the same exposure on a new-born infant whose skin is very thin and has a high water content (which markedly lowers its resistance) will probably cause significant injury. Even more important than the thickness is the moisture of the skin. Several existing scholarships dwelt on these physico-electro-mechanistic aspects, of water molecules on propagating the impact of electrical injuries. Fish in his scholarships on electric Shock: Part 1.Physics and Pathophysiology of 1993 discussed the intricacies and peculiarities of the individual or idiosyncratic factors influencing the propagation or the protection against electric shock injuries. [25]As did the grounded independent reviews of Cooper and Casani et al of 1995 and 1998 respectively. [12] [3]

 

The presence of a sweaty skin may decrease the resistance of the skin to as low as less than one thousand ohms. Wet skin (e.g .electrocution of a person in a bathtub or in a swimming pool) offers almost no resistance at all, thus generating the maximal intensity of current that the voltage can generate. This compounding synergistic impact of the deleterious impact of swimming during rains with lightning events is of utmost importance to children who swim in pools and body of accumulated  water  during rains, even mere wading  or walking  through bodies of water  or  wet clothing’s during rains could have the same compounding impact  of  water or wet clothing diminishing the resistance, some cases of near drowning or drowning during rains ,snow storms or hail stones could have been related to  subtle and covert lightning related electrical injuries or electrocutions of some sort .Deaths from near drownings in accumulated bodies of water during rains have been reported and reviewed previously.

[26] [27]

The impact of subtle lightning related events during rains in causing perturbations of consciousness and multiple organ dysfunction syndromes have not been examined previously. Since moist mucus membranes also have negligible electrical resistance, thus maximizing any current with which they come into contact. This causes significant orofacial injury to infants and toddlers who tend to put live wires in their mouths. This enhanced conductivity may have implications for subtle but deleterious perturbations of cardiopulomany or CNS regulatory centres related to electrical injuries from electrocautrey surgeries especially in the anaesthetized patients.

 

The internal resistance of the body comprises all the other tissues and is estimated to be between 500 and 1000 ohms.Although bones, tendons, and fat offer the most resistance to electric current, they are not likely to be contact points. When exposed to electric current, they tend to heat up and coagulate before conducting the current. [Cooper 1995][3]

Of importance, at the time of contact is grounding which if effective can minimize the voltage difference between two points in the electrical circuit and lower the intensity of the current passing through the body. The pathway of the current through the body is crucial. An accident involving the passage of a current between a point of contact of the leg and the ground is likely to be injurious than one between the head and the foot, in which the heart lies between the two poles of the circuit. Similarly, a small current leak, which would be innocuous when applied to the surface of the intact body, may result in a fatal arrhythmia when conducted directly to the heart via a low-resistance intracardiac catheter. Heavily calloused areas of skin are excellent resistors, whereas a moderate amount of water or sweat on the skin surface can decrease its resistance significantly.

 

[III]-The pathway of the current through the body.

 

The path that the electricity takes through the body tends to determine which tissues are affected .Because alternating current continually reverses the direction .The commonly used terms “entry “and “exit “ are inappropriate .The terms “source” and “ground” are more precise. The most   common source point for electricity is the hand, and the second most common is the head. The most common ground point is the foot. A current  that travels from arm to arm or from arm to leg may go through the heart and is much more dangerous than a current that travels between a leg and the ground .A  current that travels through the head may affect the brain.[28]

 

[iv]-The duration of exposure to the current and the duration Of Contact to the electrical source.

 

This also influences the outcome of electrical injuries Alternating current is much more dangerous than direct current, partly because of its ability to produce tetanic muscular contractions which prevent the victim from being able to release contact with the circuit. This is usually accompanied by sweating which lowers skin resistance, allowing current of still greater intensity to pass into the body until fatal cardiac arrhythmia results. While the effects of electricity on the body is incompletely comprehended, many pathophysiological features of severe electrical injury have been described. In general when sudden death occurs following low-voltage shock, it is due to the direct effect of relatively small amounts of current upon the myocardium resulting in ventricular fibrillation. With high-tension injury (greater than one thousand Volts) cardiac asystole and respiratory arrest occur probably as a result of injury to the medullary centers of the brain. In general, the longer, the person is exposed to the current, the worse the injury.

 

Therefore the duration of the contact with electrical current is an important determinant of electrical injuries. Thus, an electric shock caused by AC will produce greater injury than a shock caused by DC of the same amperage because the DC causes a single muscle contraction that “throws” the victim away from the power source, thus minimizing the injury. (Cooper 1995.  Emergent care of lightning and electrical injuries) [3]

These differences have practical significance only at low voltages, whereas in high voltages, both currents have a similar effect.

The pathway of the current through the body (from the entry to the exit point) determines the number of organs that are affected and, as a result, the type and severity of injury .The determination of the electrical pathway is important both for acute management and for overall prognosis .A vertical pathway parallel to the axis of the body is the most dangerous because it involves virtually all the vital organs ( central nervous system, heart ,respiratory muscles ,and  in pregnant women, the uterus and the fetus ) A horizontal pathway from hand to hand will spare the brain but can still be fatal due to involvement of the heart, respiratory muscles, or spinal cord. A pathway through the lower part of the body may cause severe local damage but will probably not be lethal. These aspects were elaborated upon by Jain and Bandi in their scholarships on Electrical and lightning injuries of 1999. [29]

Whereas electric shock from a low-voltage line is delivered on contact of the victim with the source, in high-voltage injury, the current is carried from the source of the person through an arc before any physical contact is made. The arc may form over or into the body of the person .Arcs can generate extremely high temperatures (up to 5000 degrees centigrade) that are usually responsible for the severe thermal injuries from high voltage. (Bernstein 1994. Electrical injury: Electrical engineers perspective and an historical review.) [1]

 

For an excellent review see the book chapters of Price and Cooper on .Electrical and Lightening injuries. Edited by Marx, Hockberger, Walls and Rosens in the, 2002 edition of their book on Emergency Medicine. [30]

 

 

PATHOLOGY

 

In patients who die immediately from electrocution, autopsy findings are limited to burns and generalized petechial hemorrhages. If patients survive for a period of days or longer, post mortem examination reveals focal necrosis of bone, large blood vessels, muscle, peripheral nerves, spinal cord, or brain. Renal tubular necrosis may also be seen when acute renal failure follows extensive tissue destruction.

 

The Histopathologic Features of Electrical Burns Injuries:

 

Demonstrable in the photomicrograph of a biopsy of the cutaneous burns area are elongated pyknotic keratinocyte nuclei with vertical streaming and homogenization of the dermal collagen

 

ELECTRIC BURNS.

 

The Physico-Chemical Aspects of Cutaneous Injuries And Burns.

 

In addition, contact with high intensity current may cause three types of thermal injuries. Current coursing externally to the body from the contact point to the ground may generate temperatures as high as ten thousand degrees centigrades and cause extensive carbonification of the skin and juxtaposed underlying tissues termed arc or flash burns. Such burns often ignite surrounding clothing or nearby objects giving rise to flame burns .Finally, there is injury due to the direct thermal injury   of tissues by electric current.

As it traverses the skin, energy from an electrical current is converted into heat which produces coaliquative coagulation necrosis at the points where it enters and exits from the skin as well as in  the striated skeletal and cardiac muscles and blood vessels through which it navigates. The associated vascular injury results in thromboses, often at sites distant from the body surface, and accounts for the observation that a greater amount of tissue destruction characteristically occurs in an electrical injury than is apparent on first inspection.

 

The Intricacies in the Pathophysiology of the Morbidity and Mortality Related to Cutaneous Burns.

 

Exposure to currents generated by low-voltage sources (including household electric sources) may cause a variety of cutaneous injuries from the transformation of electrical to thermal energy. The injuries could range from local erythema to full-thickness burns.The severity of the burn depends on the intensity of the current, the surface area, and the duration of exposure. First degree electrical burns require an exposure of at least twenty seconds to a current of more than twenty milliamperes per millimeters squared, whereas a second or third degree burn requires exposure to at least seventy five milliamperes per millimeters squared, which is well within the range capable of causing ventricular fibrillation .In order words, a patient may die before there is time to cause significant surface burns. Erudite histriographic data was proffered in 1965 by Robinson &Others in a review and analysis of 33 cases of electrical burns.[31] In addition, chronologically, several scholarships on these thematic aspects exist, in 1980.Hunt, Sato and Baxter reviewed and discussed   Acute electric burns; current diagnostic and therapeutic approaches to management.

[32] And thereafter, corroborative data were provided by Fish in 1993 from his work on Electric Shock: Part 1.Physics and Pathophysiology [25]

In addition to Bernstein in 1994.following his scholarships on electrical injury: Electrical engineers perspective and an historical review. [1]

 

In addition, because the resistance of the skin may be significantly and markedly altered by moisture, electric current may be transmitted by deeper tissues before it causes significant damage to the skin. Electric current may be adsorbed and sustained by resistant bony structures, and the heat generated may be circumscribed and localized causing massive coagulation and necrosis of deep muscles and other tissues, almost completely sparing the skin. Thus in contrast with burns caused by fires, the severity of skin burns cannot be used to assess the degree of internal injury in an electrical accident with low voltage.

Chronologically, these subtle and covert intricacies and complexities with potential deleterious implications of the impact of electric current and lightning injuries was highlighted and discussed in 1977 by Burke, Quinby and Bondoc in their seminally disseminated scholarships on the patterns of high tension electrical injury in children and adolescents and their management. [33]

As did the 1980; reviews of Hunt, Sato and Baxter on the acute electric burns; current diagnostic and therapeutic approaches to management [32] In addition to the combined electrical and lightnine injuries reviews of Cooper of 1984, [34]

and [29] Jain and Bandi of 1984 and 1999 respectively. More serious burns are usually caused by exposure to arcs that are created in accidents with high-voltage currents (more than 1000 volts)

 

In such cases, the severity of the burn depends not only on the temperature but also on the energy within the arc. Exposure to an arc may rapidly break down the epidermis of the skin (as fast as one millisecond), thus decreasing the body’s resistance to that of the internal organs (five hundred  to one thousand  ohms) The combination of high temperature and high current in an arc causes a variety of burns including:”flash burns”, which are thermal burns due to the heat generated by the arc;” electrothermal burns,” due to the passage of the electric current through the body ; and “flame burns” ,usually from ignition of the clothing .Burns due to lightning are common ( up to eighty five to ninety five  in several credible series) ,but despite the massive energy and heat that lightening generates, its short duration and flash-over effect  proffers a protective and injury ameliorating  buffering advantage. As a result deep burns occur only in five percent of the victims. For an excellent review of this theme see the literature on the Prognostic signs for death in Lightning injuries   by Cooper of 1980. [35]

 

When they occur ,burns may be of different morphological forms, including partial-thickness linear burns ,mostly in areas of amplified sudiferous glands localizations such as the armpits with  much  sweaty skin), it may be punctate burns which are  groups of small, deep, circular burns, thermal burns following  the ignition of clothing or contact with  effective metallic conductors ), and feathering burns.The latter also called Lichtenburg figures, ferns or keraunographic markings) are cutaneous marks that are considered pathognomonic of lightning, but it is unclear whether they are actual burns.

 

In 1996, Elegant Forensic Medical Pathological updates and other reviews on Lichtenberg figures was provided by   Resnik and Welti [36]

 

Special mention should be made of oral electrical burns in children and burns caused by lightning .The most common mode of electrical shock in young children is from chewing or biting on electrical cords. In such cases, arcing of the current through the lips causes the burn. The burn may be full thickness, involving the mucosa, submucosa, muscle, nerves, and blood vessels. Significant edema and eschar formation follow within hours after the injury. The eschar usually falls off after two to three weeks, being replaced by granulation tissue and scarring that may cause considerable deformity. Injury to the labial artery may cause significant bleeding .However, because the eschar is usually covering the artery, bleeding may not present until the eschar falls off days after the initial injury. For the paediatric domiciliary aspects of electrical injuries the 1989 erudite scholarships of Baker and Chiavello on the .Household electrical injuries in children. Epidemiology and identification of avoidable hazards should be reviewed. [37] Supplemented by the classic data of Cooper on the Emergent care of lightning and electrical injuries of 1995. [3]

 

Pathophysiological pathway of current of injury.

 

Depending on the voltage, current pathway, duration of contact, and type of circuit, electrical burns can cause a variety of injuries through several different mechanisms

 

Direct Current:

 

A direct current passing directly through the body will heat the tissue causing electrothermal burns, both to the surface of the skin as well as deeper tissues, depending on their résistance. It will typically cause damage at the source contact point and the ground contact point. Contact burns are shown in the image below.

 

CONTACT ELECTRICAL BURNS:

 

A 120-V alternating current nominal could cause primary thermal burns in the energized side and secondary contact electrical burns on the grounded side.

 

The contact electrical burns are otherwise morphologically indistinguishable from the thermal burns.

 

It is important to note that entrance and exit points are not viable concepts in alternating currents.

 

ELECTRICAL ARCS.

 

Current sparks are formed between objects of different electrical potentials that are not in direct contact with each other, most often a highly charged source and a ground. The temperature of an electrical arc can reach 2500-5000 degrees centigrade, resulting in deep thermal burns where it contacts the skin.

 

These are high-voltage injuries that may cause both thermal and flame burns in addition to injury from direct current along the arc pathway,

 

Flame:

 

Ignition of clothing causes direct burns from flames. Both electrochemical and arcing currents can ignite clothing.

 

Flash

 

When heat from a nearby electrical arc causes thermal burns but current does not actually enter the body, the result is a flash burn. Flash burns may cover a large surface area of the body but are usually only partial thickness.

 

MECHANISMS OF LIGHTNING INJURIES.

 

Lightning current strikes the victim in an altogether different way than low or high voltage. At least four primary modes of lightening current injury have been described.

 

[I]-Direct strike

 

In this the major pathway of lightning current is through the victim;

 

[II]-Side flash.

 

In which a direct strike to an object (or a person) is followed by a secondary discharge from the object to a near by victim.

 

[III]-STRIDE POTENTIAL

 

In which the lightning hits the ground and then enters the victims’ body from one foot and exits from the other foot. In addition to  the:

 

[IV]-Flash-over Phenomenon:

 

This occurs when the energy flows outside the body, often causing vaporization of surface water with a blast effect to clothing and shoes. The salient aspects of the mechanisms of lightening injuries was detailed and summed up by Fahmy, Brinsden and Smith, in their medical scientific updates on Lightning ;the multisystem group injuries of  1999.[24] As did the established mature data of Bernstein (1994) [1]  And Cooper (1995)[3]

 

ELECTRICAL INJURY TO SPECIFIC TISSUES AND ORGANS.

 

Electrical injury should be viewed and managed as a multisystem injury, and there is virtually no organ that is exempt from its complications. Although multisystem can be very extensive, it is damage to the vital organs that may require intensive care and accounts for the fatalities. The most important potential injuries are as follows.

 

CARDIOVASCULAR SYSTEM:

 

PATHOPHYSIOLOGY OF CARDIOVASCULAR IMPACTED ELECTRICAL INJURIES.

 

Electrical injury may affect the cardiovascular system by causing direct necrosis of the myocardium and by causing cardiac dysarrythmias.To some extent, the degree of the myocardial injury depends  on the voltage and the type of current ,being more extensive with higher voltage and for any  given voltage ,it is more severe with AC  than with DC.The injury may be focal or diffuse and usually consists of wide spread ,discrete ,patchy contraction band necrosis involving the myocardium ,nodal tissue ,conduction pathways, and the coronary arteries.

Following observational studies on this associational pathological entity, Carlton in 1995 compiled and discussed cardiac problems associated with electrical injury. [38] And other review on this theme exists. Myocardial damage associated with electrical injury was dissected by Ku, Lin and Hsu et al. in 1989. [39]The significance of the early elevation of CPK-MB isoenzymes in myocardial damage [40] Previous efforts of Housinger, Green and Shahangian et al of 1985 was directed towards a prospective study of myocardial damage in electrical injuries.[41]

 

Rhythm disturbances may be produced with exposure to relatively low currents.

A current of more than 50-100 m-A  ( which is less than half the maximal current can be generated after exposure to regular household current) with hand to hand or hand to foot transmission could cause ventricular fibrillation. Exposure to high-voltage current (AC or DC) will most likely cause ventricular asystole.Lightning acts as a massive cosmic counter-shock that causes cardiac standstill. interestingly, because of the inherent automaticity of the heart, sinus rhythm may return. The astonishing intrigue in this recovery following an apparently grave irreversible standstill was epitomized by Taussig in his histriographic scholarship on Death “from lightning and the possibility of living again .of 1968. [2]

 

A miscellaneous variety of other (usually transient) cardiac dysarrythmias have been reported in survivors of electrical injuries, and their pathogenesis  is rather unclear  and most likely multifactorial .Possible mechanisms include arrythmogenic foci due to myocardial necrosis, alterations in the Sodium-Potassium –adenosine triphosphate  concentration ,and changes in the permeability of myocyte membranes. Finally. Cardiac injury and   rhythm disturbances can be caused by anoxic injuries in cases in which respiratory arrest precedes the injury to the heart. Although delayed dysarrythmias are possible, they tend to occur only in patients who had some other form of dysarrythmias on presentation .Late dysarrythmias are probably due to arrythmogenic foci secondary to patchy myocardial necrosis and especially due to injury to the SA node. Arrhythmias related to electrical and lightning injuries was referred to and discussed by Chandra, Siu and Munster in their scholarship investigations on the clinical predictors of myocardial damage after high voltage electrical injury of 1990. [42] And other reviews on the arrythmogenic impact of electrical and lightening injuries are available.Housinger, Green and Shahangian et al. (1985) [41] Taussig (1968) [2] Hammond and Ward (1986). [40]

Ku, Lin and Hsu et al (1989) [39] In addition to (Carlton (1995). [38]

 

Electrical injury may cause direct and indirect effects on the vascular bed, which due to its high water content, is an excellent conductor .The effects of the electric current vary amongst the different size of blood vessels. Large arteries are not acutely affected because their rapid flow allows them to dissipate the heat produced by the electric current. However, they are susceptible to medial necrosis, with aneurysm formation and rupture. These makes it imperative for an utmost prevention of even minutiae amounts of electrical injury to the elderly with predisposing CVS pathologies such as HBP metabolic syndrome ,leutic disease smoking etc,but also immediate or interval aneurismal dilatation of the arteries  may be a concern with the paediatric population with risk  or predispositions of connectivopathiies  such as  Marians syndrome , Élans- Danlos syndromes,Osteogenesis Imperfecta and the other subsets with syndromic and non syndromic arrythmogenic or haemodynamically relevant cardiovascular syndromes. Concerted scholarships of Hunt, McManus and Haney, et al. on vascular lesions in acute electrical injuries of 1974 intimates that. [43]

 

Smaller vessels are acutely affected due to coagulation necrosis and tend to be affected primarily as a result of high-voltage injury (but only rarely with lightning) .Vascular injury in the extremities is very likely to cause compartment syndrome that further compromises the circulation and could cause or complicate vital end organs ischaemic dysfunctions and insufficiencies. Therafter, two decades later these data were reechoed and corroborated by the eminent reviews of Cooper of 1995. [3]

 

CLINICAL MANIFESTATIONS:

 

Cardiac standstill and ventricular fibrillation are obviously the most obvious and acutely serious of the cardiac complications of electric injury and are invariably fatal unless immediate resuscitative efforts are undertaken. However, there are also several other dysarrythmias that have a much better prognosis .Amongst the most common are sinus  tachycardia and non-specific ST  and T wave changes .Conduction defects ,such as various degrees of heart blocks, bundle-branch blocks, and prolongation   of the QT  interval, are also common.Finally,supraventricular  tachycardias  and atrial fibrillations have been reported. In the majority of cases, these dysarrythmias do not cause significant haemodynamic compromise. On echocardiogram, there may be some depression of the right and left ejection fractions. The ECG data of electrical and lightning injuries was discussed by Carlton (1995). [38] And previous publications on this theme exists.Ku, Lin and Hsu et al. (1989). [39]

Hammond and Ward (1986) [40] Housinger, Green and Shahangian (1985). [41]In addition to Taussig (1968) [2]

 

NERVOUS system INJURY.

 

Periodic paralysis, stroke, myotonia congenita, myasthenia gravis or epileptic and non-epileptic paroxysmal events could predispose to or make electrical injuries worse etc.

 

The Clinicopathological Features and The Pathophysiology and Neuropathology of Electrical and Lightening injuries.

 

Although nervous system injury (involving the central and the peripheral nervous system) is a common manifestation of electrical injury, there is no specific histologic or clinical finding that is considered pathognomonic.Furthermore, in many instances; nervous system injury is not due to the direct effect of the electrical current itself, but due to trauma or dysfunction of other organ systems (usually Cardiorespiratory).Amongst the acute direct effects of passage of electrical current through the brain, the most serious is injury to the respiratory control centre that results in respiratory arrest. Acute cranial nerve deficits and seizures may also occur after electric injury to the brain. Direct injury to the spinal cord with transection at the C4-C8 level may occur with a hand-to-hand flow.

 

Even relatively low-intensity current (30milliamperes) at the frequency of household current (60Hz) may induce an indefinite refractory state at the neuromuscular junction, causing continous tetanic contractions of the involved muscles. These tetanic contractions are responsible for the “locking-on” phenomenon that prevents the victims hand from separating from the electrical source and for suffocation that is caused by contraction of the respiratory muscles .Amongst the most common indirect injuries causing significant central nervous system injury are brain ischemia or anoxia secondary to antecedent cardio-respiratory arrest and traumatic brain or spinal cord injury secondary to a fall. Peripheral nerves may incur secondary damage due to local burns or entrapment from scar formation, vascular injury, or edema. Upper-motor neuro-deficits are relatively common; affecting primarily the lower limbs. The neuropatholgical aspects of electrical and lightning catastrophic events attracted a lot of academic investigative scholarship interests.

 

Ten Duis and Klasen in 1985. Itemized, depicted and discussed Keraunoparalysis, as a specific form of lightning injury related neuropathology.

[44]

In 1986.Varghese, Mani and Redford approached and dissected Paraplegic and paraparetic spinal cord injuries following electrical accidents. [45]

As a seminal and topical concept, the central nervous system complications of lightning and electrical injuries was tackled by   Cherington in 1995. [46],

 

Whereas Kleinschmidt-DeMasters .approached the neuropathology of lightning strike injuries in 1995. [47]

 

Eminent Scholarships by Wilbourn intimates that Peripheral nerves are not exempt in electrical and lightning injuries. [48] Related data by (Cooper 1995.)

[3] And Jain and Bandi.of 1999 on Electrical and lightning injuries made references to this neuropatholgical electrical and lightning injuries related associational entity

 

Loss of consciousness, confusion, and impaired recall tend to be very common amongst victims of electrical injury. If there is no other associated injury, they tend to recover well. Dysfunction of peripheral motor and sensory nerves acutely causes a variety of motor and sensory deficits. Seizures, visual disturbances and deafness may be present. In most severe cases involving brain hemorrhage or other traumatic or ischaemic/anoxic injury, the patient may become comatose.Hemiplegia or quadriplegic are common with significant spinal cord injury .Transient paralysis (keraunoparalysis) and autonomic instability causing hypertension and peripheral vasospasm have been described primarily in the context of electrical injury due to lightning, and they are believed to result from massive release of catecholamines.Several reviews on this theme exists.[3],

[29], [46], [48], [45], [31], [45], [31], [47], [32], [47], [44]

 

RESPIRATORY SYSTEM:

 

Pathophysiology respiratory involvements in electrical injuries:

 

Although respiratory arrest is one of the common causes of acute death in serious electrical injuries, there are no specific injuries to the lungs or the airways directly attributable to electric current. Respiratory arrest is usually the result either of direct injury to the respiratory control centre, causing cessation of respiration, or to suffocation secondary to tetanic contractions of the respiratory muscles, which occurs when the thorax is an involved pathway for the electric current.It is speculated that in a number of fatalities, it is actually the anoxic injury rather than the electric current that causes irreversible injury to the brain and the heart. Thermal burns of the airways or inhalation of toxic fumes and hot debris may occur especially in cases of industrial accidents. Blunt trauma to the chest with pulmonary contusion and associated respiratory dysfunction is also possible, especially with exposure to high-voltage current that knocks the victim to the ground.

 

CLINICAL MANIFESTATIONS of  respiratory pathology on electrical injuries:

 

In addition to apnea in cases of respiratory arrest, patients may exhibit a variety of non-specific respiratory patterns that reflect perturbations of other organ systems (such as hyperpnoea or hypopnea due to central nervous system dysfunction, fluid shifts, cardiac dysfunction, and pain.) rather than from specific injury to the respiratory system. Of course, as is the case with almost every other critical illness, survivors of electrical injury may develop respiratory complication as a result of their injury or therapeutic intervention (such as (acute respiratory dysfunction syndrome secondary to, or aggressive fluid resuscitation, in addition to ventilator associated pneumonitis.

 

OTHER SYSTEMIC INVOLVEMENT IN ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTNING INJURIES.

 

The Renal system.

 

Amongst other organ systems that may incur significant damage due to electrical injury, the kidneys are of particular importance .Although direct injury from electric current is unusual, the kidneys are very susceptible to anoxic/ischaemic injury that accompanies severe electrical injuries.In addition, vascular compromise and muscle necrosis may cause renal tubular damage, leading to renal failure from release of myoglobin and creatinine phosphokinase.

 

The Musculo-skeletal System.

 

The skeletal system may have fractures either from severe muscle contractions or from injury due to falls from significant heights .Fractures are more common in upper limb bones and in vertebrae .The latter may cause spinal cord injuries, further complicating the problem. Extensive skeletal muscle damage (Rhabdomyolisis) from high voltage electrical current injuries may lead to myoglobunuria, which could be precipitated in the kidneys causing ARF or it could also release potassium from damaged muscle cells and cause hyperkalaemia thereby compounding the hyperkalaemia related cardio-toxicity of ARF.

 

THE EYES:

 

The eyes could be an entry point for a lightning strike presenting a number of problems .Transient autonomic disturbances may cause fixed pupils after a lightning injury that in association with an often unconscious patient may be perceived as severe brain injury or even death. Cataracts are a very common complication of lightning injury but are rarely, acutely present, especially after lightning injury. [3], [29]

 

THE EARS.

 

 Up to one half of patients may experience rupture of the tympanic membranes and temporary sensorineural hearing loss.

 

CLINICAL MANIFESTATIONS of Electrical Injuries

 

Clinical manifestations of burns will depend on their extent and severity. When extensive flash and flame burns are present the patient is expected to develop severe haemodynamic, autonomic, cardiopulmonary, renal, metabolic, and neuroendocrine responses that accompany more common thermal burns and that are described in details elsewhere. Burns caused by lightening may require special care.

 

TYPES OF ELECTRICAL BURNS:

 

Depending on the voltage, current, pathway, duration of contact, and type of circuit, electrical burns can cause a variety of injuries through several different mechanisms.

Immediately after a severe electrical shock, patients are usually comatose, apneic, and in circulatory collapse from ventricular fibrillation or cardiac standstill. If they survive this stage, they often are disorientated, combative and frequently may have seizures. Often they will be found to have fractures caused of bone caused either by convulsive muscular contractions accompanying the shock or from falls at the time of the accident.Hypovolemic shock often appears soon after high-tension electrical injury and is due to the rapid loss of tissue into areas of tissue damage, and from body surface burns.Hypotension,direct injury to the kidneys by the electric current ,and renal tubular damage from myoglobin  and  haemoglobin pigments liberated during massive muscle necrosis and haemolysis may lead to acute renal failure. Besides the extensive destruction of tissue occurring instantly in electrical burns, additional injury from ischaemia produced by swelling of damaged tissues may appear later and is often accompanied by severe metabolic acidosis. Other serious complications which may be seen are gastrointestinal hemorrhage from pre-existing or acute ulcers and both anaerobic and aerobic infections originating in inadequately debrided necrotic muscle masses.

Late effects include various neurological disabilities, visual disturbances, and the residual damage by burns .Nervous system injuries are frequent and include peripheral neuropathies, incomplete transection of the spinal cord, and reflex sympathetic dystrophies, as well as late convulsive disorders and intractable headaches. The development of cataracts of one or both eyes has been reported to occur up to three years following electrical injury. Histriographically, these interval cataracts complicating electrical injuries was highlighted and discussed by Solem et al in their earlier reviews on the natural history of longitudinally and prospectively tracked cases following electrical injuries in 1977.[49]

 

Symptomatology of electrical injuries:

 

Very frequently the most common symptom of an electrical injury is a skin burn, albeit not all electrical injuries cause external damages. High-voltage injuries cause massive internal burns. If muscle damage is extensive a limb may swell so much that its arteries becomes compressed.( acute compartment syndrome) ,cutting off blood supply to the limb .If a current travels close to the eyes, it may  lead to cataracts, Cataracts following electrical injuries could develop within days thereafter or several years later.

 

Electrical injuries could occasionally be accompanied by extensive muscle damage (rhabdomyolisis) with resultant myoglobinaemia and myoglobunuria, which if precipitated in the kidneys could lead to renal failure (acute tubular necrosis) and acute cortical nephrosis.

 

Young children who bite or suck on extension cords could burn their mouth or lips.These burns may cause facial deformities and growth problems of the teeth, jaw, and face. An added danger is that severe bleeding from an artery in the lip may occur when the scab falls off, usually between a week and a half.

 

A Mild or minor shock may cause muscle pain and may trigger a mild muscle contractions or startle people, causing a fall. Severe shocks can trigger powerful muscle contractions sufficient to throw people to the ground or cause joint dislocations, bone fractures, and other blunt injuries.

 

The nerves and the brain can be injured in various ways, causing seizures, bleeding (haemorrhage) in the brain, poor short-term memory, personality changes, irritability, difficulty sleeping .Damage to the nerves in the body or spinal cord may cause weakness,paralysis,numbness,tingling ,chronic pain, erectile dysfunction( impotence)

 

 

 

 

 

The peculiarities of lightening injuries.

 

A lightening injury occurs after brief exposure to the very intense current of the strike.

 

[i]-About one in ten of the people who are struck by lightning die because the heart stops beating and breathing stops.

 

[ii]-In some people who survive severe lightening injury, an electrocardiogram is done to monitor the heart beat and blood and imaging tests are warranted.

 

[iii]-Once the person is resuscitated, burns and other injuries are treated.

 

Lightning delivers a massive electrical pulse over a fraction of a millisecond.

The brief duration of the exposure frequently limits the damage to the outer layer of skin. In addition, lightening is much less likely to cause internal burns than generated electricity.

However; it can kill a person by instantaneously short – circuiting the heart or the brain .Lightening is the second most frequent cause of storm –related deaths in the United States, resulting in about thirty to fifty deaths each year and nearly 10 times that many injuries, some of which result in permanent disability.

 

Lightening tends to strike tall or isolated objects, including trees, towers, shelters, flagpoles, bleachers, and fences.

 

A person may be the tallest object in an open field. Metal objects and water do not attract lightening but easily transmit electricity once they are hit.

 

Electricity from lightening can travel from outdoor power or telephone lines to electrical equipment or telephone lines inside a house.

 

Lightning can injure a person in several ways. Lightning can strike a person directly. In addition, electricity can reach a person who is touching or near an object that has been struck. Current can also reach a person through the ground. The shock can also throw a person, producing blunt injuries.

 

Symptomatologies of Lightening.

 

After a person has been struck by lightening, the heart may stop beating (cardiac arrest) or may beat erratically, and breathing often stops. The heart may beat again on its own, but if breathing has not restarted, the body is deprived of oxygen. The lack of oxygen and possibly. neurologic damage can cause the heart to stop beating again.

In Electric Shock, consciousness is rapidly lost. If the current continues, death from asphyxia due to ventricular fibrillation or respiratory arrest occurs within a few minutes. Interrupt the power source or knock wire away from the skin with a dry piece of wood or other non-conducting material and institute external cardiac massage or mouth-to-mouth respiration, depending on whether asphyxia is cardiac or respiratory. Supply oxygen if available and institute appropriate treatment for shock.

 

Brain Injury usually causes loss of consciousness .If brain damage is severe, coma may develop. Typically, the person awakens but does not remember what happened before the injury (amnesia) the person may be confused, think slowly, and have difficulty concentrating and remembering recent events. Personality changes may occur.

 

The ear drums are often perforated .Many eye injuries can develop including cataracts. Often both legs become temporarily paralysed, blue, and numb (kerataunoparalysis) the skin may show no marks at all, or may have minor burns that have a feathering, branching pattern, consist of clusters of tiny pinpoint spots like a cigarette burn, or consist of streaks where sweat has been turned into steam.Numbness, tingling, and weakness may develop because the nerves branching out from the spinal cord have been damaged (peripheral neuropathy)

 

A comparative overview of the major characteristics, effects and clinical manifestations of lightning versus high voltage or low voltage direct or alternating currents.

 

The voltage (V) of a lightning is usually above thirty million volts, whereas high voltage appliances have a voltage above one thousand volts and the low voltage appliances have a voltage range of less than six hundred volts in some circuits or less than two forty volts in the other. The current from lightening is usually more than two hundred thousand amperes, where as the current from high voltage sources are usually less than one thousand and those from low voltages are usually less than two hundred and forty amperes. The typology of lightenings is usually direct currents, those of high voltages could be direct or alternating currents and those of low voltages are commonly alternating currents.

 

The cause of cardiac arrest in lightning is usually due to asystole, whereas those of high voltages and low voltages are usually due to ventricular fibrillation respectively. The duration of Lightenings are usually instantaneous, where as those of high voltages are usually less than one thousand amperes, and those of low voltages are usually less than two hundred and forty amperes.

 

The myogenic contractility in lightning injuries is usually single, in lightning and high voltage events from direct current, whereas in high voltages of alternating current flow and the low voltages with always AC flow the myogenic contractilies are usually tetanic.

The pulmonary arrest in lightning is usually due to a direct central nervous system injury, whereas for the high voltage events, it is usually due to indirect trauma or tetanic contractions of the respiratory muscles, and that of the low voltages is usually due to tetanic contractions.

 

Burns are rare and uncommon in lightning injuries, but when they occur are usually superficial, however burns are common in high voltage injuries and are usually deep, whereas they usually occur in low voltage injuries where they are usually superficial.

 

THE PRENATAL AND PERINATAL ASPECTS OF ELECTRICAL INJURY .

 

Electrical or lightning injury in a pregnant woman carries additional risk of complications to the pregnancy or the fetus. Due to the small number of cases reported, the actual risks are unknown .Reports of fetal mortality vary widely, ranging from as high as  three of four cases to as low as one of six to seven cases after electrical injury and about one half after lightening strike injuries.

It is not clear whether fetal mortality is due to primary electrical injury to the fetus or secondary to injury to the mother.

 

 

 

 

Diagnostic Considerations for electrical injuries:

 

Doctors check people for burns, fractures, dislocations, and spinal cord or other injuries. Most people who have no symptoms do not require testing or monitoring.

An Electrocardiogram (ECG) Is Done To Monitor The Heartbeat In Some People.

In some instances, blood and urine tests may be needed .If people are unconscious, imaging tests such as computed tomography (CT) or magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) may be needed.

 

LABORATORY FINDINGS for Electrical Injuries:

 

Immediately following major electrical injury the haematocrit is elevated and the plasma volume is reduced, reflecting sequestration of fluid in the wound. Unless extensive flame burns are also present, serial determinations of either of these parameters provide a good means of monitoring the adequacy of fluid replacement therapy.Myoglobinuria is seen frequently in association with severe shocks, and when it persists following establishment of urine flow, usually indicates massive muscle injury .In many patients arterial blood p-H determinations will indicate the presence of metabolic acidosis.

Lumbar puncture may show elevated pressure associated with cerebral oedema or bloody spinal fluid as a result of intracerebral hemorrhage.

The electrocardiogram not infrequently shows tachycardia and minor ST-segment alterations which can persist for several weeks following injury.

Unexplained acute hypokalaemia leading to respiratory arrest and cardiac arrhythmias has developed in some patients between the second and fourth weeks following injury.

 

Diagnosis

 

Lightening injuries are often witnessed, but they may also be suspected when a person is found unconscious or with amnesia outside during or shortly after a thunderstorm.In the hospital, electrocardiography (ECG) may be done if injury is severe (for example if a person collapsed and may have had a temporary cardiac arrest) The ECG, when done, determines whether the heart is beating normally .Sometimes blood tests or imaging tests, such as computed tomography (CT) scan or magnetic resonance imaging (MRI), are needed.

 

MANAGEMENT OF ELECTRICAL INJURIES.

 

The management of severe electrical injuries requires a combination of cardiopulmonary resuscitation and acute multiple trauma care. Treatment generally follows the same principles of pediatric and adult resuscitation as any other traumatic injury .The type of care that the victim of an electrical injury requires varies according to the type and severity of the initial injury .However, certain conditions need to be evaluated, monitored, and treated in almost all cases. Specifically for patients admitted to the ICU, The following issues should be considered.

 

Thorough evaluation for hidden injury (especially spinal cord injury) and for blunt thoracic abdominal trauma.

 

Serial evaluation of liver, pancreatic and renal function for traumatic, anoxic or ischemic injury (in case of cardiorespiratory arrest), supplemented by appropriate imaging studies (such as computed tomography or abdominal sonogram as necessary)

 

Cranio-facial CT scan is indicated in all severe cases of lightning injury, of injuries due to a fall, and if there are persistent abnormal findings in the neurologic examination.

 

Preventive treatment for stress ulcers.

 

Psychiatric assessment and support as soon as the patient is conscious and haemodynamically stable.

 

Patients with high-voltage injury also require the following:

 

Evaluation for rhabdomyolysis and myoglobunuria (uncommon in lightning injury).

 

Nutritional support due to increased energy expenditures and requirements.

 

Ophthalmic and otoscopic evaluation (common in cases of lightning injury)

 

SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS:

 

In contrast with other traumatic injuries, electrical injuries present some rather unique problems that require special considerations.

 

ACCESS TO THE VICTIM:

 

In contrast with other types of trauma, electrical injury poses the same threat to the rescuer as it does to the victim because, if the victim is still in contact   with the source of the current (as commonly happens with AC), he or she becomes a conductor that may electrocute the rescuer .Similarly in cases of injury with high voltage, the ground especially it is wet) may conduct current to the rescuers Thus no attempt to provide medical care should  be made until either the source of the electrical current has been cut off or the victim has been extricated safely away from the current source with the use of properly insulated equipment .In contrast to popular belief, contact with a lightning victim does not pose any threat to the rescuer; therefore, treatment may be commenced immediately.  For an achievable non-futuristic overview see the Management Concepts in major electrical injury of 1970.by Baxter. [50]

 

TRIAGE:

 

It is not unusual for electrical injuries (especially lightning injuries) to cause multiple casualties. In general, in cases of severely  injured people, patients believed to be already dead are given the least priority, and efforts are focusing on those who have signs of life .Lightning victims are an exception to this rule because patients struck by lightning may become acutely apneic due to paralysis of the central respiratory control, may have dilated non-reactive pupils due to autonomic dysfunction, and may be pulseless due to the cardiac standstill caused by the mega-counter shock of the lightning strike. Because of its inherent automaticity it is possible for the heart to recover spontaneously .Considering that the majority of lightning victims tend to be relatively young and previously healthy individuals ,the possibility of successful resuscitation is high if proper care is instituted immediately .

Therefore administration of oxygen and ventilation with bag and mask should be started immediately on an apneic victim, and an artificial airway should be established as soon as possible to minimize the effect of anoxia, a major cause of mortality .The potential fur successful resuscitation has led people to believe that lightning causes a state of “suspended animation” from which the victim can recover virtually unharmed. Unfortunately, this claim is not substantiated .If the patient remains apneic, anoxia will lead to further brain and cardiac damage refractory to treatment.

 

EVALUATION OF THE PATIENT FOR THE SEVERITY OF THE INJURY.

 

Because the actual severity of the electrical injury depends on the pathway of the electric current .it is important to determine how the injury occurred, if the patient was exposed to DC, there may be visible burns at the entry and exit sites. In contrast, because of its cyclic movement.AC may not cause discernible entry and exit points. Another problem is that severe injury may occur when the skin is wet and its resistance is low, thus allowing current to travel freely and damage internal organs   without leaving significant surface marks. Thus although the presence of burns on the chest should raise the possibility of internal injuries, their absence does not preclude them. Similarly, skeletal injuries (including vertebral injuries) may occur as a result of even a severe muscle contraction, which can dislocate or fracture bones without any sign of external traumatic injury. Therefore, any victim of a severe electrical accident should be assumed to have a spinal cord injury and should be managed with the proper head and neck immobilization that is required for all victims with suspected or known spinal injury.

 

Therapeutic Interventions for ELECTRICAL Shock injuries.

 

First, the person must be separated from the currents source.The safest way to do so is to shut off the current-for example, by throwing a circuit breaker or switch or by disconnecting the device from electrical outlet. No one should touch the person until the current has been shut off, particularly if high-voltage lines could be involved. High voltage and low-voltage lines are difficult to distinguish especially outdoors, Shutting off current to high-voltage lines is done by local power company, Many well meaning rescuers have been injured by electricity  when trying to free a person. Once the person could be safely touched, the rescuer should check to see if the person is breathing and has a pulse, cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) should be commenced immediately Emergency medical assistance should be called for any person who has more than a minor injury. Because the extent of an electrical burn may be deceptive, medical assistance should be sought if any doubt exists regarding its severity.

People with rhabdomyolisis may receive large amounts of fluids given intravenously .A tetanus shot is given if needed .Skin burns are treated with burn cream( such as silver sulfadiazine,Bacitracin,or sterile aloe vera) and sterile dressings. A person with only minor skin burns can usually be treated at home. If the injury is more severe, the person is admitted to the hospital, ideally to a burn centre.The person is kept in the hospital for 6 to 24 hours if any of the following exists.

 

[i]-The results of an ECG are abnormal.

 

[ii]-The person has lost consciousness.

 

[iii]-The Person has symptoms of a heart condition (such as chest pain, shortness of breath, awareness of heartbeats palpitations.

 

[iv]-The person has other severe injuries.

 

[v]-The person is pregnant (in many, but not necessarily all, cases)

 

[iv]-The person has a known heart problem (in many, but not necessarily all, cases)

 

Young children who bite or suck on extension cords should be referred to a children’s orthodontist in the care of these injuries.

 

THE THERAPEUTIC ASPECTS OF ELECTRICAL INJURIES.

 

Removal of victims from contact with the current should be accomplished immediately without touching them directly. Rescuers should use a rubber sheet, a leather belt applied as a sling, a wooden pole or other nonconductive material to detach them, and this should be preceded by cutting off the source of current when possible. If the victim is not breathing, mouth-to-mouth ventilation should be instituted at once. Although most cases who survive develop spontaneous respiration within half an hour, complete recovery after prolonged period occurs often enough so that respiratory support should be continued for at least four hours.If there is no evidence of heart beat, external cardiac massage should accompany ventilatory resuscitation.

Persons struck by lightening frequently have cardiac asystole which responds to a manual blow to the chest, while victims of low-voltage shocks will usually require defibrillation to restore heart action, during cardiopulmonary resuscitation and evacuation to the hospital, attention should be paid to possible broken bones and spinal cord injuries incurred at the time of the accident.

Subsequent hospital management of patients with electrothermal injuries requires considerable specialized care, when-ever feasible, they should be referred to an appropriate burn or trauma unit. In 1974, therapeutically achievable and useful classic data on the pathophysiology and treatment of lightning injury was provided by Apfelberg, et al [51]

 

Rapid institution of fluid and electrolyte therapy for hypovolemic shock and acidosis is essential, with guidelines being the patients urine output, haematocrit, osmolality, central venous pressure, and arterial blood gases. Standard burn formulas should not be used to estimate fluid therapy since these are based only upon extent of body surface area injury and do not take into account the extensive damage to muscle which is usually present.Instead,fluid replacement principles used in the treatment  of crush injury, which electrical injury closely resemble ,should be followed. Large volumes of fluid, preferably lactated Ringers solution, should be administered in order to maintain urine output greater than fifty milliliters per hour. If myoglobunuria persists after adequate urine flow has been established, the use of furosemide or an osmotic diuretic such as mannitol along with alkalinisation of the urine is indicated. Management of the electrical wound should include adequate debridement of necrotic tissue and often will require fasciotomy to prevent further ischaemic injury. In 1979, elegant techniques and guidelines on the optimal surgical management of electrical injuries were produced by Sances et al [52]

Anticlostridial prophylaxis, including tetanus toxoid and high doses of penicillin, should be administered to all severely injured patients, while topical antimicrobial therapy with mafenide (sulfamylon) or silver sulfadiazine may be useful in preventing or delaying infections in extensive surface burns. Survivors of the acute episode often require extensive treatment for infection, cerebral oedema, visceral injury, and delayed haemorrhage as devitalized tissues slough. If acute renal failure occurs, it should be managed accordingly. Previously, seminal collative scholarships by Rouse, and Dimick et al on the treatment of electrical injury compared to burn injury and review of the pathophysiology and comparison of patient management protocols were provided in 1978. [53]

 

 

 

 

Therapeutic Interventions:

 

A person struck by lightning does not retain electricity, so there is no danger to the person providing first aid. People without a heartbeat and who are not breathing need cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) immediately .If an automated external defibrillator (AED) is available, it should be used. Emergency medical assistance should be called. Many people struck by lightning are in good general health and are more likely to recover if given CPR.

Burns and other injuries are treated as needed. If resuscitative efforts are not successful within the first twenty minutes, they are unlikely to be, so resuscitation efforts are then discontinued.

 

FLUID MANAGEMENT.

 

The combination of extensive burns and significant internal visceral injury in cases of severe high-voltage electrical leads to increased fluid requirements due to fluid extravasations into third space compartments and to ongoing fluid losses. In addition, the massive muscle destruction that accompanies these injuries may cause significant myoglobunuria, which if significant, may lead to renal failure.

 

Thus, it is important to establish good intravenous access as soon as is achievable and provide adequate fluids to maintain a normal urine output.

If the patient presents with signs of hypovolemic shock, immediate fluid resuscitation is indicated .Otherwise, the overall fluid management should be judicious in consideration of other problems that may already be present or develop( such as syndrome of inappropriate ADH secretion in case of traumatic or anoxic brain injury or acute respiratory dysfunction syndrome) and  warrant fluid restriction.

 

PATIENT MONITORING:

 

Patients, who experienced cardiopulmonary arrest, have abnormal neurologic findings suggesting central nervous system or spinal cord injury, or have severe burns and extensive visceral or vascular injury will obviously require admission to the ICU or to a specialized burn unit. The criteria for intensive in patient monitoring following electrical injuries was discussed by  Bailey ,Forget and Gaudreault in their  scholarship on the prevalence of potential risk factors in victims of electrocution of  2001.[54]

 

Although somewhat debatable and controversially discussed in the global medical literature, Cunningham in 1991 employing his them “the need for cardiac monitoring after electrical injury “ Strived  to unify and harmonize the theme on what has been less well defined in the need for cardiac monitoring after electrical injury. In the opinion of  Cunningham ,although late cardiac problems after electrical injuries have been reported, evidence from several studies suggests that the most severe cardiac complications present acutely, and it is very unlikely for a patient to develop a serious or life-threatening dysarrythmias hours or days later. Therefore patients who are asymptomatic and have a normal ECG at admission to the emergency department do not need mandatory cardiac monitoring as such. [55]

 

On the basis of the data from his research investigations on the theme, Electrical Injury: Part III: Cardiac monitoring indications, the pregnant patient, and lightning. Fish in the year 2000 proposed that for most patients, dispositions become clear after their initial evaluation in the emergency department. Victims of a low-voltage electrical injury or a lightning injury, who do not have cardiac arrest, have no loss of consciousness and no burns, and whose neurologic examination and electrocardiogram (ECG) are normal could safely be discharged home. [56]

These criteria for the selection of candidates for cardiac monitoring following electrical Injury and  the peculiar situation of the electrically injured expecting mother was discussed in 2000 by Fish.[56]In a closely related activity, Bailey, Gaudreault and Thivierge, reported that none of the patients who were discharged from their hospital after electrical injury had late adverse effects, especially arrhythmias .But, they nevertheless recommended an ECG and a 24 hour cardiac monitoring for children with history of heart disease.[57]

It is not clear whether these recommendations should apply to patients with a history of heart disease before injury. In one retrospective study, of adults who died due to electrical injury, a history of coronary artery was not found to be a risk factor between those who died acutely from arrhythmia and those who died later from other causes .Until more data become available on the actual risk that pre-existing heart disease poses for the patient with electrical injury, it seems reasonable to monitor such patients for twenty four hours following electrical current injuries.

 

Considering that the numbers of potential victims who fit this category is very limited, such recommendations will not pose any unreasonable burden to ICUs or the overall costs of health care. On the basis of studies in adults and children, the criteria for cardiac monitoring after an electrical injury are, but not confined to the following: exposure to high voltages, loss of consciousness, abnormal ECG at admission to the emergency department, and past medical history of cardiac disease (especially a history of cardiac arrhythmia) The type of recommended cardiac monitoring was also controversially discussed . Bailey, Forget and Gaudreault in their 2001 Forensic Science International Literature indicated that traditionally, cardiac monitoring refers to continous telemetry, serial ECGs, and serial measurements of cardiac enzymes. [54]

 

(Myocardial muscle creatine kinase isoenzyme CK-MB) and the use of noninvasive and invasive imaging studies (echocardiography, thallium studies, and angiography) has been rather poor and inconsistent.The CK-MB fraction  as an index of myocardial injury may be markedly elevated due to skeletal muscle and not myocardial injury. It has been reported that muscle injured by an electrical current can contain up to twenty five percent CK-MB fraction (as opposed to the normal two to three percent)

In answering the research question, Is serum creatinine kinase-MB in electrically injured patients predictive of myocardial injury? Mc Bride in 1986 lucidly dissected and discussed the therapeutically directing and useful positive predictive value of serum creatinine kinase-MB in electrically injured patients for myocardial injury. [58]

There may be some information regarding the changes in troponin levels after electrical injury. Momentary contact, particularly with a high voltage outlet, will lead to localized, sharply demarcated, painless gray areas without associated inflammation of the skin.

 

Also .in addition, the examiner should search for a second area of grayness where the current has exited and emerged from the body. Sloughing occurs after a couple of weeks.

With simple burns, the skin should be cleansed and a dry dressing applied. Deeper burns should be treated with silver sulphadiazine (Silvadene) under an occlusive dressing. Management is the same as for other types of burns.Infection occurs less often than with electric burns, but reconstructive surgery for scarring after healing may be required.

 

Toddlers and young children may sustain electric burns of the mouth by biting an electric cord. They are rarely electrocuted because the circuit is completed locally in the mouth. There is a local slough of tissue on the seventh to tenth days that may lead to brisk bleeding. The defect should be allowed to heal by scarring and the corner of the mouth revised later.

 

Multimodal Prevention Measures.

 

Weather Forecasting and Precautionary Broadcasts.

 

During the thunderstorm season, listening to weather reports, which is particularly important for the organizers of outdoor events, can assist in deciding whether to delay or postpone outdoor activities and in planning for any emergencies that may develop.

High winds, rain, and clouds may mean that a thunderstorm is imminent. By the time the  thunderstorm  is audible, the observers are already in danger and should be seeking safe shelter, such as a large habitable building or a fully enclosed metal vehicle ( for example , a car ,van ,or truck ) with the windows closed .Sheltering in  small open structure such as  gazebo is not safe. It is not safe to resume outdoor activties until about half an hour after the last sound of thunderstorm is heard or lightning is seen.

 

To prevent lightening injuries when indoors, people should avoid contact with plumbing or electrical wiring, talking on a hard wired telephone, working on a computer, using a video game console or using head sets attached by a cable to a sound system. Being away from windows and doors increases safety, as does turning off and unplugging electrical equipment before the thunderstorm arrives. Cellular telephones, personal digital assistants (PDAs), and MP3 Players Are Safe Because They Do Not Attract Lightning.

 

Prevention: of electrical injuries through proper installation of electrical appliances.

 

 

Proper installation of appliances, grounding of telephone lines and radio and television aerials, and the use of rubber gloves and dry shoes when working with electrical circuits should be a routine preventive health practice. Unused wall sockets should be kept closed and live extension cords not left unattended, particularly in households where there are young children. Of equal importance is the holistic approach to injury prevention as a whole by offering age appropriate supervisory activities to children. During a severe thunderstorm, refuge near hill tops, riverbanks, hedges, telephone poles, and trees should be eschewed.

The most secured shelter is the closed house, while a closed automobile, cave, ditch, or even lying on the ground curled up with hands close together is relatively secure. Therapeutic agents that could induce giddiness or an altered mental alertness should be employed with caution, preferably nocturnally as much as would be achievable, intoxications with alcoholic liquors should be eschewed and counseled against.

Several preventive deterrent options to preclude Lightning injuries were provided by McCrady-Kahn and Kahn in 1981. [59]

In hospitalized patients, the hazard of ventricular fibrillation precipitated by minute current leaks conducted directly to the myocardium from monitoring equipment via pacemakers or intravascular manometric catheters should be more widely appreciated. Hospital personnel should be aware that, in addition to medical instruments patient contact with two or more other power line-operated devices such as television sets, radio, electric razors, lamps, and especially electric beds can also result in electrocution if the heart lies within the current path through the patient. These hazards can be minimized by proper grounding of equipment before a patient is connected to the instrument, periodic measurement for leakage of current supplied by each device, and instruction in the principles of electrical safety for hospital personnel who use the complex and potentially hazardous equipment that is so much a part of modern medical practice are other potential deterrent options.

 

Prevention of Electrical Injuries Through Educational Enlightenment Programmes.

 

Education about the pros and cons of the utility of electricity and respect for electrical installations and appliances are crucial. Ensuring that all electrical devices are properly designed, installed, and maintained assists prevent electrical injuries at the domiciliary and occupational settings.

 

Electrical wiring should be installed and serviced by properly trained people Outlet guards reduce risk in homes with infants or young children. Any electrical device that touches or may be touched by the body should be properly grounded. Three-pronged outlets offers the utmost safety. Cutting off the lower (ground) prong of a power cord with three prongs (so that it will fit older two-pronged plugs) is potentially hazardous and increases the risks of occurrence of electrical injuries. Circuit breakers that interrupt (trip) circuits when currents as low as five milliamperes leaks should be made available in areas that get wet, such as kitchens, bathrooms and outdoors. To avoid Injury from current that jumps (arcing injury), poles and ladders should not be used near high-voltage power lines.

 

PROGNOSIS:

 

About one in ten of the individuals with lightning injuries die.The main cause of death are cardiac arrest and cessation of breathing at the time of the injury.

People whose heartbeat and breathing resume survive. If memory of recent events is impaired or thinking is slow, the person may have permanent brain injury.Keraunoparalysis usually resolves within several hours, though the person may occasionally be left with some weakness or clumsiness. People with nerve injury often have long-term problems, including chronic pain, sleep difficulties, erectile dysfunction (impotence)

 

For those without prolonged unconsciousness or cardiac arrest, the prognosis for recovery is excellent. Burns And Traumatic Injuries Continue To Cause The Majority Of the morbidity and mortality from electrical injuries. Morbidity and mortality are largely affected by the particular type of electrical contact involved in each exposure. Overall, mortality is estimated to be between three to fifteen percent by most series. [12] Flash burns have a better prognosis than arc or conductive burns. Persons who experience low-voltage injuries without immediate cardiac or respiratory arrest have low mortality, but there may be significant morbidity from oral trauma in children who bite electrical cords. Or adults who suffer burns to the hand.Persons who experience low-voltage injuries with cardiac or respiratory arrest may recover completely with immediate CPR on scene, however, prolonged CPR and transport time may result in permanent brain damage. High-voltage injuries often produce severe burns and blunt trauma.Patients are at high risk of myoglobunuria and renal failure .Burns are often ultimately much worse than they initially appear in the ED.

 

The long-term prognosis depends on the severity of the initial injury and the development and severity of subsequent complications. Due to the complexity of the problem, patients are at risk of developing multisystem organ failure that carries high mortality and even higher morbidity. Recent advances in ICU care in the areas of resuscitation, cardiopulmonary and nutritional support of the patients and new medical and surgical interventions such as immunologic therapy, early wound excision, and skin substitutes have significantly improved the outcome. Retrospectively, Waymack and Rutan histriographically relative data on the recent advances in burn care in 1994. [60] However, considering that electrical injuries are almost always preventable, it seems that the best way to manage electrical injuries can still be summarized by the old saying ,” One ounce of prevention is worth a pound of treatment .” Public education, regarding electrical safety, careful inspection, and safe use according to specifications of electric equipment at home and at work are the best means of eliminating mortality and minimizing the morbidity of electrical injuries.

 

The victims of electrical injuries and lightning’s will need to be followed up not only for the physical complications of the impact of electrical injuries, but also for its accompanying Post traumatic stress disorders.

 

The Forensic and Medical jurispedence aspects of electrical injuries:

 

Litigation concerning occupational injuries is to be expected, but law suits against practitioners in such cases are rare. Detailed documentation of the presence of electrical burns, including diagrams, can be extremely helpful. Obtain photographic records with proper consent if possible.

 

Conclusive Remarks.

 

The impact of subtle lightning related events during rains in causing perturbations of consciousness, multiple organ dysfunction syndromes, cataracts, tympanic membrane rupture needs to be examined rigorously. It would be worthwhile to examine the impact of seasonality in inducing perturbations of the cardiac rhythm (i.e are cardiac rhythm disorders, lenticular opacities and markers of end vital organ dysfunctions more common and frequent  in the rainy season compared to the dry seasons .

 

The case for the position of the elderly and certain metabolic vital organ dysfunctions associated cardiopulmonary difficulties and neuropathies in this scale may warrant an enhanced anti-electric shock measures for this subsets as a group.

 

Categorically, patients with electric shock injuries will need longer term more diligent follow ups.These themes are prophylactically, diagnostically and therapeutically unexplored aspects.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

DEFINITIVE REFERENCES.

 

[1]-Bernstein T: Electrical injury: Electrical engineers perspective and an historical review. Ann NY Acad Sci 1994; 720:1-10.

 

[2]-Taussig HB:”Death “from lightning and the possibility of living again .Ann Intern Med 1968; 68:1345-1353.

 

[3]-Cooper MA: Emergent care of lightning and electrical injuries.Semin Neurol 1995; 15:268-278.

 

[4]-Hunt JL, Mason AD, Jr, Masterson TS et al.The pathophysiology of acute electric injuries.J Trauma 1976; 16:335-340.

 

[5]-Stresser EG et al.Lightning injuries.J Trauma 1977;17:315.

 

[6]-Koumbouris AC.Electrical injuries .Crit Care Med.2002 Nov 30(11 suppl):S424-30.

 

[7]-Spies C, Trohman RG.Narrative Review.Electrocution and life-threatening electrical injuries.Ann Intern Med, 2006 Oct 3,145(7):531-7.

 

[8]-Casini V .Worker deaths by Electrocution .A summary of NIOSH Surveillance and Investigative Findings. Department of Health and Human Services (NIOSH) May 1998. pp 5-8 .Publication No.98-131.

 

[9]-Rai J, Jeschke MG, Barrow RE, Herndon DN.Electrical injuries: a 30-year review.J Trauma .1999 May.46 (5):933-6.

 

[10]-Thomson GH, Juckes AW, Farmer AW: Electrical burns to the mouth in children, Plant Reconstr Surg 35:466, 1965.

 

[11]-Baker MD, Chiavello C.Household electrical injuries in children. Epidemiology and identification of avoidable hazards .Am J Di Child 1989; 43:59-63.

 

[12]-Casani V: Overview of electrical hazards. In: Worker Deaths by Electrocution: A summary of NIOSH Surveillance and Investigative Findings. Washington, DC, Department of Health and Human Services (NIOSH); May 1998, pp 5-8 .Publication No.98-131.

 

[13]–Kisner S, Casini V: Epidemiology of electrocution Fatalities: 1998.In”Worker Deaths by Electrocution: A summary of NIOSH Surveillance and Investigative Findings .Washington D.C ,Department of Health and Human Services (NIOSH) ,May 1998,pp 9-19 ,Publication No. 98-131.

 

[14]-Hiser S: Electrocution Associated with Consumer Products: Report Safety Commission, Division of Hazard Analysis, and Directorate For Epidemiology, July 2001, 1998.

 

[15]-Lopez RE, Holle RL.Demographics of lightning casualties.Semin Neurol 1995; 15-286-295.

 

[16]-Artz CP: Changing concepts of electrical injury. Am J Surg 1974; 128:600.

 

[17]-Lievens JB: Electrical accidents .Community Health (Bristol) 2:88, 1970.

 

[18]-Gibbs W, Eisenberg M, Damon SK.Dangers of defibrillation: Injuries to emergency personnel during patient resuscitation .Am J Emerg Med 1990; 8:101-104.

 

[19]-Vogel U, Wanner T, Bultmann B.Extensive pectoral muscle necrosis after defibrillation .Nonthermal skeletal muscle damage caused by electroporation.Intensive Care Med 1998’24:743-745.

 

[20]-Gilbert TB, Shaffer M, Matthews M.Electrical shock by dislodged spark gap in bipolar electrosurgical device.Anesth Analg 1991; 73:355-357.

 

[21]-Kim SG, Furman S, Matos JA, et al: Automatic implantable cardioverter defibrillator: Inadvertent discharges during permanent pacemaker magnet tests. Pacing Clin Electrophysiol 1987; 10:579-582.

 

[22]-Rabban J,Adler J,Rosen C,Blair J,Sheridan R.Electrical injury from subway third rails: serious injuries associated with immediate voltage contact.Burns.1997 Sep.23(6) :515-8.

 

[23] -Ghezzi KT: Lightning injuries: A unique treatment challenge.Postgrad Med 1989; 85:197-208.

 

[24]-Fahmy SF, Brinsden MD, Smith J, et al.Lightning the multisystem group injuries. J Trauma 1999; 46:937-849.

 

[25]-Fish R: Electric Shock: Part 1.Physics and Pathophysiology .J Emerg Med 1993; 11:309-312.

 

[26]- Onyekwelu E. Drowning and Near Drowning. Internet Journal of Health 2008; 8(2)

 

[27]- Onyekwelu S.Critical Study of Near Drowning cases seen in a Paediatric Emergency Department in West Africa. Internet Journal of Health 2008; 8(2)

 

[28]-Lee RC.Injury by electrical forces: Pathophysiology, manifestations, and therapy.Curr Probl Surg.1997 Sep .34(9):677-764.

 

[29]-Jain S, Bandi V.Electrical and lightning injuries .Crit Care Clin 1999; 15:319-331.

 

[30]-Price T, Cooper MA.Electrical and Lightning injuries. Marx J,Hockberger R,Walls R,Rosens Emergency Medicine ,5th ed,Mosby 2002.Vol 3:2010-2020.

 

[31]-Robinson DW&Others: Electrical burns: A review and analysis of 33 cases. Surgery.1965; 57: 358.

 

[32]-Hunt JL, Sato RM, Baxter CR: Acute electric burns; current diagnostic and therapeutic approaches to management.Arch Surg 1980; 115:434-438.

 

[33]-Burke JF, Quinby WC, Bondoc C: Patterns of high tension electrical injury in children and adolescents and their management. Am J Surg 1977; 133:492-497.

 

[34]-Cooper MA.Electrical and lightning injuries.Emerg Med Clin North Am 1984; 2:489-501.

 

[35]-Cooper MA: Lightning injuries: Prognostic signs for death .Ann Emerg Med 1980; 9:134-138.

 

[36]-Resnik BI, Welti CV: Lichtenberg figures. Am J Forensic Med Pathol 1996; 17:99-102.

 

[37]-Baker MD, Chiavello C.Household electrical injuries in children. Epidemiology and identification of avoidable hazards .Am J Di Child 1989; 43:59-63.

 

[38]-Carlton SC: Cardiac problems associated with electrical injury.

Cardiol Clin 1995’13:263-266.

 

[39]-Ku CS, Lin SL, Hsu TL, et al. Myocardial damage associated with electrical injury .Am Heart J 1989;118:621-624.

 

[40]-Hammond J, Ward GC.Myocardial damage and electrical injuries: Significance of early elevation of CPK-MB isoenzymes, South Med J 1986; 79:414-416.

 

[41]-Housinger TA,Green L,Shahangian S, et al.A prospective study of myocardial damage in electrical injuries.J Trauma 1985;25:122-124.

 

[42]-Chandra NC, Siu CO, Munster AM: Clinical predictors of myocardial damage after high voltage electrical injury.Crit Care Med 1990’18:293-297.

 

[43]-Hunt JL.McManus WF, Haney WP, et al.Vasular lesions in acute electrical injuries .J Trauma 1974; 14:461-473.

 

[44]-Ten Duis HJ, Klasen HJ.Keraunoparalysis, a specific lightning injury .Burns 1985; 12:54-57

 

[45]-Varghese G, Mani MM, and Redford JB: Spinal cord injuries following electrical accidents. Paraplegia 1986; 24:159-166.

 

[46]-Cherington M: Central nervous system complications of lightning and electrical injuries.Semin Neurol 1995; 15:233-240.

 

[47]-Kleinschmidt-DeMasters BK.Neuropathology of lightning strike injuries.Semin Neurol 1995; 15:323-328.

 

[48]-Wilbourn AJ: Peripheral disorders in electrical and lightning injuries.Semin Neurol 15:241-255.

 

[49]-Solem L, et all .The natural history of electrical injury. J Trauma; 1977; 17:487.

 

[50]-Baxter CR: Present concepts in the management of major electrical injury.Surg Clin North Am 50:1401.1970.

 

[51]-Apfelberg DB, et al: Pathophysiology and treatment of lightning injury.

J Trauma 1974;14:453.

 

[52]-Sances A JR et al.Electrical injuries .Surg Gynecol Obstet 1979; 149:97.

 

[53]-Rouse RG, Dimick AR.The treatment of electrical injury compared to burn injury.A review of pathophysiology and comparison of patient management protocols. J Trauma 1978; 18:43.

 

[54]-Bailey B,Forget S,Gaudreault P.Prevalence of potential risk factors in victims of electrocution .Forensic Sci Int 2001;123:58-62.

 

[55]-Cunningham PA: The need for cardiac monitoring after electrical injury .Med J Aust 1991; 154:765-766.

 

[56]-Fish RM: Electrical Injury: Part III: Cardiac monitoring indications, the pregnant patient, and lightning.J Emerg Med 2000; 18:181-187.

 

[57]- Bailey B, Gaudreault P, Thivierge R: Experience with guidelines for cardiac monitoring after electrical injury in children. Am J Emerg Med 2000; 18:671-675.

 

[58]-Mc Bride JW: Is serum creatinine kinase-MB in electrically injured patients predictive of myocardial injury? JAMA 1986; 255:764-767.

 

[59]-McCrady-Kahn VL, Kahn AM. Lightning injuries. West J 1981; 134:215.

 

[60]-Waymack JP, Rutan RL: Recent advances in burn care. Ann NY Acad Sci 1994; 720:230-238.

 

 

 

 

 

Suggested key words: high- and low-voltage electrical injury; lightening; multiple system organ failure.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Classics and Revisits in Scientific Gastroenterology

Volume 1 Issue 1 January 2014

A precise Anatomical Data for the Gastrointestinal System

The Masticatory apparatus

The Deglutinory apparatus

The Digestive system

The Absorptive system

The Large Bowel

The Gastrointestinal system adnexea

 

 

 

Contents

 

 

Background and Purpose

Classics and Revisits in Scientific Gastroenterology is a balanced portal of continuing medical education information derived as an associated official syndication publication from the Academic Transactions of The Medical Scientific Reference Office and Library Complex and the Pan-Group Medical Associates continuing medical education programme section of The Cottage Collegiate Clinics. It is a unique contribution to medical specialty practice development nationally, regionally and globally with the intent that it could provide a fairly well effective reciprocal communicative pathway for continuing medical education development.

The text delivers the basic details of good basic and clinical medical practice clearly and concisely in the context of ongoing health trends, although the current directions in health care developments were highlighted, an unpretentious emphasis to quite often unavailable advanced technological innovations and models were weighted reasonably.

Throughout the series efforts were made to balance the emphasis on the scientific fundamentals and the basic principles of management and prevention with research directions and recent advances in investigations and interventions.

In order to make it more reader friendly and handy, efforts were made to minimize the volume while at the same time not compromising the contents. On this basis suggestions were made that it should be a regular and frequent topical medical periodical in basic scientific and clinical gastroenterology.

It is hoped that these compendia will be found most rewarding by medical practitioners, health professionals undergoing their undergraduate and postgraduate medical trainings and other health conscious professionals and individuals. 

This is a legendary textbook of scientific gastroenterology in a journal format.

 

 

EDITORIAL

Honorary Academic Chief Editor; Dr. Emmanuel G.U. Onyekwelu

In this maiden edition of the Classics and Revisits in Scientific Gastroenterology, a preamble of the format of the publications is suggested. However, it would be worthwhile to hasten to say that it is likely that there may be considerable alterations in these serial publications with regards to its academics structure, print layout, constituent parts, focus and certainly contents and periodicity.

Therefore, suggestions and opinions on contents inclusions and exclusions are welcome.

In principle, publications would normally follow positive peer and editorial reviews, revisions and decisions. The other associated syndicated serial medical scientific publications and channels of classics and revisits in scientific medicine are alphabetically itemized according to the relevant medical specialties for easy reference as follows:

  1. Classics and Revisits in Scientific Cardiology.
  2. Classics and Revisits in Scientific Dermatology.
  3. Classics and Revisits in Scientific Endocrinology.
  4. Classics and Revisits in Scientific Haematology.
  5. Classics and Revisits in Scientific Hepatology.
  6. Classics and Revisits in Scientific History of Medicine.
  7. Classics and Revisits in Scientific infectious Diseases.
  8. Classics and Revisits in Scientific Neonatology.
  9. Classics and Revisits in Scientific Nephrology.
  10. Classics and Revisits in Scientific Neurology.
  11. Classics and Revisits in Scientific Oncology.

The other associated syndicated serial medical scientific publications and channels of classics and revisits in scientific medicine continued.

  1. Classics and Revisits in Scientific Preventive Medicine.
  2. Classics and Revisits in Scientific Pulmonology.
  3. Classics and Revisits in Scientific Psychiatry.
  4. Classics and Revisits in Scientific Radiology.
  5. Classics and Revisits in Scientific Rheumatology.
  6. Classics and Revisits in Scientific Interdisciplinary Medical Themes.

 

 

 

Honorary Academic Chief Editor:

Dr. Emmanuel .G.U.Onyekwelu

Co – ordinates for correspondence:

Continuing Medical Scientific Education Programme

The Cottage Collegiate Clinics/MSROLC

P.O. BOX 2696 Serrekunda Post Office The Gambia West Africa

Tel: +220 9908295 / 7357804

E-mail: euonyekwelu@hotmail.com / cottageclinicdoctorsoffice@yahoo.com

Website: cottageclinicdoctorsoffice.wordpress.com

 

 

The Mouth

The mouth extends from the lips to the palatoglossal arches or the anterior pillar of the fauces. It is surrounded by the lips and the cheeks.

The vestibule of the mouth is the slit like space between the lip and the cheek and the teeth or the gingivae.

The space inside the teeth and the gums is the mouth cavity proper.

The floor of the oral cavity is largely occupied by the tongue, and the roof of the hard palate. 

The mucous membrane of the mouth

The mucous membrane of the mouth is adherent to the deeper structures on the lip and the cheek to the facial muscles, on the tongue to the muscles thereof, on the hard palate to the periosteum of the bone. It is therefore seldom caught between the teeth when chewing.

The mucous membrane of the mouth is covered by a stratified squamous epithelium.

It is impulsated by the trigeminal nerve, superiorly by its maxillary branches and inferiorly by its mandibular branch.

The vestibule of the mouth

This is a closed space, with the lips and the cheeks lying in contact with the teeth slightly parted, it communicates almost completely with the teeth, and the oral cavity proper.

On the mucous membrane of the cheek, the parotid duct opens on low papillae, opposite the second upper molar tooth.

A Close bye are the tiny openings of the ducts of the molar glands which are four to five mucous glands lying in the outer surface of the buccinator muscle near the parotid duct, their ducts usually pierces the muscle to get to the mucous membrane of the vestibule of the oral cavity.

In the lower lips, more often than not there are numerous, mucous glands the buccal and the labial mucous glands scattered in the vestibule, which are usually visible and palpable. However the orifices of their ducts are too minute to be visualized.

Unlike the parotid gland that drains, into the vestibule, the sub-mandibular and the sublingual salivary secretions drain into the mouth cavity proper.

The nerve supply of the vestibule of the mouth

The mucous membrane of the mouth eternal to the teeth or the vestibules is supplied by the buccal branch of the mandibular nerve, with contributions from the mandibular nerve through the mental branch of the inferior alveolar nerve, in addition to the infraorbital branch of the maxillary nerve, which supplies the red margin of the lower and the upper lips respectively.

 

 

The Gingivae

This is the scientific nomenclature for the gums. It is a semi lunar cavity surrounding the mouth cavity proper. They are firmly attached to the alveolar margins of the jaws and they have the teeth embedded in them.

They consist of a dense but highly vascularised fibrous tissue with an overlying epithelial lining which is of the minimally keratinized stratified squamous epithelial forms.

The change from the alveolar mucosa which is continuous with that of the cheek to gingival mucosa takes place at about 3 to 4 centimetres or so from the vestibular reflection, this is usually indicated by an abrupt change of color from a pure red alveolar to a more opaque and lutreless gingival matter.

The superior aspect of the gum supplied by the superior alveolar, the greater palatine and the naso-palatine nerves which are branches of the maxillary nerves, whereas the inferior alveolar, the buccal and the lingual nerves, from the mandibular nerve innervates the inferior aspects of the gums.

 

 

The Teeth

The major part of the tooth consists of the dentine, which is a hard a vascular calcified tissue penetrated by minute canals, the dentinal tubules.

The part of the mouth that projects into the mouth is the crown which is covered by the enamel, the hardest of all calcified animal tissues, and the part held in the jaw is the root which is covered with cementum, a calcified bone like tissue.

The term overt crown corresponds to the clinically obvious crown, seen on oral examination or during speech or laughter, where as the covert crown corresponds to the part of the crown which is anatomically embedded into the gums or the gingivae, its inferior part is obscured in the gingival sulcus by the free margin of the gum.

The neck of the tooth corresponds to the junction between the enamel and the cementum and this corresponds to the neck of the tooth, or literally the waist of the tooth. This union between the enamel and the cementum is important in securing a protective tightjunction between the enamel and the cementum in such a manner that the more delicate dentine would not be exposed. Inside the dentine in the pulp cavity.

The pulp cavity usually communicates with the exterior via, the root canal and the apical foramen at the apex of the tooth. The pulp cavity is filled with the dental pulp in addition to nerves, blood vessels and Lymphatic’s, all of which gain access to the pulp through the apical foreman.

The pulp is covered with a single layer of tall columnar cells, the odontoblasts, lying in contact with the inner surface of the dentine.

Throughout life, they retain consistent regenerative capacity for the production of the dentine within the pulp cavity if the surface of the dentine is breached.

These odonoblasts usually offshoots some fine cytoplasmic processes that occupy the dentinal tubules.

A structural modification of the alveolar periosteum continues as the periodontal ligament which anchors the cementum to the bony, walls of the tooth socket.

It is made up of collagen fibres which pass obliquely from the alveolar bone towards the apex of the tooth.

The substantive human dentition

The permanent dentition of the human, adult if taken from the midline has two incisors; one canine, two premolars and three molars, which is an approximate of eight teeth in each half of the jaw that corresponds to thirty-two  teeth in all the jaw.

The shape of the tooth is adapted to it its function. The incisors are for biting and cutting whereas the canines are for holding, especially useful for the carnivores, where they are well developed, and the premolars and the molars are for chewing. The features of the roots and the crowns of the teeth assist to distinguish them from one another.

The incisors crowns are chisel shaped, and are well adapted or biting, normally the most superior aspects of the incisors do not meet edge to edge on closure of the mouth or during mastication, but rather the slide over one another like pair of scissors blade.

The canine crowns are conical or pyramidal and they are much more bessolated compared to the incisor teeth.

The premolars have two cusps hence their incisors name the bicuspids teeth, whereas the superior molars have four compared to the inferior molars which have five cusps on their crown.

The blood supply of the teeth

The pulps of the mandibular teeth is supplied the dental branches of the inferior alveolar artery which is a branch of the maxillary artery.

The mental branch of the inferior alveolar artery supplies the lips and the skin around the lower lips.

Accordingly, the pulps of the, posterior superior alveolar nerve is supplied by the branches of the posterior superior alveolar nerve, which are branches to the maxillary artery, the two to three dental branches supply the molar tooth of the mandible, which corresponds to the lower tooth, where as the gingival branches supply the gingiva and the vestibules in addition to the molar tooth. Whereas the buccal branch of the superior alveolar supplies the buccinators.

The venous drainage of to the teeth follows the corresponding arteries

The lymphatic drainage of the teeth

Most of the teeth except the incisors, the four lower- ones are drained by about six to eight groups of submandibular lymph nodes which lie on the surface of the submandibular gland they also drain the lateral parts of the lower lips, and all the upper lips.

The four lower incisors are drained by the small submental group of lymph nodes, these group of lymph nodes also drain a triangle of tissue in the floor of the mouth related to these group of lymph nodes, in addition to the gums and the lips, and the tip of the tongue, these groups of submental lymphnodes eventually drain into the submandibular group of lymph nodes.

The supply of the teeth

The pulp is the part of the teeth which is really innervated technically speaking, although the fine filaments of the nerve could, occasionally, enter some dentinal tubules, however most of the dentine and all of the enamel and the cementum has no innervation.

In the superior jaw, the molars are supplied by the dental branches of the superior alveola nerve.

The canine and the incisor are supplied by the anterior superior alveolar nerves although the two premolars and the anterior buccal root of the first molar are supplied by the middle superior alveolar nerves.

lnferiorly, the three molars are supplied by the three and the premolars are supplied by the principal trunk of the inferior alveolar nerve, whose terminal branches are also supplied the canine and both incisors outstretching to supply the opposite central incisors.

The tentative dentition

The deciduous dentition or the milk tooth is the temporary tooth, which begins to erupt at about the sixth month, and is completely erupted at the end ofthe second year of life.

On the average this consists of about five teeth in each half of the jaw, which comes up to twenty in all.

There are two incisors, one canine, and two molars. They are usually temporary teeth which are usually shed as the substantive permanent dentition erupts at about the age of six years.

The time table of teeth eruption

The lower central incisor erupts at about the sixth, month, the upper central incisor erupts at about the seventh month, the upper lateral incisors erupts at about the eight months, the lower lateral incisors erupts at about the age of nine months, the first molars erupts at about the age of twelve months, the canines erupts at about the age of eighteen months, whereas the second molar erupts at about the age of two years.

Odontogenesis, the development and the eruption of the teeth

The teeth are ectodermal in origin developing developing from the primitive mouth or stomadeum at about the fifth week of life. The teeth are usually derived from the epithelial lining of the mouth. However this buds of epithelium forms only the enamel, which now evokes a reaction in the surrounding mesoderm which now differentiates to produce the dentine and the cementum.

An in growth of ectoderm occurs over the site of the future gum or gingivae, a curved sheet of ectoderm grows into the adjacent mesoderm, slanting medially corresponds to the primary dental lamina, from the outer surface of the dental lamina a series of buds grow into the mesoderm, more inwards, than outwards from the depths of the primary dental lamina, one bud corresponds to each primary dentition.

These, epithelial buds are the tooth germs, which develops further until the primary dental lamina starts to regress and get absorbed.

The tooth germs grow away from the mouth surface into a structure with a large superior aspect connected, inferiorly through a stalk to the primary dental lamina.

This structure corresponds to the enamel organ, its surface epithelium becomes columnar, the cells lining its concavity are the ameloblasts, which will produce the enamel matter the epithelium of the outstanding part of the enamel organ differentiates with its cells developing large branching processes with a layer of fluid interspersed between them.

This lump of structure is known as the stellate reticulum

As soon as the ameloblasts starts to secrete enamel, the stellate reticulum regresses and undergoes physiological atrophy. The enamel organ is now stimulated to elongate as epithelial folds, the mesoderm of the enamel organ then differentiates to form a dental papillae, the odontoblasts are then produced from its surface cells.

The odontoblasts produce dentine

The ameloblasts are ectodermal, lining the concavity of the enamel organ and the odontoblasts are mesodermal covering the convexity of the dental papillae that lie in contact.

The dentines are usually formed before the enamel because. Though chronologically superior, the ameloblasts were less active than the odontoblasts.

The pulp cavity is formed as a result of persistence of the mesoderm of the dental papillae encircled by the dentine that it has secreted. The mesoderm outside the dentine ofthe root forms the cementum in a developmental process not quite different from membranous ossification.

As the cementum is formed, the epithelial sheath around the dentine is absorbed and the cementum, becomes firmly bound to the dentine of the root of the teeth.

As the cementum and the, dentine, accrues, their primitive secreting cells are moved further away from the amelodental junction.The crown of the teeth is fully formed before eruption, but the root is only partly formed.

The tooth lies within a fibrous tissue condensation within the bone of the jaw known as the dental follicle, which communicates with the surface of the bone through a tiny orifice, which is embedded by a fibrous tissue known as the gubernaculum.

The tooth erupts by a combination of elongation of the root and absorption of the overlying bone. The elongating root is ensheated in an outgrowth of alveolar bone. A precise anatomical data of the gastrointestinal system.

The time table for the eruption of the substantive teeth

The eruption of a lower tooth usually precedes its opposite member in the superior jaw. The first tooth to appear permanently is the first permanent molar at the age of six years. It usually erupts before any deciduous tooth has been shed. This is then followed by the other set of teeth at the following sequence:

  1. The central group of incisors at about six to seven years.
  2. Then the lateral incisors at the of age of about eight years.
  3. This is then followed by the first premolars at the age nine years.
  4. Then the second premolars at the age of ten years.
  5. The canines at the age of eleven years.
  6. Then the second permanent molars at the age of twelve years.
  7. And then the third permanent molars at the age of eighteen years.

 

 

The cavity of the mouth

The hard palate

The palate is the roof of the mouth, between the teeth, it is a bony, this aspect is called the hard palate, and behind the hard palate is the soft palate which projects downwards. 

The hard palate is made up of the palatal, processes of the maxillae and the horizontal plate of the palatine bone.

Anterior to the hard palate in the midline is the incisive fossas, into which opens the incisive foramens, which are the ends of the incisive canal.

The greater palatine foramen is located between the palatine bone and the -maxilla at the same level with the last molar tooth where as the lesser palatine foramina are located posterior to it and perforates the palatine bone itself.

The mucous membrane covering the hard palate is strongly attached to the palates periosteum, so much so that the two could not be striped apart from the bone, but instead a combined layer of mucoperiosteum is formed.

Also the periosteum is firmly attached to the bone by multiple fibrous tissues peg like fibres which get embedded on the skull surface.

These firm fixations of the mucoperiosteum on the bone aimed to facilitate mastication of food substances, because the moving bolus of food will not displace the covering mucous membrane.

This role is further enhanced by the presence of numerous masticatoiy ridges on the palatine aspect of the periosteum anteriorly.

These features are not functionally necessary posteriorly, where the horizontal plate of the palatine bone has a substance of glandular tissue interspersed between the periosteum and the mucous membrane.

The bony surfaces are uniform and fine with no transverse masticatory ridges and the anchoring multiple fibrous pegs are sparse.

The blood supply to the hard palate

The blood supply to the hard palate is through the greater palatine artery.

This is a branch of the posterior superior alveolar artery.

The greater palatine arteiy emerges through the greater palatine foramen.

The artery then courses around the palate lateral to the nerve.

It enters the incisive foramen, from where it passes on to the nose. 

The venous drainage of the hard palate

The veins accompany the arteries back to the pterygoid plexus.

Occasionally, some other veins pass back to the supratonsillar region to join the pharyngeal plexus.

The lymphatic drainage of the hard palate

The Lymphatic’s from the hard palate drain to the retropharyngeal and the deep cervical group of lymph nodes.

The nerve supply of the hard palate

The nerve supply of the hard palate is from the greater palatine nerve which is a branch of the maxillary nerve through the pterygopalatine ganglion as far fonivard as the incisive foramen.

The anterior part of the palate, behind the incisor teeth is usually supplied by the two nasopalatine nerves from the same source.

The developmental anatomy of the hard palate

From the maxillary processes usually two in number on both sides of the face, bounding the stomodeum, are noted two wings like processes growing inwards.

These processes are known as the palatal processes.

They grow so much so that they overlap superiorly over the dorsum of the tongue.

They subsequently fuse together with the nasal septum.

These processes latter undergo hyalinization and cartilagenisation by the deposition of hyaline cartilage.

These processes take place at about the sixth week of life.

The cartilaginous hard palate will then undergo intramembranous ossification to form the membranous hard palate bones.

 

 

The Tongue

The tongue is essentially a mass of skeletal muscle, mostly covered by mucous membranes and with a midline fibrous septum separating the two muscular halves.

The main parts are the dorsum, the tip, the inferior surface and the root.

The dorsum of the tongue could be divided into two parts.

The anterior two thirds and the posterior one third or the pharyngeal part also known as the base of the tongue backwards which forms the anterior wall of ` the oral part of the pharynx.

The tip is the most anterior and the most mobile part of the tongue and it into the inferior surface.

The dorsum of the tongue faces in two directions, the anterior two thirds or the oral part anchors upwards. Whereas the posterior third or the pharyngeal part which corresponds with the base of the tongue anchors backwards.

The posterior third of the tongue forms the anterior wall of the pharynx. 

The mucous membrane of the oral and the pharyngeal parts of the tongue are   quite distinct developmentally, embryologically, structurally, functionally and histologically.

Also their nervous impulsations, their lymphatic drainage and their arterial blood supplies remarkably differs.

In addition their venous drainage systems are quite distinct as will be discussed further.

The Lingual Myology

The mycological aspects of the tongue are quite an interesting topic to discuss. Basically, there are four extrinsic muscles, and also there are four intrinsic muscles.

The intrinsic muscles are wholly within the lingual stroma, or the tongue substance. Whereas there are no forms of bony attachments for these group of muscles.

However for the extrinsic group of muscles, there are bony attachments which anchor the muscles to the body’s cranio-cervical skeleton.

These bony attachments act as supporting frame works.

There are four muscles in each group, in each half of the tongue, with a midline fibrous septum dividing the organ into two symmetrical halves.

The intrinsic groups of the lingual muscles are named on the basis of their layouts.

They are

  1. The superior longitudinal lingual muscles.
  2. The inferior longitudinal lingual muscles.
  3. The vertical lingual muscles.
  4. The transverse lingual muscles.

The Muscles of the tongue continued

For the four extrinsic muscles of the tongue, their nomenclature is derived from the bony structures, to which they are attached.

The four components of the lingual mycology consists of

  1. The genioglossus

The genioglossus muscle or more descriptively, the geniohyoglossus muscle. This muscle takes its origins from the superior mental spine or the genial tubercle from where its fibers fan-out to become wider. Finally, having its insertion at the mucous membranes of the tongue. Occasionally, some of its fibres are also inserted further down on the hyoid bone.

  1. The Hypoglossus muscle

The hypoglossus muscle takes its origin from the body of the hyoid bone. Also another significant form of origin is taken from a considerable part of the body of the greater horn of the hyoid bone, lateral to the geniohyoid muscles. It usually extends superiorly, as a slender square shaped flap of muscle layer. Having its superior border interdigitating at right angles with the fibres of styloglossus.

With its anterior and posterior borders redundant, its attachments are to the sides of the tongue. This muscle has as its superior relations from upwards to downwards, the lingual nerve, the submandibular ducts and the hypoglossal nerve.

While inferiorly from top to bottom its relationships are the glossopharyngeal nerves, the stylo-hyoid ligament and the lingual blood vessels.

  1. The Palatoglossus Muscle

The palatoglossus muscle descends from the undersurface of the hard palatine aponeurosis to the sides of the tongue It forms with its opposite complimentary counterpart, the palatoglossal arch.

The palatoglossal arch is the anatomically distinct point for the distinction between the mouth and the pharynx topographically.

  1. The styloglossus muscle

This muscle arises from the front of the lower part of the styloid processes and superior component of the stylohyoid ligament.

It then courses fonrvard beneath the superior constrictor group of muscles to be inserted into the side of the tongue.

It interdigitates with the superior fibres of the hyoglossus.

The glossopharngeal nerve has a relationship with this muscle at its inferior border but on a slightly deeper level.

 

The blood Supply to the Tongue

The lingual artery an offshoot of the external carotid artery is the major blood supply to the tongue.

It courses along superiorly to the greater horn of hyoid bone deep to the hypoglossus muscle.

At this point it gives off dorsal lingual branches.

The dorsal lingual branches then course into the posterior part of the tongue musculature.

The original stem of the lingual artery then continues to supply the tip of the tongue.

Also whilst in this relation to the hyoglossus muscle it gives off a branch to the sublingual gland and to the structures in the floor ofthe mouth.

The lymphatic drainage of the tongue

The tip of the tongue drains to the submental group of lymph nodes. The remaining parts of the anterior part of the tongue drains to the submandibular group of lymph nodes

Thereafter, after draining into the submandibular group of lymphnodes, they drain to the superior and the inferior aspect of the deep cervical group of lymph nodes. It is to these groups of deep cen/ical lymph nodes that the posterior aspects of the tongue drain into.

The lymphatic drainage of the tongue is of a distinctive comparative interest.

Compared to its blood supply, the lymphatic drainage of the tongue has the unique ability for an adaptation in the pattern of its flow.

The pattern of lymphatic flow, which although unilateral in physiological states may become crisscrossed in obstructive or obliterative pathological conditions involving the lymphatics unilaterally.

Whereas its blood supply remains unilateral and uncollaterised in obstructive or obliterative pathological states.

The embryologic developmental aspects of the tongue

The myological aspects of the lingual gland or the tongue are direct derivates of the sub-occipital myotomes, superior to the first cervical segment.

Whereas the epithelia, mucoid or the glandular aspects and the mucous membranous components of the tongue are derivatives of the lining of the floor of the pharynx.

These epithelial and muco-membranous components of the tongue develop from the first, third and the fourth branchial arches respectively.

This triple embryologic concept of origin explains the three distinct sensory nerve supplies to the tongue.

The presulcal mucosa develops from the midline tuberculum impar and the pair of the lateral lingual swellings of the first arch.

Whereas the postsulcal aspect is a derived from the midline hypobranchial eminence of the third arch.

These aspects of the two parts of the tongue are accompanied by their corresponding embryologically plausible innervations.

These are the lingual and the chorda tympani branch of the facial nerve and the glossopharngeal cranial nerves respectively.

Also there is a minutiae contribution from the recurrent laryngeal branches of the vagus nerve, which normally innervates the fourth branchial arch.

The tissue of the second arch is not apparently represented in the lingual stroma.

However its innervation, the facial nerve is represented through its chorda tympani branch.

The tissue contributions of the second branchial arch to lingual stromal development is not represented.

This unrepresentation is because; it was outstripped by the more rapid growth of the tissue contribution of the third branchial arch.

This much more forward rapid differential growth of the third branchial arc continues, until it unites with the tissue contributions of the first branchial arches.

The sub occipital myotomes migrate into membranous mucosal folds that move along with its nerve supply the hypoglossal nerves.

This migratory course could be traced to around posteriorly to the internal and external carotid arteries, but on the internal aspect of the internal aspect of the internal jugular vein.

It is from these sub-occipital myotomes that the extrinsic and the intrinsic muscles of the tongue develop from.

Of further embryologic interest is the confluence point between the tuberculum impar and the hypobranchial eminence.

This lingual structural confluence is the» point from where the thyroid diverticulum grows down from.

This point corresponds to the foramen ceacum.

The fine structure of the tongue, the microanatomy of the tongue and its Functional histology

The substance of the tongue is composed mostly of some striated muscles lying mostly in longitudinal, transverse and vertical planes.

The mucous membrane of the tongue has both structural and functional

distinction on the basis of their location and developmental origin.

The mucous membrane of the inferior surface of the tongue and the floor of the mouths are thin and smooth.

They have some structural resemblance with that of the cheek internally.

Beneath the tip of the tongue the lingual mucous membrane projects as a midline flap of tissue.

It is orientated vertically from the under surface of the tongue superiorly to the floor of the mouth inferiorly.

The Lingual frenelum

Anteriorly, at the tip of the tongue, this structural modification of the lingual mucous membrane is referred to as the frenelum of the tongue.

The tongue is a composite gland, given the different developmental origins of its components.

Given this composite origin, the mucous membranes of the oral, the anterior two thirds or the presulcal section is quite distinct from that of the posterior section or pharyngeal section. `

This distinction is both morphological and functional.

Functionally the oral part of the tongue has adaptive masticatory function.

Unlike the pharyngeal aspect of the tongue which is deglutinatorily adapted.

This is because the oral mucous membrane is a bit rustic, which is an inherent functional structural modification for gripping the food particles during masticatory processes.

Whereas the smooth pharyngeal part is adapted histo-physiologically for deglutination given its smooth surfaces.

The oral two-thirds of the tongue or the presulcal section of the tongue

This part of the tongue is covered by an array of mucous membrane into which the underlying muscles are inserted

Its covering surfaces epithelium is of the keratinizing stratified squamous form.

The most superficial aspect of the tongue is covered by a stratified squamous epithelium.

This stratified squamous epithelium is modified into papillae in the oral cavity.

The lingual keratinizing squamous epithelium is invested with an increased rugosity due to the presence of abundant papillae on its surface.

Although there are several forms of papillae, on academic basis.

However for clinical practical purposes especially in man the predominant lingual papillae include the:

  1. The Filliform papillae

This form of papillae is horse-shoe shaped structures whose most superior aspects are flat.

They are covered with a keratinized stratified surface epithelium.

This keratinized layer, imparts the appearance and colour to the tongue.

When there is abundant keratin for example in starvation states, accompanied by limited mastication, the keratinized layer will be fur like.

In the post cibal state following prolonged masticatory act, the keratinized layer would have been abraded, leading to the tongue being a healthy pink.

In prolonged ill health with respiratory difficulties, the lack of masticatory activities will lead to an increased accumulation of keratin.

The associated prolonged mouth breathing will make the colour of the keratin to change from white to brown.

  1. The fungiform papillae:

The fungiform papillae are tiny minutiae tadpole shaped structures.

They are light reddish in colour.

 They are localized predominantly around the edges of the tongue.

Unlike the filiform papillae, the fungiform papillae bear a few taste buds.

These forms of papillae are usually tad pole shaped structures.

They may not be very easily seen in occasional cross-sections of the tongue.

This is because of their relative paucity, in addition to lack keratin.

  1. The Vallate papillae:

The Vallate papillae areusually observed as minutiae papillae with a crevice.

These crevices are epithelial structures surrounding each vallate papillae.

They are usually about six vallate papillae in each row.

Vallate papillae are V-shaped columns of tissues with the termination of the or its apex corresponding with the point of the sulcus terminalis.

  1. The sulcus terminalis

The sulcus terminalis is an ill defined anatomical land mark for the confluence of the oral and the pharyngeal parts of the tongue. ·

Creviceal epithelial lining taste buds

The presence of numerous taste buds in the creviceal epithelial linings is one of the peculiarities of these papillae.

Their main function could be the perception of taste sensation.

It is presumed that during mastication, prior to deglutination, that food juices and saliva get to the taste buds.

In this way, it is understood that bitter, sweet, salty, sour and tasteless flavours are transmitted to them for reception, perception and relay.

Postulations that they play an active role in mastication will be unlikely.

This is because these set of papillae are located too far away from the oral part of the tongue.

The Vallate papillae is a tube like structure encircled by taste buds containing slits or crevices.

The duct of the serous glands opens into the base of the slit.

It offers a cleansing process, by washing the slits clean.

The slits are then prepared for the next coming taste sensation.

This could explain the importance of having an abundant mucous and serous gland, in the posterior aspect of the tongue, compared to the anterior aspect. 

These taste buds usually lie in spherules. 

Their entire surface is almost covered with stratified epithelium. 

Almost always they exist in the walls of the Vallate papillae where they could be observed as thin and delicate, pin shaped pallid corpuscles, a significant proportion of these corpuscles could get modified and form taste receptor cells. 

A typical taste bud will open to the superficial surface through a tiny gustatory pore.

The posterior third of the tongue or the post sulcal part of the tongue.

Anatomically, the topographic land mark, for the posterior third of the tongue is between the sulcus terminalis and the epiglottis.

The Foramen Caecum

This point between the sulcus terminalis and the epiglottis has an important. embryologic note.

It is the origin of the foramen ceacum

The foramen ceacum is the point with a diverticulum which marks the origin of the thyroglossal duct or the thyroid diverticulum.

One of the histological hall marks of the post sulcal part of the tongue or the posterior third of the tongue is the absence of the papillae behind the sulcus terminalis.

The smooth mucous membranes have a nodular appearance from the underlying clumps of mucous and serous glands.

In addition there are aggregations of lymphoid follicles which constitute the lingual tonsillar component of the Waldeyers ring.

This posterior part of the tongue is like the soft palate seen superiorly.

It has a smooth slippery surface coated with enough mucous.

The mucous is derived from its multiple glandular constituents.

This is another model of a situation where structure is well suited to function.

This structural modification is well suited for deglutinatory purposes.

Further posteriorly midway between the tongue and its posterior anatomical limit the epiglottis, a midline flap of mucous membrane, is elevated between This midline flap of mucous membrane is known as the median-glosso-epiglottic fold Also from the epiglottic end of the glosso-epiglottic folds, another mucosal fold, which is structurally in consonance with the former extends sideways and laterally to the inner walls of the oro-pharynx. This fold is known as the lateral glosso-epiglottic-pharyngeal folds.

Here there to there is a triangular outline formed.

These three folds are notable, because within then are two round shallow grooves.

These shallow grooves are posterior and inferior to the posterior end of the tongue.

These two round shallow pits are known as the two valleculae.

The posterior part of the tongue is further denoted by the presence of an aggregation of lymphoid follicles.

ln conglomeration these aggregated lymphoid follicles are known as the lingual tonsils.

These specialized lymphoid organs are almost unknown in the anterior part of a the tongue.

A good overview of the inferior surface of the tongue could be achieved by raising the tip of the tongue to the roof.

On inspection a thin midline septum could be appreciated.

This midline septum is composed of mucous membranes.

It is better denoted as the lingual frenelum.

The lingual frenelum unites the inferior aspect of the tongue to the floor of the mouth.

Lateral to the frenelum is the deep lingual vein, the lingual artery and the lingual nerve with the vein most conspicuous, Further laterally is another fold of mucosa, known as the fimbriated fold.

The histological and the microanatomical aspects of the tongue continued.

The anterior pillars of the fauces

The anterior pillars of the fauces are also known as the palatoglossal arches.

These are ridges of mucous membranes raised by the palatoglossus muscles.

They extend from the inferior aspect of the anterior part of the soft palate to terminate at the lateral aspects of the tongues vallate papillae

On termination, they form an anatomical entity known as the oropharyngeal isthmus.

Anterior to the isthmus is the mouth, posterior to it is the pharynx

Semantically, the isthmic point would be expected to be more narrow than the two terminal ends, the mouth and the oropharynx.

This oropharyngeal isthmus could be made more diminutive superior-inferiorly by the depression of the palate and elevation of the dorsum of the tongue.

In this way, these two structures the palate and the dorsum of the tongue will be well apposed together.

The inferior superior aperture could be made progressively diminutive by the opposition of these two structures until it could be completely closed.

Also its anterior posterior diameter could be significantly narrowed by the contraction of the palatoglossus muscles

This contractile effect of the palatoglossus muscle could continue until it is quite minute in its anterior-posterior dimension.

The Lingual glands,The anterior Lingual glands

The whole lot of the lingual glands appears to concentrated under the tip of and the sides of the tongue

However, its presence appears to be over represented in the former more than the latter.

They are more or less large amounts of both serous and mucous secreting salivary glands

However, overall, there appears be more of mucous glands thanlserous glands.

These glands are usually located on each side of the midline.

They usually have about twelve ducts overall.

They open into the undersurface of the tongue.

The motor nerve supply of the Tongue

The intrinsic muscles of the tongue are all supplied by the hypoglossal nerve.

Whereas all the extrinsic muscles of the tongue with the exception of the palatoglossus are supplied by the hypoglossal nerve.

Technically speaking, the palatoglossal muscle being a palatal muscle is supplied the pharyngeal plexus.

The motor cell bodies of the hypoglossal nerve are in the hypoglossal nucleus.

The hypoglossal nucleus is located just below the hypoglossal trigone in the medullary part of the floor of the fourth ventricle.

Its vagal parasympathetic fibres are secretomotor fibres.

They are relayed to the anterior lingual glands in the inferior aspect of the tongue, through the chorda tympani branch of the facial nerve from the superior salivary nucleus and the submandibular ganglion.

The relay course of the prioprioceptive fibres to the tongue is not yet quiet lucidly comprehended. However, it is likely that its course from the tongue is through the lingual nerve.

It is agreed that vasoconstrictor fibres of the sympathetic group are relayed along with the lingual blood vessels from the external carotid plexus.

These vasoconstrictor fibres have their cell bodies in the superior cervical gangHon.

The sensory nerve supply of the anterior two third of the tongue.

The sensory supply to the mucous membranous aspect of the oral part of the tongue or its presulcal and anterior two thirds is likely to be through the lingual nerves.

The lingual nerve a branch of the mandibular component of the trigeminal nerve.

It modulates the pain and temperature sensations, However, the taste sensations will be regulated through the chorda tympani constituent.

The chorda, tympani branch has its cell bodies in the geniculate ganglion of the facial nerve nucleus.

The nerve supply of the posterior one-third or pharyngeal or the post sulcal aspect of the tongue.

The glossopharyngeal nerve supplies the posterior one-third of the tongue.

In addition, the outstanding presulcal area including the vallate papillae is supplied by the glossopharyngeal nerve

Unlike the position in the anterior two thirds of the tongue or the presulcal area.

The glossopharngeal nerve is responsible for supplying, the pain, temperature, in addition to the taste sensations to the posterior aspects of the tongue.

Also the outstanding aspects of the anterior two thirds or the presulcal aspects of the tongue which are not impulsated by the chorda tympani nerves and the lingual nerves are subsen/ed by the glossopharyngeal nenxes.

The Nervous Impulsations ofthe Posterior third ofthe tongue.

The fibres of the glossopharngeal nerves have their cell bodies in the glossopharngeal ganglia in the jugular foramen.

They also have impulsations similar to that of the chorda tympani branch of the facial nerve, by relaying impulsations necessary for secretomotor function.

These are parasympathetic secretomotor fibres to the mucosal glands.

These are relayed within the lingual ganglia in the mucosa.

Interestingly a small circumscribed area of the lingual mucosa forming then anterior wall of the vellucullae is supplied by the nerve of the vellucullae mucosa, which is the internal laryngeal nerve.

The nerve ofthe vellucullae mucosa is the internal laryngeal nerve.

The internal laryngeal nerve has its cell bodies in the inferior vagal ganglia anterior to the sulcusterminalis.

The mucous membrane of the vallate papillae is supplied by the glossopharngeal nerve.

The glossopharyngeal nerve is a nerve of the pharyngeal or the post sulcal aspect of the tongue.

There is no neuronal land mark to depict the point of confluence between the IinguaI and the glossopharngeal components of the impulsations of the tongue.

However, some structural histological distinction between the presulcal or post sulcal aspects on the dorsal aspect of the tongue is presumed.

The embryologic basis for the composite nervous impulsation of the tongue.

Embryologically, the lingual mucosa develops from the pharyngeal arches.

The fonrvard migration of the post sulcal aspect of the tongue is a well accepted embryologic phenomenon.

The mucosal components of the pharyngeal arches will therefore drag along their innervations with them

Given that the glossopharyngeal nerve is the nervous impulsation for the third pharyngeal arch, this pattern of impulsation is embryologically plausible.

The soft palate

The soft palate anchors inferiorly from the posterior aspect of the hard palate, as a mobile fold.

Its lateral walls are intertwined with the outer wall of the pharynx.

This intertwining between the soft palate and the pharynx closes off its nasopharyngeal aspect during deglutination

Much of the bulk of the soft palate is due to the large volume of mucous membrane and serous glands within the bulk of the soft palate.

The palate is made up of five pairs of muscles

  1. The tensor palati muscle
  2. Thelevator palati muscle
  3. The palatoglossus muscle which is part of the tongue musculature
  4. The palatopharyngeous, which is also part of the pharynx
  5. The muscle of the uvula also consists of an aponeurosis that is acted upon these groups of muscles, in order that its shape and position could be altered.

The tensor veli palatini

This is a slender delicate, muscle with multiples origins outside the palate:

  1. From the scaphoid fossa at the superior end of the medial pterygoid plate.
  2. From the lateral side of the cartilaginous part of the, auditory tube.
  3. From the side of the sphenoid bone.

From these origins the muscle then condenses into a flat tendon.

The condensed muscular tendon is then inserted into the base of the pterygoid hamulus.

This tendon then courses above the fibrous arch of the origin of the buccinators.

It eclipses around the hamulus and thence gets into the pharynx.

The tendon now broadens out into a wide aponeurosis.

The anterior border of this aponeurosis is attached to the crest of the palatine bone.

The medial border of the aponeurosis blends with that of the contralateral side.

Its posterior-anterior border has interdgitatiing fibres with the wall of the pharynx anteriorly.

It hangs freely posteriorly, forming the edge of the soft palate with the dependent uvula in the midline.

Each tensor veli palatini pair of triangles masses at the base of the hamulus.

One of the triangles is orientated in the triangular plane, group of muscles,

The other is made up of aponeurosis which is curved towards the oral cavity.

Function

The main function of the tensor veli palatine is the sustenance of the palatine aponeurosis, with regards to the shape and the structural outline of palatine aponeurosis.

This is achieved by keeping the tensor veli palatini under a tensed state

ln this way, it could be lowered or elevated, without having its shape altered, just like its name tensor suggests. ‘

The levator veli palatine

The Ievator veli palatini is a rod shaped bundle of muscle.

It arises from the quadrate area at the tip of the petrous bone, anterior to the carotid canal.

In addition, some of its fibres also arise from the proximate side of the cartilaginous part of the auditory tube medially.

It forms a rounded belly that is inserted into the nasal surface of the palatine bone aponeurosis between the two heads of the palatopharngeous muscle

The origin and the insertions of the two Ievator veli palatini muscles are in such a way that the two Ievator veli palatini muscles on each side on passing down to the palate are directed forwards and medially.

In this way, the two slings of muscle bundles form a triangular shaped structure with the apex converging at the pharynx.

Action and function

The contraction of Ievator veli palatini usually pulls the palate upwards and backwards without alterations in its shape.

In this way the nasopharynx is shut off from the oropharynx during the process of deglutination.

During its contraction, the soft palate will be brought in contact with the posterior wall of the pharynx at the Passavants ridge

The Passavants ridge is on the same level with the anterior arch of the first cervical vertebrae.

Also the contraction of the Ievator veli palatini also opens the cartilagenous tube and equalizes air pressure between the middle ear and the nose.

The palatoglossus muscle

This muscle arises both from a bony origin forming the anterior head and an aponeurotic origin forming the posterior head.

The bony head is usually rigid, whereas the apneurotic origin is mobile.

The anterior head or the bony end takes its origin from the posterior border of the hard palate which corresponds with the horizontal plate of the palatine bone.

With the palatine aponeurosis lying just on its oral surface, it extends anteriorly until its attachment to the crest of the palatine bone.

The posterior head or the aponeurotic end takes its origin further posteriorly on the superior surface of the palatineaponeurosis.

The two heads then interdigitate inferiorly on the outer edges of the aponeurosis to form one muscle bundle.

This muscle bundle courses inferiorly below the mucous membrane and the submucosa of the lateral wall of the pharynx posteriorly and laterally to the palatine tonsils.

The superior part of the muscle raises the palato-pharyngeus fold of mucous membrane that constitutes the posterior fold pillar of the fauces.

Its inferior fibres are inserted principally into the posterior border of the thyroid Iamina and its horns.

AIthough some of the anterior fibres of this muscle gets attached directly as insertion fibres into the superior border of the thyroid lamina.

Some of the anterior fibres are inserted or merge with the surrounding fibres of the inferior constrictor muscles of the pharynx.

The action and function of the palatopharyngeous

The anterior head of the palatopharyngeus muscle which is attached to the palatine bone keeps the relaxed soft palate in a curved position in its oral part.

On contraction it causes the elevation of the larynx and the pharynx.

Whereas the posterior head of palatopharyngeus muscle which is attached to the aponeurosis of the palate only depresses as a whole the tensed palate on contraction of its fibres.

 

 

The palatopharyngeal sphincter

The humans with extranarial larynx, which are more inferiorly placed, some of the fibres of the palatopharyngeus muscles have been pulled down.

Some of the inferior fibres of the palatopharyngeal muscles form the palatopharyngeus sphincters at the level of the hard palate and the anterior arch of the first cervical vertebrae.

It is possible that some fibres comprising the arch have contributions from the in superior constrictors in addition.

The function and the actions of the palatopharyngeus sphincter

The palatopharngeal sphincter is less of an anatomical sphincter than a physiological sphincter.

It assists the general anterior movement of the posterior wall during deglutination when it has the soft palate approximated to its posterior wall.

On closer observations these anatomical fibres could be seen forming a ridge previously known as the Passavants ridge.

It is most conspicuously appreciated when the soft palate is elevated.

Its palatal component is more active in shutting off the nasopharynx from the oropharynx during deglutination.

The fine structure of the soft palate and the histological aspect of the soft palate.

The oral part ofthe soft palate, in addition to the posterior part of its nasal surface around the area of the Passavants ridge is lined by the stratified aquamous epithelium.

The oral epithelial region contains a few taste buds.

The pseudostratified epithelium in its posterior-nasal aspect continues interiorly as the respiratory type of epithelium and membrane.

The soft palate is very closely related to the uvula.

The uvula

This is an aggregation of mucous glandular tissue, with some inconsequential putative muscle fibres attached to the posterior nasal spine.

In confluence with the soft palate, the uvula is occupied by a huge tissue of mucous and serous secretory glands inferior to the palatine aponeurosis.

The ductular systems of the uvula opens into orificial structures scattered over the oral epithelium.

There are islands of scattered lymphatic follicles in the oral mucosal aspects of the soft palate.

The arterial blood supply to the soft palate

The soft palate receives its arterial blood supply from an anastomotic network of blood vessels.

The branches from this vascular network anastomose unrestricted on the stroma of the soft palate.

The contributions to this anastomotic network comes from the lesser palatine arteries.

The embryologic development of the soft palate.

The soft palate is formed entirely from the palatine shelves between the sixth and the seventh week of life.

The fusion of these processes gives rise to the definitive secondary palate.

The primary palate forms partly the anterior component of the hard palate.

The primary palate is the primary palatal component of the intermaxillary segment.

It has a labial and upper jaw components.

The secondary palate is derived entirely from the out growths of the maxillary processes, which give rise to the palatine shelves.

The Oropharynx

The oropharynx extends from the inferior border of the soft palate to the superior border the epiglottis.

Anteriorly, the pharyngeal boundary is the space between the soft palate and the epiglottis.

Posteriorly, the pharyngeal boundary is covered by a dynamic wall which is the posterior aspect of the tongue.

The wall of the pharynx is formed by the superior, middle and the inferior constrictor muscles.

The lateral walls of the oropharynx are formed by projecting ridges.

These projecting ridges are formed by the palatopharyngeal and the palatoglossus arches respectively.

These arches were previously known as the pillars of the fauces.

These ridges are usually formed by the underlying corresponding muscles which were described previously.

Structurally, the pharynx is adapted such that posteriorly it could be closed off against a swallowed bolus of food, but it is otherwise open anteriorly for Ou respiration to continue.

The superior constrictor muscles of the pharynx.

The superior constrictor muscles originates from several sites such as:

  1. From the medial pteiygoid plate
  2. The hamulus
  3. The mandibular bone

From these origins, the superior constrictor muscles coils around the pharynx whilst decussating with its other half from the contralateral side.

Following a slight superior course they then meet superiorly at the midline pharyngeal raphe.

The superior end of this pharyngeal raphe forms a noticeable fibrous band.

It is into this noticeable fibrous band at the superior end of the pharyngeal raphe that the most superior fibres of the superior constrictor muscles are jnsened.

The pharyngeal raphe is thereafter attached to the pharyngeal tubercle.

The most inferior of its fibres extend as far down as the level of the vocal folds.

Thereafter it lies within the middle constrictor muscles.

The hiatus between the superior constrictor muscles and the base of the skull is filled by the pharyngobasilar fascia.

The cartilagenous part of the auditory ltube, will then pass through the outstanding spaces left out after a partial filling of the hiatus by the pharyngobasilar fascia.

The Middle Constrictors Muscles of the Pharynx.

The middle constrictor muscles of the pharynx arises from the intersection between the styloid ligament and the greater horn of the hyoid bone.

The styloid ligament itself is attached to the lesser horn of the hyoid bone

The hyoglossus muscles superficial to it.

The fibres of the middle constrictors fan out extensively encircling the pharynx to terminate in the pharyngeal raphe.

It courses superiorly to enclose the superior constrictor muscles, with its uppermost fibres its lowermost fibres descend as far down as the level of the vocal cords.

They course further inferiorly until they are enclosed within the inferior constrictors muscles.

There is a gap between the middle and the inferior constrictors muscles.

This gap is covered by the thyrohyoid membrane.

The thyrohyoid membrane is the membrane that joins the hyoid bone to the thyroid cartilage.

The thyrohyoid membrane is pierced by the internal laryngeal nerves and the superior laryngeal blood vessels.

The Inferior Constrictor Muscles

There are two groups of muscles that make up the inferior constrictor muscles

These muscles are named according to the point of origin of the muscles.

These muscles are:

  1. The Thyropharyngeus Muscle
  2. The Cricopharyngeus Muscle

The thyropharyngeus muscle component of the inferior constrictors arise from the oblique line of the thyroid cartilage.

It is in continuity inferiorly with a fibrous band that encircles the crico-thyroid muscles.

It encircles the superior and the inferior constrictors as its fibres course around to the mid-line raphe.

The fibres fan out extensively and then course superiorly to the pharyngeal raphe.

Occasionally the fibres of the inferior constrictors courses up to the pharyngeal tubercle.

The most inferior fibres are horizontally placed side by side terminal to the second part of the muscle the cricopharyngeus muscle.

The deglutinatory apparatus continued

The Cricopharyngeus MuscIe. 

The crico-pharyngeus muscle is generally a more robust muscle compared to the other constrictor muscles.

It is rotund and more muscular than the other constrictor muscles.

Its origin is at the one side of the cricoid arch to the other side of the cricoid arch encircling the pharynx.

It does not get united to a raphe.

Being continuous inferiorly with the superior aspect of the oesophageal fibres through the circular muscle coat of the oesophagus.

It acts as a sphincter at the junction of the oesophagus inferiorly and the lower part of the pharynx.

It is under some degree of tension except during swallowing momentarily, when it opens to allow the bolus of food to move forward down progressively.

In its lower border are located the recurrent laryngeal nerve and the inferior laryngeal blood vessels.

At the midpoint of the junction between the thyropharyngeous and the cricopharyngeus, is a potentially relatively weak area of the pharyngeal wall.

Occasionally, it is thought that this point undergoes some dehiscence and is known as Killians dehiscence.

From this a pouch of mucosa could protrude forming the otherwise pharyngeal diverticulum.

With progressive enlargement, this pouch hangs down the side of the oesophagus.

The deglutinatory apparatus continued.

The other muscles of the pharynx.

The outer surface of the pharynx is enclosed by the very slender epymysium of the pharyngeal constrictors.

This structure courses superficial to the pterygomandibular raphe, intertwining with the epymysium of the superficial buccinator muscles.

This epimysial modification was occasionally referred to as the buccopharyngeal fascia.

This fascia was thought to be structurally and functionally inconsequential.

The other relevant muscles ofthe pharynx include:

  1. The palatopharyngeus muscle

These groups of muscle fibres have its origin at the palatal structures.

It courses down on the inner side of the superior constrictorsmuscles.

  1. The Stylopharnygeus muscle

This Muscle arises from the deep aspect of the styloid process quite superiorly.

It then proceeds inferiorly to the lower border of the, superior constrictor muscles

The muscle then courses inferiorly into the middle constrictors muscles.

It by passes the internal carotid anteriorly, before its insertion in to the posterior border of the thyroid lamina and the side wall of the pharynx

It lies in close proximity to the palato-pharyngeus muscles.

In its posterior aspect is the glossopharyngeal nerve surrounding it mediolaterally supplying it with nervous impulsations.

  1. The Salpingopharyngeus Muscle

This is a thin delicate muscle which arises from the lower part of the cartilage of the auditory tube.

lt courses inferiorly to intermingle with the palatopharyngeus muscle.

The blood supply to the Pharynx

The pharynx has multiple blood supplies from several branches such as the following.

  1. The ascending pharyngeal artery
  2. The Lingualartery
  3. The ascending palatine artery
  4. The tonsillar artery
  5. The greaterpalatine artery
  6. The artery of the Pterygoid canal
  7. The superior laryngeal artery
  8. The inferiorlaryngeal artery

Given its multiple derivatives and conduits, this miscellaneous blood supply is plausible.

The Venous return to the pharynx

The venous drainage of the larynx is mainly into the laryngeal venous plexus

This plexus lies at the middle constrictor level posteriorly

It eventually drains into the pterygoid venous plexus.

It could also drain directly into the internal jugular veins.

From its inferior part the venous blood could be drained to the inferior thyroid veins.

The Lymphatic drainage of the pharynx

The lymph from the pharynx passes to the retropharyngeal group of lymph nodes through the upper and lower deep cervical lymph nodes.

The nerve supply of the pharynx

All the muscles of the pharynx are supplied nervous impulsations through the pharyngeal plexus

The only exception to this rule is the stylopharyngeus, which is supplied by the glossopharyngeal nerve.

Occasionally, the cricopharyngeal head of the inferior constrictors could be supplied by the recurrent laryngeal nerves.

Exceptionally it could be supplied solely from the external laryngeal nerves

However, interestingly, all the cell bodies of the nerves that supply the pharynx are in the nucleus ambiguous, no matter by what name that they arrive to the pharynx.

Most of the oropharynx receives its sensory impulsations from the glossopharyngeal nerves.

The vellucullae is impulsated by the internal laryngeal nerve.

The outstanding portion of the pharynx is impulsated by the recurrent laryngeal nerve.

The Pharyngeal Nervous Plexus.

This nervous plexus is formed by the confluence of:

  1. The glossopharyngeal nerves
  2. The pharyngeal branches of
  3. The vagus nerve
  4. The cervical sympathetic nerves which is constrictive.

The pharyngeal fibres of the vagus nerve carry some motor fibres from the Cranial part of the accessory nerve, in addition to Its own afferent motor fibres,

The pharyngeal plexus is localized on the postero-lateral walls of the pharynx usually over the middle constrictor muscles.

The Salivary Glands

The parotid gland

The parotid gland is one of the salivary glands.

It has an irregular outline.

It fills the gap between the mastoid process of the ramus of the mandible and the styloid process

This gland overlies the muscles attached to these underlying bones.

It is surrounded by a tough fibrous capsule called the parotid sheath

The parotid sheath is a modification from the covering layer of the deep cervical fascia.

Topographically, the parotid gland is composed of a superior and an inferior pole.

Its other anatomical disposition could be considered from three projections:

  1. A lateral projection
  2. An anterior projection
  3. A deeper medial portion

The superior surface of the parotid gland

The superior pole of the parotid gland is a small concave surface that adheres to the cartilage of the external auditory meatus; it lies in juxtaposition to the capsule of the temporomandibular joint.

The Inferior Pole of the Parotid gland

This aspect of the parotid gland is rounded, lying below and behind or posterior to the angle of the mandible and the sternocleidomastoid muscles which is embossed by them.

lt usually covers, the posterior belly of the jugular digastric muscle.

The anterior surface of the parotid gland

This aspect of the parotid gland is most appreciated academically, if it considered in its exact anatomical, disposition which is antero-medial.

It is a horse shoe shaped glandular structure, which encircles the ramus of the mandible.

Its outer surface is bounded by the masseters muscles externally.

The medial pterygoid muscle bounds it internally and more distally.

The stylomandibular ligament separates, its surface from the medial pterygoid muscle and from the posterior part of the submandibular gland.

The lateral edge of this anterior surface meets the lateral surface of the gland over the masseter to form the convex anterior border.

Deep to the anterior surface emerges the parotid duct and the five groups of nerves, forming the branches of the facial nerve

The five groups of nerves forming the branches ofthe facial nerve fan out over the face.

Deeper to these structures, the terminal branches of the external carotid artery which are the superficial temporal and the maxillary artery leave the gland.

The deep aspect of the parotid gland

Like the anterior aspect of the gland with an anterior medial disposition, the deep aspect of the gland will be appreciated most, if it is described in its exact anatomical disposition, which corresponds to the posterior medial position.

This aspect of the parotid gland is more or less inconsistent in its disposition.

Its structure is more intricate and complex compared to, the other parts of the parotid gland.

It has a very close relationship to the mastoid process and its attached muscles, such as the sternocleidomastoid muscles, laterally, and the posterior belly of the juguIo – digastric muscles medially, it lies against the styloid process with its three attached muscles, the stylohyoid, the styloglossus and the stylopharyngeous muscles.

Furthermore the two ligaments, the stylohyoid, the stylomandibular ligaments, and the external carotid muscle penetrates this aspect of the parotid gland.

Exceptionally, the parotid gland could be so huge that this aspect of the gland approaches the superior constrictor muscles.

The parotid gland is separated from the internal jugular vein and the much deeper internal carotid artery by

  1. The styloid process
  2. The temporal zygomatic branches of the facial nerve
  3. The cervico-facial branches the facial nerve

With the gland lying between the styloid and the mastoid processes

The facial nerve, the retromandibular nerve and the external carotid artery are buried in the stroma of the parotid gland.

Interestingly after a further outward course the facial nerve emerges latter to become the most superficial of all the structures embedded in the stroma of the parotid gland

The major branches of the facial nerve will then emerge from the posterior aspect of the parotid gland.

Infact it is the facial nerve that actually divides the gland into its superficial and deep parts. Following very closely the, branches of the facial nerve from the most superficial surface inwards is the retromandibular vein which is a tributary and continuation of the external jugular vein superiorly.

Then further inwards lies the external carotid artery with its two terminal branches lying profoundly in the extreme.

The particular group of lymph nodes could extend anywhere from the superhcial surface

Exceptionally, it extends to the capsule and the stroma of the parotid glands more often than not.

The parotid gland could be penetrated by the filaments of the aunculo-temporal nerves which provide secretor—motor fibres to the gland.

The parotid duct or the Stensons duct.

The duct measures anywhere between 4cm to 5cm

It courses fonlvard across the masseters muscles in its course to pierce–the buccinators muscles.

It is disposed palpably between the auricular notch and the mid-region of the philtrum.

Its palpation is most achievable and appreciable on palpation over a clenched masseter. 

The duct opens in the mucous membrane of the cheek opposite the second T molar tooth.

It pierces the buccinators further back and runs forward beneath the mucous membranes to its outlet at the mucous membranes of the cheek.

It then opens opposite the second upper molar tooth.

A valvular flap of mucous membrane is produced which prevents inflation of the glands with increased intraoral pressure during whistle blowing.

The accessory parotid gland

More often than not an accessory parotid gland will lie on the masseter muscle between the duct and the zygomatic process or arch.

Several ducts open from it into the parotid duct.

The parotid gland and the parotid duct lie on the tendinous part of surface of the masseter muscle.

The arterial blood supply of the parotid gland.

The parotid glands are supplied by branches the external carotid artery.

The venous return and drainage of the parotid gland.

The venous drainage of the parotid gland is to the retromandibular vein

The lymphatic drainage of the parotid gland

The lymphatic drainage of the parotid glands is to the group of lymph nodes      within the parotid sheath and thence with the external carotid artery to the nodes of the upper deep cervical nodes group.

The nerve supply to the parotid glands

The secretor motor fibres arise from the cell bodies in the otic ganglion. They reach the glands by extrapolations along the auriculo-temporal nerves. The pre-ganglionic fibres arise from cell bodies in the inferior salivary nucleus in the medulla.

They travel by the way of the plexus of the glossopharyngeal nerves, its tympanic branch, the tympanic plexus and the lesser petrosal nerves in its otic ganglion.

Sympathetic vasoconstrictor fibres reach the gland from the superior cervical ganglion by way of the plexus of the external carotid and the middle meningeal arteries.

The gland itself receives sensory fibres from the auriculo temporal nerves.

The parotid fascia receives its sensory innervations from the greater auricular nerve through the second cranial nerves

The parotid gland

The microanatomy of the parotid gland and a comparative histology the Parotid gland.

The histological feature of the parotid gland is appreciated if it is studied in comparison with the other salivary glands, such as the submandibular and the sublingual salivary glands.

Compared to the submandibular gland, the parotid gland has more and almost principally serous acini which secretes the digestive enzymes ptyalin.

It has a numerous ducts and ductular system. In addition to its abundant fatty tissues, whereas the submandibular gland has a composite of a mucous and serous secreting acini.

The fatty tissues in between the acini are less pronounced.

There is a paucity of ducts or ductular system on relative terms.

In this type of salivary glands of the submandibular variety are found a composite of serous acini centrally with a mucous acini and serous demilunes.

Whereas as for the sublingual salivary glands, the stroma is made up of almost exclusively, of the mucous secreting glandular cells of the acinus type

The mucous secreting glandular cells of the acinus type with very few ducts or ductules.

The developmental anatomy of the parotid glands continued.

The parotid gland is an offshoot of the duct, which commences initially as a groove in the cheek, which is an ectodermal structure.

It gets converted into a tunnel, the terminal end of this tunnel or duct then proliferates to form the parotid gland.

The applied anatomy of the parotid gland

Mumps a viral, infection of the parotid gland, a severe pain is usually felt in the region of the parotid gland because the gland swells within a tight fibrous envelope.

The submandibular gland

The submandibular gland consists of a large superficial part and smaller deeper part.

The superficial part occupies the space between the mandibles, the mylohyoid muscle and the investing layer of deep cervical fascia.

It has three surfaces:

  1. The lateral surface
  2. The inferior surface
  3. The medial surface

The lateral surface of the submandibular gland.

The lateral surface of the submandibular gland lies against the submandibular fossa of the mandible.

It overlaps the anterior aspect of the medial pterygoid insertion.

It is bounded posteriorly by the facial artery which goes under the mandible to get to the face at the front of the masseters muscle

The inferior border of the submandibular gland

The inferior border of the submandibular gland is covered by skin pIatysma  and the investing fascia, the cervical branch of the facial nerve and also the marginal mandibular branches of the facial nerve occasionally.

The submandibular lymph nodes lie not only in contact with the surface of the gland, but also deeper within it stroma.

 

The Medial Surface of the Submandibular Gland

The medial surface of the gland lies against mylohyoid and its blood vessels

Posteriorly, it overlaps the hyoglossus, with the lingual nerve above it and the submandibular ganglion and the hypoglossal nerve and the deep lingual vein.

The Deep Aspect of the Submandibular gland.

The deep part of the submandibular gland extends forwards and courses for a variable distance between the mylohyoid and the hyoglossus with the lingual nerve superiorly placed.

The submandibular duct and the hypoglossal nerves form the inferior aspect of the deep part of the submandibular gland.

The submandibular duct or Wharton’s duct.

The duct measures about 5cm, long, just like the parotid duct. It emerges from the superficial aspect of the submandibular gland close to the posterior border of the mylohyoid.

It courses between the mylohyoid and the hyoglossus and then between the sublingual gland and the geniohyoid, to open into the floor of the mouth beside the frenelum.

 

The blood supply of the submandibular gland

The submandibular gland is supplied from the facial artery.

The venous drainage of the submandibular gland.

The venous drainage of the submandibular gland is into the facial veins.

The lymphatic drainage of the submandibular gland.

The glands lymphatic drain to the submandibular group of lymph nodes.

 

The nerve supply to the submandibular gland

The submandibular glands secretor-motor fibres have their cell bodies in the is submandibular ganglion

The preganglionic fibres pass from cell bodies in the superior salivary nucleus in the pons by way of the nenrus intermedius, chorda tympani and the lingual nerve.

Sympathetic vasoconstrictor fibres emanate from a plexus around the facial artery.

There appears to be a few small ganglionic masses on the surface of the gland itself.

 

The developmental anatomy of the submandibular gland

A groove in the floor of the mouth becomes metarmorphosied into a tunnel whose blind end proliferates to form secreting acini.

It is likely that the origin of the submandibular gland is ectodermal.

 

Applied anatomy of the submandibular gland

Occasionally some stones could form in the submandibular ducts.

This usually warrants removal which could be undertaken intraorally.

The duct does not need to be stitched after this procedure.

The surgical approach to the submandibular gland has to be undertaken tactfully.

The incision must be placed in such a way that the marginal mandibular branch of the facial nerve should be avoided.

The surgical removal of the submandibular gland would involve the ligation of the facial artery and the facial vein superiorly and ligation of the, lingual nerve and the submandibular, duct as it lies on the hyoglossus.

 

This gland is almond to round shaped gland.

It lies in the front of the anterior border of the hyoglossus, between the mylohyoid muscles inferiorly the tongue and the genioglossus anteriorly and medially, on its lateral side.

It lies on the sublingual fossa of the mandible.

Its upper surface raises the sublingual fold on the floor of the mouth anteriorly

The two parts of the salivary gland meets one another almost posteriorly

Each of the sublingual glands is separated from the submandibular gland by the stylomandibular ligament.

The gland is almost completely mucus secreting.

Of its 15 or so ducts, 50 percent open directly into the submandibular duct, whereas the remaining open separately on the sublingual fold.

The Masticatory Apparatus and the Muscles of Mastication.

There are four principal muscles involved in the masticatory process.

These muscles are

  1. The Masseters Muscles
  2. The Temporalis Muscles
  3. The Lateral Pterygoid Muscles
  4. The Medial Pterygoid Muscles

 

The Masseters Muscles

The bundles of the fibres of the Masseters muscles are usually divided into

  1. A superficial part
  2. An I ntermediate part
  3. A deep part

The group of muscles as a whole arises from the zygomatic arch.

The heads of the three different parts of the masseters muscles are fused together.

At their insertions at the mandibular ramus, the three sets of muscle fibres are fused together anteriorly, but they are separated posteriorly.

This separation of the insertion fibres of masseters posteriorly is to allow for the course and the exits of the masseteric artery and nerves.

This artery and its accompanying nerves usually course further through the deep and the intermediate aspects of the masseters muscles

The superficial temporal or the transverse facial artery runs between the superficial and the intermediate parts of the masseters muscle groups.

The Superficial Part of The Masseters Muscles.

This is usually the largest part and the most prominent_ part of masseters muscles.

lt usually arises from the anterior two thirds ofthe lower border of the zygomatic arch and proceeds anteriorly to the zygomatic process of the maxilla.

Thereafter, it is then inserted at the most inferior part of the mandible.

lt then courses superiorly to include the inferior part of the mandibular ramus.

From its origin, its fibres courses inferiorly at an acute angle.

It has the parotid duct of the main parotid gland and the accessory parotid gland as its immediate relationship, with these structures lying superficial to it.

Its superior aspect is made up of only aponeurotic fibres, whereas its inferior fibres are mainly fleshy.

The Intermediate Part of The Masseters Muscles.

These groups of muscle usually arise from the middle third of the mandibular arch and it courses vertically down wards to be inserted at the mandibular ramus.

At the insertion point of the mandibular ramus, its fibres fuses with those of the superficial and deep groups anteriorly, although they are separated posteriorly.

 

The Deep Part of the Masseters Muscles

This aspect of the muscle arises from the deep surface of the arch of the mandible.

It courses inferiorly downwards to be inserted at the mandibular ramus, fusing anteriorly with the muscles of the intermediate and the superficial groups but not posteriorly.

 

The Blood Supply to the Masseters Muscles

The superficial temporal or the transverse facial artery offers the blood supply to the Masseters muscles. ‘

 

Action and Function

The masseters muscles assist in the closure of the jaw, by elevating or drawing forwards, the angles of the mandible, which is a crucial step in the masticatory process.

This muscle arises from its origin at the region between the temporal fossa at the point between the inferior temporal line and the infratemporal crest.

As a group this muscle has a very variable course.

The most anterior fibres being vertical aligned, where as the most posterior fibres were horizontally aligned.

The temporalis muscle is a relatively huge triangular shaped muscle

Its fibres coursing inferiorly over the base of the zygomatic arch until it arrives towards the coronoid process of the mandible, where its fibres gets tendinous in anticipation of its insertion.

Its insertion commences at the deepest parts of the mandibular notch coursing the coronoid process to be inserted on the anterior side of the mandibular ramus.

Also very few fibres of the muscle only are inserted into the outer plate of the mandible.

There is also a significant amount of insertion of its fibres at the anterior border of the coronoid process inferiorly on the ascending mandibular ramus which continues until the attachment of the buccinator at the retromolar fossa.

 

The blood Supply to the Temporalis Muscle

The blood supply to the temporalis muscle is derived from the temporal branches of the maxillary artery, in addition to the mid temporal artery.

The nerve Supply to the temporalis muscle is by the two deep branches of the mandibular nerve in addition to the middle temporal nerve occasionally.

 

Action and function of the Temporalis muscle.

The superior and the anterior fibres of the temporalis muscle elevate the mandible thereby closing the jaw.

The posterior fibres of the temporalis muscle, sweeps over the root of the zygoma thereby retracting the mandible.

The retraction ofthe mandible is undertaken by the temporalis muscle alone.

The lateral pterygoid Muscle.

The lateral pterygoid muscle has two origins, a superior and an inferior origin.

The superior origin or head arises from the infra temporal surface of the skull.

The inferior head or origin is from the lateral surface of the lateral pterygoid plate.

The two heads lying side by side condenses into a short thick tendon to be inserted into the pterygoid fovea, beneath the medial end of the mandibular head.

The superior fibres of the muscle courses superiorly to the pterygoid fovea coursing back into articular disc of temporomandibular joint, and thence into the anterior portion of the capsule.

The nerve supply to the lateral pterygoid muscle

The lateral pterygoid muscle is supplied by a branch of from the anterior division of the mandibular nerve.

 

The action and the function of the lateral pterygoid muscle

On contraction, the muscle draws the condyle and the disc fonlvards from the mandibular fossa down the slope of the articular tubercle, thereby opening the mouth.

 

The Medial Pterygoid Muscle

Like the lateral pterygoid muscle the medial pterygoid muscle arises from the two heads:

  1. A superficial
  2. A deep head

The superficial head of the lateral pterygoid is the smaller of the two heads taking its origin from the tuberosity of the maxilla and the pyramidal process of the palatine bone

Thereafter, it passes over the inferior margin of the lateral pterygoid muscle

The deep head of the medial pterygoid muscle

This is considerably larger than the superficial head.

It takes its origin from the deep surface of the lateral pterygoid plate and the depths of the fossa between the two pterygoids.

The copious deep component of the medial pterygoid muscle then fans out inferiorly from the lateral pterygoid muscle nearly at right angles from their common origin at the lateral pterygoid plate.

Thereafter it fuses with its other superficial component at the inferior border of the lateral pterygoid muscle, by encircling the lower margin of the lateral pterygoid plate.

The huge band of muscle then courses inferiorly and posteriorly and then laterally until it gets to the mandibular angle.

After passing through the rough areas of the bone, as far as the groove for the mylohyoid blood vessels and nerves, the nerve coursing in a small groove between the muscle and the mandible.

 

The Nerve Supply of Medial Pterygoid Muscle

This medial pterygoid muscle is supplied by a branch from the main trunk of the mandibular nerve.

 

The Action and Function of The Medial Pterygoid Muscle

The main function of the medial pterygoid muscle is for mouth closure, therefore it plays a significant role in the mastication of food particles.

The contraction of this muscle exerts a tug on the angle of the mandible moving it upwards and medially to the opposite side, so that the mouth is closed.

It assists the molar tooth in the mastication of food particles.

In unison with the two lateral pterygoids. it assists in mandibular protrusion.

The deglutinatory apparatus.

 

 

The oesophagus

The oesophagus is about 25cm in length.

It is composed of an outer longitudinal and an inner circular muscle layers in the upper part.

These are both striated muscle and in the lower part both are smooth muscles.

The myenteric plexus lies between the two muscle layers, the mucosa is lined with a squamous epithelium. 

The lower esophageal sphincter pressure is maintained at a pressure of about 15 to 35 mmHg and the usual PH is between 5 to 7.

This muscular tube extends from the cricoid cartilage at about the level of the vertebra to the cardiac orifice at the level of the T10 vertebrae at the level of the left seventh costal cartilage.

The Cervical Portion of The oesophagus

The cervical portion of the oesophagus is a continuation of the cricopharyngeous muscle. 

At the level of the lower border of the cricoids cartilage at the C6 vertebrae level.

The inner circular muscle of the esophagus is an out pouch from the lower border of this muscle the cricopharyngeous muscle.

The outer longitudinal muscle layer is attached to the midline ridge of the lamina of the cricoid cartilage and the arytenoids cartilages fibres.

The fibres spiral down from the origin to the back of the oesophagus, along this line the longitudinal muscle layer is continuous.

The oesophagus lies anterior to the prevertebral fascia.

It is inclined more to the midline except at the point of its entrance to the thorax at the diaphragmatic hiatus it reverts to the midline, in front of the vertebrae.

 

The Thoracic Component of The Oesophagus.

This portion of the oesophagus passes mostly through the superior mediastinum and once more in lies more to the left of the midline behind and the left bronchus occasionally.

In this section, the oesophagus passes mostly through the superior mediastinum and once more inclines more to the left of the midline behind the left main bronchus occasionally.

The two structures are in such a close proximity to each other, that the left bronchus makes an indentation on the oesophagus which may occasionally be radiologically distinct.

In this section, the oesophagus is almost always in contact with the vertebral bodies and takes the anterior curvature of the vertebral column, occasionally a lot more than the vertebral column itself.

Passing in front of the descending aorta, in its thoracic component, at this point, it is also in close contact to the pericardium.

It then moves further inferiorly to penetrate the diaphragm 2.5 cm to the left of the midline, opposite the body the T10 vertebrae, which approximately corresponds to the anterior aspect of the seventh costal cartilage, 2cm to the side of the sternum.

Fibres from the right crus of the diaphragm, sweep around the oesophageal opening in a sling like loop.

In the superior mediastinum, the oesophagus is crossed over by the arch of the aorta, on its left side and the azygos vein on its right side.

Just below the bifurcation of the trachea, in the posterior mediastinum,it is bounded anteriorly by the left main bronchus and the right pulmonary artery.

The thoracic duct lies in the prevertebra fascia to the left of the oesophagus.

The pleura have very close proximity to the osophagus along its course at several points, especially at its right aspect, however at no point is the pleura attached to the oesophagus.

A pouch of pleura exists between the eosophagus and the aorta.

The points of oesophageal constrictions are anatomically four in location.

  1. The origin the oesophagus at the cricoid-pharyngeal sphincter is the most narrow and constricted part of the oesophagus, in an average individual this point will correspond to about 15 cm from the incisors.
  2. The second potential point of anatomical constrictions of the oesophagus is the point, where it is crossed over by the aortic arch which corresponds to approximately 22cm from the incisor teeth.
  3. The third point of possible oesophageal constriction is at the point where it is crisscrossed by the left main bronchus at about 27 cm from the incisor teeth.
  4. The fourth and the last point of oesophageal constriction is at the point where it opens into the diaphragm, at about 38cm from the incisor teeth.

Also for academic-clinico-pathological purposes, inferior to the constriction points, at the left main bronchus, in left atrial hypertrophy, the atrium could lead to indentations on the oesophagus.

The oesophagus is attached to the aorta by firm connective tissue in its anterior wall, this attachment is not all that 1oose allowing the movement of the oesophagus during respiratory excursions, it also allows the closure of the cardia.

A defect of this attachment will result in a herniation of the sliding type, allowing the oesophagus to move up.

 

 

The deglutinatory apparatus

The blood supply of the oesophagus

For the purposes of deriving its optimal blood supply, the oesophagus could be subdivided into three anatomical zones.

  1. The first third of the oesophagus in the superior mediastimum, from its origin at the cricoid cartilage to the level of the aortic arch in the superior mediastinum is supplied by the inferior thyroid arteries,
  2. The middle third portion of the oesophagus is supplied by the oesophageal branches of the aorta.
  3. The lower third is supplied by the oesophageal branches of the left gastric artery

The venous drainage of the oesophagus especially its most inferior portion is of immense clinical importance.

  1. The venous return from the most superior portion of the oesophagus goes to the brachiocephalic vein.
  2. The venous drainage to the middle portion goes to the azygos vein as highlighted above.
  3. The venous drainage of the lowest part of the oesophagus which drains to the oesophageal tributaries of the left gastric vein, which eventually empties into the portal veins.

Therefore there exists an anastomosis between portal and the systemic veins in the lower part of the oesophagus, at the about the level of the central diaphragmatic tendon, which corresponds to the T8 vertebra, well above the oesophageal hiatus in the diaphragm.

 

The lymphatic drainage of the oesophagus

Unlike the venous drainage of the oesophagus its lymphatic drainage follows its arterial blood supply.

  1. The superior portion of the lymphatic drainage of the oesophagus follows the inferior thyroid arteries which correspond to the deep cervical group of lymph nodes.
  2. The middle portion of the oesophagus drains into the tracheobronchial group of Iymphnodes, whereas the most inferior portion correspondingjo the oesophageal branches of the left gastric arteries drains into the pre-aortic nodes of the coeliac groups.

Also within the oesophageal walls, there are several lymphatic channels which enable lymphatic drainage to proceed for considerable length uninterrupted, so that drainage by a particular group of lymph nodes will be more of academic phenomena, than of practical importance.

The Nerve supply of the oesophagus

The nerve supply of the oesophagus superiorly is derived from the recurrent laryngeal nerves, and by the sympathetic fibres from the cell bodies in the middle cervical ganglion, running in the inferior thyroid arteries.

The lower part of the oesophagus receives fibres from the sympathetic trunks and the greater splanchnic nerves.

The sympathetic supply is from the vagus nerves which form anterior and posterior oesophageal plexuses in their respective surfaces.

These plexuses are mainly parasympathetic fibres.

They form mesh works over the lower part of the oesophagus encircling the oesophageal tube below the level of the left lung roots.

Over the last few inches of the oesophagus, their fibres become collected and form the anterior and posterior vagal trunks respectively.

Although both trunks share fibres in common the anterior trunk contains principally the left vagal fibres, whereas the posterior trunk contains principally, the right vagal fibres.

The motor supply is from the vagus, with cell bodies in the nucleus ambiguus for the upper striated muscle part.

The motor supply is from the dorsal motor nucleus with relays in the plexuses in its walls for the visceral portion.

The oesophageal mucosa and glands receive secreto—motor fibres from the vagal roots of the inferior salivary nucleus.

In addition there are vagal fibres forming afferent fibres, whose cell bodies are in inferior vagal ganglia.

Oesophageal pains like their cardiac counterpart could be referred to the neck, arm and the thoracic wall, since the pain fibres appear to run with both the vagal and the vasomotor sympathetic fibres supplies.

 

The histological features of the oesophagus

The outer longitudinal and the inner circular muscle layers of the oesophagus are usually skeletal in the upper third and smooth muscle in the lower two by thirds.

However this distinction is more of an academic thing since there is not any anatomical demarcation as such but there appears to be a considerable it overlaps between them.

This disposition in the muscular anatomy of the oesophagus is a good example of how the anatomy of a structure could be suited to its function because; the muscular upper third would facilitate a rapid muscular contraction which would enhance the rapid propulsion of food, material inferiorly in such a way that the food bolus could be well pushed further inferiorly, and the larynx may well open on time to allow respiration to be continued.

The mucous membrane is thick, with a thick muscularis mucosa which is thrown into longitudinal folds, the mucosa contains widely spread lymphoid follicles. 

The surface epithelium of the mucosa membrane is of the stratified squamous form.

In the upper and lower ends of the oesophagus are located predominantly mucous glands in the sub mucosa.

Although there are no anatomical thickening of the muscle at the lower end of the oesophagus.

The last six centimetres of the oesophagus acts physiological as a sphincter. 

Inordinate function of the sphincter could lead to gastro-oesophageal reflux discords.

There is no serosal covering for the oesophagus except for the very short intrabdominal portion of the oesophagus.

Several factors have been postulated to guard against the reflux of the gastric contents into the oesophagus, although the fibres of the right crus of the diaphragm which passes through the left side of the oesophageal diaphragmatic opening maintains angulations between the oesophagus and the stomach.

Other factors are considered more important in the sustenance of the anti-reflux mechanisms. These factors include:

  1. The sphincteric actions of the lower oesophageal muscles fibres.
  2. The sphincteric function of the muscle of the right crus fibres.
  3. The possible sphincteric function of some mucosal flaps produced by the muscularis mucosa of the stomach.

 

 

The stomach

At the gastro—oesophageaI junction, the oesophagus enlarges to become the stomach

The stratified columnar epithelium of the Iowermost part of the oesophagus then gradually changes to the columnar epithelium of the stomach.

Of all the factors postulated to assist the sustenance of the gastroesophageal sphincter the most plausible mechanism suggests that the sphincteric mechanism in operation is rather more of a physiological sphincter than a mechanical one.

The pressure differentials between the negative intrathoracic pressure and the positive intrabdomial pressures appear to play a significant role in the sustenance of this sphincteric mechanism.

The stomach is the most dilated part of the alimentaiy system

Anatomically, the stomach is interposed between the oesophagus and the duodenum.

It is located in the upper part of the abdominal cavity.

It lies mainly to the left hypochondriac regions, epigastric and the umbilical regions.

Much of the boundaries of the stomach is covered by the lower ribs.

It is an elastic bag encircled by whorls of muscular fibres.

Although fixed at both its superior and inferior poles.

It could assume a much wider surface area given its immense capacity for distention with considerable variations in its size.

On the basis of its content, this increase in capacity appears to be age dependent

There appears to be a considerable variation in the capacity of the stomach between individuals on the basis of their physical profile, height and weight.

It volume capacity is usually about 30ml per kilograms body weight.

The cardia is the part of the stomach in direct relationship to the oesophagus.

It lies immediately beneath the diaphragm, at the level of the T10 vertebrae, usually to the left of the midline.

The principal parts of the stomach include the

  1. The Fundus
  2. The body
  3. The pylorus

The greater and lesser curvatures form the right superior and the left inferior borders respectively.

The stomach is covered almost completely by a single layer of peritoneum.

The peritoneal layer doubles up at the lesser curvature as the lesser omehtum and extends to the hepatic surface.

It also doubles up at the greater curvature as the greater omentum.

It also involves the fundus.

The greater omentum fuses with the transverse colon and mesocolon. ;

  1. The Fundus.

The fundus is that portion of the stomach which projects upwards above the level of the cardia.

The fundus of the stomach usually appears radiographically as a bubble of gas below the diaphragm in radiographs on the left side.

  1. The body of the stomach.

The body is the largest part of the stomach.

A variable part of the body of the stomach will be above or below the costal margin.

The stomach is usually in direct contact with the diaphragm or the anterior abdominal wall.

The extent of the stomach is usually quite variable.

It depends on the physique of the individual and the gustatory state of the individual.

The body of the stomach usually extends from the fundus to the angular notch or the incisura angularis of the lower part of the lesser curvature.

This angular notch or the incisura angularis is a permanent structural feature of the stomach irrespective of the strength of the peristaltic wave of the stomach.

The lowest part of the greater curvature may be above or below the umbilical level.

  1. The pylorus of the stomach

The pyloric portion of the stomach extends from the angular notch to the gastrodeudonal junction.

It consists of the more proximal pyloric antrum and the more distal pyloric canal.

The circular muscle layer of this bag distally narrows down as the pyloric canal

The circular muscle of the distal end of the canal thickens to become the anatomical pyloric sphincter

The pylorus is relatively mobile, given its interposition by the lesser and greater omentum.

In its physiological state, the pylorus is normally open such that when a peristaltic wave reaches it, contractions are usually initiated to squirt its content into the duodenum.

Also some of the duodenal contents are regurgitated backwards and upwards towards the pylorus to the stomach to assist in mixing the content of the stomach appreciably.

The posterior aspect of the stomach has some interesting relationship with several structures such as:

  1. The left crus and the dome of the diaphragm inferiorly.
  2. The upperparts of the left kidney and the left suprarenal gland to the left medial side.
  3. The pancreas transversely, inferior to the pancreas is the transverse mesocolon, and superior to the pancreases is the splenic artery with a tortuous course.
  4. The spleen at its upper lateral side.

Whereas on the right of the lesser curvature in the midline lies the aorta with the celiac trunk, celiac ganglia and celiac lymph nodes.

 

The blood supply of the stomach

The blood supply of the stomach is mainly from the branches of the celiac hunk.

The left gastric a d the right gastric arteries anastomoses, the right gastric artery is usually a branch of the hepatic or the gastrodeudonal artery.

The fundus and the upper part of the body which usually corresponds to the upper part of the greater curvature are supplied by a set of six short gastric anenes.

The outstanding portions of the greater curvature are mostly supplied by the left and the right gastro-epilploic vessels, which are usually derivatives of the splenic and gastrodeudonal arteries. 

All these vessels enter the anterior and the posterior walls of the stomach.

The epilploic branches of the gastro-epiploic blood vessels will then supply the peritoneal and omental portions of the stomach.

 

The Venous drainage of the stomach

The venous drainage of the stomach accompanies its arterial supply except that there is no gastrodeudonal vein.

The veins drain directly into the portal vein or its splenic or its superior mesenteric tributaries.

Exceptionally, there exists a small vein with no accompanying artery, known or as the prepyloric vein, which drains directly into the portal vein or its right gastric tributary.

This vein is of anatomical import given its function as the identification of the pylorus topographically.

Like in the other parts of the gastrointestinal tract there appears to be a great variability in the anatomy of the gastric venous drainage.

 

The lymphatic drainage of the stomach

All the lymph travel finally to the celiac group of lymph nodes.

The valves in the lymphatic blood vessels are positioned in such a way that lymph from the lesser curvature drain to the left and right gastric lymph nodes respectively

The lymph from the upper left quadrant flows to the splenic group of lymph nodes at the splenic hilum.

Thereafter the lymph proceeds to the pancreatic lymph nodes.

The drainage lymphatic drainage systems exist in close proximity to the blood vessels.

There appears to be significant areas of anastomosis of the lymph vessels around the stomach.

The lymph from the outstanding parts of the stomach drains to the group of lymph nodes running alongside the gastroepiploic blood vessels.

These lymphatic channels course along the greater_curvature, superiorly, inferiorly and posteriorly to the pylorus.

Furthermore, there also appears to be a communication between the lymph nodes draining the stomach and that of the thoracic cavity and the neck, because exceptionally in some instances of gastric carcinoma, the supraclavicular lymph nodes particularly the left will become involved and demonstrate the Troisers sign.

 

The nerve supply of the stomach

Of Considerable clinical import in the innervations of the stomach is the parasympathetic nerve supply from the vagi which regulate motility and peptic gastric acid secretion.

The anterior vagal trunk from the oesophageal plexuses runs down the lesser omentum, close to the lesser curvature along the left gastric artery.

At that point for clinical purposes, its name changes to the anterior nerve of Laterget or the anterior vagal nerve of Laterget.

Thereafter it gives branches to the anterior surface of the stomach.

Another branch, the large hepatic branch also further innervates the pylorus, especially its antrum.

The posterior vagal trunk lies posterior to the oesophagus though it is not in direct contact with it. 

It runs posteriorly to the anterior branch, and at this point continues as the posterior nerve of Laterget.

A large celiac branch is given off by the posterior nerve of Laterget which proceeds posteriorly along the left gastric artery to the celiac ganglion.

In addition the posterior nerve of Laterget gives off numerous branches to the posterior wall of the stomach.

 

The histological aspects of the stomach

Except for the most superior component of the cardia, the stomach is made up of a single layered columnar epithelium.

On the average the epithelium is not a single layer of cell, but dips down into the connective tissue lamina propria to form myriads of glands.

In the main part of the stomach the body, the mucus secreting surface cells dip down to form the gastric pits straight test-tube like glands containing the peptic and parietal cells respectively which secrete pepsin and hydrochloric acid respectively, are the continuation of the mucus secreting cells following further histological modifications inferiorly.

The intrinsic factor responsible for the absorption of vitamin B12 is also secreted by the parietaI cells.

The cells in the cardia are mostly short and mucus secreting.

In the antral region the cells are much more tubular and elongated, secreting a gastrin producing endocrine-G cells, as well as D cells, which secrete somatostatin.

In the body and the pyloric regions there are also enterochromaffin cells which secrete both serotonin and endorphin.

 

The Applied Anatomy of the stomach

The applied anatomy of the stomach could be discussed in the view of three main pathologies

  1. Vagotomy

For medically and pharmacologically intractable peptic ulcer disease, vagotomy could be offered to the patient as an option after offering counseling sessions to the patient.

  1. In truncal vagotomy, the vagal trunks are ligated before the point of their subdivisions into the left and the right vagal nerves of Latarget.
  2. Selective vagotomy implies the ligation of the anterior nerves of Latarget.

However the shortcomings of these forms of vagotomies are that because the antral branches are spared, there will be a decreased acid secretion, but the beneficial effect of this procedure is marred by an accompanying gastric stasis, warranting a further antral drainage procedure known as pyloroplasty.

This shortcoming is then mitigated by a modified procedure, known as a highly selective vagotomy

Highly selective vagotomy

In the highly selective vagotomy, only the branches to the fundus and the body are ligated, leaving the antral branches intact, because of the accompanying diminution in the gastric acid production following this procedure, this procedure is also known as parietal cell vagotomy.

  1. Gastrotectomy

For the definitive management of a peptic ulcer and a gastric carcinoma, a partial or a total gastrectomy may be indicated in partial gastrectomy, the stomach is usually transected in its distal two thirds up to the duodenum.

A gastroenterostomy may then be undertaken for the continuity of the gastrointestinal tract, usually, the jejunum is anastomosed to the remaining part of the stomach to form a gastrojeujenostomy.

  1. Gastrostomy tubes could be inserted for nutritional purposes either as a permanent procedure or in instances, when the intestines are obstructed by inoperable lesions, or as a tentative procedure before definitive interventions for oesophageal strictures.

 

 

 

The Small Intestine

The small intestine is made up of the duodenum, the jejunum and the ileum.

The duodenum is a curved intestinal tube in juxtaposition to the aorta and the inferior vena cavae.

Four academic clinical purposes, the duodenum could be conveniently divided into four parts.

The first part or the superior part measures about 5.5cm in length.

Its second part or the descending part which measures about 7. 8cm in length.

The third part or the horizontal part, which measures about 10cm in length.

The fourth part or the ascending part, which measures about 2.5cm in length.

The length of the deudenum is quite close to that of the oesophagus at about 25cm.

 

The first part of the deudenum has a direct relationship to the pancreatic head.

Given its curved outline the deudenum is classically lying between the first to the third lumbar vertebrae

In this context, the deudenum could be taken as a supradiaphragmatic structure.

Its surface outline would correspond to the transpyloric line.

The duodenal cap which is the first two centimeters of the oesophagus lies between the peritoneal folds of the lesser and greater omentum.

The duodenal cap forms the Iowermost part of the opening into the lesser sac.

The duodenum is bounded posteriorly by the liver pedicle, which comprises of the common bile duct, the hepatic artery and the portal vein

The inferior venae cava courses more posteriorly.

The superior aspect of the gall bladder is directly related to the deudonal cap.

The remaining part of the first part of the deudenum is related to the right crus of the diaphragm and the psoas muscle in addition to the medial aspect of the right kidney.

 

The second part of the duodenum

This part of the duodenum has a direct relationship with the right kidney.

The superior one half of the second part of the deudenum lies in the supracolic compartment whilst the inferior half lies in the infracolic compartment.

The superior component of the second part of the deudenum has a relationship with the hepato-renal pouch.

The clinical import of this part of the deudenum to the study of hepatology and gastro-enterology is the reception of the bile duct and the pancreatic duct at the posterior—medial aspect of the deudenum at the hepatopancreatic ampulla of Vater.

Anatomically the ampulla lies at about the middle of the second part of the duodenum.

Approximately at about two cm to the ampulla superiorly lies the accessory pancreatic duct at the minor deudonal ampulla.

 

The Third Part of the Deudenum

This part of the deudenum has a relationship to the right paracolic gutter over the right psoas muscle, the gonodal blood vessels and the ureters, the inferior, vena cava and the aorta.

Its inferior region has a relationship, with the, inferior mesenteric arteries.

The surface outline of the third part of the deudenum corresponds with that of the umbilicus.

It occupies the whole of the infracolic compartments.

 

The fourth part of the deudenum

This part ofthe deudenum has a relationship with the aorta, on the left, in addition to the, left psoas muscle and the left sympathetic trunk, and the lower border of the pancreas.

It then undergoes some curving to become the deudeno-jeujonal flexures.

The distinction on surface anatomical basis between, the jejunum and the duodenum is more of an academic thing,

On the basis of their surface anatomies they look quite alike.

On the basis of their peritoneal attachments and coverings, they are quite distinct and dissimilar, because whilst the deudenum is a retroperitoneal structure, the jejunum is an intraperitoneal structure and has a mesentery.

The deudona-jeujonal flexure is fixed to the left psoas muscle and then the   duodenum by a suspensoiy muscle or ligament known as the ligament of which is a thin muscle.

Usually it is a band of smooth muscle descending from the right crus of the diaphragm which descends and blends with the outer muscle coat of the flexure.

The main function of the small intestine is the absorption of food and nutrients.

However the ileum has an additional function which is mainly immunologic given the presence of the Payers patches in the terminal ileum.

A significant degree of absorption of Vitamin B12 equally takes place in the terminal ileum also

There is a significant amount of fluid secretion of an alkaline nature mainly mucoid and digestive enzymes from the enterocytes of the villi.

The Peneth cells at the bases of the Crypts of Liberkum and the Brunners glands are mucous secreting cells.

The gastrointestinal tract is responsible for the elaboration of several hormones such as the gastrin, cholecystokinin produced by the jejunum and the duodenum.

In addition to secretin, motililin and gastric inhibitory peptide elaborated by the duodenum and the jejunum.

The vasoactive intestinal peptide appears to be elaborated by the small intestine.

The stimulus and the functions of these hormones will form a topic for further discussion.

 

The histological features of the duodenum

Histologically, the deudenum is quite similar to the rest of the small intestines except for the presence of mucus secreting glands of Brunner in the submucosa.

Internally, the mucous membranes of the duodenum like that of the most of the gastrointestinal tracts is thrown into numerous circular folds known as the plicae clrculares or valvular connivantes, however the walls of the first two centimeters are smooth, giving the full smooth outline.

The lack of’ the plicae circulares or the valvulae connivantes makes the deudenum to appear radiologically smooth and the presence of these structures will make the deudenum break up the barium.

The paraduodonal recesses:

The paraduodonal recesses or fossae are peritoneal folds and evaginations existing to the left ofthe deudonalflexures.

These spaces are potential sites for herniations.

An incarcerated hernia, in this site could obstruct or thrombose a vein.

These obstructed or incarcerated veins are at risk of resection intraoperatively during the reparative herniarophies or herniotomies.

There are basically four paradeudonal recesses:

  1. The superior and. the inferior paradeudonal recesses.
  2. The retrodeudonal recess and the paradeudonlal recess proper.

Since these reccesses face one another incerartion of herniation of one recess could very easily involve the other recesses.

 

The arterial blood supply of the deudenum

The arterial blood supply of the deudenum is received mainly from the superior and the inferior paradeudonal arteries.

However, just below the gastroesophageal junction, that part of the deudenum usually receive its blood supply from the other various sources such as:

  1. The hepatic artery.
  2. The common hepatic artery.
  3. The gastroduodonal artery.
  4. The superior pancretodeuodonal artery.
  5. The right gastric artery.
  6. The right gastro-epiploic arteries.

The venous, drainage of the deudenum corresponds to the arteries. In addition, the prepyloric veins plays an assistive role in the venous drainage of the duodenum.

 

The lymphatic drainage of the duodenum

The lymphatic drainage of the deudenum drains by channels that accompany the superior and inferior pancreatodeudona1 vessels to the celiac and the superior mesenteric lymph nodes.

 

The applied anatomy of the deudenum

The applied anatomy of the deudenum is of most import with regards to the first or initial parts of the deudenum, the first 3cm or so where ulcerations are most likely.

 

The jejunum and the Ileum

Structurally the jejunum and the ileum are quite similar except that the jejunum is somewhat thicker in comparison to the ileum.

Furthermore the inferior aspect of the ileum is characterized by the presence of the aggregation of lymphoid follicles othenivise known as the Payer’s patches.

Anatomically, the jejunum is located in the superior aspect of the infracolic compartment, whereas the ileum is located in the inferior aspect of the infracolic compartment and partly in the pelvic cavity.

The length of the ileum in the averagely sized adult is about 50cm, of this the   jejunum is about 20cm, whereas the ileum is about 30cm.

The Blood supply of the lleum and the Jejunum.

The blood supply of the jejunum and the ileum are usually through the superior mesenteric arteries. The jejunal branches join one another to form an arterial arcade in series which could be single or doubles up inferiorly.

From these arterial arcades straight vessels emanate, which are end arteries.

Occlusion of these straight blood vessels could lead to the occlusion of the intestinal segment supplied by them.

The occlusion of anastomotic vessels which may not be of any consequence due to their rich anastomotic network.

The ileal blood vessels are quite similar to the jejunal blood vessels except that the arcades are much more numerous and prominent and the straight arteries much more shorter in Iength.and the fatty content of the mesentery much more abundant compared to the corresponding portion of the jejunum.

The venous drainage of the ileum and the jejunum all correspond to their reciprocal arteries, and they all drain to the superior mesenteric group of veins.

 

The lymphatic drainage of the Jejunum and the lleum

The lymphaticdrainage of the jejunum and ileum drains to the superior mesenteric group of lymph nodes through the juxtaintestinal nodes in the intestinal mesentery of the small intestine, the preaortic lymph nodes and those group of lymph nodes lying along the main blood vessels supplying that part of the ileum and the jejunum

 

The nerve supply of the small intestine

The peristaltic activity of the small intestinal function is mainly regulated by the parasympathetic vagal nerve supply.

The nerves are usually accompanied by their corresponding blood vessels.

The pain impulses are usually transmitted by the sympathetic nerve fibres.

The sympathetic fibres are also vasoconstrictor and counteracts peristalsis.

Their fibres are usually from the lateral horn cells of the spinal segments of the T9 and the T10 aspects.

The small intestinal pain is usually felt at the umbilical region.

Applied anatomy of the ileum and the jejunum.

An ileal Nlickels diverticulum which is a remnant of the intestinal end of the vitello-intestinal duct.

It is usually connected to the umbilicus by other remnant of the cord.

The duct is usually encountered in two percent of individuals, two inches in length and about two feet from the ceacum

It could be a potential site for herniation, ulceration or perforation.

 

 

The Large intestine

The large intestine consists of the ceacum with the vermiform appendix, the ascending, descending and the sigmoid parts of the colon, the rectum and the anal canal.

The colon

The ascending colon

This is the first part of the colon, which measures, about sixteen centimeters in length.

It extends upwards from the ileoceacal junction to the right hepatic flexure

The ascending colon lies basically to the left inferior pole of the right kidney close to the inferior surface of the liver.

The ascending colon is markedly sacculated because of the presence of tinea, coli in abundance which are continuous with that of the ceacum.

They are usually disposed anteriorly, posterior-medially and posterior literally

The tinea coli consists of longitudinal muscle fibres.

The peritoneal covering of the ascending colon is extensively laden with fat.

This modified epithelial covering is known as the appendices epiploicae.

The blood vessels supplying them perforate the intestinal wall

The posterior aspect of the ascending colon is devoid of peritoneal coverings.

The transverse colon

This part of the colon is normally about 46cm in length.

It usually extends from the hepatic to the splenic flexures in a loop which hangs down.

It is connected to the greater culvature of the stomach by the gastro-colic momentum.

It is completely invested in peritoneum, unlike the ascending colon.

It has some relationship with the right kidney, at its, inferior border, the second part of the deudenum, the pancrease and the inferior pole of the right kidney.

The splenic flexure is more superiorly disposed compared to the hepatic flexure.

Its appendices epiploicae are larger and more numerous than that of the ascending colon.

 

The descending colon

The descending colon is about 28cm in length

It usually extends from the splenic flexure to the pelvic brim.

It is a retroperitoneal structure with a bare area posteriorly.

Exceptionally, both the ascending and the descending colon will carry a mesentery which is an embryonic remnant.

The descending colon ends its course at the pelvic brim about five cm above the inguinal ligament.

Its three tinea coli are in continuity with that of the transverse colons appendices epiploicae

Appendices epipiploicae are quite numerous in the descending colon.

 

The sigmoid colon

This part of the large intestine has a considerable length at about 44cm, although a great amount of’_individual variation occurs.

It is also equally known, as the pelvic colon because of its anatomical location at the colon

It usually extends from the pelvic brim to the commencement of the rectum in front of the third sacral vertebra.

Like the transverse colon it is completely invested in peritoneum and is suspended by a mesentery.

The sigmoid mesocolon is similar to that of the rest of the large intestine.

With the sigmoid colon, its tinea coli is continuous with that of the descending colon.

In the sigmoid colon, the sacculations by these longitudinal bands are more prominent and extensive than elsewhere in the gastrointestinal tract.

The three bands of tinea coli eventually meet terminally to form a uniform longitudinal band of muscle encircling the circular muscle layer of the sigmoid colon terminally.

The appendices epiploicae of the sigmoid colon are quite well developed. Anatomically it is anteriorly disposed and lies in proximity to the rectum anteriorly, it also lies in juxtaposition to the peritoneal surfaces of the uterus and the bladder.

The sigmoid colon is the most sacculated of all the large intestinal components, because the base of the large intestine is about nineteen centimeters, whereas the length of its inner surface is about 44cm which is about four times, its outer length.

The sigmoid blood vessels lie between the layers of the mesocolon.

The distinction between the sigmoid colon and the rectum, is more of an academic thing because there is no structural distinction as such in the gut wall, the distinction is only in the peritoneal attachment, where there is a mesentery, the gut wall is taken as sigmoid colon, where there is no mesentery the gut wall is presumably the rectum.

 

The blood supply to the large intestine

The ascending and the proximal third of the transverse colon are supplied by the ilio-colic artery, the right colic and the middle colic branches of the superior mesenteric arteries

The remaining part of the large intestine is supplied by the left colic and the sigmoid branches of the inferior mesenteric.

The anastomosis commonly formed by these main arterial branches is known as the marginal artery of Drummund. 

This marginal artery gives rise to perforators which emerge to run into the gut wall.

Close to the left colic flexure, there appears to be a weak point in between the middle and the left colic branches.

 

The venous drainage of the large bowel

The veins correspond to the arteries, and thus reach the portal vein via the superior mesenteric tributaries.

 

The lymphatic drainage of the large intestines

As usual the lymphatic drainage is through lymphatics accompanying the blood vessels to the superior and the inferior group of mesenteric lymph nodes.

 

The nerve supply of the large intestine

Following its embryonic origin, the nerve supply from the midgut portion is from the vagi, whereas that from the hindgut component is from the pelvic splanchnic nerves.

The pain fibres are conveyed by the sympathetic nervous supply which are derived from spinal segments T10 to L2, these are also vasoconstrictor nerves which eventually give rise to periumbilical pain if from midgut structures and pelvic or hypogastric pains if from hindgut structural origin.

However some pain of rectal origin could be conveyed through the parasympathetic fibres.

The applied anatomy of the Large intestine

Diverticulosis could arise from herniation at the points of potential weaknesses following the perforations caused by the blood vessels supplying the appendices epiploicae

These mucous membrane herniations could get inflamed and form a diverticulitis’s.

It is most frequent in the sigmoid colon because of the abundance of the appendices epiploicae at that area.

Although it is equally common in the other parts of the large bowel.

Colectomies for this condition could be more restricted to a segment supplied by a group of artery.

Surgical procedures for carcinomas of the large bowel will more likely be more extensive.

 

 

The Appendix

The appendix is a vermiform shaped structure, which ends like a blind tube.

It has an average length of about ten cm, with an average range of about three centimetres to about twenty four centimetres.

It is connected to the posterior-medial wall of the ceacum, at about two centimeters beneath the ileoceacal valve.

On the surface, the base of the appendix is at the terminination of the three tinea coli on the posterior-medial wall ofthe ceacum.

The three tinea coli merge into a complete longitudinal muscle layer at the appendix.

The lumen of the appendix appears to be wider in early life, but it tends to obliterate with increasing age.

A prolongation at the mesentery of the terminal ileum continues as three sided folds of peritoneumto form the short mesentery of the appendix otherwise known as the mesoappendix.

 

The blood supply of the appendix

The appendix is usually supplied by the appendicular artery, which is either a  single or occasionally a double artery. The appendicular artery is usually an off shoot of the ceacal artery.

After an initial course in the meso-appendix it continues in close proximity to the appendicular wall.

 

The venous drainage of the appendix

The arterial blood supply of the appendix is followed quite closely by corresponding veins.

 

The lymphatic drainage of the appendix

The lymphatic drainage of the appendix’ passes to the lymph nodes associated with the ileocolic artery such as the superior mesenteric group of lymph nodes.

 

 

The Ceacum

This is a terminal pouch of the large intestine originating from the commencement of the ascending colon, beneath the ilocaecal valve.

Following the pattern for the rest of the colon, the longitudinal muscle of the ceacum is concentrated into three flat bands, the taenia coli, between which are the circular muscle layer

All the three taenia converge at the base of the appendix.

An anatomical rather than a physiological ileoceacal valve assists to deter some reflux of the ceacal contents into the ileum.

The caecum lies in the peritoneal floor of the right iliac fossa, over the iliacus and the psoas fascia and the femoral nerve.

 

The blood supply of the ceacum

The blood supply of the caecum is usually achieved by the anterior and posterior caecal vessels which are offshoot branches of the superior mesenteric arteries respectively.

The anterior ceacal branch supplies the anterior surface of the ceacum The rest of the ceacum is then supplied by the posterior ceacal branches which also gives off the appendicular branches which supply the appendix.

The anterior caecal artery is the smaller of the ilio-colic off shoot of the superior mesenteric artery.

 

The venous supply of the Ceacum

The venous drainage of the ceacum follows their corresponding arterial blood  supply.

The lymphatic drainage of the ceacum

The lymphatic drainage of the caecum is usually by the group of lymph nodes associated with the ilio-colic artery, which eventually drain to the superior mesenteric group of lymph nodes respectively.

Also there are epicolic lymph nodes in the medial, wall of the caecum which assists the lymphatic drainage to these sites.

 

The applied anatomy of the ceacum and the appendix

Appendicitis and appendicectomy

The appendix usually lies in the retrocaecal recess, which is usually formed by the free empty peritoneal space behind the caecum and the sacrum

This retro-peritoneal spaces and recess is usually interrupted by the peritoneal folds emanating from the posterior wall of the caecum.

The space in between these peritoneal folds forms the retrocaecal recess, and more often than not the appendix lies in this recess.

For clinical purposes, the surface anatomy of the proximate portion of the appendix corresponds to the MCBunneys point on the surface of the abdomen.

The MC Bunneys point is more or less one-third of the line oblique in direction drawn from the right anterior superior iliac spine to the umbilicus.

Appendicitis which implies inflammation of the appendix could be caused by the obstructive lesions of the lumen such as by a faecolith or a stone.

A vicious circle may be set up because inflammatory lesions of the distal inferior aspect of the appendix may thus obstruct the appendicular blood vessels.

Given their close proximity to the appendicular wall, leading to ischaemic necrosis, gangrene and probable rupture of the appendix

The appendix is especially prone to obstruction with ischaemic necrosis and at gangrene given its end artery, without any collateral as such.

At appendicectomy, although incisions are usually applied over the MC Bunneys point, the base of the appendix, although fairly constant relative to the caecum, it is usually identified somewhat beneath this point intraopertively

However of greater complexity is the apex of the appendix relative to the topographic disposition with the caecum.

This subject has been a topic of much debate for a long time amongst several authorities.

The most common position pathologically as demonstrated by both intraoperative criteria and scanning procedureswere the retroceacal and the retro-colic position.

However under normal circumstances or when laparotomies were undertaken for other conditions, the retroileal sites, were found to be preponderant in the absence of organic disease of the appendix or the other peri-appendicular structures.

Given these inconsistencies, the identification of the appendix intraoperatively is rather achieved through a definition of the point of termination of the tinae coli.

 

Appendicectomy

The identification of the appendix is rather achieved intraoperatively through a delineation of the point of termination ofthe three tinea-coli.

Appendiciectomy is achieved through a McBunneys or a transverse muscle splitting incision.

The peritoneal cavity is opened and the whole length of the appendix

If it is not immediately obvious, tracing of any of the tinea coli down over the caecal wall will lead to the base of the appendix.

The whole organ is mobilised, often requiring very delicate loosening of the adhesions.

The mesoappendix is divided before the base is crushed and divided and the rest of the appendix is removed.

The stump is invaginated with a purse string suture.

Nlicroanatomical considerations of the large intestine.

Haustrations and circulations are identified in the walls of the large intestine externally, because the tinae coli is considerably shorter than the length of the large intestine in itself.

Internally, the absence of the villi over the mucosa is almost characteristic of the large intestine. 

The colonic glands are short inward projections of the mucosa that secrete mucus.

Lymphoid follicles could be identified sporadically especially in the caecum and the appendix.

The main function of the intestines differ, whereas the small intestine is involved in digestion and absorption, the large intestine is involved mainly with absorption of water, sodium and chloride.

Although typically it could absorb about two litres of water daily, its water absorbing capacity is considerably much more than this figure.

In addition a considerable quantity of mucous, potassium and bicarbonate absorption, also takes place in the large intestine, in this way about twenty milliliters of chyme transiting from the small intestine into the large intestine on daily basis is converted to about four to five millilitres of semi-solid stools.

The basic anatomy and the functional histology of the gastrointestinal tracts adnexae.

 

 

The Pancreas

The pancreas is both an exocrine and an endocrine gland

It is of a firm consistency and it is a Iobulated gland.

It is a tad pole shaped gland with a big head and a narrow tail

On the average the pancreas measures about ten centimetres to sixteen centimetres.

It is a retroperitoneal structure, although most of the gland lies in the supracolic compartment, some of its distal part lies in the infracolic compartment.

Anteriorly, it is related to the transverse mesocolon and superiorly it is related to the stomach, where it lies on the stomach bed inside the lesser sac.

It is made up of a head, neck, body and a tail where as the head and the tail inclines towards the vertebral gutters, the neck and the body are curved thoroughly in the anterior aspect of the inferior vena- cava, and the aorta in front of the first lumbar vertebrae, in cray-fish like pattern.

The disposition of the gland is somewhat oblique slanting from the inferior aspect of the head towards the tail.

The head of the pancreas

The head the widest part of the pancreas, which is moulded to C shaped concavity of the duodenum which it fills completely. 

It is closely related to the inferior vena cava, and the right and left renal veins at the level of the vertebrae.

Its posterior relationship is the terminal aspect of the common bile duct.

 

The uncinate process of the head of the pancreas

The part of the head of the pancreas which lies posterior to the superior mesenteric vein and artery, anterior to the aorta has an elongated, triangular shaped process at the inferior posterior aspect, known as the uncinate process of the pancreatic head.

Anteriorly, the head of the pancreas lies in both the supracolic and the infracolic compartments.

There exists a bare area in this aspect of the pancreas because at this point, the leaves of the greater omentum and the transverse mesocolon are here wide apart at their attachments.

 

The neck of the pancreas

This is the part of the pancreas joining the head and the body of the pancreas.

It is a slender band of pancreatic tissue which is disposed anterior to the superior mesenteric vein and the portal vein.

It is related inferiorly by the transverse mesocolon and superiorly is the stomach; it actually forms the stomach bed where, it lies the stomach bed of the lesser sac or the omental bursa.

 

The body of the pancreas

The body of the pancreas is that part of the pancreas, which connects the neck of the pancreas to the pancreatic tail.

It courses from the neck in a superior direction towards the left renal vein and the aorta, the left diaphragmatic crus, the left psoas muscle, and the inferior pole of the suprarenal gland, to the hilum of the left kidney.

The origin of the celiac trunk is that part of the aorta, most related to the pancreas also the splenic artery has a direct relationship to this part of the pancreatic body.

Its lower border is related to the superior mesenteric artery.

On the anterior surface of the pancreas there is a slight convexity known as the tuber omentale.

Superior to the lesser gastric curvature the pancreatic tuber omentale has direct contact with the tuber omentale of the left hepatic lobe.

In between these tuber omental lies the lesser omentum.

This part of the pancreas also has the stomach in its superior border whilst forming the stomach bed at the lesser sac or the lesser omental sac

The splenic vein lies closely to its posterior surface the inferior mesenteric vein is joined by the pancreas, where as anteriorly- lies the transverse mesocolon.

 

The tail of the pancreas

The tail of the pancreas courses through the anterior surface of the left kidney at the level of the hilum, accompanied by the splenic artery, vein and lymphatics, it lies within the two layers of the Iinorenal ligament and then touches the hilum of the spleen.

The main pancreatic duct

This is a consistent tube leading from the pancreatic tail up to the head, gradually increasing in diameter as it receives delicate tributaries.

At the hepato-pancreatic ampulla it is joined at an acute angle of about fifty five to seventy degrees by the bile duct.

The main pancreatic duct drains most of the pancreas except the uncinate process which is drained by the accessory pancreatic duct which also drains the lower part of the head of the pancreas

For embryologic developmental reasons the accessory pancreatic duct passes into the duodenum at the minor duodenal papillae situated at about two centimetres proximal to the major papilla

Terminally, eventually the main and the accessory pancreatic ducts will communicate with one another.

 

The blood supply of the pancreas

The major blood supply to the pancreas is achieved through the splenic artery, which supplies the neck of the pancreas, its body and its tail.

It usually accomplishes this, through some numerous branches

The major blood supply to the pancreas is from a huge branch called the arterial pancreatic magna.

The head of the pancreas is supplied by the superior and the inferior pancreatico-deuodonal arteries.

 

The venous drainage of the pancreas

The venous drainage ofthe pancreas is by numerous, minutiae dveins, which drain into the splenic vein.

These groups of veins drain the neck, the body, and the tail of the pancreas principally.

Whereas the venous drainage of the head of the pancreas is achieved through the superior pancreatico-duodenal vein into the portal vein and by the inferior pancretico-duodenal vein into the superior mesenteric vein.

 

The lymphatic drainage of the pancreas

The lymphatic drainage of the pancreas follows very closely its, arterial suppIy,lymph from the neck and the body of the pancreas drain into retro-colic group of lymph nodes.

The superior aspect of the head of the pancreas drains into the colic group of lymph nodes.

Whereas the lymphatic from the inferior aspect o the head drains into the superior mesenteric group of lymph nodes, especially those of the pre-aortic group of lymph nodes.

 

The nerve supply of the pancreas

The parasympathetic fibres from the posterior vagal trunk, which are capable of stimulating the exocrine secretion innervates the pancreas.

There are also some sympathetic fibres from the vagal plexus of the celiac group or the celiac plexus.

However advanced this neuronal impulsation may appear to be in functional terms, quite similar to the case of the gall bladder, hormonal regulation overrides that ofthe neuronal regulation of the pancreas.

The pain fibres are derived from the sympathetic supply, which are also vaso-constrictive.

These sympathetic fibres are usually derived from spinal, segments T6 to T10 through splanchnic nerves and the celiac plexus.

The efferent fibres of these adrenergic fibres course the pancreatic gland along its arterial supply.

ln acute pancreatitis the pain will be felt along the distribution of these fibres between the T6 to T 10 dermatomes

 

The embryologic development of the pancreas

At the junction between the foregut and the, midgut, two independent buds develop, which are each an offshoot of the endoderm at this junction.

A ventral duct, which grows into the ventral mesogastrium alongside the hepatobiliary system.

Also there exists a second independent dorsal bud which grows into the dorsal mesogastrium.

Following the gut rotation, the duodenal component of the gut undergoes a differential rotation and growth, becoming firmly embedded to the posterior abdominal wall, finally lying retroperitoneally, with the pancreatic outgrowths.

In this way the opening of the dorsal and the ventral pancreatic duct, which were denovo opposite to one another are now arranged in a superior-inferior manner in such a way that the ventral duct lies superiorly, while the dorsal duct lies inferiorly.

The duct units of the ventral and the dorsal pancreatic ducts now undergo some intimate connexion in such a way that there is certainly some synergy of their duct systems,

The dorsal and the ventral duct systems which gets intertwined in such a way that the duodenal terminal of the dorsal duct becomes the accessory pancreatic duct opening inferiorly.

Whereas the duct system of the ventral bud duct unites with the outstanding portions of the dorsal duct to form the main pancreatic duct.

The pancreatic acini will then outshoot from the ends of the dividing ducts.

The Islets cells of Langerhans emanates from a complex metamorphosis and differentiation of these bud offshoots, undergoes some migration and sophistication in its secretory function.

 

The micro-anatomy and the histology of the pancreas

The pancreas is a glandular organ with both exocrine and endocrine.

It is a microlobulated organ with numerous cells of the serous acini structurally like the parotid gland in this aspect.

Like most protein secreting cells, the pancreatic acinus exhibits some marked degree of basophilia.

Several digestive enzymes are secreted by the acinus of the exocrine pancreas under the regulation of the secretin and CholeCystoKinin (CCK)  produced by the entero-endocrine cell of the small intestine, the pancreatic acini cells, secrete various digestive enzymes, in particular trypsin and lipase including some·secretion of electrolytes from the centro-acinar cells especially bicarbonate.

Some relatively large duct could be found in the interlobar connective tissue. However compared: to the parotid gland, the ductular system is not all that a very prominent feature.

 

The histological aspects of the endocrine pancreas

The endocrine pancreas

The islets of Langerhans are pale staining rounded groups of cells, which are spread among the acini.

An lntermingling of the islets and the acini is the peculiar histological feature of the pancreas on conventional micrographic views.

However on differential staining, and during electron transmission microscopy, several distinct cell groups, could be observable

Principally, three distinct groups of cells could be identified, such as:

  1. The lslet cells of Langerhans, also known as the beta cells, which secretes the hormone insulin.
  2. The alpha cells which secret glucagons
  3. The delta cells which secrete somatostatln

 

 

Applied Anatomy of the pancreas

In cases acute pancreatitis, there will be accumulation of fluid which bulges into the lesser sac, usually posterior to the stomach.

In cases of carcinoma of the head of the pancreas there may be obstructive jaundice due to obstruction of the bile duct.

ISSN: 0796-191X CRS [Med] Volume 1 May 2014

 

May 2014 Classics and Revisits in Scientific Hepatology Supplement 1                                                                                                                         

 

 

A precise anatomical data for the hepatobiliary system

Table of Contents

Back ground and Purpose. 2

Editorial 9

The Anatomy of the liver or hepatis [A gastrointestinal tract adnexae]. 10

The Liver or the hepatis. 11

The Applied Anatomy of the Liver. 17

References: 20

The biliary tract. 21

The Portal venous system… 27

References. 30

Acknowledgements. 31

 

 

 

Back ground and Purpose

 

Back ground

Classics and Revisits in Scientific Hepatology CRS [Hep.] is a hepatology specialty focused supplement of Classics and Revisits in Scientific Medicine CRSM [Med]. It is a balanced portal of continuing medical education information in scientific hepatology.

Purpose

The intent is that CRS [Hep] could provide a fairly well effective reciprocal communicative pathway for continuing medical education development.

The text delivers the details of good basic and clinical hepatology practice clearly and concisely.

 Focus and Theme

Throughout the series efforts were made to balance the emphasis on the scientific fundamentals and the basic principles of management and prevention with research directions and recent advances in investigations and interventions in hepatology.

In order to make it more reader friendly and handy, efforts were made to minimize the volume while at the same time not compromising the contents.

On this basis, suggestions were made that it should be a regular and frequent topical medical periodical in scientific basic and clinical hepatology.

It is hoped that these compendia will be found most rewarding by medical practitioners, health professionals undergoing their undergraduate and postgraduate medical trainings and other health conscious professionals and individuals.

This is a legendary textbook of scientific hepatology in a journal format.

Issues and Future Trends of Specialty Focused Journal Supplements

In principle, publications of each supplement would normally follow positive peer and editorial reviews, revisions and decisions.

For clarity sake, the hepatology supplement publications and channels of classics and revisits in scientific hepatology, which will normally be published periodically as attached or merged supplement to the parent journal CRS [Med]. or adhoc as isolated supplements

We are pleased to consider papers in the following categories.

Original Articles from primary and secondary research in hepatology:

The original articles could normally be up to 3000 words.

The documentations of the original papers should follow the traditional IMRAD pattern introduction, methods/ patients, results, discussion, conclusion, acknowledgements and references

The contents are expected to be precise, factual and as concise as possible.

Illustrative colour, black and white photographs and line drawings could be used if they could make the contents more lucid.

The abstract or the summary section should be structured and limited to 250 words or less.

Review Articles:

Review articles would generally be less than 3000 words.

It should be well researched and referenced.

Short Reports and Brief Communications:

Short reports and brief communications may contain up to 1000 words.

No summary or abstracts are required, but authors could decide to include them.

The contents should be logically ordered, but division into sections is optional and up to ten references may be used.

This may be suitable for the presentation of descriptive studies, some personal experience/observation and some field studies.

Case Reports and Case Series

This is the format most suitable for the presentation of individual case reports of particular interest or an illustrative series of cases.

Correspondence to the Editor

This could be on any topic related to the subject areas of the journal, which could be new topics or based on articles which have appeared in the series.

Current Topical Issues, opinions, view points, annotations and perspectives

This part of the series will provide a forum for expert opinion on topical issues in the area relevant to the series.

Appropriate submissions may include proposals for action such as:

  • I Sound clinical judgment and good practice.
  • II Appraisal or critiques of ongoing practice or principles.
  • III Responses to published statements.

The length of submissions in this section should normally be less than 1000 words. The presentations are expected to be precise, succinct and factual.

Usually about 20 references or less will suffice.

Occasional papers

Manuscripts of reasonable academic or clinical relevance belonging to this category could be published with the parent journal or as a detached supplement.

Research Letters:

This is a good medium for communicating research findings in hepatology, which are too brief for short reports or brief communications.

 

 

Supplements:

Supplements in hepatology by Consulting Guest Editors on emerging topical issues will be published with a hepatology specialty based focus, periodically and on ad-hoc basis.

Normally these specialty focused supplements will be published as attachments, merged to the parent journal CRS [Med] or isolated and detached supplements.

Technical Notes, Methods and Devises:

Papers describing procedures, techniques or equipment adapted by authors to their own conditions of work in hepatology are welcome.

Medical Highlights and Forum Digest:

Summaries or Abstracts of ongoing and emerging topical l issues in scientific hepatology will be published in the relevant sections of the journal or its specialty supplements.

Normally, these abstracts and summaries will be limited to 350 words or less and are best presented unstructured.

Editorials:

Normally, each series will be accompanied by an editorial perspective which as much as possible will aim to illuminate on the most significant contributions in the series.

Periodically, and on ad hoc basis editorials by consulting academic clinical guest editors will also be included, in the journal series or its supplement.

Book updates, Book Reviews and the Academic Clinicians Book shelf:

The series will consider book reviews, book updates relevant to the specialty of hepatology. A book shelf highlighting other updated books relevant to the specialty of hepatology could be mentioned or displayed.

Report of the Highlights of Meetings and Conference Proceedings:

Proceedings of meetings and conferences relevant to the theme of hepatology could be published along the main journal series or as a supplement.

The hepatology specialty relevant highlights of appropriate medical scientific meetings will be published in the journal series or as supplements.

Academic Clinicians Web-Blog watch and alert:

Clinicians and medical scientists could be made aware of interesting Web sites and web-blogs in the relevant specialties of hepatology.

Expert Opinions, View Points and Personal Practice

This involves a best evidence based expert advice and answer on a difficult or ambiguous academic or clinical encounter in any area relevant to the scope of hepatology. Normally the question or the scenario would be presented in a contextual format with no more than 250 words.

The interventional answer or the solution to the difficulty will then be printed along with the question in the journal or a supplement following consultations with academic clinical experts in the topic and specialty.

Ongoing and forthcoming medical conferences, courses and pathways to medical career opportunities and progressions

The series will from time to time and on adhoc basis publish a list of accreditated medical conferences, courses and achievable pathways to medical career progressions and opportunities in the field of scientific hepatology.

Health News

The series will from time to time publish a balanced scientific perspective of the medical health literature on emerging clinical issue of public health importance related to hepatology.

Profile of Medical Journals and other related Publications

Editors of Medical Journals with significant scientific hepatology content or other relevant scientific publications in hepatology could proffer copies of their publications to the Classics and Revisits in Scientific Medicines for review.

A compilation of these publications would then be sent to our consulting guest editors, referees and reviewers for short listing, vetting and selection. The publications will then be showcased in the upcoming issues of CRS [Hep].

Clinical debates and Round Table discussions.

Logical and constructive debates and discussions on emerging topical health issues, on clinical issues in hepatology which could influence practice positively will be published in the journal or its supplements periodically or on adhoc basis.

Text Presentation Format:

Text should be double spaced and all pages should be numbered.

The first page should include the title and the full names of authors with their academic and professional qualifications and/or job title and institutional affiliations at the time of writing, postal and E-mail addresses, telephone and   fax numbers or other relevant contact co-ordinates for correspondence.

Tables, figures and text boxes should appear on separate pages at the end of the document and be appropriately labeled.

Text Boxes

Text boxes should be used for tangential information, such as contact details or background information of organizations relevant to the article, lists of very short case studies or descriptions of related research/projects and details of elements of a study or project, such as a survey, which for reasons of clarity are best removed from the main body of the text.

References and Acknowledgements:

References and acknowledgements should each start on a new page.

References should be outlined using the Vancouver referencing style, as originally published by the International of Medical Journal Editors (ICMJE) 

References should be listed numerically in the order in which they appear in the text. The numbers of the references in the text could be in superscript.

A corresponding numerical list of the references is supplied at the end of the text after conclusive remarks.

References should be adequate, but redundant references should be avoided.

The full list of references should include the names and initials of the authors up to six authors could be listed then followed by et al for the outstanding authors, title of the paper, journal title, year of publication, volume number, first and last page numbers.

References to books should give the book title, place of publication, publisher and year; those of multiple authorship should also include   chapter title, first and last page numbers and the names and initials of the editors.

Papers accepted but not yet published should be included in the references followed by (in press)

Those in preparation (and any submitted for publication), personal communications and unpublished observations should be referred to as such in the body of the text.

 

Consent:

  • I Original sentences and paraphrases replicated and quoted from other authors should be cited in a standard manner and be referenced appropriately.
  • II The consent of patients and approval of the protocol by an ethical committee or relevant authority on ethical matters should be confirmed for human investigations.
  • III Any potentially defamatory statement or those construed to be defamatory must be eschewed.
  • IV Any tables or illustrations previously published should be accompanied by the written consent of the copyright holder to republication, an acknowledgement included in the caption and the full reference should be included in the list.

Patient confidentiality:

Where a patient might be identified through an illustration or from the text, it is essential that written permission is obtained from the patient and forwarded with the manuscript.

Proofs and off prints

Proofs are sent to authors designated to receive them and corrections should be made within specified guidelines.

Covering Letter:

A covering letter signed by all of the authors must be submitted with the articles, and original or secondary research papers.

E-mail submissions should be sent to the Classics and Revisits in Scientific Medicine editorial section with record of all approved authors e-mail accounts.

The letter must contain the following information:

  • I Why the submission is appropriate for publication in Classics and Revisits in Scientific Medicine or its specialty focused supplements and what it adds to the existing body of medical scientific knowledge.
  • II The manuscript category that the paper is for.
  • III Confirmation that the paper meets the requirements for the category as laid out in this document, stating word count and confirming that references were formatted in the Vancouver style as detailed below.
  • IV Confirmation that the paper has not been published elsewhere.
  • V Declaration of competing interests or the absence of competing interests and the disclosure of all sources of funding.
  • VI Original research must declare ethical approval from an appropriate body and consent from participants.
  • VII Name the corresponding author and provide full contact details.
  • Authors should also include written consents from those individuals being acknowledged in their paper.

 

Key Words

Authors are advised to include about five main key words before their introduction; this will facilitate the indexing of the article.

 

Language Support

Ideally, authors are advised to seek the assistance of a native English linguist for a linguistic editorial revision, however if this is unachievable, the Editors will provide the necessary linguistic support.

 

Copyright.

Before publication, authors would be asked to transfer the copyright of their contribution to the publishers of the Journal or its relevant supplement.

 

Check Lists for Authors:

Please ensure inclusion of the following before the manuscript submission:

  • Manuscript in Microsoft word.
  • Manuscript corresponding authors name, qualifications, degrees and/or job title ,contact co-ordinates outlining their institutional affiliations, postal address, e-mail and telephone/ fax numbers.
  • Submission covering letter.

Consent forms where applicable.

Papers may be submitted in one of the following ways:

  • Two copies of the manuscripts typed and double spaced.
  • On a disk accompanied by one printed copy.
  • Via E-mail to:

Dr.Emmanuel.G.U. Onyekwelu

Honorary Academic Clinical Editor

Classics and Revisits in Scientific Medicine.

P.O.BOX 2696

Serrekunda Post Office

The Gambia.

West Africa.

Tel: +220/9908295/2207357804.

E-mail:euonyekwelu@hotmail.com

Website: cottageclinicdoctors.wordpress.com

 

 

 

Editorial

A lucid comprehension of the topographical, microscopic, functional and applied anatomy of the hepatobiliary system will expediently facilitate the introduction, study and investigations of several aspects of hepatological conditions. A common and typical example would be the subject of undertaking the indispensible basic liver biopsy, a procedure that will make a lucid comprehension of the hepatic topographic anatomy imperative. 

In this edition of the classics and revisits in scientific hepatology, a Medical Scientific Institutional and Collegiate Academic View point and Personal Practice on the developmental structural, topographic, comparative, microscopic and applied anatomy of the hepatobiliary system is  delivered entitled a precise anatomical data for the hepatobiliary system, The contents were derived and created  following the collation, compilation and composition  of the collected Scholarships, correspondences and interviews from Scholarly Medical Scientific Academic Associates by the Guest Editors.

The precise anatomical data of the hepatobiliary system is delivered in three sections comprising, the anatomy of the liver, the biliary tract with the gall bladder and finally the anatomy of the portal venous system.

Each of these sections is preceded by a concise abstract followed by a precise text with relevant illustrations.

The evolutionary, developmental and embryologic anatomy of the relevant structures was outlined. The structural, topographical anatomy and the crucial relationships of the hepatobiliary system to other organ systems were discussed. The arterial blood supply of each organ system was lucidly itemized; their venous and lymphatic drainage systems were highlighted. In addition the innervations, the impulsations and the humoural regulations of the various organ systems were mentioned and discussed.

Also the most relevant aspects of the applied anatomy of each system was introduced.  With this note the Editors will then move on and urge the potential readers and reviewers to proceed forward with what they think will make an interesting, intellectually contributing and stimulating academic study with knowledge acquisition sessions.

Dr.Emmanuel.G.U.Onyekwelu.

Honorary Academic Clinical Series Editor.

Medical Scientific Institutional Collegiate Academic View Point and Personal Practice:

Guest Series Editors: Dr.Emmanuel Onyekwelu.

Contributing Series Editors: Medical Scientific Academic Associates.

The Anatomy of the liver or hepatis [A gastrointestinal tract adnexae]

Abstract:

The liver could very easily be regarded as the largest organ of the body. The hepatocytes and the hepatic stroma develop from the proliferation of cells from a Y shaped diverticulum, which is an off shoot of the foregut into the ventral mesogastrium.

Topographically, the liver has a visceral and a diaphragmatic surface.

The porta hepatis is the point where the hepatic ducts, the hepatic vessels are in close proximity, with the vein most anteriorly placed, followed by the hepatic artery and then the bile ducts. The cystic duct lies in a close association with the medial aspect of the porta, with several periportal groups of lymph nodes.

For anatomical purposes, the liver is considered to consist of the left, the right, the caudate and the quadrate lobes.

Anteriorly, the hepatis is divided into the left and the right lobes by the falciform ligament where as posteriorly, the caudate lobe is connected to the right lobe by an isthmic hepatic structure known as the caudate process.

The quadrate lobe lies between the gall bladder fossa, and the groove for the ligamentes teres posteriorly,

The hepatic segments were derived on the basis of the relevant vascular supply of the area, in addition to the associated biliary drainage. There are four main anatomical corresponding segments. The left anatomical lobe, which corresponds to the left lateral segment, the left medial segment which corresponds to the whole of the caudate lobe and most of the quadrate lobe, the less distinct right anterior segments and the right posterior segment.

The liver receives its blood supply from two main sources, the hepatic artery and the portal vein. The hepatic artery normally arises from the hepatic trunk.

Three principal hepatic veins drain from the liver into the inferior vena cava.

The lymphatics of the liver drain into the hepatic group of Iymph nodes in the porta hepatis. They drain to the retropyloric group of lymph nodes and thence to the celiac group of lymph nodes eventually.

The hepatic nerve supply is derived from both the sympathetic fibres which originates, from the celiac ganglia and the vagus fibres which originates from the left vagal trunk, both usually accompanying its vascular supply to the porta hepatis.

The fine anatomy of the liver could be typically depicted if the hepatic morphology is studied by considering the liver to be in lobules.

The acinus are the functional units which consists of relevant aspects of the two adjacent hepatic lobules, in such a way that the hepatocytes close to the region between the hepatic canal or the portal triad will come in close relation to the incoming blood supply, whereas those a bit apart, will come in contact with the incoming blood supply much latter, these ones will correspond to the hepatocytes closest to the central veins.

The liver is uniquely situated to process, distribute and metabolise nutrients, several organic, inorganic substances and pancreatic hormones, because the venous drainage of the gut and pancrease must pass through the hepatic portal vein initially before entry into the general circulation.

The applied anatomy of the liver is discussed from the point of view of topical interventional themes such as Lobectomies, hepatic arterial embolisations for primary hepatocellular carcinoma or secondary metastatic carcinoma, hepatic biopsies, orthoptotic hepatic transplantations and obstructive jaundice secondary to hepatic nodes and kupffer cells hyperplastic hyperplasia.

 

Text:

The Liver or the hepatis

The liver is probably the largest organ of the body weighing about 30g/kg and receiving about 30mls/kg of blood per minute

Developmental anatomical considerations of the liver

The hepatocytes and the hepatic stroma develop from the proliferation of cells from the terminal portions of Y shaped diverticulum which is an off shoot of the foregut into the septum transversum.

Precisely its distal or inferior aspect forms the ventral mesogastrium.

Initially, the liver lies in the space between the ventral mesogastrium.

However with further growth of the liver, the size of the liver outstrips the outer edges of the ventral mesogastrium. [1]

This growth continues inferiorly until the umbilical veins, which in the adult corresponds to the ligamentum teres limits its inferior border.

This differential growth of the liver relative to the ventral mesogastrium partitions the ventral mesogastrium into separate parts, the falciform ligament between the liver and the anterior abdominal wall and the gastro­ hepatic omentum or the lesser omentum between the liver and the stomach.

The left fold of the ventral mesogastrium between the liver and the anterior abdominal wall makes a double fold on itself to form the left triangular ligament.

The right leaf of this part of the ventral mesogastrium, between the liver and the anterior abdominal wall makes another double fold, but unlike the left sided leaf leaves a bare area because of lack of apposition of the leaves this bare area is bounded anatomically by the upper layer of the coronary ligament, the right triangular ligament and the lower layer of the coronary ligament. The proliferating liver cells, break into branching buds of hepatocytes that form an anastomosing connexion with reticulating, stroma which form hepatic buds filled with sinusoidal venous channels draining into the vitelline veins, which are located in the caudal aspect of the septum transversum.

In utero, oxygenated blood returning from the placenta by the left umbilical vein joins the left branch of the portal vein in the porta- hepatis.

This oxygenated blood short circuits the sinusoids hepatis being shunted directly to the interior vena-cava by a shunting structure known as the ductus venosus which usually lies along the distal aspect of the liver, in between the lesser omentum.

Ex-utero, the remnants of the umbilical veins is redundant and then gets thrombosed, the ductus venosus is then obsolete with devitalized blood which coagulates and this structure then gets converted to a fibrous cord known as the ligamentum venosus, which is embedded in a slit delineating the caudate lobe of the liver.

Continuous with the ligamentum venosus is a remnant of the intrabdominal part of the umbilical vein also forming a fibrous band known as the ligamentum   teres hepatic.

The topographical aspect of the liver

Anatomically, the liver has two surfaces, the diaphragmatic and the visceral surfaces. An indirect multidimensional evaluation of the hepatic size could be achieved radiologically. [2] or ultrasonographically.

The diaphragmatic surface is clearly more superior in comparison to the visceral surface.

The porta hepatis is at the hilum of the liver and it is usually the point where most blood vessels enter or exit the liver.

It is at the visceral surface of the liver and it is usually enclosed between two layers of the lesser omentum.

This porta is the point where the hepatic ducts, the hepatic vessels are in close proximity to one another, with the vein most anteriorly placed, followed by the hepatic artery and then the bile ducts.

The cystic duct lies in a close association with the medial aspect of the porta, with several periportal groups of lymph nodes. In addition there are several hepatic nerves. [3]

The hepatobiliary lobes, segments and sections

For anatomical purposes, the liver is considered to be made up of the left, the right, the caudate and the quadrate lobes.

Anteriorly, the liver is divided into the left and the right lobes by the falciform ligament, where as posteriorly, the caudate lobe is connected to the right lobe by an isthmic hepatic structure known as the caudate process, lying between the inferior vena cavae and the groove for the ligamentum venosus.[4]

Whereas the quadrate lobe lies between the gall bladder fossa, and the groove for the ligamentes teres also posteriorly.

Although originally considered to be part of the right lobe anatomically, functionally the caudate and the quadrate lobes are more related the left lobe because almost all the caudate lobe and most of the quadrate lobe derives and receives their blood supply from the left branches of the hepatic artery and portal veins and their bile is delivered to the left hepatic duct. [5]

The hepatic segments and sections ­

The hepatic segments were derived on the basis of the relevant vascular supply of the area in addition to the associated biliary drainage covering that area.

There are four main areas which correspond to these anatomical segments.

  1. The left anatomical lobe which corresponds to the left lateral segment,
  2. The left medial segment which corresponds to the whole of the caudate lobe and most of the quadrate lobe.
  3. The less distinct right anterior segments.
  4. The right posterior segment.

The right anterior and posterior segments correspond to the anatomical right lobe of the liver.

The left and the left medial and lateral segment of the liver are demarcated by the slight slit or grooves of the ligamentum teres or ligamentum venosus.

The anatomical right lobe of the liver is divided and separated from the rest of the liver by the inferior vena caval groove anteriorly and the gall bladder posteriorly, if a plane is taken between the two structures.

The liver sections correspond to the areas of the liver supplied by a set of blood vessels,

The whole question on the various liver segments, sectors or sections could be gleaned from authoritative scientific reviews, although these were somewhat contentiously discussed, however comprehensive reviews by several experts’ offers a consistent patterns of description which were found useful for planning lobectomies for hepatocellular carcinomas. [6]

The blood supply of the liver

The liver receives blood supply from two main sources:

  1. The hepatic artery.
  2. The portal vein.

The hepatic artery normally arises from the celiac trunk, although, exceptionally it could arise from the superior mesenteric artery or directly from the aorta.

At the porta hepatis arteries

The left hepatic artery usually divides into the medial and the lateral branches, supplying the left medial and the left lateral hepatic sections respectively.

The right hepatic artery usually divides into the anterior and the posterior branches, supplying the right anterior and the left anterior hepatic, segments, respectively. [7]

The right and left hepatic branches may occasionally have an anomalous origin directly from the superior mesenteric artery or from the left gastric arteries.

Occasionally it may co-exist with the normally originated and coursed arteries; in other instances they may replace them almost entirely completely or entirely.

The hepatic artery usually supplies oxygenated blood to liver, which is rich in well oxygenated blood.

The portal vein carries portal venous blood to the liver, it divides at the porta hepatis into a right and left branch and gives offshoot branches running into hepatic segments like the arteries, the portal blood is replete with the end products of digestion.

The blood supply to the liver

The nutrient carried by the portal vein is metabolized by the liver cells

The hepatic ductules accompanies the hepatic artery and the portal vein, in several sections of the liver, the three in unison makes up the portal canals of histological sections.

The anastomotic connexions between the right and the left halves of the liver are completely rudimentary, very primitive or entirely non-existent and the arteries are end arteries, hence theoretically the hepatic cells could be prone to profound ischaemic insults and real damage [8]

From the hepatic sinusoids, the blood is in close contact to the portal canals, from where the blood enters the hepatic sinusoids in-between a column of hepatocytes to the centre of the liver, where the central vein of each lobule is located.In the hepatic sinusoids, the arterial and the portal venous blood become admixed and then pass on to the central vein of the liver lobule located at the centre of each lobule. [9]

The venous drainage of the liver:

Three principal hepatic veins drain from the liver into the inferior vena cava.

A major central vein runs in the plane between the right and the left halves and receives blood from each lobar half, a further  right and left vein, in addition to a middle which joins, the left vein in the drainage  of the liver,

All these veins have direct relationship to the diaphragm superiorly; they have no extra hepatic course as such.

They terminally drain into the inferior vena cava near the, central tendon of the diaphragm.

Unlike the situation for the arterial blood supply, the left and the right sides of the liver have a mixture of their venous blood drainage.

In addition to its blood drainage role, the hepatic veins have a supportive role in that the penetration of these veins, into the inferior vena cava a structure which is already well embedded in the liver stroma   offers a principal support which is more superior than the peritoneal attachments to the liver cells.

Several small supplementary hepatic veins enter the vena cava inferior to the hepatic veins. The caudate lobe appears to have its own hepatic venous drainage. [10]

The lymphatic drainage of the Liver

The lymphatics of the liver drain into the hepatic group of Iymph nodes which are a set of three to four lymph nodes in the porta hepatis.

The lymphatic blood vessels run alongside the artery to the retropyloric group of lymph nodes and from thence to the celiac group of lymph nodes.

In addition there are communications with the posterior mediastinal group of lymph nodes from the bare area of the liver on its surface which communicate with lymphatics positioned extra-peritoneally which then penetrates the diaphragm draining into the thoracic and peritoneal group of lymph nodes posteriorly

There also appears to be other lymphatics running along the falciform ligament and the left triangular ligament, which then penetrate the diaphragm, in a similar manner draining into to the posterior thoracic group of lymph nodes.

The nerve supply of the liver

The nerve supply of the liver originates from both the sympathetic and the vagus.

The sympathetic supply is primarily from’ the celiac ganglia, they usually accompany its vascular supply close to the gastro-colic ligament and thence to the porta hepatis.Vagal fibres from the left vagal trunk reach the porta hepatis through the gastro-colic ligament on the side of the lesser curvature of the stomach.[11]

The histology and microanatomy of the liver

The fine microscopic anatomy of the liver could be typically depicted if the hepatic morphology is studied by considering the liver to be in lobules.

Lobules are minute structures of the liver which are hexagonally shaped.

The septation of the hepatic lobules are best demonstrated with the animal liver, rather than the human liver.

The best classic description of the liver was achieved with the pig or the porcine liver, which could very easily be used as a teaching model for the demonstration of the fine and peculiar architecture of the hepatic histology.

Typically each hepatocyte is hexagonally shaped, having a central vein in the centre of the lobule which stands out quite distinctly. It is hexagonally shaped according to most academic descriptions.

The central vein is at the center of the liver with hepatocytes and the sinusoids radiating from it centrifugally up to the part of the lobule where there may be fine connective tissue septa separating it from the adjacent lobules.

Compared to the porcine liver, in humans, these hepatic lobules are poorly developed, for this reason for classical micrographic didactic purposes, the porcine liver is considered an ideal for the academic appreciation of the hepatic histology. At the corners of these hexagonal lobules, the minutiae branches of the hepatic artery and the portal veins are in close proximity to the bile ductules, forming the portal canals.

Although both anatomically, and histologically, the hepatic lobules are considered to be units, functionally, the acinus is considered to be more physiologically relevant, though not anatomically so, because the vascular and the biliary channels of the portal canals are united by anastomosing, connexions which, although may not be lucidly demonstrated histologically are paramount to understanding of the compartmentalization of the functional units of the liver.

The acinus are the functional units which consists of relevant aspects of the two adjacent hepatic lobules, in such a way that the hepatocytes close to the region between the hepatic canal or the portal triad will come in close relation to the incoming blood supply, whereas those a bit apart will come in contact with the incoming blood supply much latter, these ones will correspond to the hepatocytes closest to the central veins. The sinusoids intertwined between the hepatic cords of the hepatocytes are lined like all blood vessels by endothelial cells which have numerous intercellular spaces and fenestrations, which allow serum but not red blood corpuscles to exit the sinusoids, and enter the perisinusoidal spaces of Disse between the endothelium and the hepatocytes, so that exchange of material could take place between the plasma and the hepatocytes.The perisinusoidal space of Disse continues at the periphery of the lobule as the Space of Mall.

Bile manufactured by the hepatocytes first enters the biliary canaliculi which are located between apposing sides of adjacent hepatocytes.

Collectively, the canaliculi form a meshwork which drains into the bile ductules.     

The bile manufactured by the hepatocytes first enter the biliary canaliculi which are located between the apposing sides of the hepatocytes .In unison, all the adjacent canaliculi form a mesh work which drain into the bile ductules, of the portal  canals, and all these then unite to form the bigger intrahepatic ducts.

Most of the endothelial lining cells are capable of phagocytic activities, corresponding to the Kupffer cells of the reticulo-endothelial system.

Functions of the Liver:

The liver is uniquely situated to process, distribute and metabolise nutrients, bilirubin, organic, inorganic substances and humoural factors, because the venous drainage of the gut and pancrease first passes through the hepatic portal vein before entry into the general circulation .Thus the liver is bathed in blood containing nutrients from the diet and elevated levels of insulin secreted by the pancrease. During the absorptive period the liver takes up carbohydrates, lipids, and most amino acids. These nutrients are then metabolized, stored or routed to other tissues .Thus the liver smoothes out potentially broad fluctuations in the availability of nutrients for the peripheral tissues. The liver is responsible for the metabolism of bilirubin. The liver is also the site of synthesis of colloid oncotic proteins such as albumin, and the protective globulins, some immunoglobulins, and complement.

The hepatic Ito cells and prominent hepatic Golgi apparatus, and endoplasmic reticulum, putatively subserve micronutrient synthetic, storage and synthetic functions especially the fat soluble vital vitamins such as  A.

The liver is a major focus of haemopoiesis in utero, [12] and ex-utro, there is evidence for the production of the hepatic erythropoetic factor or erythropoietin in the hepatocytes.

 

The Applied Anatomy of the Liver

The study of the applied anatomy of the liver will be most rewarding if it is discussed from the point of view of topics such as Lobectomies for hepatocellular carcinoma or secondary metastatic carcinoma.

Lobectomies, hepatic arterial embolisations, hepatic biopsies and orthoptotic hepatic Transplantations and obstructive jaundice secondary to hepatic nodes and kupffer cells hyperplastic hyperplasia

Hepatic arterial embolectomies and ligations

Although the hepatic arteries being end arteries without any significant anastomosis as such predisposes the liver to infarctions in cases of sudden embolisations, the case is quite different for cases where there is       a progressive pathology such as in metastatic disease whether primarily hepatic or metastatic, the indolent course of the metastatic process ,may be enough to offer adequate time to allow reasonable colIateral circulations to be established in such a way that it could be exploited therapeutically by ligations of such suspicious lead arteries ,such that metastatic hepatocellular disease could regress without compromising the blood supply significantly to lead to ischaemic necrosis of the involved lobes.

Lobectomies

More precise lobectomies of the hepatic segments or sections could be undertaken on the basis of a precise knowledge of their vascular anatomy at the lobar segmental levels.

For a right lobectomy to be achieved, the liver tissue should be excised along a line running from the left side of the gall bladder to the right edge of the inferior vena-cava, the vessels and the ducts along the way in such a manner that the right lobe and the gall bladder could be excised.

For a complete left­ hepatic lobectomy to be achieved, the left lobe with most of the caudate and the quadrate lobe should be extirpated.

The gall bladder should be left intact, and posteriorly the point of resection should correspond with the left edge of the inferior vena cavae.

The contralateral hepatic vein should be preserved in both procedures. [14]

Obstructive jaundice following hepatic nodes and Kupffer cell hyperplastic hyperplasia

In some cases of carcinoma of the juxta-hepatic structures such as the pancreas or the pylorus the retropyloric nodes could become hypertrophied spread of malignant cancer cells along these channels could involve the hepatic nodes at the porta-hepatis leading to obstructive jaundice by compressive effects on the hepatic bile ducts.

Also in some cases of disseminated miliary tuberculosis, the involvement of the hepatic lymph nodes could lead to hypertrophy of these nodes which could cause a compressive effect on the hepatic ducts leading to obstructive jaundice.In cases of hepatitis of viral or bacterial origin and that do to indeterminate microbes, the Kupffer cells could undergo hyperplastic hyperplasia causing hepatic biliary ductular obstruction with choleastatic icterus.

Orthotopic hepatic transplantation

In orthotopic hepatic transplantation the aim is to have the donor liver at the anatomical position where the recipients liver was positioned.

This could be achieved by the removal of the recipient’s liver following the identification of an HLA compatible hepatic donor.

The donor’s inferior vena cava is clamped at the supra-hepatic level following removal, it still has to remain clamped whilst it is stitched to that of the recipients the suprahepatic inferior vena cava, this is followed by reunion of the portal vein, with restoration of the circulation, so that blood flows at the lower end of the donor vena cava. The suprahepatic vena cava is then unclamped, and the respective hepatic arteries and bile ducts joined up again.

Following a successful transplantation the vitality of the bile duct, is quite crucial for the functional success of a hepatic transplant, this could be assessed by ensuring that the outer end of the donors hepatic duct bleed on restoration of the hepatic circulation.

The superior vena cava of the recipient must be kept clamped until the recipients’ portal circulation has been established; this will ensure the efflux of the accumulated products of metabolism which are toxic to the hepatic cells.

In addition, potentially lethally toxic electrolytes especially potassium which are very toxic to the cardiac myocytes could also be effluxed during these procedures.

Hepatic- Liver biopsy

For a successful liver biopsy to be accomplished, a good knowledge of the surface anatomy of the liver will be crucial.

When taken from the surface, the anterior surface marking of the liver corresponds to a superior margin which has a height corresponding to the xiphisternal joint, arching slightly upwards on each side on the right at the midaxillary line it extends down wards from the seventh rib up to the eleventh rib, on the left it extends about six to twelve cm from the midline.

Given that the liver is more of a right sided structure, the inferior border is marked by a line joining the inferior right extremity and the superior left extremity which corresponds with the lowermost costal margins on the right to some extent, whilst centrally it crosses the superior abdominal walls between the costal margins.

Therefore for a successful hepatic liver biopsy to be accomplished, the liver biopsy needle has to be introduced through the right eighth or ninth intercostal space in the mid-axillary line a reasonable caution has to be taken to ensure that the juxta hepatic structures such as the inferior vena-cava, the right kidney, the transverse or the ascending colon or the pancreas are not damaged by a misguided needle, this could be achieved by ensuring that the needle does not extend more than about 5.5 cm from the skin surface, whilst at the same time ensuring that the right course below the lungs is followed, transversing the costodiaphragmatic recess of the pleura before going  through the diaphragm and crossing the peritoneal cavity to penetrate liver for a  reasonable bite to be achieved.

 

 

References:

  1. Severn CB: A morphological study of the development of the human liver: I. Development of the hepatic diverticulum. Am J Anat. 1971; 131:133.
  2. F.G.and Sayegh.V. Assessment of the size of the Liver, roentgenologic considerations. New Eng.J.med.1958; 259,271-4.
  3. H. Anatomy of the Liver.Surgery-Oxford.International. December 2011; 589-592
  4. McIndoe A.H, Counsellor.S.The bilaterality of the liver. Am.med.Assoc.Arch-Surg.1927; 13, 589-612.
  5. C.H. The topography of the intrahepatic duct systems, Acta anat, 1951;11, Suppl.14-15.
  6. Bilbey, D.L.J and Rappaport, A.M The segmental Anatomy of the human Liver, .Anat.Rec. . 1960; 136,330
  7. Sedzinski Z and Tyszkiewiez T Hepatic veins of the right part of the liver in man.Folia Morph.Warsz.1975; 34,315-22.
  8. R.T. Segmental Anatomy of the Liver blood supply and collateral circulation Univ.Mich.Med.Bull.1962; 28, 198-99.
  9. Michels N.A The newer anatomy of the liver and its variant blood supply in collateral circulation.Am.J.Med.Sci .1962; 166.22-8.
  10. Lepp.EP [Hepatic veins and venous blood outflow from liver segments in man.Arkh.Anat.Gistol.Embriol1968; 55,105-10.
  11. Sutherland S.D The intrinsic innervation of the Liver.Rev.Int.Hepat. 1965; 15.596-78.
  12. G.D An electron microscopic study of hematopoiesis in the Liver of the fetal rabbit.Am.J.Cell, Sci, 1960; 3:207-30.
  13. Michels N.A The anatomic variants of the arterial pancreatico-duodenal arcades, their impact in regional resections, involving the gallbladder, bile ducts, liver, pancrease and parts of the small and large intestines.J.Int.Coll.Surg. 1962; 112-337-47.
  14. N.A and Woodburne.R.T. The Surgical Anatomy pertaining to Liver resection.Surgery.Gynae.Obstetrics. 1957; 105; 310-18.

 

 

 

 

 

 

The biliary tract

Abstract:

The bile duct is formed from the modification of the diverticulum of the primitive foregut

Its Y structured bifurcation produces the right and the left hepatic ducts respectively.

These hepatic ducts undergo further subdivisions to form the interlobular and the intralobular bile ductules.

The cystic duct and the gall bladders are formed as a blind diverticulum.

The extra-hepatic biliary tract consists of the three hepatic ducts, the right, the left and the common hepatic ducts, the gall bladder and the bile duct.

The gall bladder is a globular structure with a neck, a fundus, a body and a cystic duct.

The main function of the gall bladder is storage and concentration of the bile secreted by the hepatocytes.

The venous return from the gall bladder is derived by the way of multiple small veins in the gall bladder bed into the substances of the liver and thereafter into the hepatic veins.

Normally, the cystic artery is accompanied by a cystic vein. Lymphatic channels from the gall bladder drain to the nodes in the porta, hepatis, to the cystic node

The right and the left hepatic ducts emerge from the porta hepatis and unite near its right margin in a Y shaped manner to form the common hepatic duct, following a short course this is joined by the cystic duct to form the common bile duct.

The applied anatomy of the biliary tract and the gall bladder could be approached from the discussion of the symptomatologies of biliary tract and gall bladder pathologies, interventional procedures for gall bladder pain, cholestectomy, liver transplantation, choledochotomy and operative cholangiography and occasionally some abnormal morphology of these structures due to congenital structural defects.

Text:

The biliary tract

The extra-hepatic biliary tract consists of the three hepatic ducts, the right, the left and the common hepatic ducts, the gall bladder and the bile duct.

Bile is manufactured in the liver cells or hepatocytes.

It is collected in the lobular biliary canaliculis, and then it flows along the bile ducts in the portal canals in the bile duct tributaries, and so gets to the right and the left hepatic ducts, which emerges at the porta hepatis.

There they join and form the common bile duct, this hepatic duct is then coursed along the two peritoneal layers at the loose border of the gastro-colic ligament until it is joined by the cystic duct from the gall bladder to form the bile duct. [1]

The gall bladder

The basic function anatomy and functional histology of the gall bladder

The gall bladder has the main function of storage and concentration of the bile secreted by the hepatocytes.

It is a globular or pear shaped structure with a capacity of about 1cm/kg body weight. It is topographically made up of three structures, the fundus, the body and the neck.

It is positioned in the gall bladder fossa, which is located at the visceral surface of the liver, adjacent to the quadrate lobe of the liver.

It is bounded anteriorly by the liver, the anterior abdominal wall, the duodenum and the transverse colon.

The fundus is the bulbous blind end of the gallbladder.

It usually projects a little beyond the sharp lower border of the liver, and touches the peritoneurn of the anterior abdominal wall at the tip of the ninth costal cartilage, where the transpyloric plane crosses the right costal margin, at the lateral rectus sheath.

This point corresponds to the surface marking of the gall bladder fundus and the point of maximal tenderness in gall bladder pathologies.

This point is also related to the transverse colon and the medial side of the hepatic flexure of the transverse colon.

The body of the gall bladder

The fundus of the gall bladder continues-posterior superiorly as the body of the gall bladder towards the right end of the porta, hepatis and is in direct contact with first part of the duodenum.

The neck of the gall bladder

The superior aspect of the body the fundus continues as the neck of the gallbladder by a narrowing of its caliber superiorly.

The cystic duct of the gall bladder

The neck of the gall bladder continues into the cystic duct of the gall bladder. It measures about 2 to 3 cm in diameter.

It courses along the porta hepatis to join the common hepatic duct so forming the bile duct, between the gastro-colic ligament very close to the duodenum, usually in front of the right hepatic artery and its cystic branch.

The junction between the neck and the cystic duct may show a small diverticulum, otherwise known as the Hartmann’s pouch.

This may be associated with pathological conditions more often than not.

The gall bladder is supplied mainly by the cystic artery, which is a branch of the right hepatic artery.

This artery usually courses behind the hepatic duct to the neck of the gall bladder, from where it supplies the rest of the gall bladder.

Occasionally, it could arise from the main trunk of the hepatic artery, or from the left hepatic artery, exceptionally it arises from the gastroduodonal artery.

Also the gall bladder has an alternative blood supply, which is derived from small vessels from the hepatic bed.

This alternative blood supply is sufficient to maintain vitality of the gall bladder, when there is thrombosis of the cystic artery.

The venous return and drainage of the gall bladder

The venous return from the gall bladder is by the way of multiple small veins in the gall bladder bed into the substances of the liver and so into the hepatic veins. Normally, the cystic artery is accompanied by a cystic vein.

Exceptionally, there might be an anomalous cystic vein, running from the neck of the gall bladder into the portal vein.

Lymphatic channels from the gall bladder drain to the nodes in the porta, hepatis, to the cystic node in the Carlots, triangle. Also they could drain to the lymph-nodes situated in the epiploic foramen. From thence lymph passes to the free edge of the lesser omentum to the celiac group of lymph-nodes of the pre-aortic group.

The histological features of the gallbladder

Histologically, the gall bladder has a small amount of smooth muscle in its wall. It is more fibrous than muscular. It has a mucosa, which is lined with a simple columnar epithelium in the body of the gall bladder, the mucosa is more or less reticulated, whereas towards the neck of the gallbladder, the mucosa and the simple columnar epithelium are more or less arranged in a spiral manner, this area contains the non-goblet mucous secreting cells.

The common hepatic duct

The right and the left hepatic ducts emerge from the porta hepatis and unite near its right margin in a Y shaped manner to form the common hepatic duct, following a short course this is joined by the cystic duct to form the common bile duct.

The common bile duct

This duct which measures about 10cm long and about 8 to10cm in diameter is better described in three parts. [2]The first or the supra-duodenal part is the most superior portion and it lies in the free edge of the lesser omentum.

The second or the retroduodenal or the middle portion, usually runs posterior to the first part of the common hepatic duct.

The third or the paraduodonal or the inferior portion is related to the head of the pancreas and the second part of the duodenum and the right renal vein it then joins the pancreatic duct at an angle of about 60 degrees at the hepatopancreatic ampulla of vater.

The ampulla and the terminal ends of the pancreatic and the common bile ducts are each surrounded by sphincteric muscle, the whole constituting the ampullary sphincter of Oddi.This disposition allows for an independent control of bile and pancreatic flow and bile flow. [3 The whole ampullary unit opens into the posterior, medial wall of the second part of the duodenum at the duodenal papillae, which is situated about 10cm from the pylorus.

The blood supply of the biliary tract

The bile duct receives small branches from the cystic, the hepatic and the gastroduodonal arteries, forming anastomotic channels on the duct.

Most of the blood supply to the biliary tract is derived distally, usually via the retrodeudonal artery formed by the union of the branch from the gastrodeudeonal artery and the posterior branch of the superior pancreaticodeudonal artery forms a considerable portion of the blood supply to the gall bladder. [4]

The nerve supply of the biliary tract

The hepatic branch of the vagal trunk supply the parasympathetic fibres, this will stimulate the contraction of the gall bladder and relaxation of the sphincter of Oddi at the ampulla.

Sympathetic controls by sympathetic fibres at the cell bodies in the celiac ganglion with preganglionic cell in the lateral horn of the spinal cord segments T7 to T9 inhibits contraction, but the hormonal control of the gall bladder activity by the CholeoCystoKinin (CCK) from the entero-endocrine cells of the upper small intestine is far more important than the neuronal control of the gall bladder function.

Normally, afferent fibers subserving pain from, the duct could run from the right sided­ sympathetic fibres and reach the spinal segments at T7 to T9 levels, however exceptionally some fibres from the other parts of the gallbladder run in the right phrenic nerve from the C3 to the C5.

Any afferent vagal fibres are probably concerned with reflex activities and not painful stimuli as such. [5]

The applied anatomy of the biliary tract and the gall bladder

A review on the applied anatomy of the biliary tract and the gall bladder could be approached from the discussion of its symptomatology and interventional procedures such as gall bladder pain, cholestectomy, orthotopic hepatic transplantation, choledochotomy and operative cholangiography and occasionally some abnormal morphology due to congenital structural defects [6]In other instances at cholangiography or intraoperatuively, the gall bladder or the biliary ducts were found to be quite rudimentary such as in congenital biliary atresia, cystic in choleduchal cystic conditions, dilated   or entirely absent.[7]

Cholecystectomy

Following a Kocher’s incision below the right costal margin, the abdominal cavity could be accessible, and the fundus or the gall bladder could be visualized.To display the neck of the gall bladder, and the cystic duct properly, the adjacent liver, transverse colon and the duodenum must be suitably retracted and the peritoneum over the free margin of the lesser omentum incised.

All the individual ducts and the blood vessels are dissected out, itemized and identified clearly, and the plausible anomalies of the cystic ducts and the bile ducts with regards to their relationships or aberrant course considered.

The cystic duct and the cystic arteries must be ligated and the cystic duct clearly identified and separated from the bile duct.

The cystic artery should also be ligated and the gall bladder now dissected away from, the hepatic bed, commencing from the neck towards the gall bladder fundus.

Operative cholangiography

In operative cholangiography, the cannula is inserted into the cystic duct into down into the bile duct

Choledochotomy:

In operative choledochotomy, the upper aspect of the bile duct could be incised for the removal of stones.

During operative procedures, other vital structures such as the inferior vena cava, the ureters, and the gonodal vessels must be spared, when clearing the operative fields.

Orthotopic hepatic transplantation:

In this procedure, the vascularity of the donor bile duct must be preserved as this is very vital for the success of the transplantation procedure.

 

 

 

References:

  1. Healy, J.E and Schroy.PC Anatomy of the biliary ducts within the human liver analysis of prevailing pattern of branching and major variations of the biliary ducts.AMA.Archs.Surg. 1953; 66.599-616.
  2. G.H, Wallinik.G.Soule.F.H and Ferries.D.O The common bile duct after Cholecystectomy; comparison of common bile ducts in patients who have intact biliary systems, with those in patients who have undergone cholecystectomy.Ann.Surg. 1967; 166-964-7.
  3. R.M.H and Kugler.J.H The glands of bile and pancreatic ducts autoradiographic and histochemical study.J.Anat,.1961; 95, 1-11.
  4. F.A Blood supply of the common bile duct and its relationship to the duodenum.Br.J.Surg; 1955 13, 75-80.
  5. Sutherland SD The nerves of the gall bladder and gut.J.Anat. 1967; 101, 702-19.
  6. Mincsev M Bilocular gall bladder Or vas hepzes.1967;, 42,286-98.
  7. Houle MP, Hill PS: Congenital absence of the gall bladder.J Maine Med Assoc.1960; 51:108,

 

 

 

The Portal venous system

Abstract:

The portal vein is a superior continuation of its distal tributaries, principally, the superior mesenteric vein, with contributions from the splenic veins.

This vein is a remnant of the vitelline veins, which are the embryologic venous drainage system for the yolk sac from which the alimentary tract is derived.

Although there are about five principal sites of porto-systemic anastomosis.

Only two to three of these could be considered to be of some clinical relevance.

Both extra-hepatic and intra-hepatic portal venous obstruction could produce hypertension and ascites.

In hepatic cirrhosis, the radicles of the portal veins are compressed by the contraction of the fibrous tissue in the portal canals.

In constrictive pericarditis, vavulopathies and cardiomyopathies, backward pressure on the hepatic veins and the whole hepatic circulation will exert similar effects on the portal veins.

Furthermore, the portal veins could be compressed by primary or secondary hepatic tumefactions, carcinoma of the head of the pancreas or pancreatic pseudocysts, all leading to portal venous obstructions.

In portal hypertension, there will be splenomegaly with hypersplenism,

Text.

The portal vein

Basically the portal vein is a superior continuation of its distal tributaries.

Thus the superior mesenteric vein principally, which changes its nomenclature to the portal vein after the entrance of the splenic tributary of the portal vein close to the pancreatic neck.

It then courses superiorly posterior to the pancreas and the first part of the duodenum, and then enters the two layer of the lesser omentum.

It then courses vertically upwards in between the lesser omentum and the epiploic foramen, until it then, comes close to the bile duct and the hepatic artery at the porta hepatic at the porta hepatis.

It then divides into a right and left branch which are the respective halves of the liver.

Although, the portal vein receives as its principal tributaries, the superior mesenteric veins and the splenic veins, which are its foundation component

In addition, the right and the left gastric veins, which drain the stomach and the lower part of the oesophagus also offer some contributions.

More often than not the superior pancreatcicodeuodonal veins are contributory tributary to the portal vein.

Furthermore, the cystic veins could join the right branch of the portal vein and the periumbilical veins running with the ligamentum teres joins its left branch.

Although the blood coming to the portal vein might be thought of as coming in two streams the superior mesenteric and the splenic, with the superior mesenteric derived from the right hepatic lobe, and the splenic from the left hepatic lobe. [1]

Although this functional structure is quite plausible with the animal models, in the human, the situation is quite different, because of the poor septations of the hepatic lobule of the human liver compared to that of the­ animals such as the porcine liver,

Even in the presence of significant hepatic pathology involving the liver extensively, this septation has not been demonstrated in the human model.

 

Developmental anatomy of the portal vein

This, vein is a remnant of the vitelline vein, which are the embryologic venous drainage system for the yolk sac from which the alimentary tract is derived.

The splenic and the superior mesenteric veins drain to the left vitelline vein, whose superior cranial aspect obliterates, leaving the caudal inferior tributaries to become the inferior aspect of the portal vein.

Also the superior aspect of the right vitelline vein and the ventral aspect of the tributaries persist as the superior aspect of the portal vein, the cranial end of the vitelline veins becomes, the hepatic veins, and the uppermost part of the right vitelline vein becomes the upper part of the inferior vena cava.

 

There are five sites of porto-systemic anastomosis.

  1. At the lower end of the oesophagus, between azygos veins through its oesophageal tributaries as the systemic component and the oesophageal branches of the left gastric vein as the portal tributary.

Of all the porto-systemic anastomotic network, this one existing at the distal part of the oesophagus is the one which is the most important clinically, because in cases of portal hypertension, varicosities of these veins occur and could rupture quite easily giving rise to fatal haemorrhage.

  1. Also there exists another point of portosystemic anastomosis at the upper end of the anal canal at about the level of the Hiltons white line, between the venous channels draining to the superior rectal and the inferior mesenteric as portal and the tributaries draining to the internal iliac veins as systemic, this site is of comparatively  more clinical import compared to the remaining three sites of porto-systemic anastomosis which are more or less of academic interest technically speaking, because in cases of portal hypertension varicosities of these veins will theoretically present clinically as haemorrhoids.

Although this postulation was contentiously discussed, at least it was believed that straining at stool due to constipation and other factors such as chronic cough which could lead to an increased in intrabdominal pressure will predispose patients with portal hypertension to haemorrhoids compared to the general population.

  1. The third site of porto-systemic anastomosis in the abdomen corresponds to the periumbilical region, where some of the umbilical veins running along the­ course of the ligamentum teres drains to the left branch of the, portal vein and the systemic portion of this anastomosis is depicted by the epigastric veins which drain into the lateral thoracic vein and the axillary veins superiorly and thence to the great sephanous veins inferiorly, in cases of portal hypertension these, umbilical veins would get distended and form a snake like colorful reticulations of the subcutaneous veins radiating away from the umbilicus known as the Caput medusa, which is somewhat of clinical import because in cryptogenic liver disease it may be a useful and a sole pointer to the existence of occult portal hypertension.
  2. The fourth area of porto-systemic anastomosis is at the bare area of the liver where putatively there appears to be an anastomosis between the retroperitoneal veins of the abdominal wall as the systemic component and venous radicles and tributaries of the bare area of the liver derived from the portal vein.
  3. About the fifth site here, the retroperitoneal veins, of the abdominal wall as the systemic component communicate with the venous radicles and the tributaries of the colon as the portal component.

Compared to the three previous sites of porto-systemic anastomosis, the latter two points of porto-systemic anastomosis are not clinically relevant, but their study is more or less an academic thing.

In case of portal hypertension, most of the portal blood is shunted into the collateral channels, so that only a small portion gets to the hepatic bed. [2]

However, the opening of these collaterals does not normally decrease the level of hypertension considerably.

Both extra-hepatic and intra-hepatic portal venous obstruction could produce hypertension and ascites.

In hepatic cirrhosis, the radicles of the portal veins are compressed by the contraction of the fibrous tissue in the portal canals.

In constrictive pericarditis, vavulopathies and cardiomyopathies, backward pressure on the hepatic veins and the whole hepatic circulation will exert similar effects on the portal veins.

Furthermore, the portal veins could be compressed by primary or secondary hepatic tumefactions, carcinoma of the head of the pancreas or pancreatic pseudocysts, all leading to portal venous obstructions.

In portal hypertension, there will be splenomegaly with hypersplenism, technically speaking; some diminution in the portal pressure could be achieved by anastomosing the portal vein to the inferior vena cavae or a splenic vein to the left renal vein, in addition to offering splenectomy to the patient.

 

References

  1. C.H The intrahepatic ramifications of the portal vein, Lunds Univ.Arssk.N.FAvd. 1956; 2, 52, 1-30.
  2. H and Irwin D.T Clinical application of portal venography, Br.med, J.; 1954 1; 312-13.

 

 

 

 

Acknowledgements

 

The Editors will wish to seize this opportunity to acknowledge all those whose invaluable contribution and support lead to the successful completion of this supplement.